: 3 WEA IAS 
4 lana \ ig 


Oa Gan 





ein OF PRINGE » 
DEC 6 - 1926 
“Yy 












AGHISTOR Va OLS AW ATT 





Kamehameha, the Great 


Portrait made from life in 1816 by the French artist, L. Choris. Original owned 
by Bruce Cartwright. Photographic copy made by Norman D. Hill. 


Pol Oiny OF FAW ATI 


PREPARED UNDER THE DIRECTION OF 


THE HISTORICAL. COMMISSION 





"y 

~ DED Sia 1926 | 

“By Ss 
£01 OGICAL op 


OF THE TERRITORY OF HAWAII 






BY 


RALPH S. KUYKENDALL 


WITH INTRODUCTORY CHAPTERS 
BY 
HERBERT E. GREGORY 


Nef Bork 


THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 
1926 


All rights reserved 


PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA 


COPYRIGHT, 1926, 


By THE TERRITORY OF HAWAII. 


Set up and electrotyped. Published October, 1926. 


WNoroood press 
J. 8S. Cushing Co. — Berwick & Smith Co. 
Norwood, Mass., U.S.A. 


PREFACE 


THE purpose of this book is to describe briefly and simply the 
historical process by which Hawaii came to be what it is to-day 
—an integral part of the United States, an American common- 
wealth having a unique social and economic background. The 
topical method is used, but without disturbing too violently 
the chronological sequence of events. The aim has been to 
make each chapter center about some person, some event, or 
some clearly defined line of development, other things being 
made subordinate to the central theme, in order that the atten- 
tion of the reader may be fixed upon the outstanding characters, 
the decisive events, and the controlling movements in the history 
of Hawaii. In the selection of facts and incidents to be included 
in a work of this character, no two writers would agree. The 
authors of this book have used their best judgment, in the light 
of their own studies, and the criticisms and suggestions of those 
with whom they have discussed the subject. While the book is 
intended primarily for school use, it is believed that it will be of 
service to the general reader who desires a plain statement of the 
main facts of Hawaiian history. 

It will be well to state briefly how the volume came to be 
written. The Legislature of the Territory of Hawaii, by laws 
enacted in 1921 and 1923, provided for the appointment of an 
Historical Commission. Among the duties assigned to this 
Commission was that of having compiled and published a school 
textbook of Hawaiian history. Governor Farrington appointed 
as members of the Commission Hon. Jonah Kuhio Kalanianaole, 
Hawaii’s Delegate in Congress, Hon. George R. Carter, formerly 
Governor of the Territory, and Dr. K. C. Leebrick, Professor of 


v 


vl PREFACE 


History in the University of Hawaii. Upon the death of Prince 
Kuhio in January, 1922, Mrs. A. P. Taylor was appointed to fill 
the vacancy. After its organization the Commission employed 
Ralph S. Kuykendall as Executive Secretary. It is under 
direction and by authority of the Historical Commission, as 
thus constituted, that this volume (the ‘‘textbook of Hawaiian 
history” required by the law) has been written. 

The first three chapters were written by Herbert E. Gregory, 
Ph.D., Director of the Bernice P. Bishop Museum of Polynesian 
Ethnology and History; the remainder of the book by Ralph 
S. Kuykendall, M.A., Executive Secretary of the Historical 
Commission. 

In the preparation of this history use has been made princi- 
pally of the following collections: (1) the Archives of Hawaii; 
(2) the George R. Carter Library (now the property of the 
Hawaiian Mission Children’s Society); (3) the library of the 
Hawaiian Historical Society; (4) the library and collections of 
the Bernice P. Bishop Museum. It would be unjust not to ac- 
knowledge the unfailing courtesy and helpfulness of the officials 
and attendants who have charge of these collections. 

The Historical Commission has been able, out of the appro- 
priations made by the Legislature, to obtain several hundred 
pages of important documentary material from the national 
archives of the United States, Great Britain, and Mexico, and 
from unofficial collections in the United States. Many of the 
illustrations in the book are from photographs made especially 
for this work. The members of the Historical Commission have 
given generously of time and counsel; the book owes much to 
their interest, knowledge of facts, and good judgment. Mr. 
G. V. Blue, formerly Instructor in History in the University 
of Hawaii, assisted in the preparation of chapters XXVII and 
XXX. Much help has been gotten from the results of the work 
of other laborers in the field of Hawaiian history, especially W. 
D. Alexander and Thomas G. Thrum. The authors are also 


PREFACE vii 


under obligation to other individuals too numerous to mention 
in a preface. 

The questions and exercises at the ends of the various chapters 
were prepared by Miss Thelma K. Murphy of the Kauluwela 
School, Honolulu. Following some of these are references toa 
few books or special articles on topics treated in the chapters. 
In the Appendix is given a short list of the more important 
general books dealing with Hawaiian history, a summary of the 
government of Hawaii, and additional statistical tabulation of 
historical interest. 





AK AL 
XVII. 
VIII. 
a D.S 
XX. 
XXI. 
XXII. 
XXII. 
XXIV. 
XXV. 
XXVI. 
XXVILI. 
XXVIII. 


CONTENTS 


THE PACIFIC AND ITs ISLANDS 

THE PactFic PIONEERS 

SOME POLYNESIAN CUSTOMS AND BELIEFS 

CAPTAIN COOK AND THE DISCOVERY OF THE HAWAIIAN 
ISLANDS 

THE RISE OF KAMEHAMEHA 

Fur TRADERS AND EXPLORERS 

KAMEHAMEHA COMPLETES THE CONQUEST 

THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA . 

INTRODUCTION OF CHRISTIANITY 

SANDALWOOD DAYS . 

FOREIGN RELATIONS 

PROGRESS OF CIVILIZATION 

THE CATHOLIC MISSION . 

RECOGNITION OF INDEPENDENCE 

ORGANIZATION OF THE GOVERNMENT 

END OF FOREIGN DIFFICULTIES 

THE WHALING ERA. 

EARLY AGRICULTURAL ENTERPRISES 

A New KInc anp A NEw POLtmicy 

THe LAST OF THE KAMEHAMEHAS . 

KINGS BY ELECTION ; ; : : : 

CHANGES DURING A THIRD OF A CENTURY (1840-1874) 

RECIPROCITY AND ITS EFFECTS 

THE REIGN OF KALAKAUA 

THE END OF THE MONARCHY. 

Hawai BECOMES AN AMERICAN COMMONWEALTH . 

HAWAII AND THE NATION 


INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT 
ix 


IIo 
118 
127 


143 
152 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER 
XXIX. Ractat ASSOCIATIONS 


XXX. OLD PROBLEMS IN A NEW AGE 
APPENDIX 
RULERS OF HAWAII 
GOVERNORS OF Hawati 
POPULATION OF HAWAII 
GROWTH OF HAWAIIAN COMMERCE 
OUTLINE OF HAWAIIAN GOVERNMENT . 
A SHort List oF Books DEALING WITH HAWAIIAN 
HISTORY 
I. GENERAL HISTORIES 
II. REFERENCE MATERIAL . 


PAGE 
323 
333 
345 
345 
346 
346 
347 
347 


356 
356 
357 


AS TUISTORY: OF HAW AIT 


%» Ms 
* 


ig i Bh sh Cane ¥ 
Te eT at 
‘fGVOE B 
say ey 7 (2 | - it. La 


a 2 A . J 


ie 
; 


& 


y 

aa - 
ue. 
3 a er , 


; ; = oe ; : 
mits os ce 





Ag D@NGYs @)F sll Ae Askl 


I 
THE PACIFIC AND ITS ISLANDS 


A large ocean. The Pacific Ocean is the largest body of water 
on earth. It is twice the size of the Atlantic Ocean, four times 
the size of the Indian Ocean, and more than ten times larger than 
the Arctic Ocean or the Antarctic Ocean. Its length from north 
to south measures nearly 8,o0o0 miles, and along the Equator 
where it is widest the ocean measures more than g,ooo miles. 
When marked out on a map, it is seen that the Pacific Ocean occu- 
pies more space than all the continents combined and covers 
more than one third of the entire surface of the earth. 

Borders of the Pacific. The Pacific is bounded in part by 
land and in part by water. On the east and northeast it is walled 
in by land extending from Cape Horn along South America, 
Central America, Mexico, the United States mainland, Canada, 
and Alaska, a distance equal to nearly one third of the circum- 
ference of the earth. Until the Panama Canal was dug and 
opened for navigation in 1914, this wall was unbroken and the 
Pacific was entirely shut off from the Atlantic. On the north 
the Pacific is connected with the Arctic Ocean by Bering Strait — 
only 54 miles wide. On the northwest the Pacific is bounded 
by the continent of Asia, which is bordered by the long chain 
of islands known as the Kuriles, Kamchatka, Japan, and Taiwan 
(Formosa). On the west the waters of the Pacific join the waters 
of the Indian Ocean by passing through straits between the 


I 


2 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


Philippines, Borneo, Celebes, Sumatra, Java, and Australia. On 
the south the Pacific Ocean is united with the Antarctic Ocean by 
two great branches; one of them, that between Australia and 
New Zealand, is 1,200 miles wide, and the other, that between 
New Zealand and South America, 5,000 miles wide. 

Depths of the Pacific. The Pacific Ocean is not only very 
broad but also very deep. Its waters rest in an enormous basin 
with steep sides and a wrinkled bottom. In several places the 
water covering the bottom of the basin is 25,000 feet deep, and 
at one place near Mindanao, one of the Philippine Islands, it is 
32,088 feet deep. The average depth of the whole Pacific is 
nearly 14,000 feet, which means that, if placed almost anywhere 
on the bottom of the ocean, the great mountain Mauna Kea, 
13,823 feet in height, would be entirely covered with water. Only 
near the continental shores of America, Asia, and Australia and 
near islands is the depth of the Pacific less than 1,000 feet. 

From this deeply sunken floor of the Pacific masses of land 
project upward. Many of them do not reach the surface of the 
water; some of them, called reefs, come just about to the surface 
and may be covered by water during high tide and exposed to 
view at low tide; others remain above the surface as islands. 

Many islands. The number of islands in the Pacific Ocean 
is not known. Every one that is known is shown on the maps 
used by the captains of ships, but there is doubt about the posi- 
tion and size of several of them. There are islands on which no 
man has ever landed, and there may be islands which no one has 
seen. 

The maps used in schools show only a few of the Pacific islands ; 
many small islands which stand far away from continents and 
from larger islands are omitted, and there is not space on the map 
for showing all of the small islands which form part of a group of 
islands like Hawaii, Tahiti, and Tonga. Fiji consists of 470 
islands, the Tuamotus of an equal number, and the Philippines of 
more than 7,000. In the whole Pacific there are possibly 30,000 





a ? " oe 
opm oe ee Mie 
Pa ay ae pt a 


! leek. 
eles “ “¢ 
" 


> 








] ae 
a ends 


ne 





id sot 








‘ o A 
. *) 
‘ 
i ] 
+¥ i we 
r oe td omen Ss if 
Yas iz A a 
¥ 1" - 
= ‘ $ S 
’ ay a 4 
} 
fe / yi 1 L 
a . 
F ¢ 7 
Le i 
1 , . 
, + ore 
- 3 
Fa As e 
j ; ‘ * 
rt 7 
ae: 
« fae f 
2 y 
- b pap >| 
y + 
; re 
- om ; 
i , nae 
7 ¢ 4 4 
5 ’ , 
ine + 
i ‘ 
ak ; 
. _* i 
ny by ¥ 
hee, 
‘ 5 
rot ; 
' 
ui * 
a4 - 
: ¢ 
Fae 4 
2 he 
C int ied 
vie - v4 
e 4 ’ 
be at : \ : 
"a = P : ‘ 
aie Pa h « 
Lg 
> ? 
q 
« ‘ i 
; ] 
\ e<)5 € » 
4 oe 
( ab, 
? 
‘ , 
>, 7 ; J 
‘ * =“) 
t joe fe 
j Or 
aa, 4 3 4 
k a A 
“ore 5 . 
} _) 1 de 
4 ' ~t 
’ iat" \ ) 
J Ve | ; 4 Mt 
f ne aaer 
¥ + we 
pa 4iy y T peg ' Te 
i - ‘ ig 
* r TRAN r 
Sey a 2 % aa 
44 i? a f, , 
. pe » * | 2 ’ 4 
[ s : y | 
* J > 4 “-! J 
ad yf ane * n 4 


7 
a 
‘~ 
: 


» 
tt ll hel 











Tie | a 


sg phe dea 
ye) oe” a ex Viel val) i 
; tints, Cdl 





Ke 


§ 


























Longi tude 


FA East 


160° 





~“<-— 


IN FEET 


{ “2000 to 5000 


a \\ ~ 1009 to 2000 








160° 


140° 
| 





























. level to 1000 
=} 
2 .¢ : = 
y : 
= = = SS SS SSS aS SSS 
°h s. HAWAII 
=s ———- 
[ Johnston I. 
s = R 
Cc) I = piu fi C 
| 
> / Z 
a 
Palmyra Le 
/ 22 = 
2 = Fanning I. i 
/ e 
EQUATOR ° 
: 0 
Ze 
Phoenix Ts, a 
——e — @ 
be = 
: = Tongareva I. =e 
yuti I, == *Manibiki 1s,-. ale 
= = : sMarquesas 
| a 2 e| ~ Is. 
Samoa = 
) s_ 7a Society = 
\ =is= Sn = — Ty) 
fy = —— 
J Tonga 5 <= -= ae = 
. ee = oe 7 = = 
&= : = gous. 9 Tahiti en a* = 
2 oN" Niue 1. Cook . 4 3s/§*Tuamotu Is. af 
= *Tongatabu i = = =r 7 
’ Rarotonga I. os © Tubuail. ~ Gambier I. - 
Se SSS SS Se =e SS Se 
a E A HN 
> Rapal. Easter I.o 
= (Rapa nui) 
, 32 
H 
| 
| 
° 5 
40 


- ¥ Chatham Is. 


at ~ Longitude ” West 








THE ISLANDS 
OF THE PACIFIC OCEAN 


120° 


from “Greenwich 140° — 


160° 


pr: 
te hr 
14 is he af 

1 aA me 
me pr id: ant 


36 4, Tere 
une 

f a, oa 
ees 





THE PACIFIC AND ITS ISLANDS 3 


islands, which is more than the islands in all the other four oceans. 
The Pacific Ocean may be called the Ocean of Islands. 

Islands of different sizes and shapes. ‘The islands are of 
different sizes and different shapes. Some of them are project- 
ing rocks or short high ridges like Molokini, Kaula, and Mokoli ; 
others are low flat masses or broken rings of islets of a few hundred 
acres in extent, like Laysan and Palmyra islands. There are 
many islands the size of Oahu or Maui, some of them flat and 
low and some of them rugged and mountainous. There are many 
islands larger than any in the Territory of Hawaii. Java is ten 
times the size of the island of Hawaii; New Caledonia is about 
the size of Massachusetts; and Borneo is larger than Texas. 

Continental islands. The many thousands of islands in the 
Pacific are of several different kinds. Some of them, like Juan 
Fernandez (Robinson Crusoe’s island) off the coast of Chile, Van- 
couver Island adjoining the State of Washington, the Japanese 
islands on the Asiatic coast, and Papua separated from Australia 
by the narrow Torres Strait, are continental islands. They 
consist of about the same kinds of rock and have many of the 
same plants and animals as the near-lying continents of which 
they were once a part. Other is ands, like New Zealand, New 
Caledonia, Fiji, Timor, Borneo, and the Philippines, are little 
continents in themselves or parts of continents which have been 
broken up into islands by the sinking of the surrounding land 
into the sea. 

Oceanic islands. Most of the thousands of islands which 
rise above the sur ace of the Pacific are oceanic islands; the rocks 
which compose them and the animals and plants which live on 
them are different from those on the continents of North America, 
South America, Asia, and Australia. These oceanic islands 
include Hawaii, the Marquesas, the Tuamotus, the Austral, 
Cook, the Society, Tonga, Samoan, Ellice, Gilbert, Marshall, and 
Caroline Islands and the many small islands scattered between 
and beyond these groups. 


4 A HISTORY OF HAWAIL 


Volcanic islands. Oceanic islands of the Pacific are of two 
kinds, volcanic islands and coral islands. Volcanic islands are 
composed of lava which has issued in a molten state from vents 
in the bottom of the sea and spread out over the sea floor, build- 
ing up a mound of rock. In places where lava continues to come 
from the interior of the earth the mound may be built up until 
it stands above the surface of the water. Continued supply of 
lava may make this mound into a huge mass of lava, a volcano, 
which may remain as a mountain long after lava has ceased to 
flow. Some volcanic islands consist of one volcano; others have 
been made by the combined activities of many volcanoes. The 
kind of lava rock which composes the volcanic islands of the 
Pacific is basalt and is different from that which forms volcanic 
islands in some other parts of the world. 

Coral islands. Coral islands are composed of limestone made 
of whole shells and parts of broken shells of many small animals 
which live in the sea and of algae, sea plants, of several kinds. 
Of the animals which form limestone, corals are the most abun- 
dant. The beginning of a coral island is a mass of land which 
rises nearly to the surface of the sea. To this land corals attach 
themselves and begin to spread and to grow upward nearly to 
the water’s surface. Corals also attach themselves to the edges 
of continents, continental islands, and volcanic islands, forming 
reefs which border the shore and extend some distance seaward. 
Coral islands are not found everywhere, because corals can live 
only in warm, shallow, and clear salt water. No corals grow 
in New Zealand or in the Aleutian Islands because the water 
is too cold; and none grow near the mouths of fresh-water 
streams or of muddy streams. 

Corals by themselves make coral reefs which may be exposed 
at low tides, though they do not make coral islands, for they die 
when out of water. But waves may break up a coral reef and 
make an island by piling the broken fragments so high that 
their top is above high tides. The waves not only break large 


fein Nin 
bis bit 1h 


i hs Fy a i Ra 


ae 














HAWAIIAN ISLANDS 


Seale of statute miles 
0 5 10 ~ 20 30 40 50 60 70 6 
SS ee eel eee : 
ae a lroads. See Leaman routes 
Rigi Trails 


HEIGHTS IN FEET 


Over 10,000 1 Wi 
6000 to 10,000 











1500 to 3000 
500 to 1600 
Sea level to 500 














ae? 
Oceana Is. 
ee 
Pearl and 
Hermes Reef 


Lisianski I. 
os, 
oe 


4 
Laysan I, 2 
= Gardner I. 





ras 


French Frigate = £5 = 
Shoal Necker as 


= A af F Z C O C 





HAWAITAN ARCHIPELAGO 


Scale of statute miles 
50 100 150 200 





175° Longitude West 170° from Greenwich 165° 





Greenwich 1 


———— 
—— EY 








| KAHOOLAWE @ 





A Oahu : 
Molokai 


eS 
ai 


Shani 
Sw 


Lan 


Kahoclawe 


' Hawaii 





160° 155° 156° 155° 


ie at 
“4 


® 


as 
(in 


or. 


— at 


2" see a 
Paper) ey ic 
ee ee 


. 


Pepa cee 
) ee me 


> 





THE PACIFIC AND ITS ISLANDS 5 


chunks from the reef but also grind the corals and shells into 
sand. This sand is carried by the wind and built into sand 
dunes, which make the new islands still higher and wider and 
provide a soil in which plants may grow. ‘These islands made by 
the waves and the wind working together have various forms; 
some are straight narrow belts of land; others are shaped like a 
circle or a horseshoe; but all of them are low islands with the 
highest points not more than twenty or thirty feet above sea 
level. 

Raised coral islands. The sea bottom beneath some coral 
reefs in the Pacific has risen toward the surface of the water, 
carrying the reefs up with it, thus making islands of coral and 
shell which may stand as high as one hundred feet or even more 
above sea level. Such islands are called razsed coral islands. 

Some islands better than others. As places for men to live 
these three kinds of oceanic islands are very different. The soil 
of coral islands and of raised coral islands is made of decomposed 
limestone; that of volcanic islands is volcanic dust and sand 
and mud made from decomposed lava. Little rain falls on coral 
islands, more on raised coral islands, and the most on volcanic 
islands. The plants, insects, and land shells are different on the 
three kinds of islands. 

Oahu, a volcanic island. Oahu is an example of a volcanic 
island. Volcanoes which were active long ago have been worn 
down and cut into valleys and ridges and are now represented by 
the Koolau Range and the Waianae Mountains. Diamond 
Head, Punchbowl, and Koko Head are volcanoes which were 
active such a short time ago that their original form has not 
been much changed. 

The mountains reach a height sufficient to check the moisture- 
laden trade winds, thus producing a fairly heavy rainfall on the 
windward side; but they are not high enough or continuous 
enough to prevent winds and rain from coming to the leeward side 
at Honolulu, Pearl Harbor, and Ewa. The valleys are broad 


6 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


enough to serve as fields for taro, and the small streams which 
run in most of them supply water enough for necessary irrigation. 
Near the seashore are groves of coconuts, and in the valleys 
and on the ridges at different elevations are the native trees and 
shrubs — the hau, the ohia, the kukui, the koa, pandanus, and 





From Headquarters Hawaiian Department U.S. A. Photograph by Signal Corps, U.S. Army. 


Relief map of island of Oahu 


other species of plants suitable for food, for making of clothing, 
for the building of homes and canoes, for making cooking utensils 
and farming implements, and for use as medicine. On the island 
are more than four hundred kinds of native flowering plants. In 
the forests are birds which may be used for food and whose 
feathers are used for decoration. The coast is bordered by 
coral reefs, through which are passages at the mouths of the 


‘Q0UBISIP 9Y} UI UVES oq ABUT N[NJouOF 


Teq nuenny 94} ssoloe SUTYOO] ‘nyvo jO purest oq} jo MOTA 
"P'S ‘a91aLa9 41P £UW01290aS 010Yd Yruaaaly fiq ydvLb010Y qT 





‘ 


8 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


principal valleys. These passages permit the entrance of 
boats to safe landing places. The shallow waters at the mouths 
of streams make favorable sites for artificial fishponds; and the 
reefs themselves and the waters beyond furnish an abundant 
supply of sea food. On such an island as Oahu a fairly large 
number of people could live comfortably, either in villages or 
scattered about, and they could support themselves by hunting, 
agriculture, and fishing. 

Most volcanic islands in the Pacific are well suited to human 
occupation; in olden times as well as to-day islands of this 
class, like Tahiti, Samoa, the Marquesas, Hawaii, Solomon 
Islands, Ponape, and Kusaie, were populated by a larger number 
of people in a more advanced stage of development than were the 
coral islands or the raised coral islands. 

Funafuti, a coral island. Funafuti is a coral island and is an 
example of thousands which dot the surface of the Pacific. It 
is a circular island — an atol/ — consisting of a ring of twenty- 
nine oddly shaped islets surrounding a central lagoon. It in- 
cludes three hundred thirty-four acres and rises at its highest 
point but sixteen feet above the sea. The rock of the little 
islands which make up Funafuti is limestone made of chunks 
of coral and wind-blown coral sand, and the soil is a thin 
layer of decomposed limestone overlying hard rock. There 
are no streams; the water for drinking and cooking comes 
from shallow brackish wells or is rain water caught in bowls. 
The island is too low to intercept the rain-bearing clouds; 
rain falls just as it does over the open ocean, and droughts may 
occur any year or several times in a year. Because the soil of 
the island is thin and lacks the vegetable mold necessary to the 
growth of many species of plants, there are only a few kinds 
of trees and shrubs, those which will grow in sand and in the 
cracks of rocks. The trees suitable for making canoes are small. 
The food plants are the coco palm, which serves also for building 
material, and the wonderful pandanus, which furnishes a kind 


THE PACIFIC AND ITS ISLANDS 9 


of flour for bread and fiber for ropes and strings, mats, and 
clothing. By digging suitable trenches to procure moist earth 
and protection from drifting sand and by carefully tending the 





Sketch of Funafuti 


crop, taro and bananas are raised. Sea food and the flesh and 
eggs of sea birds are plentiful. On some of the little coral 
islands, like those which make up the Gilbert Islands, the 


10 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


Marshall Islands, and the Tuamotus, several families may make 
a living, and on a few of them are communities of more than a 
hundred people. But no one lives on most of the many thousands 
of coral islands, like Laysan, Johnston, and Palmyra; many of 
them have never been inhabited. ‘The reason for this is not only 
that food is scarce; the islands are so low that in times of great 
storms the waves would rush across the land, destroying the crops 
and drowning the peoples. 

Niue, a raised coral island. Niue is a raised coral island four- 
teen miles long and ten miles wide and bordered nearly all the 
way around by sea cliffs. Its surface consists of several plateaus 
or terraces rising one above the other, the highest standing about 
200 feet above sea level. The island is composed entirely of 
limestone made of coral, shells, and plants which grew on a coral 
reef before it was raised to its present position. The soil is de- 
composed limestone and, though thin, is rich and favorable for 
the growth of plants. There is abundant rainfall, but the water 
quickly runs into the ground through caves and open cracks in 
the limestone, and for drinking and cooking the natives use 
either rain water or the brackish water obtained from caves. 
There are many times of drought. There are but few kinds of 
trees on the island, but because of the rich soil they may grow 
luxuriously. Hardwood trees suitable for making small canoes 
are present. Pandanus and coconut are the principal plants, 
which serve alike for food, clothing, and building material. Fish 
and other sea foods are plentiful. 

Raised coral islands, like Nauru, Loyalty, Vavau, and Makatea, 
may support a fairly large population after food plants intro- 
duced from other islands have been established. 

Climate of the Pacific islands. One feature of oceanic islands 
which distinguishes them from continents and from many of the 
continental islands is the climate. The great body of water which 
surrounds oceanic islands never becomes so warm and never so 
cold as the land on and near continents. Therefore the tempera- 


‘soovid Surpury 
pood ou a1v slo], “BaS oY} JO adBjINS 94} MOTI 9ITO SBM PUBS SSUIP]Ing 9y} s194M 9de"{d 9Y} puB [VION SI YIOI 94} [TV 


ont Ss 
*ydn1b010Yd wnasnpy doys1_ IN JO 4SBO0D 





12 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


ture of the air over the open ocean and around and over the 
oceanic islands does not rise so high or fall solow. For the same 
reason the winter and summer temperatures are not very far 
apart, and the climate does not differ much from month to month. 
Places in Mexico in the same latitude as Hawaii and places in 
Australia in the same latitude as Rapa have cold winters and 
hot summers. | 

Temperature. ‘The average annual temperature of nearly all 
the Pacific oceanic islands is 70 degrees. Only in a region ex- 
tending west from Fiji does the average reach 80 degrees, and 
only in the Aleutian Islands and in the islands lying south of New 
Zealand are the winters uncomfortably cold. 

Winds. Because of the vast stretches of water over which 
they may blow without interruption, the winds of the Pacific 
are more regular and uniform than are the winds in any other 
part of the world. These winds blow in different directions in 
different parts of the Pacific. In the belt of ocean lying approxi- 
mately between the parallel of latitude 30 degrees north, which 
runs through Midway Island, and the parallel of latitude 60 
degrees north, near the Bering Sea, the winds come generally 
from the west and are known as “‘ westerly winds.” From lati- 
tude 30 degrees north to near the equator the winds come from 
the northeast. For more than three hundred days in the year 
they blow so regularly and evenly that they have been called 
northeast trade winds (trade is the English form of an old word 
trod, which means path). Along the equator the winds blow 
feebly, generally from the east. From near the equator to lati- 
tude 30 degrees south are the southeast trade winds, and still 
farther south is the belt of strong westerly winds known to sailors 
as the “ roaring forties.” 

In the two trade-wind belts, the winds sometimes blow from a 
direction opposite to their usual course, bringing with them the 
kind of weather known in Hawaii as “ Kona storms.’ Some- 
times the winds become hurricanes or typhoons. Most of these 


Loma OLE AN Deli SeiISCANDS 13 


hurricanes occur in the region between the Marshall Islands and 
China and west and southwest of Samoa—din Micronesia, 
Melanesia — and farther west in the Indian Ocean. But they 
sometimes occur in the winter months in Polynesia and are then 
very destructive. The houses may be torn down and the trees 
broken and uprooted. The hurricane winds and the high waves 


an 


4 


mar, 
VS a 


: 
cat 
mull 

i 





Map showing prevailing winds and temperatures of the Pacific Ocean 


Most of the islands are within the belt of Trade Winds and most of them have 
average temperatures of less than 80 degrees. 


which come with them have swept some low coral islands bare of 
trees, buildings, and men and have sunk the canoes along the 
shores. These winds and the ocean currents made by the winds 
have aided boats in sailing in some directions and hindered them 
in sailing in other directions. 

The map (pp. 2-3) shows that nearly all the Pacific volcanic 
islands, coral islands, and raised coral islands lie in the trade- 
wind belts in a region where the temperature and rainfall are 
favorable for human life. 


14 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


Groups of Pacific islands. The Pacific oceanic islands are so 
numerous that it has been found convenient to consider them as 
three groups of islands: Polynesia, Melanesia, and Micronesia. 
Each group contains volcanic islands, coral islands, and raised 
coral islands. In each group there are different plants and 
animals and different races of men. Hawaii includes the north- 
ernmost islands of Polynesia. (Maps, pp. 2-3 and 4-5.) 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


Answer yes or no to the following : 


1. Is the Pacific Ocean larger than Europe, Asia, North America, 
South America, and Australia, taken together? 

2. If Mauna Kea were on the bottom of the deepest part of the 
Pacific, would its top form an island ? 

3. Are all of the islands of the Pacific on the map in your geography ? 

4. Are the Hawaiian Islands the largest group of islands of the 
Pacific ? 

5. Does the climate of oceanic islands have greater extremes of 
temperature than the climate of continental islands ? 

6. Is Hawaii part of Polynesia? 

Give the evidences from the chapter which lead you to answer as 
you did each of the above questions. 

7. Suppose you had to choose between living on a coral island and 
living on a volcanic island. Copy the following sentences in your 
notebook, filling in the blanks, to give reasons for your choice: 

. The volcanic islands have water supply. 

. The rainfall of coral islands is 
There are more mountains in islands. 

. The scenery of islands is more beautiful. 
Ocean storms dash over islands and destroy 























me THR AAS 








There is soil on volcanic islands. 
. There are more plants on islands. 
h. More people can live on islands. 


8. Describe four prevailing winds of the Pacific Ocean. Show 
their relation to the temperature in different parts of the Pacific 
Ocean. What winds affected favorably for human life the temper- 
ature and rainfall of most of the Pacific islands? 


LHbeoAC RLGFAND TUES ISLANDS 15 


For FURTHER READING 


General references which may be consulted throughout this entire 
book, both for pleasure and profit, are: 


CHAMBERLAIN, JAMES F. and Artuur H. — Oceania. 

Dana, R. H. — Two Vears before the Mast; Chapter XIX. 

Lonpon, (Mrs.) CHARMIAN K.— Our Hawati, and The Log of the 
Snark. 

Lonpon, JACK. — The Cruise of the Snark. 

Ocitvie, P. M. — International Waterways. 

STEPHENS, H: M:,’ and Borton, H. E.— The Pacific Ocean in 
History. 


II 


THE PACIFIC PIONEERS 


Pacific islanders came from Asia. Far back in the history of 
the human race the ancestors of the natives living on islands in 
Polynesia, Melanesia, and Micronesia had their homes on the 
great Asiatic continent. The first inhabitants of Australia, 
Java, Borneo, and the Philippines also came from the Asiatic 
region. The route by which they came is marked out by islands, 
peninsulas, and straits. From the continent of Asia down along 
the Malay Peninsula to Sumatra, Java, Borneo, the Celebes, 
the Moluccas, and on to Papua and Australia it 1s possible to 
sail from island to island without going out of sight of land. 
The large islands are joined together by chains of small islands, 
and the passage from one to another is no more difficult or dan- 
gerous than to go from Maui to Lanai or from Oahu to Molokai. 
In good weather the crudest craft, even a log or a raft, might 
safely take the voyage. 

Pacific islands are far apart. The islands of Melanesia lying 
between Papua or New Guinea and Fiji are not very far apart, and 
primitive canoes might make the journey from one to another of 
them in two or three days. But east, northeast, and southeast 
of Fiji the islands are widely separated; most of them are very 
small and low and cannot be seen at a distance. Most of the 
island groups and some single islands are from 100 to 300 miles. 
from their nearest neighboring island. Easter Island is 1,100 
miles from the outermost island of the Gambier group, and Hawaii 
is goo miles from Fanning Island, the nearest land which might 
be used as a stopping place. To cover these great distances 

' 16 


THE PACIFIC PIONEERS 17 


requires boats which can live through rough seas, a way of carry- 
ing food for voyages of weeks and months, and fearless men who 
are skilled in navigation. [arly in the history of the human race 
there were no such boats and no such men. This makes it 
possible to understand why Java and the Philippines and Austra- 
lia were inhabited probably more than 10,000 years ago and also 
why many of the Polynesian islands were first seen by men within 
the last 2,000 years, some of them within the last 500 years. It 
is probable that Polynesia is the last habitable part of the world 
to be occupied by the human race. It is remarkable that 
Hawaii, so far removed from America, Asia, and from the other 
islands in the Pacific, was found at all before the days of big 
sailing vessels. 

Why the pioneers came. The causes which led the early 
Polynesians to make short voyages to near-lying islands in the 
western Pacific and to the remote and widely separated islands 
of the central and eastern Pacific are not known, but they are 
probably the same as the causes which have led to the migra- 
tion of other primitive people in other parts of the world. To 
escape slaughter in battle some people were forced to find new 
homes in more favorable places. The destruction of food plants 
and homes by storm waves which sometimes sweep across low 
islands led to the abandonment of fields and village sites. Some 
migrations of small groups of people were probably involuntary ; 
the boats were blown to sea and carried wherever wind and cur- 
rents directed until land came in sight. For other migrations 
plans may deliberately have been made for the purpose of finding 
new islands where fishing was better and where food for an 
increasing population was easier to obtain. There is evidence 
also that many migrations were the result of love of adventure — 
a deliberate intent to find something new. When a new island 
was discovered, the adventurer made his way back to his people, 
only to return with his family or with a company of immigrants 
who were attracted to the new-found land. 


18 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


This love of adventure which led to the finding of islands, fish- 
ing grounds, food plants, and choice places for settlements is a 
marked characteristic of all branches of the Polynesian race. 

The routes from Asia. The precise routes taken by the fear- 
less explorers are not known. The migrations were many and 
were spread over centuries of time. Also the small companies of 
adventurers and scouts and the larger companies of immigrants 
came by different routes. The route through Java to the Fiji 
Islands and eastward is marked by stranded remnants of Poly- 
nesians at Futuna (Erronan) in the New Hebrides, at Rennel in 
the Solomons, and at the Ontong Java (Lord Howe) Islands. 
The Polynesian settlement at Nukuor in the Caroline Islands 
may mark a northern route by which immigrants came through 
the Marshall Islands, Gilbert Islands, and Ellice Islands to Samoa 
and perhaps to Hawaii. It is possible that some adventurous 
companies came by a yet more northern route through the Mari- 
anas Islands or the Carolines directly to Hawaii. After immi- 
grants had become established in such places as Samoa and 
Tahiti, these centers probably were used as bases for explora- 
tion of islands in their vicinity. 

When the Polynesians came. Some Polynesians speak of 
their former homeland as “ Hawaiki,”’ a faintly remembered 
faraway region from which many choice things came and to which 
the souls of men returned after death. The first emigrations 
from this homeland took place so long ago that the record is lost. 
But at the beginning of the Christian era colonists were in the 
Pacific, and it is known that during the eighth and ninth centuries 
eighty-five islands and island groups had been discovered — 
islands lying far apart on both sides of the equator. 

The Maoris of New Zealand trace their descent from immi- 
grants who reached the islands about the year 1400. But these 
immigrants had learned about the country from earlier voyagers 
and came with their wives and children, carrying with them the 
sweet potato and taro, their household idols, medicinal plants, 


THE PACIFIC PIONEERS 19 


and domestic animals. They found New Zealand occupied by 
people of their own race, who had come from different places, 
and learned that the Chatham Islands lying eastward across 500 
miles of stormy sea had been settled. 

As early as the thirteenth century the geography of the Pacific 
was fairly well known. The colonists were familiar with the 
mountains, volcanoes, rivers, reefs, and forests and knew the 
regions of large rainfall and small rainfall and the direction of 
winds and currents. All this was before Columbus had dis- 
covered America, or Balboa the Pacific; before Magellan had 
crossed the Pacific to the Philippines. 

Pioneer navigators. Long before European navigators had 
ventured far from land, Polynesians were sailing back and forth 
among the dots of land in the broad Pacific, making voyages 
thousands of miles in length. The Polynesian outposts in the 
Carolines and at Easter Island are nearly 9,000 miles apart and 
3,800 miles of water lie between Hawaii and New Zealand. The 
route from Tahiti to New Zealand, used many times by Poly- 
nesian boats, is 2,200 milesin length. Yet these widely separated 
lands and intervening islands were not only known but were 
settled and served as distributing points for the shoots and seeds 
of such food plants as the banana, coconut, yam, breadfruit, and 
taro. Even the west coast of America may have been visited 
by adventurous navigators. 

Long voyages. The facts about some of these voyages are 
known. Four early trips from Hawaii to Tahiti, 2,400 miles, 
are recorded. Uenga, a twelfth-century sea rover, sailed from 
Samoa to Tongareva, thence to Tubuai, and through the Tuamo- 
tus to Tahiti. The entire journey covered about 4,000 miles, 
most of it against the trade winds. ‘Tukuiho, sailing from Rapa, 
discovered Rapa-nui (Easter Island) after a voyage of 2,500 
miles with no intervening stopping places. Karika, a Samoan 
chief, discovered and colonized Rarotonga, and the thirteen 
voyages of Tangiia cover a distance of more than 18,000 miles. 


20 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


No compass used. The Polynesians readily made their way 
across the ocean without the aid of a compass or a log book. 
During the daytime they guided themselves by the sun, by the 
flight of birds, and the shape and color of clouds, and in stormy 
weather by the trend of the waves driven before the prevailing 
winds. A man with a knowledge of clouds and rainbows and 
winds ranked high in the esteem of the people. Some of the 
Pacific peoples made crude charts on which the trends of the wave 
crests in the trade wind belts were indicated by parallel sticks 
stretched on a frame, and the number and position of the islands 
included on the chart were shown by little pieces of stone or 
coral placed in proper position. 

Sailing by stars. As guides in voyages far from land, stars 
were chiefly used. Probably many voyages started at night 
when stars were visible and at times of the year when recognized 
stars remained for some time above the horizon. A favorable 
time was when the dog-star, Sirius, appeared. Polynesian 
navigators were familiar with the position of important stars 
and knew of their change in position from month to month. Five 
planets were known and named and the time and place of their 
appearance kept in mind. Thirteen “ canoe steerers’ stars,” 
among them Sirius, Regulus, and the Pleiades, were known, 
together with the months in which they appeared, the time they 
reached the zenith, and the times of rising and setting. In 
the Northern Hemisphere, Aldebaran was used, and the North 
Star was known as one in an unchangeable position, which could 
be relied upon throughout the year. The stars in an east-west 
belt over the equator were commonly used as guides in sailing. 

A youth studying navigation in Hawaii was taught to view the 
heavens as a cylinder on which were marked “ highways of navi- 
gation stars.’’ One highway led from Noholoa (North Star) to 
Newa (Southern Cross). The portion of the heavens east of 
this line was “ the bright road of Kane,” that to the west was 
the “ highway of Kanaloa.” A line drawn east and west through 


THE PACIFIC PIONEERS zt 


the place of the sun in winter was “ the black shining road of 
Kane,” and one drawn through the southern limit of the sun’s 
course in summer was “ the black shining road of Kanaloa.” 
Within these limits are the stars to be used in sailing; outside, 
are the ‘‘ strange’ stars. The young man was taught that, in 
going southward to Tahiti, new sets of stars will be seen and that 
after passing the equator the North Star disappears. In the 
legend of Hawaii-loa, the navigator Makalii sailing eastward 
is said to have used Iao and Hokuula (Aldebaran) to guide him to 
Hawaii. On a journey from Hawaii to Tahiti the Southern 
Cross was the guide. 

Kinds of boats. In making their voyages among the islands 
the Polynesians made use of three kinds of boats: the single 
canoe, the outrigger canoe, and the twin canoe. The simplest 
form of single canoe — a short, narrow log hollowed out by chip- 
ping with stone adzes — was little used. Such canoes capsize 
easily and are suitable for little else than fishing in lagoons and 
in shallow waters. Where large trees were available, single 
canoes with lengths exceeding fifty feet were made; some Maori 
single canoes were more than one hundred feet long and five 
feet wide and were capable of carrying one hundred thirty men 
and a cargo of provisions on voyages within bays, up rivers, and 
along the coast. 

Outrigger canoe. The outrigger canoe is the type of craft 
most common in Polynesia. By the attachment of an outrigger, 
small narrow canoes are made seaworthy and are much less 
liable to overturn ; if carefully constructed they may be safely 
used for voyages of considerable length even in rough seas. 

Twin canoe. The twin canoe consists of two canoes placed 
side by side, several feet apart, fastened together by wood cross- 
pieces or by a platform which occupies the space between them. 
It is like a raft which can be paddled from both canoes or sailed 
by erecting masts. On the platform of large twin canoes canopies 
were erected to shield the voyagers from sun and rain, and even 


ce 


22 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


thatched houses were built which served the same purpose as 
cabins on modern steamships. Such craft were remarkably sea- 
worthy, and the larger ones could accommodate as many as 200 
men, women, and children, together with domestic animals and 





: Photograph by R. J. Baker. 
Outrigger canoe 


the provisions necessary for a long voyage. One canoe of a 
Kamehameha twin canoe, cut from a single log, measured 108 
iets 

Canoes with sails. Many outrigger canoes and twin canoes 
were equipped with sails made of pandanus or coconut leaves, 
attached to masts which were permanent or set up when needed. 
For long sailing voyages with canoes, outriggers were faster and 
were considered safer than twin canoes, as twin canoes when 
broken apart were helpless. 


THE PACIFIC PIONEERS 23 


Importance of outrigger and twin canoes. It was with the 
aid of such craft that the traditional war expeditions and peaceful 
migrations were carried on, and in the life of the Polynesians 
they played a very important part. They were the only means 
of travel from island to island and were required for fishing. 
Nearly every man, woman, and grown child could handle a 
canoe while fishing or in battle or during the frequent regattas 
(races) in which as many as one hundred canoes took part. But 
to build a big seaworthy canoe with nothing but stone adzes, 
stone chisels and coconut-fiber lashings was the work of trained 
craftsmen. There were building superintendents and special 
workmen for making hulls, sails, and outriggers. The principal 
chiefs kept canoe builders at their courts; other people hired 
them. ‘The canoe meant so much to the island dwellers that it 
is not surprising to learn that each canoe had a name and that 
special ceremonies and special chants were associated with 
felling the tree, shaping the wood, and finishing and launching 
the boat 

Pioneers had little food. The pioneers of the Polynesian race 
must have been surprised and disappointed at the scarcity of 
food on the islands to which they came. ‘The region is less well 
supplied with food plants than are most other parts of the world. 
The first comers to America found corn, potatoes, and the fruits 
of many trees and vines. The early settlers.in Asia and in 
Indonesia found wild rice, coconuts, breadfruit, and taro. It was 
easy for them to get the food they needed. But the men who 
first landed in Hawaii, Tahiti, Samoa, and other Polynesian islands 
found that few of the plants furnished food in sufficient abundance 
to support life. There was no wheat, barley, rye, or corn for 
flour, no rice, taro, breadfruit, sweet potato, papaia, custard 
apple, sugar cane, mountain apple, or fleshy fruits. A kind of 
coconut with small fruit grew in a few places. Perhaps a small 
banana and a kind of yam were to be found on some high islands. 
The native food plants are those which nowadays are little used. 


24 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


The fleshy leaves and shoots of zeze, the cabbage tree (Pisonia), 
purslane, fau, and the seeds of pandanus were cooked or eaten 
raw; also the underground stems of ferns, fern shoots, and sea- 


a: 


Bishop Museum Photo. 
Pandanus tree 





weeds. The fruit of 
a nettle, toa-tou, was 
eaten in the South 
Pacific. A few rasp- 
berries and huckle- 
berries and perhaps 
also the vz apple grew 
on some high islands. 
The seed of palms and 
the fruit of the ‘ Ta- 
hitian chestnut ’’ were 
used wherever they 
could be found. Few 
of these plants furnish 
much food even in 
places where they 
grow well. The un- 
derground stem of the 
fern and the seaweeds 
are the best of them. 
The pandanus. The 
plant most relied upon 
for food was the pan- 
danus. For the earli- 
est immigrants to 
Polynesia the pan- 
danus was the “ staff 
of life,” just as in later 


times taro in Hawaii and breadfruit in the Marquesas were the 
chief foods. The pandanus grows everywhere in Polynesia north 
of New Zealand. Even on the poor soil of coral islands great 


THE PACIFIC PIONEERS 25 


groves of it were growing before any human beings entered the 
Pacific. ‘The kernels of the nuts are eaten, and the ripe fruit 
may be boiled down into a molasses. Its greatest use is in 
making a kind of bread by grating the soft parts of the fruit and 
drying the pulp in the sun. After drying, it is pressed into a hard 
mass and when wanted for use Is moistened, kneaded, and baked. 
It is an easily digested, wholesome food which may be kept for 
a long time without spoiling. 

The chestnut. The “ Tahitian chestnut,” which now grows 
abundantly in many Polynesian islands, produces cone-shaped 
masses of small, white, fragrant flowers and a flat kidney-shaped 
fruit, which when baked is nourishing food. 

Animal food scarce. Animal food likewise was remarkably 
scarce. In no part of the world were there fewer animals useful 
to man. Before the immigrants came, only the bat and per- 
haps the rat represented the higher animals. On the land there 
were birds, insects, and snails, but no cattle, swine, sheep, deer, or 
other wild animals suitable for food. Fish and other forms of 
sea life were the chief animal food of the pioneers, and nearly 
all kinds were eaten. They were caught by hooks, nets, and 
spears by several ingenious methods. Fish traps of several 
kinds were used, and in New Zealand great weirs or dams were 
built across rivers to catch the enormous eels living in tidal 
waters. In Hawaii and elsewhere fish ponds were walled in with 
stone. 

Plants brought by the pioneers. ‘The first Polynesian immi- 
grants probably soon learned that pandanus, seaweeds, and the 
roots, stems, leaves, and fruit of a few other plants could not 
provide enough food for many families and that if their race 
was to increase in numbers and be free from the fear of starva- 
tion other kinds of plant food must be obtained. These early 
settlers were aware that other islands to which they might wish 
to go did not have the food which was needed. Probably word 
was sent back to those who were planning to come that seeds and 


26 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


shoots for planting must be brought along. In seeking new 
islands to settle, the canoes came prepared to plant the necessary 
crops. ‘Thus it came about that the food plants which the immi- 
grants knew in the 
places from which 
they came were intro- 
duced into their new 
homes. 

The coconut. The 
Polynesian pioneers 
had been familiar with 
the coconut, and prob- 
ably this was brought 
in at a very early date. 
The first canoes which 
came doubtless car- 
ried coconuts for food 
along the way, and 
any nuts which re- 
Mmainedvad benmhe 
party had landed on 
a strange island were 
planted, for the use- 
fulness of the coconut 
has been known for 
thousands of years. 
In the tropical Pacific 
this wonderful tree stands first among useful plants. The kernels 
of old coconuts and of green coconuts are eaten just as they come 
from the shell; the sprouting coconut and the green sprouts of 
the tree itself are much relished. The water of green coconuts 
is a common drink; and sweetmeats are made of grated coconut 
kernel. The coconut tree not only furnishes abundant food of 
good quality, but provides the material needed for the frame- 





Photo by R. J. Baker. 
Top of a coconut tree showing the fruit 


THE PACIFIC PIONEERS 27 


work, sides, and roof of a house. Its leaves can be made into 
thatch baskets, sleeping mats, and clothes; its fibers into fishing 
lines and ropes. The shell of the nuts is material for bowls and 
other food utensils; the dried husks make charcoal for fires; and 
from the trunk of the tree are made paddles, clubs, and spears. 
From the juice of the nut medicines are made, and the oil is used 
for cooking and for anointing the body. If no other plant were in 
the Pacific islands, the early settlers would have had the means of 
feeding themselves, of getting the necessary clothing and shelter, 
and of catching birds 
and fish. 

The coconut grows 
best near the sea- 
shore, where there is 
little soil except sand 
and fragments of coral 
rock — just the place 
where the immigrants 
to uninhabited islands 
must establish their 
first settlements in 
order to make use of 
sea food and to be 
near their canoes. 
But very few coco- 
nuts will grow of 
themselves. They 
must be planted, cared 
for while they are : eC 
young, and replanted Breadfruit 
after they have been 
broken down or uprooted by strong winds and heavy waves. Coco- 
nuts became the food of tens of thousands of Pacific islanders be- 
cause of the hard and skillful work of the pioneer settlers. 





28 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


The breadfruit. Another food plant introduced by the ances- 
tors of the present Polynesians is.the breadfruit, which has its 
native home in the islands westward toward Asia. There are 
more than two hundred varieties which grow in different places 
and on different kinds of soil. This tall wide-spreading tree 
furnishes shade, resin for calking canoes, and lumber for mak- 
ing houses, canoes, furniture, and household utensils. Its great- 
est value is for food. In Tahiti, the Marquesas, Rarotonga, 
Samoa, and other high islands south of the equator, breadfruit 
was the common food, eaten every day. Breadfruit, like the 
coconut, must be planted on the right kind of soil and where the 
rainfall is favorable, and it must be carefully tended while it 
is young. 

Taro. Taro is a very important food among the Pacific 
islanders ; like the coconut and the breadfruit it was introduced by 
the early immigrants. It is the starchy tuberous stem (com- 
monly called root) of the taro plant, the leaves of which also 
serve as food. After baking, the root was eaten as a vegetable, 
but the commonest use was in making poz, a starchy paste which 
was the principal food in many Polynesian islands. To grow a 
taro crop required skillful preparation of the soil in planting and 
a great amount of labor while the crop was growing. It was 
cultivated in many islands but was most used in Hawaii. 

Sweet potato and yam. The sweet potato and the yam were 
brought into Polynesia at an early day and were carried from 
island to island until the people in nearly all parts of the Pacific 
knew these plants and cultivated them to some extent. In 
Hawaii fields of sweet potatoes were once as common as fields of 
taro, and in New Zealand, where the breadfruit and taro do not 
thrive, the sweet potato became a very important part of the 
food supply. 

Dogs, swine, and chickens. The Polynesian pioneers soon 
learned of the remarkable scarcity of native animals suitable for 
food. They brought in dogs, swine, and poultry — animals not 


THE PACIFIC PIONEERS 29 


too large to carry in canoes — and found them so valuable that 
they were taken from island to island and became important for 
food. Hogs were nowhere plentiful; in some islands they were 
reserved for chiefs or eaten only on festive occasions. Dogs 
were more abundant, and those which were to be eaten were fed 
on breadfruit, coconut, yams, and fruit. Poultry seems to have 
been less desired than wild birds. 

Food eaten raw. In the Pacific islands, coconuts, seaweed, 
pandanus nuts, and young shoots and leaves of many plants and 
several kinds of sea food may safely be eaten raw. But the 
value of most food is increased by cooking, and some uncooked 
foods are poisonous. In the early days of the human race all 
foods, both plant and animal, had to be eaten in their natural 
state, for the use of fire was not known. : 

Making fire. Before a method of making fire was invented by 
man, the only fire known was that in volcanoes and lightning, 
and when fire was needed it was carried from place to place on 
land or in canoes and kept constantly burning. If the fire went 
out it must be renewed by bringing new fire from its source. 
For this reason one of the greatest discoveries of mankind is the 
knowledge that fire may be made by rubbing two sticks together. 
The Polynesians made use of this discovery in a special way ; 
they invented the “ fire plow.” A piece of wood, held firmly, was 
rubbed briskly back and forth with the pointed end of another 
stick until a groove was made. ‘The wood dust made by the 
rubbing was gathered at one end of the groove, and quick rubbing 
with the pointed stick was repeated until smoke was seen. The 
smoking pile of dust was then blown into flame and over it were 
placed dry fine shavings, leaves, or twigs. The fire could then 
be kept burning, or it could be made again. 

The imu. With the friendly fire at hand the way was open 
for devising methods of cooking. The Polynesian pioneers had 
no metal or earthenware utensils and knew nothing of boiling 
food in water. But they were familiar with the underground 


30 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


oven, imu, which in many islands is still used. Many families 
had their own ovens, but in some places all the people of a district 
united in building the oven and preparing the food. A shallow 
pit was dug and filled with small stones and firewood. After 
the stones had become hot, the breadfruit, taro, or sweet potatoes 
were put in and covered with leaves. Other heated stones were 





Photo by R. J. Baker. 
Preparing to bake a pig in the underground oven 


placed over the leaves and the whole covered with green leaves 
and earth. 

After this baking and steaming the vegetables were ready for 
eating. The cooked breadfruit and the taro were also used for 
making poz, a pasty mass which took the place of bread. In some 
islands great masses of breadfruit paste were stored away in 
pits and kept for a year or more. This was done to provide 
food for times when for any reason the crops might fail. Fish 


THE PACIFIC PIONEERS 31 


were sometimes broiled over hot stones or embers, but the usual 
method of preparing animals for food was by baking in the under- 
ground oven. ‘The animal, which had been carefully cleaned and 
filled with hot stones, was wrapped in leaves, placed on hot stones, 
and covered with other leaves, heated stones, mold, and earth. To 
cook a dog or a hog in this manner required about four hours. 

Principal foods. Soon after an island was settled its popula- 
tion lived chiefly on foods which had been introduced, and for 
2,000 years the vegetable foods of the Polynesians were coconut, 
breadfruit, taro, yam, banana, and sweet potato. The chief 
food of the Marquesans, Tahitians, and Samoans was breadfruit ; 
of the Maoris of New Zealand, sweet potato; of the Hawaiians, 
taro and sweet potato; just as the chief food of the Chinese is 
rice and of the Anglo-Saxons, flour made from grains. Princi- 
pally on these plant foods and fish the Polynesian race has been 
nourished. 

No work animals. The Pacific pioneers probably knew of 
horses, oxen, and water buffalos. But these large animals could 
not be taken from place to place in canoes, and the Polynesians 
therefore had no animals which could be used for hauling heavy 
stones and timbers and for clearing and cultivating land. The 
people traveled on foot or in boats and carried on their backs or 
dragged along the ground everything which had to be moved. 
All plowing and digging necessary to prepare a field for crops and 
to keep it free from weeds was necessarily done by hand. 

Races of people. The people who colonized the Pacific 
islands belong to three races: Polynesian, Micronesian, and 
Melanesian. 

The Polynesians. The Polynesians are not a pure race —all 
descended from the same ancestors. Like the English, the 
French, and the Americans, they are a mixed race made up of 
men and women of different races who came from different places 
at different times. By intermarriage since they came into the 
Pacific these people have become more mixed. It is possible to 


Re: A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


recognize four types of people among the natives of the Polynesian 
islands; the Polynesians themselves recognize the differences 
and have terms to describe them. The people known as “‘ typical 
Polynesians”’ live in all the islands, but more of them in southern 
than in northern Polynesia. They resemble the Caucasians and 
in several respects are like the race from which Europeans have 
sprung. They are unlike the Melanesians, and are quite different 
from the Negro. 

The Muicronesians. The Micronesians are a combination of 
races. Among them are some people who resemble the Poly- 
nesians; but most of them show mixture with the Japanese, 
the Filipinos, and the Melanesians. The people on the different 
islands — Marshall, Caroline, and Marianas — although all 
Micronesians, are almost like different races. The Micronesians 
are said to lack the courtesy and hospitality of the Polynesians. 
They are able warriors, skillful fishermen and navigators, and 
make fine mats and clothing by weaving bark and leaves. As 
farmers and gardeners the Micronesians are much less skillful 
than the Polynesians and the Melanesians. 

The Melanesians. The Melanesians differ widely among 
themselves in bodily form, language, and customs; but as a race 
they differ much from both the Polynesians and the Micronesians. 
Their features resemble the Negro. Their color varies from 
brown to black, and their hair is crisp, curly, or even tufted. 
They are ferocious warriors and once practiced cannibalism to 
an extent beyond that of other Pacific peoples. They are less 
intelligent than Polynesians, but their skill in carving and 
decoration is remarkably good. 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


1. What conditions can you imagine which would make you willing 
to start for San Francisco in a canoe? 

2. Compare the conditions you have just stated with those which 
led the early Polynesians to travel over the Pacific. 


THE PACIFIC PIONEERS 33 


3. What would you have to know if you were to reach San Fran- 
cisco In a canoe? 

4. Give reasons why special ceremonies took place during the build- 
ing of acanoe. | 

5. The early Polynesians experienced hardships when they reached 
new islands. What were they? Would we experience them to-day? 
Why? 

6. The native Hawaiian is a Polynesian. Write the following list 
in your notebook and put a cross before the group which the Hawaiian 
most resembles: a. Melanesian, 6. Caucasian, c. Japanese, d. Negro, 
e. Micronesian. 

7. If you landed on a tropical island and knew there would be only 
one plant on it what would you likeit tobe? Give all the reasons you 
can to support your choice. 


For FURTHER READING 


Turum, T. G. — More Hawaiian Folk-Tales; ‘‘Hawaii-Loa, Tradi- 
tional Discoverer and First Settler of Hawaii.” 

SULLIVAN, Louis R. — Asta, January, 1923; ‘‘New Light on the 
Races of Polynesia.”’ 

Emerson, Dr. N. B.— Papers of the Hawatian Historical Society, 
No. 5; ‘‘The Long Voyages of the Ancient Hawaiians.”’ 


Ill 


SOME POLYNESIAN CUSTOMS AND BELIEFS 


Polynesian civilization. During the 2,000 years which may 
have elapsed between the coming of the first Polynesian im- 
migrant and the visit of Captain Cook, the Pacific colonists had 
increased until perhaps 800,000 Polynesians were living on the 
many islands suitable for habitation. They were too widely 
scattered to form a nation under one government; but they had 
lived so long near each other and had been so long separated 
from people in other parts of the world that they became one 
race or group of people. No other people look like them or do 
things as they do them. } 

As one group of colonists after another came into the Pacific 
they brought with them ideas and customs from their old homes 
and changed these ideas and customs in ways more suitable to 
life in their new homes. ‘Thus there grew up a Polynesian civi- 
lization which is remarkable because it was made by a people who 
knew nothing of the use of metals. 

The Polynesians had no iron, no pottery, and no beasts of 
burden. ‘Their tools, weapons, and utensils were of stone, wood, 
shell, teeth, or bone. From hard wood or soft wood tipped with 
hard wood, effective spears and harpoons were made. Bowls and 
boxes were made with stone tools and engraved with stone or 
tooth knives. The canoe maker’s tool chest contained adzes of 
stone, chisels of stone, shell, or bone, rasps and files of coral, and 
polishers made of coral or the rough skin of fish. In place of 
screws and nails cord made of fibers was used. 

Although they lived in a ‘‘ Stone Age,” the Polynesians learned 
to make good use of all the things at hand and showed skill in 

34 


SOME POLYNESIAN CUSTOMS AND BELIEFS 35 


the making of houses and clothing and in the cultivation of fields ; 
in their art, government, and religious ideas they reached a high 
stage of development. 

Houses. ‘The Polynesian house was well suited to the tropical 
climate. It was chiefly a place to sleep; cooking, washing, and 
other household activities were usually performed in the open. 





Bishop Museum Photograph. 


Samoan round house 


The ordinary family dwelling house was about ten feet wide 
and twenty feet long. It was set among trees, usually on a stone 
platform raised a few feet above the ground and extending beyond 
the walls of the house as a Janai. There were also large houses 
in which several families lived together and houses used for 
public meetings. The essential part of the house was the roof 
of thatch supported by poles. The sides of some houses were 
also thatched; many others were not walled in. The floor was 
the stone platform covered with mats, and there were no parti- 


36 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


tions to separate rooms. The material for the framework was 
the trunks of coconut, breadfruit, or other trees fastened 
together with sennit (fiber) lashings skillfully arranged. The 
thatch was usually dense layers of coconut, pandanus, or bread- 
fruit leaves fastened to rods of bamboo or hibiscus. In Hawaii 





Hawaiian grass house in Bishop Museum, Honolulu 


grass was used for thatch, and in New Zealand, where timber is 
abundant and material suitable for thatch is scarce, it was cus- 
tomary to make the entire house of planks hewed and carved with 
stone adzes. 

Little clothing needed. On low tropical islands and aiong 
the shore of high volcanic islands, where most Polynesians lived, 
the need for clothing was small. A loin cloth (called malo in 
Hawaii) for men, a short skirt for women, and sandals for fishing 


SOME POLYNESIAN CUSTOMS AND BELIEFS a 


on the reefs or walking on lava were the only essential articles. 
But the instinct for adornment led to the making of skirts, cloaks, 
and even headdresses which were attractive as well as useful. 

Dress for women and men. ‘The usual Polynesian full dress 
for women consisted of several yards of cloth wrapped about 
the waist and extending below the knees; other pieces placed 
one above the other were hung from the neck behind and in 
front, giving the arms full play, and were tucked in at the waist 
to form a girdle. The pieces of clothing were arranged to suit 
the fancy. The dress of men was similar except that the skirts 
were sometimes tucked up about the loins. In rainy weather 
mats took the place of cloth. Skirts made of leaves or fiber 
were also widely used.: The material used for clothing by the 
early Polynesian immigrants was that found in the islands to 
which they came 

Use of pandanus. ‘To prepare pandanus for clothing, leaves 
of suitable length are stripped from strong young plants and 
drawn through a fire, one at a time, to make them pliable and to 
soften the sawlike spines on the edges and midribs. After soak- 
ing in sea water for a week or more these pliable strips are bleached 
in the sun and their rough edges stripped off. The leaves are 
then made flat and smooth by drawing them back and forth 
about a stake stuck in the ground, rolled in balls, and stored in 
a dry place until needed. To make a mat for clothing or a 
blanket the strips are plaited. 

Plants for making tapa. Even before coming to their new 
island homes the Polynesian immigrants were familiar with the 
method of making fapa or paper cloth from the inner bark of 
trees and knew that for clothing and for bed blankets this tapa 
was better than mats and leaves. Wherever the materials were 
to be had, tapa was made. On some islands no suitable trees 
grew; on other islands one or more kinds of trees had an inner 
bark which could be made into paper clothing. In Hawaii the 
mamaki, the oloa, and the akala could be used. But none of the 


38 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


native Polynesian plants were as useful for tapa making as the 
breadfruit tree and the wauke, which were brought to the islands 
from places farther west. Wauke (paper mulberry) is the best 
material. Slips of it were carried from place to place, planted, 
and cultivated with such care that it now grows on most 
Pacific islands. In New Zealand, where tapa-making plants do 
not thrive, fine mats 
woven of native 
‘flax’? were commonly 
used for clothing. 

Tapa difficult to 
make. To make an 
ordinary piece of 
coarse plain tapa is 
difficult and requires 
great skill. Even 
greater skill and 
knowledge were de- 
manded of the few 
men and women who 
could dye the tapas 
with delicate shades 
of gray, red, brown, 
blue, and yellow and 
print on them the 
beautiful patterns 
which make the old 

Bishop Museum Photograph. Hawalian tapas price- 
Hawaiian feather cloak less. 

Personal adornment. The Polynesians were not content with 
making clothing for everyday use. Their strong desire for 
personal beauty led them to undergo the painful process of tattoo- 
ing, and many ways were found to make their dress attractive. 
Headdresses of ropes of human hair were used, and all Polynesians 





SOME POLYNESIAN CUSTOMS AND BELIEFS 39 


were exceedingly fond of flowers as personal ornaments. In the 
use of feathers the Polynesians surpassed all other people. The 
Hawaiian feather cloak ranks with the Persian rug as a master- 
piece of human skill. 

Making gardens. The Polynesians were successful gardeners. 
They made use of such native plants as were suitable for food, 
clothing, and medicine and introduced many plants which were 
better than the ones which they found in the islands to which 
they came. They raised crops of sweet potatoes and taro suffi- 
cient to feed a large population, which means that they had a 
good knowledge of soil, water, and weather and knew when and 
how to plant and to cultivate. The preparation of a taro patch 
requires much hard labor. The ground must be cleared of 
stones and brush, leveled, and built into terraces. Walls must 
be constructed for each terrace. To supply water, ditches must 
be dug along the sides and the bottoms of valleys. Among the 
remarkable examples of ancient Hawaiian skill and industry are 
the irrigation channels which wind along the slopes as walled 
stone ditches and cross the gulleys in wooden flumes. 

Polynesian language. The Polynesian language is soft and 
musical; there are few harsh sounds. It contains more than 
20,000 words and the number in everyday use was remarkably 
large for a people whose language had not been reduced to writing. 
These words and their combinations are capable of expressing a 
great variety of fine shades of meaning. 

How language was preserved. It is surprising that without 
writing to preserve their language the widely separated groups 
of Polynesians should have retained a common language for some 
thousands of years. But their language was preserved with 
great fidelity. Much attention was given to the use of words 
and to pronunciation. Children were trained to apply the right 
words to objects and to ideas, and young men who had not learned 
to use the language correctly were usually not permitted to speak 
in public. The best trained chiefs, generals, and priests were 


40 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


truly great orators, and eloquence was so highly prized and con- 
sidered so necessary for a leader that one who did not have it 
might not be chosen as a chief. 

Poetry. Poetry also was highly prized and was used at all 
festivals and rites. The poet was highly honored. 

Story-telling. Story-telling was an interesting feature of 
Polynesian life. Daytime and evenings groups of men, women, 
and children might be seen listening to tales of gods and heroes 
and distant lands. ‘These tales were told by a special class of 
story-tellers who did little or nothing else but make up stories 
and recite them. Besides the tales which were widely known and 
related by the common people, there were tales told in a special 
language understood only by the ali, or chiefs. Much time 
also was given to telling riddles and conundrums and to playing 
games based on some form of old fairy tale or mystery story. 

Kinds of stories. Most Polynesian stories are unlike those 
in other parts of the world. There are almost no animal stories 
except those about the shark, the whale, the turtle, and birds. 
There are stories about places to which it is forbidden to go and 
about maidens who were carefully guarded. The commonest 
stories are about demigods, beings like Maui, who could do 
what men do but who also had some supernatural power. Many 
of the stories express the beauty of nature, the color of flowers, 
the form of clouds, the strength of mountains, and the look of the 
sea. Hawaiian stories have much about the waterfall, the forest, 
the rainbow, the volcano, and the surf breaking on the coral 
reefs. 

Chanting and dancing. Out of the story-telling grew the chant. 
The Hawaiian oli is merely a story recited like a chant, the mele 
is also a chanted story, and the hula is a story in which a musical 
chant is accompanied by gestures. Chanting and dancing went 
together. Some dances and chants were known to nearly all 
Polynesians, but each island group had also its own kinds. The 
Hawaiians and the Samoans paid special attention to dancing, 


SOME POLYNESIAN ‘CUSTOMS AND BELIEFS 41 


the Marquesans and Tahitians to chanting. Music such as is 
heard to-day was not known in Polynesia before the coming of 
the white man. 

Sports. Swimming. Outdoor sports received much attention. 
Among them swimming stands first. Even children swam long 
distances and were accustomed to dive, and to ride on the surf 
both with their bodies and with the surf board. 

Wrestling. Wrestling was a common pastime for both sexes, 
and many wrestling matches were arranged. At one end of a 
railed-in area sat the chief and leading men, who were to serve 
as judges. At the appointed time several men with no clothing 
except the malo entered the area, and each one offered to wrestle 
with anyone who so wished. After the challenges had been 
arranged the pairs contestedin turn. The victors were applauded 
in chants, and the defeated and their friends accepted the outcome 
without bitter feelings. Boxing matches also were part of the 
Polynesian amusements. 

Spear throwing, coasting, bowling. In spear throwing a group 
of contestants were expected to catch one of the spears thrown 
at them and with this spear ward off others thrown; when a 
favorable opportunity came, they hurled the spear back at their 
opponents. During the contest the air was full of spears, and 
to avoid disaster, spears must be thrown, caught, parried, and 
dodged with coolness and lightning-like speed. In Hawaii 
favorite sports were coasting down grassy slopes and bowling 
with uwlumatka stones. 

What children were taught. The white men who first came 
into the Pacific expressed surprise at the intelligence shown by 
the natives. They discovered that the Polynesians have good 
minds and that many of them had also been trained in schools or 
under the direction of selected teachers. The young man who 
was to be a chief or leader studied astronomy, law, geography, 
and particularly history and language. Besides his regular - 
studies he must be trained as a warrior and a speaker and taught 


42 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


to read the meaning of the habits of fish, the blossoming of trees, 
the flight of birds, and the movement and shape of clouds. In 
some Polynesian islands each young man learned some trade, 
such as house builder, wood carver, fisherman, sailor, or farmer ; 
and in New Zealand there were separate schools in which each 
trade was taught. 

The Polynesian knew the importance of giving all his atten- 
tion to the task in hand and of doing one thing at a time. While 
making a canoe or a stone carving or learning to recite the history 
of his tribe, the man withdrew from his family and friends and 
even refrained from eating food for many days at a time. 

Polynesians good workers. ‘There are some accounts of the 
surprising skill and quickness with which trained workers per- 
formed their tasks. In 1812 the natives of the Marquesas built 
for Captain David Porter two dwelling houses, a sail loft, 
a cooper shop, a place for the sick, a bake house, and a guard 
house. The work was performed in one day. More than 4,000 
natives united to assemble the materials and construct the 
buildings. Each man was master of the particular work he was 
doing, and there was keen competition among the groups to see 
which could build the most perfect house in the shortest time. 

Difficult work. Some work done by the Polynesians seems 
impossible without the aid of horses or machinery. In the 
platforms of temples and houses and in walls are stones weighing 
several tons. The stone images of Easter Island are twenty to 
seventy feet high. Some tall stone monuments were quarried 
and carried to their places, and heavy stone caps were placed on 
them after the monuments were erected. 

Strength and courage. Polynesian children were taught to 
be strong and fear nothing, and strength and courage shown in 
battles, in voyages, and in sports were qualities most admired in 
men. At times the display of strength resulted in cruelty. 

Hospitality and courtesy. But courtesy and hospitality were 
ideals of the whole race, and on some islands laws were made 


SOME POLYNESIAN CUSTOMS AND BELIEFS 43 


which compelled hospitality from the few who might otherwise 
not recognizeit. ‘‘ Look not with ungracious eye upon a traveler 
who passes your door. You must bid himenter. Your pig must 
be killed, your bowl must be greasy from the food that you offer 
him. Whosoever does not respect this order is to be taken to 
the public place and shamed; his sin shall never be hidden; with 
the chief shall lie the right to confiscate his lands in punishment.” 

What Polynesians believed. To a Polynesian religion was 
as much a part of his everyday life as were the stones with which 
he built his house platforms or the wood of his canoe, or as his 
eating and drinking. Religious thought and physical effort 
were parts of all activities. Birth, death, and work had a re- 
ligious as well as a physical meaning. To accomplish an under- 
taking it was as necessary to perform appropriate religious rites 
as it was to have the right kinds of tools. 

The things in nature were thought to have individual life. 
Land, sea, stones, stars, and other natural objects grew and 
changed and moved just as do trees and animals and men. ‘The 
Maori Rang, the heavens, was a thinking, living being, having 
its own peculiar form. In Tahiti Taa-roa, the creator, was 
thought to have human form. 

The Polynesian recognized the regularity of nature — day 
follows night, stars move across the heavens, seeds grow into 
plants, waves respond to the wind — and explained it by the 
belief that the forces of nature, each an independent living thing, 
worked in harmony with each other. 

Mana. Every human being, every god and spirit, every ani- 
mal and plant, every stone, every star, every hill and valley, 
differed from every other in its class, because each had a different 
amount and a different kind of mana. The power and dignity 
of a sacred chief was his mana, part of which he inherited from 
his godlike ancestors. The mana of the priest was shown by his 
knowledge of things to come and of how the people should act. 
He obtained his mana by study and by rites which brought him 


A4 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


close to powerful spirits. The mana of the orator, the poet, and 
the teacher, the fisherman, the canoe builder, the house builder, 
and the farmer was shown by his skill. The unjust ruler, the 
dishonest priest, the unskillful workman were said to have lost 
their mana through some ignoble action or perhaps never to have 
had mana. Some weapons and tools had mana. A canoe with- 
out mana could not be swift, and fishhooks without mana were 
not of much use. For the Maori some streams, mountains, and 
lakes had mana which made them beautiful places and enabled 
them to protect, comfort, and bring good luck to those who 
stayed among them. 

The Polynesians did not separate what we call natural from 
what we call supernatural. ‘To them everything in the world — 
gods, men, animals, heavenly bodies, islands, wind, rain, rocks, 
mountains, valleys, and sea—are related because they all 
descended generation after generation from a “ Sky Father ” 
and an “‘ Earth Mother.” 

Tapu. Polynesian religion recognized things and actions 
which were holy, sacred, and good, and things and actions which 
were unholy, common, or bad. To mark the difference and to 
see that these differences were accepted by the people, the system 
of tapu (otherwise taboo or tabu —in Hawaiian, kapu) was estab- 
lished. The chief was tapu because he represented the sacred 
god, and everything connected with worship was tapu. In some 
islands the chief was so sacred that to come within his shadow 
might mean death. Throughout Polynesia places of worship 
were tapu except for those who were specially set apart to act 
in the services. Religious services were tapu, and while some of 
them were being performed all work was forbidden. Fish caught 
was tapu until some had been offered to the gods who assisted in 
the successful catch. Some things were marked tapu merely for 
the personal benefit of the chief or priest. Evil spirits and 
unclean things were also tapu and must not be touched under 
pain of disaster and death. In general women were considered 


SOME POLYNESIAN CUSTOMS AND BELIEFS 45 


inferior to men and were forbidden by tapu to enjoy certain 
foods and certain pleasures which men might freely enjoy. 

The Chief. The central figure in Polynesian worship was the 
chief who combined the offices of leader and priest. The people 
thought of him as divinely born and therefore believed him to 
represent the gods from which he came and the people over 
whom he ruled. Through him the tribe might approach the 
gods, and through him the gods spoke to the tribe. Because 
of his close relations with the gods, this sacred chief was supposed 
to be able to prevent droughts, famine, failure of crops, and 
other disasters, and if these disasters came the chief was supposed 
to be careless or guilty. The chief therefore must be wise and 
strong and generous. He must take great care of himself, and 
his people must see that he lived safely and in comfort. From his 
birth he was treated as sacred. He had special food, special 
companions, and lived in a special place. 

The position of the sacred chief was not the same in all the 
Polynesian islands. In some he owned all the land and all the 
people. His person was so sacred that no one could touch his 
body or his clothes or come within his house without fear of 
death, and when he went out the people who saw him must cease 
work, remove their clothing, and remain bowed down until he 
had passed. In other islands the chief had much less religious 
power, and in some islands the chief was merely the leader, re- 
ligious rites being performed by priests. 

Souls lived after death. The Polynesians believed that the 
souls of men continued to live after the death of the body and 
had power to aid or injure the families to which they belonged. 
Departed spirits were thought to be still members of the family 
or tribe to which they belonged on earth. At some places in 
Polynesia the spirit of almost every person was represented by a 
relic which was sacred. Especially the bones of human beings 
were considered sacred and protected by a tapu to prevent Injury 
to them. They were concealed in caves, hidden away among 


46 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


rocks or in the dense jungles, or placed within inclosures which 
no one could enter. The burial places of tens of thousands of 
bodies are no longer known. The head, which was supposed to 
be the most sacred part of the body, was especially preserved and 
guarded. 

Places of worship. In all the Polynesian islands are places of 
worship, some of them protected by an inclosing wall. In them 
were houses for the priests and places for holding ceremonies. 
On the walls and within the inclosure were images, and somewhere 
near was a place for the bones of sacrifices. .In Hawaii these 
places of worship are known as /evaus. In them services were 
held for many purposes, such as preparations for war, thanks to 
the gods for a good harvest, and to overcome the sickness of 
a ruler. There were different prayers, different chants, and 
different sacrifices for each occasion. 

A higher god. The Polynesians believed in a god who was 
above all images and chiefs. Among the Maoris he was called 
Io and was considered so sacred that his name could be spoken 
only by priests and then only in the depths of the forest far away 
from men. 

Differences among Polynesians. Although the inhabitants 
of the different Polynesian islands have descended from people 
who belonged to more than one race, their customs and beliefs 
are much alike. They even have some ancestors in common. 
From the same revered hero, Olopana, the Maoris and the 
Hawaiians record twenty-seven generations. 

But just as in England, Japan, or the United States people in 
one part of the country speak differently, use different tools, and 
play different games, so in Polynesia the people in different islands 
differ from each other. Aloha in Hawaii, aroha in New Zealand, 
kaoha in the Marquesas, and alofa in Samoa are merely different 
spellings of the same word. In the Marquesas and in Hawaii 
the houses were rectangular; in Samoa and Tonga, they were 
oval. Only the Marquesans and the Maoris carved their house 


umesny doystg ul neley ev jo Jepoy] 





48 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


posts. Canoes in the Marquesas, New Zealand, and Hawaii 
were dug out of logs; in Tahiti, Samoa, and Tonga they were 
built of planks. The shape of adzes, poi pounders, and stone 
images differs in different islands. Wooden bowls with legs, 
which are common in Tahiti, Samoa, and Tonga, are rare in 
Hawaii and are not found in the Marquesas. In war, spears, 
clubs, and slings were used in 
all Polynesia, but the bow 
and arrow was an important 
weapon only in Tonga. The 
shell trumpet, the nose flute, 
and some kind of drum were 
used nearly everywhere; but 
the wooden trumpet was played 
only in New Zealand and in the 
Marquesas, and the musical 
bow was an important instru- 
ment only in Hawaii and the 
Marquesas. All Polynesians 
engaged in boxing, wrestling, 
: 3 and dart throwing, and all ex- 
ee ae ee EL CCDL wat eee OMe omens liscc mes Tt 

Sanka aoa Be Marquesas’ « boardsan Buunkite flying was 
mostly a game for Maori 

children, and bowling with ulumaika stones and coasting down 
hill were games for Hawaiians. All Polynesians except the 
Maoris made tapa, but the tools for making it and the figures 
stamped or painted on it were different. Feathers were used for 
dress or ornaments in all islands, but in different ways, and 
feather cloaks were made only in New Zealand and Hawaii. 
All Polynesians carved in wood, but little attention was paid 
to this art except in the Marquesas and New Zealand; the 
method of representing the human figure in carving, painting, 
and in petroglyphs was different. The Marquesans and the 





SOME POLYNESIAN CUSTOMS AND BELIEFS 49 


Maoris were cannibals, and they hunted heads of enemies 
and preserved them as decorations; the Tahitians, Samoans, 
and Tongans hunted heads but did not keep them. The 
Hawaiians were not cannibals and did not hunt heads. 
Burial customs were different in each island group. In the 
Marquesas and New Zealand were regular schools for the 
training of young people. In other parts of Polynesia educa- 
tion was not organized. 

Early history. Hawaii was a group of islands covered with 
vegetation and surrounded by coral reefs for thousands of years 
before any man came to its shores, and the islands may have 
been in existence before any men were on earth. It would be 
interesting to know the name of the man who first saw Mauna 
Loa, Haleakala, the Nuuanu Pali, or Waimea Canyon, and to 
know how he came to the islands and the reason for his coming. 
But the date of discovery, the name of the discoverer, and the 
place from which he came will never be known. 

The first Hawaiians. According to some traditions, the first 
people to settle in Hawaii were a small group of Polynesians — 
probably the occupants of one canoe — who reached the islands 
about 500 A.D. It may be that these people and their descend- 
ants were the only inhabitants of Hawaii for more than six 
hundred years. Then more immigrants came, and during the 
years between 1100 A.D. and 1250 A.D. new settlers arrived from 
the Marquesas, from Tahiti, and from Samoa. 

According to Hawaiian tradition the first of these new settlers 
was Paao, who arrived at Puna from Samoa or from Tahiti about 
the year 1125 with a company of thirty-eight, including his 
relatives and attendants. The fact that his expedition was 
equipped with well-constructed boats, a store of food, and was 
accompanied by a navigator, a sailing master, and an astronomer 
indicates a definite intention to find a place for settlement. But 
there is no evidence that Paao knew of the existence of Hawaii. 
It is probable that he foundit by chance. There are no traditions 


50 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


of immigrations to Hawaii during the period 1250 to 1778, the 
date of the rediscovery by Captain James Cook. 

Thus for more than 500 years the inhabitants of Hawaii may 
have been isolated from the other peoples in the Pacific. During 
this time of about twenty generations the Hawaiians lived much 
like other members of their race, but because they were not in 
contact with their relatives living on distant islands they came 
to have customs and beliefs, kinds of governments, songs, and 
stories somewhat different from those in other parts of Polynesia. 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


1. Compare a tool chest to-day with the Polynesian canoe maker’s 
tool chest. What is the greatest difference? 

2. All houses to-day have floors, roofs, and walls. What is the 
essential feature of the Polynesian house? 

3. Give evidence from this chapter to show: a. That the Polyne- 
sians were skilled craftsmen; 0. that the Polynesians were skilled 
gardeners; c. that the Polynesians loved beauty; d. that the Polyne- 
sians admired eloquence; e. that the Polynesians appreciated skilled 
leadership. 

4. What sports with which you are familiar were favorites of the 
Polynesians ? 

5. Polynesians were taught to show: a. Strength; 6b. Courage; 
c. Hospitality. Which do you consider the best trait? Why? 

6. Polynesian chiefs were fapu or sacred. Compare our attitude 
toward our leaders in government to-day with the Polynesian attitude 
toward their leaders. Name the good points of each attitude; the 
bad points of each. Which attitude do you prefer? Why? 

7. The Hawaiians say that was the first new settler to come 
to Hawaii. He came about the year After his coming, Hawaii 
was isolated from the rest of the world for about years. (Write 
Exercise 7 in your notebook, filling in the blanks) 

8. Compare your own with the Polynesian religion as to: a. the 
sacredness or holiness of certain acts, places, and things; 0. the 
position of women; c. the position of the chief or ruler; d. the soul 
and the disposal of the dead; e. places and ceremonies of worship ; 
f. gods and a supreme god. 











SOME POLYNESIAN CUSTOMS AND BELIEFS 51 


For FURTHER READING 


Mato, Davin. — Hawaiian Antiquities. 

BERNICE P. BrsHop Museum. — Memozrs of, Vol. I, No. 1, ‘‘ Hawaiian 
Feather Work,” by W. T. BricHam; No. 4, “Stone Implements 
and Stone Work of the Ancient Hawaiians,” by W. T. BricHAm ; 
Vol. II, No. 1, ‘“‘“Mat and Basket Weaving of the Ancient 
Hawaiians,’ by W. T. BricHam, and ‘‘Hawaiian Nets and 
Netting,” by J. F. G. StoKEs; No. 3, ‘The Ancient Hawaiian 
House,” by W. T. BricHamM; Vol. III, ‘‘Ka Hana Kapa: the 
Making of Bark Cloth in Hawaii,” by W. T. BricHam; Vols. 
IV, V, VI, ‘‘ Fornander Collection of Hawaiian Antiquities and 
Folk-lore.”’ 

EMERSON, Dr. N. B.— Eleventh Annual Report of the Hawaiian 
Historical Society, ““The Poetry of Hawaii.” 


IV 


CAPTAIN COOK AND THE DISCOVERY OF THE 
HAWAIIAN ISLANDS 


Hawaiian islands unknown. Until after the middle of the 
eighteenth century the Hawaiian islands remained unknown to 
the civilized world of Europe, America, and Asia. There are 
some reasons for supposing that a few Spanish or Dutch sailors 
may have landed on Hawaii at some time in the sixteenth century 
or about the beginning of the seventeenth century, but if such 
a landing took place it did not result in bringing the islands to the 
knowledge of the outside world 

Search for northwest passage. In fact very little was then 
known about the geography of the Pacific Ocean and the lands 
bordering it and of the islands which it contained. There were 
many strange ideas held by geographers and scientists. Among 
these ideas was a belief that there was a strait through the 
northern part of America, by which it would be possible to sail 
from Europe to Japan, China, and India, without making the 
long voyage around Africa or South America. It was considered 
very important to find this strait and so a great many ex- 
peditions were sent out to look for it. England took the great- 
est interest in this search because she would profit most from 
the discovery of a shorter route from northern Europe to Asia. 
Among the men who headed these expeditions were Frobisher, 
Davis, Hudson, and Baffin; their names are now to be found 
on the map of the northern coasts of America. These men tried 
to find the entrance to this strait on the Atlantic Ocean side. 
Finally it was decided to send an expedition into the Pacific Ocean 

52 


CAPTAIN COOK AND HAWAIIAN ISLANDS 53 


to look for the strait from that side. Captain James Cook was 
selected to head this expedition. 

Captain James Cook. James Cook was born in 1728 of humble 
parents. At an early age he was apprenticed to a shipping firm 
on the east coast of 
England and entered 
upon the career of a 
sailor. Young Cook 
was industrious and 
eager to learn. See- 
ing this, his employer © 
gave him opportunity be 
to study and acquire 
experience in naviga- 
tion. He soon rose to 
the rank of mate in 
the merchant service, 
Ute LETS gm TnaeT 7.015% 
volunteered as an 
ordinary seaman in 
thes Britishenavy: 
Almost immediately 
he was promoted to 
master’s mate and 
during the next few years sailed in different ships, serving in 
America in the French and Indian War. From 1763 to 1767 he 
was engaged in surveying the coast of Newfoundland, and in the 
following year was placed in command of an expedition whose 
purpose was to go to Tahiti to observe the transit of the planet 
Venus across the face of the sun and to carry on explorations 
in the South Pacific. He thus began a series of explorations in 
the Pacific Ocean and the southern hemisphere, extending over a 
period of ten years and giving him a distinguished place in the 
history of maritime discoveries. 






Captain James Cook 


54 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


The Hawaiian Islands discovered. On his third voyage 
Cook’s instructions were to go first to the Society Islands and 
to sail thence to the coast of America at about 45 degrees north 
latitude, from which point he was to skirt the coast north- 
ward in search of the supposed strait. In accordance with 
these instructions the ships under his command, the Kesolu- 
tion and the Discovery, sailed north early in December, 1777, 
from Borabora in the Society Islands. At daybreak on the 
morning of January 18, 1778, an island was sighted on the 
northeast side of the ships and a little later another island came 
into view to the west. of that first seen. These islands were 
Oahu and Kauai. The next day as the ships approached the 
coast of Kauai a number of canoes came out to meet them. 
~ Captain Cook wrote: 

‘They had from three to six men each; and, on their ap- 
proach, we were agreeably surprised to find that they spoke the 
language of Otaheite and of the other islands we had lately 
visited. It required but very little address to get them to come 
alongside; but no entreaties could prevail upon any of them 
to come on board. I tied some brass medals to a rope and gave 
them to those in one of the canoes, who, in return, tied some 
small mackerel to the rope, as an equivalent. This was repeated ; 
and some small nails, or bits of iron, which they valued more 
than any other article, were given them. For these they ex- 
changed more fish and a sweet potato, a sure sign that they had 
some notion of bartering or, at least, of returning one present for 
another.” 

Going slowly around the island, the ships came to anchor in 
the bay of Waimea, where, during the next few days, the natives 
had an opportunity to observe more closely their strange visitors 
from across the sea. Captain Cook in his account of the voyage 
speaks about the great astonishment of the natives and their 
interest in iron. ‘These two points are also clearly shown in the 
Hawaiian account of this event: 


CAPTAIN COOK AND HAWAIIAN ISLANDS 55 


‘Tt is at Waimea, on Kauai, that Lono first arrived. ... He 
arrived in the night at Waimea, and when daylight came the 
natives ashore perceived this wonderful thing that had arrived, 
and they expressed their astonishment with great exclamations. 

“One said to another, ‘What is that great thing with 
branches?’ Others said, ‘ It is a forest that has slid down into 
the sea,’ and the gabble and noise was great. Then the chiefs 
ordered some natives to go in a canoe and observe and examine 
well that wonderful thing. They went, and when they came to 
the ship they saw the iron that was attached to the outside of the 
ship, and they were greatly rejoiced at the quantity of iron.” 

The English ships remained at Kauai and Nuhau until Feb- 
ruary 2, engaged in filling up their water barrels and in trading 
with the natives, buying for trinkets and bits of iron large quanti- 
ties of hogs, yams, and other food stuffs. To the entire group 
of islands Cook gave the name Sandwich Islands, in honor of 
his friend and patron the Earl of Sandwich. Finally he sailed 
away to the northwest coast of America without having seen the 
three large islands to the southeast. 

Cook’s second visit. Returning in November from the north 
with the idea of wintering in the islands, Cook first sighted Maui. 
The natives of that island manifested the same willingness to 
trade that had been shown by those of Kauai and Niihau. In- 
deed the Englishmen found evidence that reports of their previous 
visit had been spread throughout the entire group. Off the coast 
of Maui the ships were visited by Kalaniopuu, king of the island 
of Hawaii, and a group of his followers, among them being 
Kamehameha, who remained on board all night. Nearly two 
months were spent in sailing along the coasts of Maui and 
Hawaii, without landing at any point, though a more or less 
continuous traffic was carried on for provisions. In the middle of 
January, 1779, the two ships sailed around the south of Hawaii 
and on the seventeenth day of that month came to anchor in 
Kealakekua Bay, where they were at once surrounded by a 


56 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


multitude of canoes. ‘‘ Besides those who had come off to us in 
canoes, all the shore of the bay was covered with spectators, and 
many hundreds were swimming round the ships like shoals of 
fishue 

Cook worshiped as a god. The ships were immediately 
visited by several chiefs, among them a priest, who paid their 
respects to Captain Cook in a formal manner. On going ashore 
he was treated with religious veneration by chiefs and common 
people alike, being taken to the feiau of Hikiau where he was 
made the center of an elaborate ceremony, by which the natives 
meant to acknowledge him as an akua. ‘There can be no doubt 
that at first the Hawaiians looked upon Cook as the incarnation 


“of their god Lono, though this fact does not seem to have been 


clearly understood by the Englishmen. 

The next day astronomical instruments were landed from the 
ships and set up in a sweet potato patch which was tapued for 
them by the priests. Part of the crew went ashore to fill the 
water barrels and others were put to work repairing the ships. 
The Hawaiians looked at all of these operations with much 
interest, helping the crew at times, frequently visiting the ships, 
and every day sending on board large quantities of hogs and 
vegetables. On the twenty-fifth of January King Kalaniopuu 
arrived from Maui and greeted Captain Cook in a truly royal 
style, presenting him with a magnificent gift of a feather cloak 
and helmet. Among the entertainments provided for the 
strangers were boxing and wrestling matches; and in return the 
natives were allowed to witness a display of fireworks. 

Unpleasant incidents. During this time the relations be- 
tween the Englishmen and the Hawaiians were on the whole very 
friendly, this being especially true in the case of King Kalaniopuu 
and Captain Cook. Lieutenant King, who had charge of the 
sailors on shore, also became a great favorite with the natives. 
Nevertheless, a number of unpleasant incidents occurred, growing 
in part out of some rather high-handed actions of the strangers, 


yoo) ureydeg 0} sjussoid Bursuriq nndorurey sur 






58 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


in part out of the natural tendency of some of the natives to take 
whatever suited their fancy, but more from the misunderstandings 
due to the imperfect knowledge each side had of the language, cus- 
toms, and habits of the other. It is also likely that some of the 
Hawaiians came to doubt that Captain Cook was a god. But 
the efforts of the leaders on both sides prevented any serious 
trouble, and on February 4 the two ships took their departure, 
after Captain Cook and Lieutenant King had received from King 
Kalaniopuu gifts which astonished them on account of their value 
and magnitude. 

Death of Captain Cook. A week later the ee returned to 
Kealakekua, a serious defect having been discovered in one of 
themasts which made it necessary to take it on shore for repair. 
At this time the ships were not received quite as cordially as 
before and serious quarrels very soon broke out. Finally on the 
night of February 13 a boat was taken from the Discovery by the 
natives, removed to another part of the bay, and broken to pieces 
for the nails which it contained. The next morning Captain 
Cook, considering this a serious matter, took determined meas- 
ures for the recovery of the boat. He first put a blockade on 
the bay and then went ashore to the village of Kaawaloa for the 
purpose of persuading or compelling the king to go aboard the 
Resolution, meaning to keep him there until the boat was re- 
turned or satisfactory reparation made forit. This was a method 
which he had already used in the South Pacific and up to this 
time it had never failed to accomplish its purpose. At first it 
seemed that it would succeed in this case also, but Kalaniopuu’s 
wife and several chiefs tried to keep the king on shore and this 
caused him to hesitate. 

A quarrel quickly developed between the Englishmen and 
the natives, which soon led to blows. At about the same time a 
chief entering the further side of the bay without knowing about 
the blockade was killed by a shot from one of the boats. News 
of this came swiftly to the place where Cook was standing, sur- 


CAPTAIN COOK AND HAWAIIAN ISLANDS 59 


rounded by natives. One of the chiefs “‘ seized Captain Cook 
with a strong hand, designing merely to hold him, and not to 
take his life; for he supposed him to be a god, and that he could 
not die. Captain Cook struggled to free himself from the grasp, 
and as he was about to fall uttered a groan. The people 
immediately exclaimed, ‘He groans —he is not a god,’ and 
instantly slew him.”’ 

Besides Captain Cook four marines and about a score of 
natives were killed in this unfortunate affray. The bodies 
of the five Englishmen were immediately carried off by the 
natives and treated according to the Hawaiian custom. The 
bones of Captain Cook were divided among the high chiefs and 
priests. 

In spite of the tragedy which had occurred, the policy of 
Captain Clerke, who succeeded to the command of the ships, was 
to bring about a reconciliation with the natives and to recover 
the bodies of Captain Cook and the marines who had been 
killed. In these efforts he was fairly successful, though the 
English sailors were eager for revenge, which made it hard to 
keep them under control. After the first burst of anger had 
cooled, the Hawaiians, with few exceptions, seem to have sin- 
cerely regretted their own part in the tragedy and did what they 
could to restore the former friendly relations. Most of the 
bones of Captain Cook were recovered and these were buried 
beneath the waters of the bay on Sunday, February 21, with an 
impressive funeral service, a tapu being placed on the bay for 
this occasion by the Hawaiians. 

The following day final preparations for departure were made 
and that evening the ships sailed out of the bay. ‘‘ The natives 
were collected on the shore in great numbers; and, as we passed 
along, received our last farewells with every mark of affection 
and good will.” After brief stops at Oahu and Kauai the English 
ships continued their course toward the north in order to com- 
plete their explorations in that region. 


60 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


You remember from your American history that the European 
countries, especially England and Spain, were interested in exploring 
the Pacific. Magellan and Drake had early entered and sailed across 
that ocean. Both countries by the end of the 18th century had 
possessions there. England by that time had added India to her 
possessions. ‘This was before the time of the steamship, and ocean 
travel meant long months spent on a sailing vessel. If there was any 
way in which England could save time in reaching her colonial pos- 
sessions, she would have been glad to know it. 


t. What is the connection between Captain Cook’s voyages and the 
facts stated above? 

2. If you had been sailing from the Philippines across the Pacific 
for ten months, why would you have been glad to see land on the 
horizon on coming on deck early one morning? Make a list of all the 
reasons you can in your notebook. 

3. If you had been a Hawaiian and awoke one morning to find 
Captain Cook’s ship at anchor in the bay, how would you have felt ? 
If you had been a chief, what would you have done? Why? If you 
had been a poor commoner who had a small taro patch, what would 
you have thought? What would you have done? Why? 

4. Show how each of the following made it impossible for the 
English and Hawaiians to understand each other’s actions and led up 
to the events which caused Captain Cook’s death : 

a. Each group spoke a different language. | 

b. The Hawaiians desired, above all things, to possess iron. 

c. The English looked on stealing as a crime which deserved 
capital punishment. 

d. The Hawaiians had never seen so large a ship or men who 
looked like the English. 

e. The English sailors were rough and ignorant men. 

f. The Hawaiians did not feel that it was wrong to take from 
some one else a thing that they wanted. 

g. The English did not realize that the Hawaiians thought 
Cook was a god. 

5. Inthe time of Cook, a northwest passage would have given to the 
country which controlled it great power. Why? ‘To-day the large 
countries of the world are hunting for land in which there is oil. Can 


CAPTAIN COOK AND HAWAIIAN ISLANDS OI 


you explain why? Can you imagine what troubles would arise if oil 
was found in a rather small unprotected country ? 


For FURTHER READING 


BESANT, W. — Life of Captain Cook. 

FORNANDER, A.— The Polynesian Race, Vol. II, pages 158-200. 
(Cook’s visit to Hawaii, based largely on the Hawaiian accounts.) 

Krepis, A. — Life and Voyages of Captain James Cook. 

Kitson, A. — Captain James Cook the Circumnavigator. 


V 


THE RISE OF KAMEHAMEHA 


A transition period. At the time of Captain Cook’s visits 
the Hawaiian islands were divided into four kingdoms, each with 
its own moi or sovereign. Of these sovereigns the most important 
were Kalaniopuu of Hawaii and Kahekili of Maui. The his- 
tory of the next quarter century consists largely of the story of 
the wars and negotiations by which the entire group, with the 
exception of Kauai, was united into one kingdom under the 
control of Kamehameha of Hawaii, the nephew of Kalaniopuu. 
This period was marked also by the coming of foreigners to the 
islands and the beginning of relations with citizens of various 
countries of Europe and America. | 

Importance of Kamehameha. The life of Kamehameha 
spans the transition from old to new Hawaii, its beginning resting 
in the ancient epoch and its close firmly established in the modern 
age. From his career one looks dimly back into the early history 
of the Hawaiian race and forward into the clear light of Hawaii’s 
modern history. Kamehameha, partly by reason of this strategic 
position but more because of his own strength and wisdom, is the 
great hero of the Hawaiian people. He created the Hawaiian 
Kingdom of modern times, and the strong impression which his 
personality made upon the minds of the people of Europe and 
America was an important influence toward keeping that kingdom 
independent. 

Birth and early life. On a wild night in the stormy winter 
season — such a night as was fit to be the birth-time of a king — 
Kamehameha was born in Kohala, Hawaii. The year is not 

62 


THE RISE OF KAMEHAMEHA 63 


known certainly, but it was about 1737. His father was of royal 
lineage and his mother of high chiefly rank. At birth he was 
taken away from his mother and kept for five years in seclusion. 
He was then returned to the court of the king, Alapainui, where 
he was brought up in a manner suited to his rank. Not much 
is known of his youth, but it is certain that his training was such 
as to develop warlike and princely accomplishments. He was 
instructed in the arts of war by Kekuhaupio, one of the most 
famous warriors of that time. The king, Alapainui, was fre- 
quently at war and it is quite probable that the young prince had 
his first taste of battle at a very early age. 

First glimpses of Kamehameha. Kamehameha continued to 
live at the court of the king during the lifetime of Alapainui, and 
after that he is found in the following of his uncle, Kalaniopuu, 
who succeeded to the sovereignty of the island of Hawaii about 
1755. Ten years later Kahekili became moi of the neighboring 
island of Maui. Kalaniopuu and Kahekili were both ambitious 
and warlike, and it is in one of the wars between them that we 
get the first clear glimpse of Kamehameha as a warrior. The 
legends relate that in a battle on Maui about the year 1775 
Kamehameha by his strength and skill and courage saved his 
old teacher from almost certain death. 

A few years later came the visits of Captain Cook, at which 
time Kamehameha spent many hours on the English ships. He 
was then forty years of age, and Captain King, who saw him on 
several occasions, speaks.of him as possessing “‘ the most savage 
face ’’ he had ever beheld. 

Guardian of the war god. A year or two after the death of 
Captain Cook, King Kalaniopuu, having grown old and feeble, 
called a council at Waipio, at which, in the presence of his chiefs, 
he proclaimed his son Kiwalao his successor in the government 
of the kingdom, and at the same time gave to Kamehameha 
the guardianship of the war god, Kukailimoku. Shortly after 
this an incident occurred which seemed to foreshadow a civil 


64 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


war between these two princes. A rebellious chief of Puna had 
been captured and was about to be sacrificed at the heiau. It 





Bishop Museum Photograph. 
Kukailimoku 


was supposed that 
Kiwalao, as the repre- 
sentative of the king, 
would perform the 
ceremony, but while 
he was making the 
preliminary offering of 
the pigs and fruit, 
Kamehameha _ seized 
the captive chief and 
offered him up at the 
same time. Various 
reasons are given as 
a justification for this 
action,’ but at the 
moment it created so 
great a sensation that 
Kalaniopuu advised 
Kamehameha to leave 
the court for a time, 
but to retain the care 
of the war god. Ka- 
mehameha therefore 
took his wife, his 
brother, and the god 
Kukailimoku and re- 
tired to his own lands 


in Kohala, where he remained quietly until after the death of 


Kalaniopuu. 


Battle of Mokuohai. In the early part of 1782 Kalaniopuu 
died and in due course of time his body was taken for burial to 
the Hale-o-Keawe in South Kona. To this place came the 


THE RISE OF KAMEHAMEHA 65 


chiefs from all parts of the island to do honor to the dead 
king and to be present at the customary distribution of land 
by the new moi, Kiwalao. The latter, whose home was in 
Kau, seems to have been under the influence of his energetic 
uncle, Keawemauhili, the principal chief of the Hilo district. 
Because of this the chie’s of Kona feared that they would be 
unfairly treated in the distribution of land and five of them 
decided to act together to protect their interests and persuaded 
Kamehameha to become their leader. These five chiefs were 
Kekuhaupio (Kamehameha’s teacher in the art of war), Kee- 
aumoku, Kameeiamoku, Kamanawa, and Keaweaheulu. From 
this time on these chiefs were the staunch supporters of Kame- 
hameha in all his wars. | 

Matters turned out as they had feared, but the Kona chiefs 
remained quiet until Keoua, the brother of Kiwalao, made a 
wanton attack on some of Kamehameha’s people. ‘This soon led 
to a battle between the forces of Kiwalao and those of Kame- 
hameha, in which Kamehameha was victorious. Kiwalao was 
slain and his uncle Keawemauhili was taken prisoner but almost 
immediately escaped and returned to Hilo. 

This battle of Mokuohai, as it is called, marks an important 
step in the rise of Kamehameha. As a result of it the island of 
Hawaii was divided into three parts: the districts of Kona, 
Kohala, and Hamakua being under the control of Kamehameha ; 
Kau under the control of Keoua, the brother of Kiwalao; and 
Hilo and Puna under the control of Keawemauhili. 

Struggle for supremacy. During the greater part of the next 
ten years Kamehameha was engaged in a hard struggle to keep 
what he had already won and to gain control of the rest of the 
island of Hawaii and of the other islands of the group. His 
principal opponents were Keoua and Keawemauhili on the south 
and east and Kahekili, the king of Maui, on the northwest. 
These were able leaders and they were victorious almost as often 
as Kamehameha. 


66 A PHISTORY, OF HAWAII 


Mamalahoe Kanawai. At the. beginning of this period 
Kamehameha made an attack on the Hilo district, in which he 
was severely beaten by Keawemauhili. On his return northward 
Kamehameha stopped at Laupahoehoe to rest and while there 
started out one day in his war canoe to make a raid on the Puna 
coast. As the canoe sped southward Kamehameha saw some 
fishermen on the beach and leaped ashore alone to attack them. 
The fishermen fled and as Kamehameha pursued them his foot 
slipped into a crevice of the lava and he was held fast. Seeing 
this, one of the fishermen returned and struck him on the head 
with his paddle so that the paddle was broken to pieces. The 
fishermen then made their escape and Kamehameha pulled his 
foot loose and returned to the canoe. 

Later when the fishermen were caught and brought before 
him, Kamehameha not only spared their lives but gave them each 
some land, saying that he himself had been at fault in attacking 
the innocent. And in after years he gave the name Mamalahoe 
Kanawai (the Law of the Splintered Paddle) to one of his decrees : 
“Let the aged, men and women, and little children lie down in 
safety in the road.” 

Aid from foreigners. It was during this period that the 
islands began to be visited by foreign trading ships. From these 
ships the various chiefs bought guns and ammunition and other 
things that would be of help to them in their wars. They also 
obtained the services of several foreigners who left the ships to 
live on the islands. On account of the favorable situation of his 
territory Kamehameha was able to secure a greater amount of 
assistance in this way than most of the other chiefs, which gave 
him a great advantage over them. 

Destruction of part of Keoua’s army. After some years 
Kamehameha and Keawemauhili became reconciled and the 
latter sent a number of soldiers to aid Kamehameha in a campaign 
against Maui and Oahu. This fact so angered Keoua that he 
made an attack upon the Hilo district, and Keawemauhili was 


THE RISE OF KAMEHAMEHA 67 


defeated and killed. Keoua then invaded Kamehameha’s 
territory and ravaged the districts of Waipio and Waimea. 
Kamehameha immediately returned to Hawaii and drove the 
invader out of his part of the island. Keoua made his way back 





Photograph by K. Maehara, Hilo, Hawait. 
Explosive eruption of Kilauea in 1924 


It was an eruption like this that destroyed part of Keoua’s army in 1790. There 
have been only two such eruptions of Kilauea in historic times, in 1790 and 1924. The 
picture shows the smoke, fumes, and ashes being carried off to the southward by the 
wind, just as they were in 1790. 


to his home in Kau. But while his army was passing Kilauea 
an eruption occurred and about one third of the soldiers, together 
with their wives and children, were killed by the ashes and fumes 
from the volcano (1790). Many people looked upon this occur- 
rence as proof that the goddess Pele was on the side of Kame- 
hameha. 


68 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


Building of the Puukohola Heiau. But the struggle still went 
on and Keoua seemed to be as strong as ever. He had added to 
his former possessions those of Keawemauhili and as a result the 
island of Hawaii was almost equally divided between him and 
Kamehameha. About this time Kamehameha sent a messenger 
to find out from a famous kahuna, or soothsayer, of Kauai what 
he ought to do to win the supremacy of Hawaii. The reply 
was that he must build a large heiau for his god at Puukohola, 
Kawaihae. To this work Kamehameha now turned his attention. 
‘“‘ Chiefs of the highest degree and common natives worked side 
by side, and Kamehameha himself set the example of carrying 
stones to the building. “Fhere was but one exception known, and 
that was Kamehameha’s younger and favorite brother Keliimai- 
kai.’ He was not allowed to work on the heiau because it was 
necessary that there should be at least one tapu chief uncon- 
taminated by menial labor in order that the religious rites might 
be properly carried on. 

Death of Keoua. When the heiau at Puukohola had been 
completed, two of Kamehameha’s principal supporters, Kea- 
weaheulu and Kamanawa, betook themselves to the home of 
Keoua in Kau. They were received in a manner befitting their 
rank, though some of Keoua’s followers advised that they be 
killed. To Keoua they said that they had come to induce him 
to go to Kona to be united and reconciled with Kamehameha. 
“Let the war between you two come to an end.’ Keoua’s 
answer was, “‘ J am agreed; let us go to Kona.” 

The great double canoes were made ready and the journey 
to Kawaihae was begun. Several stops were made along the 
way. At the last of these Keoua bathed and prepared himself 
for whatever was to come. It seems that he must have had a 
premonition of the fate awaiting him. 

As they approached the shore at Kawaihae, Keeaumoku came 
to meet them with a number of armed men. Keoua saw Kame- 
hameha some distance away and called out to him, ‘‘ Here I am.”’ 


THE RISE OF KAMEHAMEHA 69 


Kamehameha replied, “‘ Rise and come here, that we may know 
each other.” As Keoua was about to step ashore Keeaumoku 
struck him with a spear. The wounded man struggled for a 
moment and then died. All of his immediate companions were 
likewise killed and then Kamehameha put an end to the slaughter. 
The slain men were offered as a sacrifice on the altar of the new 
heiau. 

The death of Keoua occurred in the summer of 1791. His 
possessions immediately fell into the control of Kamehameha, who 
thus became the undisputed moi of the whole island of Hawaii. 
Another long step had been taken toward the control of the whole 


group. 
QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


Copy the following in your notebook, filling in the blanks: 


When Kamehameha was born, the Hawaiian islands were divided 
into —— kingdoms. ‘Two of the great chiefs were of Hawaii and 
of Maui. When Kamehameha died, the Hawaiian islands were 
into When Kamehameha was born, the white man 
to the islands. When he died, many foreigners 
Kamehameha’s life is a bridge between the —— and the 
Kamehameha was years old when Captain Cook came. Kame- 
hameha became chief of all Hawaii through 

What does Mamalahoe Kanawai mean? What does this law say? 
Why was the law given thisname? If the story of the naming of this 
law is true, what does it tell you about Kamehameha’s character ? 


























oo 














VI 


FUR TRADERS AND EXPLORERS 


The northwest fur trade. One of the most important results 
of the last voyage of Captain Cook was the accidental discovery 
that a great deal of money could be made out of the fur trade 
between China and the northwest coast of America. As soon as 
this fact became generally known, traders of all the leading 
maritime nations flocked into the Pacific Ocean to engage in this 
trade. These nations became greatly interested in the western 
coast of America. Russia took possession of Alaska, and English 
and Spanish expeditions were sent out to explore the coast and 
to make settlements at strategic points. War nearly resulted 
from this rivalry. American and French trading vessels as well as 
those of England and Russia visited all parts of the coast from 
Alaska to California, buying furs which were sold in China at 
an enormous profit. A large number of these trading and ex- 
ploring ships visited Hawaii on their way across the Pacific. 

Trading ships at the Hawaiian islands. It was therefore the 
trade in furs that first made the Hawaiian islands well known and 
gave them a place of importance in the commercial world. The 
islands were so situated that they were a convenient stopping 
place for ships going to and from the coast of America, and their 
products and mild climate made them an ideal place in which 
to rest and to get needed supplies. Frequently ships came here 
to spend the winter. An Englishman, who visited the islands 
in 1792, wrote as follows: ‘‘ What a happy discovery these 
Islands were! What would the American fur trade be, without 
these to winter at and get every refreshment? A vessel going on 

7O 


FUR TRADERS AND EXPLORERS 7p 


that trade will need only sufficient provisions to carry her to 
these Islands, where there is plenty of pork and salt to cure it, 
and yams as a substitute for bread.” 

Besides hogs and yams the traders bought many other articles, 
such as sugar cane, coconuts, taro, plantains, melons, salt, wood 
and water, calabashes, mats, feather capes and helmets, and other 
natural and manufactured products. In exchange for these 
things the traders supplied the islanders with nails, knives, and 
other objects made of iron, which the natives were very anxious 
to get because no metals were obtainable in the islands. Utensils 
of various kinds, cloth, and ship stores were also in demand. 

As time went by the Hawaiians came to know the value of 
different articles and refused to sell their provisions for such 
trifles as they were at first glad to receive. A trader who visited 
the islands in 1798 gives the following statement of a bargain 
he made with Kamehameha: “ We agreed [to purchase], and 
paid for at the same time, forty-five large hogs, and as much 
sugar cane and vegetables as would fill our quarter deck square 
with the binnacle and as high as the quarter rails. We paid a 
barrel of flour for twelve hogs, a barrel of pitch for ten hogs, and 
a large pitch kettle for eleven hogs; the balance we paid in 
canvas, rice, and blocks and some rigging.” The captain of a 
Russian ship which visited Hawaii in June, 1804, wrote that 
“everything at present is dear, on account of the many Ameri- 
can ships, which, in navigating these seas, always touch at the 
Sandwich Islands for refreshments.” ‘This captain stated also 
that in the course of the preceding twelve months the bay of 
Kealakekua had been visited by no less than eighteen different 
vessels. 

When the Hawaiian chiefs noticed the effectiveness of the 
traders’ firearms, they were very eager to obtain a supply of 
these weapons, and many of the traders sold them muskets, 
cannons, and ammunition, thus encouraging the chiefs to con- 
tinue their destructive interinsular wars. 


72 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


From time to time various white men, officers and sailors, 
left the ships and took up their residence on the islands. Most 
of these men entered the service of the different chiefs, advising 
them in their relations with foreigners and helping them in their 
local affairs. Many of these white men were not of good charac- 
ter and had a bad influence over the natives, but some of them 
proved to be true friends of the Hawaiians. 

Meares and Kaiana. Among the first of the fur traders to 
visit the Hawaiian islands was an Englishman named John 
Meares, who arrived in the fall of 1787 and remained for a month. 
Upon his departure for China, Captain Meares took with him the 
chief, Kaiana, who expressed-a desire to see the outside world. 
Kaiana was a large, powerful, and fine looking man and at Canton 
received much attention and was given many things which it 
was thought would be useful to him in his own country. After 
about three months Meares set out once more for the coast of 
America, taking with him Kaiana and three other Hawaiians 
who had been carried to China in trading vessels. On this 
voyage Kaiana visited the American coast from Alaska to Van- 
couver Island and finally returned to his native country in 
December, 1788. He then joined Kamehameha and was a 
prominent chief for several years. 

Besides Kaiana many other Hawaiians were taken on trading 
ships to China, to the American coast, and even to England and 
the United States. It was soon found that Hawaiians made 
good sailors and many of them were hired by the various ship 
masters. 

First American ships. In the winter of 1789-090 the first 
American ships visited the islands. There were four of these 
ships. The earliest was the Columbia, commanded by Captain 
Robert Gray, the first American ship to circumnavigate the 
globe. Another. was the Lady Washington, commanded by 
Captain John Kendrick. This ship visited the islands several 
times and Kendrick became well acquainted with the Hawaiian 


FUR TRADERS AND EXPLORERS 73 


chiefs, to whom he sold guns and ammunition. The other two 
American ships were the Eleanora and the Fair American. 

The Eleanora and the Fair American. ‘These vessels were com- 
manded by Captain Simon Metcalfe and his son, a youth of about 
eighteen years. They had been trading for furs on the American 
coast and at the end of the season the Eleanora sailed to the 





The Columbia and the Lady Washington anchored in the river near Canton, 
China 


Hawaiian islands to spend the winter. After remaining for some 
time at the island of Hawaii, Captain Metcalfe went over to 
Maui about the first of February, 1790. While he was there 
some of the natives one night took a small boat from the ship and 
killed a sailor who was sleeping in it. An attempt was also 
made to sink the vessel by stripping off her copper bottom. As 
a punishment Captain Metcalfe fired on the natives who were 
on shore and burned their village. A few days later a chief came 
on board the Eleanora and offered, for a reward, to return both 
the sailor and the boat. During the next few days this chief 


"4 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


brought the bones of the sailor and the keel of the boat, claimed 
his reward, and asked that the natives might continue to trade 
as usual. This was granted, but one day, when a large number 
of them had come out in their canoes to trade, Captain Metcalfe 
fired on them with all his guns, loaded with round and grape shot 
and nails. A horrible slaughter resulted, more than a hundred 
natives being killed and many others wounded. The Eleanora 
then sailed to Kealakekua. This affair is known as the Olowalu 
massacre. | 

Some days later the Fair American, commanded by a son of 
Captain Simon Metcalfe, arrived off the coast of Hawaii. This 
ship was very small and had only six men on board. One of the 
chiefs, who had once been whipped by the older Metcalfe for 
some petty offense, formed a plot to capture the Pair American. 
The plan was very easily carried out, and all the men on board 
were killed except one. The man who escaped alive, though 
badly hurt, was Isaac Davis. There were some other white men 
on the island at that time, and the boatswain of the Eleanora, 
John Young, went on shore to visit them. Kamehameha was 
afraid that if Captain Metcalfe learned of the death of his son 
and the capture of the Fair American he would take some terrible 
revenge. He therefore kept John Young on shore, and Metcalfe 
had to sail away without him and without learning what had 
happened to the Fairy American. 

Kamehameha had no part in the capture of this ship and he 
immediately took Young and Davis under his protection. They 
tried several times to escape, but were prevented from doing 
so and soon became reconciled to their situation. They were 
kindly treated by the king, to whom they always proved them- 
selves true friends and wise and faithful advisers. They were 
finally made chiefs and held important and responsible positions 
in the government. 

Captain George Vancouver. It was during this period that 
Captain Vancouver made his three visits to the Hawaiian islands. 


FUR TRADERS AND EXPLORERS 75 


As a result of the fur trade a dispute had arisen between Spain 
and England over their rights on the west coast of America. 
There was danger of war, but this was finally averted and a 
treaty was made to settle the difficulty. Captain George Van- 
couver, who had been 
with Captain Cook on 
his last voyage, was 
then sent by the 
British government to 
carry out the terms of 
the treaty with Spain, 
to make a careful ex- 
ploration of the coast 
from Alaska to Cali- 
fornia, and to con- 
tinue the search be- 
gun by Captain Cook 
for a navigable pas- 
Sage, sDetwechm Lhe 
Pacific and Atlantic 
Oceans. He was also 
given instructions to 
winter at the Hawai- 
ian islands and _ to 
complete the survey 
of those islands. Two 
ships, the Dzscovery 
and the Chatham, were placed under his command, and a third 
ship, the Daedalus, was later sent out to him with supplies. 
Vancouver arrived off the coast of Hawaii on the first day of 
March, 1792. A native of the islands, who had been brought 
from England on the Discovery, was landed under the protection 
of Kaiana, and another native, who had previously been on one 
of the fur trading vessels, was taken on board as interpreter. 





Photograph of painting in Bishop Museum. 
Captain George Vancouver 


76 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


After spending a few days on the coast of Hawaii, Vancouver 
proceeded to the other islands without having seen Kamehameha. 
A short stop was made at Waikiki, Oahu, and a longer one at 
Waimea, Kauai, where Vancouver was visited by the young 
prince Kaumualii, a lad of about twelve years. At all of these 
places Vancouver treated the natives in as friendly a manner as 
possible and gave to the chiefs various kinds of useful seeds and 
plants, but he refused to give them firearms or ammunition. 

About six weeks after the departure of Vancouver, the store 
ship Daedalus arrived, in command of Lieutenant Hergest, and 
anchored off Waimea, Oahu, for the purpose of obtaining a supply 
of water. While engaged in this operation a party on shore was 
attacked by the natives and Lieutenant Hergest and two other 
men were killed. The Daedalus then proceeded to the American 
coast to join the Discovery and the Chatham. 

A year later Vancouver returned for a second visit, the two 
ships of his squadron sighting Hawaii on February 12, 1793. In 
order to complete the examination of the coast, the Chatham 
sailed around the south side of the island, while Vancouver, in 
the Discovery, sailed around the north. After a short stop at 
Kawathae the Discovery proceeded to Kealakekua. Before its 
arrival there, Kamehameha came on board, and Vancouver, who 
had seen him before at the time of Captain Cook’s visit, says 
that he “ was agreeably surprized in finding that his riper years 
had softened that stern ferocity which his younger days had 
exhibited, and had changed his general deportment to an address 
characteristic of an open, cheerful, and sensible mind, combined 
with great generosity and goodness of disposition.” With him 
were John Young and various members of the king’s family. 
The English captain expressed himself as being highly pleased 
with the conduct of the whole party. 

On this visit to the islands Vancouver had three objects that 
he was particularly anxious to accomplish. One was to introduce 
cattle, for which purpose he had brought from California a 


FUR TRADERS AND EXPLORERS 77 


number of those useful animals. These were presented to Kame- 
hameha. A second object was to bring about a permanent peace 
between the different islands of the group. This was very hard to 
accomplish. Vancouver induced the different chiefs to agree to 
what seemed reasonable terms, but their mutual distrust of each 


er — a a een et 


ies FE CEPT LEH r, ae Sarge 7 
Paes ve ee Fie eit pays s De ; 
LL Hberwege/ oA A tht. Ve on. m2) ga 

: fo ~~ 


y 
CANA CA eh ya Aoi esuyig, ig ee 


fp an ee oh “Ande tay SE ae an oe Dey Ae 
ad oe 


rh ae seve JOC Of CLAS i: Ais tery eG 
Mes ? A. AA VLASC ALA: 
hk v Waders ned Le 


r 


CO’ { 
a) Das. CA Maveer 


; r if f 
he rid Gace oS tha tu. Cteete te fe 


/ Aig ew ee : 


ety ze : 
Lonrte ret We Bao ie oad 5 


Calg ae Rey 7 ae Arg 


| bh pages Us rw Cee “eg Hh cf” Steel, ae 
or TRIE bhavir— Latily enferer IVE Ed - ty a . 


Xs . Vang he ¢ 3 


Yul fe Le, pas Visa. © : : 


oe bia Ai ao ae Coe TA if. 
| Le Wiprctr. iG Wess ge dee tk thas 1c AOE AA 


Hob ogy LY benefit ay tf Fhe Mertarettrt 


jee ECR De Du oe . 







* : ‘ 

°. f . . 

# , § s i 4 3 
Oe, 3 reli! v Choys veg J : Lo : 
FOG @ : ae ? 

y Aesemey, ra, DO e a | 
they. oF eos Ee 
‘ i] 3 F 
Ay bede Va herel thd): ree = 
| “rom eeptnal in Archives of Hawaii. 


Part of a letter written by Captain Vancouver while at the Hawaiian islands 


78 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


other made it impossible for them finally to get together. Van- 
couver’s third object was to secure the punishment of those who 
had been responsible for the killing of Lieutenant Hergest. For 
this purpose he visited Maui and Oahu. The king, Kahekili, 
and his advisers seemed to be willing to do what Vancouver 
demanded; after an investigation at Waikiki three natives were 
executed for the murder, but it is very doubtful whether they 
were the guilty ones. 

Vancouver spent about three weeks at Hawaii and made 
shorter stops at Maui, Oahu, and Kauai. To Kauai he returned 
two girls who had been taken from there to the American coast 
on a trading vessel. At all these places he was careful to avoid 
any possibility of trouble with the natives and they in turn 
showed a most friendly and honorable disposition. From his 
actions it is clear that Vancouver looked on Kamehameha as the 
most powerful chief and as a man on whom the greatest reliance 
could be placed. He also gives high praise to John Young and 
Isaac Davis. 

Vancouver’s third and last visit to the islands (January—March, 
1794) was marked by a number of interesting circumstances. 
The English ships remained for several weeks at Kealakekua. 
Vancouver improved the time by giving Kamehameha much 
good advice. He was able to bring about a reconciliation be- 
tween the king and his favorite wife, Kaahumanu, between 
whom an estrangement had occurred. An additional supply of 
cattle was brought from California and Kamehameha was in- 
duced to place a tapu on them for a period of ten years. The 
carpenters of the Discovery and the Chatham constructed the 
framework of the Britannia, the first vessel ever built in Hawaii. 
This was a project on which the king had set his heart, and he 
spent most of his time watching the operations connected with 
it. At this time there were about a dozen white men residing on 
the island and they all came to take part in the work. Among 
them was a carpenter named Boyd, in the service of Kamehameha, 


FUR TRADERS AND EXPLORERS 79 


who undertook to complete the vessel after the framework had 
been set up. Shortly before the departure of Vancouver, Kame- 
hameha and his chiefly advisers ceded the island of Hawaii to 
Great Britain, or placed it under the protection of that nation, 
as a defense against the attacks of enemies, near or distant, with 
the understanding, however, that the native religion, government, 
and social system should not be interfered with. This cession 
was never accepted by Great Britain and no result of any im- 
portance ever came from it. 

The visits of Vancouver made a deep impression on the 
Hawaiian people. They remembered particularly his refusal to 
sell guns and ammunition and his effort to bring the chiefs of 
the different islands to live at peace with one another. This 
effort failed, but the attention which he paid to Kamehameha 
undoubtedly increased the prestige of that king and made it 
easier for him to conquer the other islands and in that way pacify 
the entire group. The Hawaiian tradition says that Vancouver 
promised to send teachers from England to explain the Christian 
religion to the Hawaiians. 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


When traders came to the Hawaiian islands, there were both good 
and bad results. Makea list of each in your notebook. Which do you 
think were the greater, the good results or the bad? Give evidence 
from the chapter to support your decision. 

Compare the visits of Vancouver and their results to Hawaii with 
the visits of other traders mentioned in the chapter. With which 
captain would you have preferred to sail — Metcalfe, or Vancouver ? 
Why? 


VII 


KAMEHAMEHA COMPLETES THE CONQUEST 


King Kahekili of Maui. Kamehameha, having conquered 
his own island, was more eager than ever to gain control of the 
remainder of the group. But a great obstacle stood in his way. 
This was Kahekili, the king of Maui. By the time Kamehameha 
had become sole king of the island of Hawaii, Kahekili had 
succeeded in making himself overlord of Maui, Molokai, Oahu, 
and Kauai. This powerful chieftain was an older man than 
Kamehameha and for a long time had been the ruler of Maui. He 
had fought many battles with Kalaniopuu, who invaded Maui on 
several occasions. In some of these battles the Hawaiian king was 
badly defeated, and finally Kahekili was able to win back the 
district of Hana, East Maui, which for a long time had been 
held by the moi of Hawaii. 

For several years after the death of Kalaniopuu, while 
Kamehameha was engaged in his contest with Keoua and 
Keawemauhili, Kahekili was able to turn his attention to Oahu 
and Molokai, and in a short time he succeeded in conquering those 
islands, where he treated the conquered people with the most 
barbarous cruelty. His younger brother, Kaeokulani, had 
married the moi of Kauai, and by this means Kahekili’s influence 
was extended over that island as well. In his wars he was aided 
by his brether, Kaeokulani, the real ruler of Kauai, and by his 
son Kalanikupule, who was made regent of Maui while Kahekili 
remained on Oahu. ‘This was the situation about 1785. 

Kamehameha makes war on Kahekili. Toward the end of 
that year Kamehameha sent an army under command of his 

80 


KAMEHAMEHA COMPLETES THE CONQUEST SI 


younger brother to attempt the reconquest of Hana, East Maul. 
This attempt met with some success at first, but the invaders were 
soon driven out by a force sent against them by Kalanikupule. 

After this, for several years, peace prevailed on all the islands, 
and during this time the chiefs were engaged in strengthening 
their own positions, repairing the damage done in the recent 
campaigns, and carrying on trade with the many foreign ships 
which visited the islands for rest and refreshment. 

In 1790 Kamehameha prepared another army, invaded Maui, 
and defeated Kalanikupule in the great battle of Iao Valley. The 
Maui army was almost completely destroyed, but Kalanikupule 
and several other chiefs escaped to Oahu, where they joined Kahe- 
kili. Kamehameha decided to carry the war into Oahu and was 
making plans to do so when news came to him that his posses- 
sions on Hawaii had been invaded and ravaged by Keoua. He 
therefore gave up the idea of further conquest at that time and 
returned to Hawaii to settle his account with Keoua. 

Kahekili attacks Kamehameha. When Kahekili saw that 
Kamehameha was involved in difficulty at home, he and his 
brother Kaeokulani (or Kaeo, as he is more frequently called) 
gathered their warriors together, returned to Maui, and from there 
launched an attack on Hawaii. Kaeo carried destruction and 
ruin into the valley of Waipio, while Kahekili invaded Halawa 
in Kohala. 

In order to repel this attack Kamehameha collected a large 
fleet of war canoes, with which he met and defeated the fleet of 
Kahekili off the north coast of Hawaii. In this battle each side 
used cannon which had been obtained from the fur traders, and 
Kamehameha’s victory was due to his superiority in this respect, 
John Young and Isaac Davis being in charge of his artillery. It 
is probable also that the small schooner, the Fair American, 
formed part of his fleet on this occasion. ‘This battle occurred in 
the spring of 1791, only a few months before the death of Keoua., 
which made Kamehameha sole king of the island of Hawaii. 


82 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


Death of Kahekili. Again for a few years peace prevailed 
throughout the group, while the chiefs engaged in trade with the 
foreign ships and prepared their resources to be used in the final 
struggle for supremacy. It was during this time that Vancouver 
made his three visits to the Hawaiian islands and tried in vain to 
bring about a permanent peace between the opposing forces. 
During these years Kahekili, though he was old and feeble, 
visited all of the islands over which he ruled, leaving Kaeo as 
regent on Maui and Kalanikupule on Oahu. Finally the aged 
king died in the summer of 1794 at Waikiki, and his possessions 
were divided between his brother and his son, Kalanikupule 
continuing to rule over Oahu and Molokai, while Kaeo retained 
control of Maui and Kauai. 

War between Kaeo and Kalanikupule. In the latter part of 
1794 Kaeo decided to return to Kauai, where there had been some 
disorder due to his long absence. He accordingly set out with a 
considerable force, stopping first at Molokai and then at Wai- 
manalo, Oahu, to rest. For some unknown reason Kalanikupule 
sent a body of soldiers to prevent his landing and some fighting 
occurred. This difficulty was soon settled, however, by a per- 
sonal conference between the two leaders and shortly afterwards 
Kaeo proceeded on around the island to Waianae from which point 
he expected to embark for Kauai. While waiting here he dis- 
covered that some of his own soldiers were conspiring against him. 
In order to avoid this danger Kaeo proposed to his chiefs to make 
an attack on Kalanikupule and conquer theisland of Oahu. This 
had the desired effect ; the conspiracy was checked, his warriors 
all rallied about him, and the advance toward Waikiki was at 
once begun. 

Kalanikupule marshaled his army and prepared to meet the 
attack. Just at this time two English fur trading vessels, the 
Jackal and the Prince Lee Boo, under command of Captain 
William Brown, came into the harbor of Honolulu. Brown had 
visited the islands several times before and was well known to all 


KAMEHAMEHA COMPLETES THE CONQUEST 83 


the native chiefs, to whom he had sold guns and ammunition. 
Kalanikupule now appealed to him for assistance, and a bargain 
was made by which Captain Brown was to receive four hundred 
hogs in return for the aid which he and his men should furnish to 
the Oahu king. A few days later an American ship, the Lady 
Washington, commanded by Captain John Kendrick, who was 
likewise well known at the islands, came into the harbor, and it is 
possible that he also gave some assistance to Kalanikupule. 

The invaders continued to advance and two battles were 
fought. In the first battle Kaeo won the day, but in the second 
the Oahu warriors, with the help of the foreigners, gained a 
decisive victory and Kaeo and several of his chiefs were killed. 
This battle was fought December 12, 1794, in the Ewa district. 

The next day the foreign ships fired a salute in honor of the 
victory. Through some oversight one of the saluting guns on the 
Jackal was left loaded with shot and this shot passed through 
the Lady Washington, killing Captain Kendrick and some 
members of his crew. The body of Kendrick was taken on shore 
for burial and a few days later the Lady Washington sailed for 
China. 

Capture and loss of the English ships. After the battle a 
disagreement seems to have arisen between Captain Brown and 
Kalanikupule over the question of payment for the service given 
to the king by Brown and hismen. The trouble was apparently 
settled satisfactorily, but some of Kalanikupule’s chiefs advised 
him to seize the two ships. After some hesitation Kalanikupule 
agreed to this, and on the first day of January, 1795, the plan was 
carried out. A large number of hogs were brought down to the 
beach and while part of the English sailors were busy killing and 
salting the hogs and part of them were at a distance getting salt, 
the natives captured the ships, killed the two captains, and made 
prisoners of all the sailors. 

Being in possession of these two ships, with a large quantity 
of guns and ammunition, Kalanikupule thought he would now 


84 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


be able to overcome Kamehameha. ‘The English sailors were 
compelled, under guard, to get the ships ready for sea, Kalani- 
kupule and his queen went on board, and the vessels were taken 
out of the harbor and anchored for the night at Waikiki. During 
the night the English sailors rose in revolt, killed their guards, put 
the king and queen on shore, and sailed for the island of Hawaii, 
where they told about these occurrences on Oahu. 

Kamehameha conquers Oahu. When Kamehameha heard 
about these events, he saw that the time had come for him to 
complete his work of conquest. He therefore summoned his 
chiefs and warriors and collected the largest army that had yet 
been seen. on the islands. This army was well equipped and 
thoroughly trained and organized. To transport it Kamehameha 
had already built an immense fleet of war canoes. 

In February, 1795, the expedition sailed from Hawaii, touching 
first at Maui. That island was taken possession of, after which 
the fleet crossed over and took possession of Molokai and from 
there sailed to Oahu, landing at Waikiki. During the passage 
from Molokai to Oahu, Kaiana, who was one of Kamehameha’s 
principal chiefs but whose loyalty had for some time been doubt- 
ful, deserted with his followers and joined Kalanikupule. The 
army of Oahu was posted in Nuuanu Valley and there the last 
great battle was fought. Kamehameha won a complete victory. 
Of the defeated army hundreds were killed and a large number 
were driven over the pali (precipice) and perished on the rocks 
below. A few escaped up the sides of the mountains. Kalani- 
kupule wandered for some months in the mountains, but was 
finally captured, killed, and sacrificed to the war god Kukaili- 
moku. 

Attempted invasion of Kauai. Having made sure of his con- 
trol of Oahu, Kamehameha turned his attention to the conquest 
of Kauai and Niihau. Captain Broughton, an English naval 
officer, who was at Waikiki in February, 1796, states that 
Kamehameha was then making preparations for an attack on 


‘yuvesed Ulepow ¥ UI pejueseldel sy 
TYyIeM }e Zulpueyl Aue s vyourvyouey 


¥ 





86 A HISTORY OF HAWATE 


Kauai. These plans were rapidly pushed and during the spring a 
fleet of canoes set out on the difficult journey from Oahu to Kauai 
but was shattered in a storm, so many of the canoes being lost 
that Kamehameha’s plan had to be abandoned for the time 
being. 

Revolt on Hawaii. An additional reason for postponing the 
attack on Kauai was the fact that during the absence of Kame- 
hameha and his principal chiefs from Hawaii a serious revolt had 
broken out on thatisland. This was led by the brother of Kaiana 
and was joined by many warriors who had ‘been followers of 
Keoua some years before. The rebels succeeded in getting pos- 
session of a large part of the island. Finally Kamehameha re- 
turned in the fall of 1796 and quickly crushed the revolt, the 
decisive battle being fought near Hilo. The rebel leader escaped 
but was soon captured and offered as a sacrifice to the gods. 

This was the end of the wars of Kamehameha. He was able 
to devote the remaining years of his life to works of peace. Kauai 
and its dependency Niihau remained as yet unconquered, but 
from that direction there was no danger to Kamehameha’s 
position, and eventually those islands were ceded to him without 
the necessity of armed conquest. 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


t. Do you think Kamehameha was justified in attacking Maui and 
Oahu. Why? 

2. What evil attended Kamehameha’s conquests? Which do you 
think the greater, the evil or the good? Why? 

3. Do you think that the possible good results of a war justify a war ? 
Give evidence to support your conclusion. 

4. Which do you think the greater day in Kamehameha’s life — 
the day of the battle of the Pali, or the day on which he made the 
Mamalahoe Kanawai? Why? 


Vill 


THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA 


Condition of the country. At the conclusion of Kamehameha’s 
wars of conquest the country was in bad condition. The almost 
constant fighting for many years had resulted in the loss of many 
lives — warriors who were slain in battle and women and children 
who died of starvation and destitution. One writer who visited 
the islands in 1796 estimated that Kamehameha alone had lost six 
thousand of his people in the recent wars. The various islands 
were devastated, crops destroyed, and cultivation interfered with. 
In this respect Maui and Oahu were much worse off than Hawaii. 
Before starting for Kauai in 1796 Kamehameha caused all the 
hogs on Oahu to be destroyed, so that the natives of that island 
would not be able to rebel against him. When his army returned 
without being able to reach Kauai, conditions were worse than 
before and something very much like a famine resulted. 

Against this dark picture we must place the fact that the wars 
were now ended. ‘There was no one left strong enough to suc- 
cessfully oppose Kamehameha’s rule. Indeed, most of the chiefs 
who had fought against him were killed, and no powerful chiefs 
were left except those who were his supporters. Now Kame- 
hameha, having become the supreme chief, proved himself a wise 
and able ruler. 

Kamehameha encourages industry. Under the encourage- 
ment of Kamehameha the country quickly returned to a state of 
prosperity. The historian Kamakau says that the king “ urged 
the chiefs and common people to raise food, while he set the 
example by doing the same thing. ... All this the chiefs and 

87 


88 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


common people saw with their own eyes — that their lord and 
master labored with his own hands. . . . The common people 
said of Kamehameha, ‘ He is a farmer, a fisherman, a maker of 
cloth, a provider for the needy, and a father to the fatherless.’ ”’ 
Crime and disorder were suppressed, so that agriculture, fishing, 
and all other useful industries could be carried on in peace and 
security. 

A trader who visited the islands in 1798 found them in a 
prosperous condition. Of Oahu he says: “ The lands are in the 
highest state of cultivation, everything of luxurious growth; .. . 
you here see the breadfruit, coconut, plantain, sweet potatoes, 
taro, yams, banana, which are native productions, and water- 
melons, muskmelons, pumpkins, cabbages, and most of our 
garden vegetables, introduced by foreigners.” 

Organization of the government. One of the first things to 
which Kamehameha had to turn his attention was the organiza- 
tion of the government in such a way that his control might be 
permanent and beneficial. Having conquered the kingdom, 
everything belonged to him, both the land and the people. He 
was supreme; but in accordance with the usual custom he divided 
the land up among his chiefs as a reward for their services to him, 
retaining, however, a number of valuable districts as his own 
personal estate. The chiefs in turn subdivided it among their 
followers. This procedure reminds one of the feudal system of 
Europe in the Middle Ages. The greatest portions were given 
to the four Kona chiefs who had aided him in all his wars, Kea- 
weaheulu, Keeaumoku, Kameeiamoku, and Kamanawa. These 
chiefs also formed a council of advisers on whom he depended. 
When they died their sons, Naihe, Keeaumoku, Hoapili, and 
Koahou, succeeded them. 

The king appointed a younger chief, Kalanimoku, as prime 
minister and treasurer. In this office he was the most powerful 
person in the kingdom next to Kamehameha. So well and 
faithfully did he serve the king that he earned the title of the 


THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA 89 


“Tron Cable.” As governors Kamehameha appointed men on 
whose fidelity he could depend. John Young was for a long time 
governor of the island of Hawaii, and Keeaumoku governor of 
Maui. 

All the people were required to pay taxes in proportion to their 
ability. The taxes were paid in the products of the soil and in 
such things as were manufactured. ‘‘ Each person was to bring 
the results of his own labor. Some brought pigs, chickens, dogs, 





Kalanimoku and John Young 
Drawn by a French artist who visited Hawaii in 1819. 


sweet potatoes, mats, calabashes, and like products of home 
industry. The hunters brought rare feathers and birds, and the 
fishermen brought fish.” At a later time sandalwood became an 
important article of taxation. 

A religious king. Kamehameha maintained the ancient 
religion of his people with great strictness. He was the official 
guardian of the war god Kukailimoku and paid it special atten- 
tion; but at the same time he was careful to appoint priests to 
attend to the ceremonies due to the other gods. He built several 
heiaus and repaired many others. The tapus were carefully 
observed, though in his later life the length of some of the periodi- 
cal tapus seems to have been shortened. It is recorded that the 


go A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


king caused several persons to be put to death for violations of 
the tapus, some of these executions occurring as late as 1817. 
During his lifetime no missionaries came to Hawaii to teach the 
people a better way, and the example of the foreigners he saw did 
not lead Kamehameha to have a very high opinion of Christianity. 
To one man who told him his gods were not true gods, the king is 
reported to have said, ‘‘ These shall be my gods, for they have 
power, and by them I have become possessed of this government, 
and through them I have come to my throne.”’ 

Kamehameha’s treatment of foreigners. Kamehameha was 
one of the first chiefs to realize the advantages to be gained from 
the foreigners who came to the islands in increasing numbers. 
He was fortunate in securing very early the services and advice of 
two such honorable men as John Young and Isaac Davis. They 
were the most important of his foreign advisers; but there were 
several others whose names are deserving of mention, among 
them being Holmes, Stewart, Boyd, Harbottle, Beckley, Adams, 
and the Spaniard, Paula Marin (Manini). The advice of 
Vancouver was also very profitable to Kamehameha. A great 
many of the foreigners who took up their residence on the 
islands were of evil or worthless character, but Kamehameha 
was a keen judge of men and was able to pick out those upon 
whom he could depend. These he rewarded liberally with land 
and in other ways. 

The foreign traders quickly learned that Kamehameha could 
be trusted to deal fairly with them in all particulars. This 
reputation for fair dealing gave him a great advantage over some 
of the other chiefs during the later wars, and after the conquest 
was completed made the Hawaiian islands the most important 
commercial center in the whole Pacific Ocean. Being honorable 
himself, Kamehameha expected those with whom he dealt to 
show the same characteristic. He was honest in his relations 
with the traders, and he was shrewd enough not to allow them 
to treat him dishonestly. 


THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA gi 


Development of commerce. The fur traders were the first 
foreigners to visit the islands in any considerable number. They 
came chiefly for the purpose of buying fresh meat and vegetables, 
firewood, and water. As time went by other island products were 
sought after. Most important, perhaps, in the earlier years, 
was salt, of which large quantities were exported. Another 
article bought by the traders was cordage or rope made from the 
olona fiber, which was valuable for the rigging of ships. After 
the year 1800 the trade in sandalwood became of great impor- 
tance. Besides these native products, Kamehameha in the 
later years of his reign accumulated a large stock of goods of 
foreign manufacture and was able to supply ships with such 
things as firearms and ammunition, hardware, cloth, and ship 
furnishings, which they sometimes needed. 

In exchange for the provisions they obtained the first traders 
gave the natives trinkets, bits of iron, and other things of little 
value. As they got better acquainted with the foreigners the 
native chiefs came to demand articles of greater value. During 
the time of Kamehameha’s wars of conquest guns and ammuni- 
tion were the principal articles of trade. These continued to be 
imported and while the king was building up his navy he pur- 
chased large quantities of ship supplies of various kinds. At 
this period and still more at a later time cloth and many other 
articles of peaceful character were much sought by the Hawaiians. 
This demand was supplied by the traders. Kamehameha early 
learned the value of silver and before his death is reported to have 
accumulated in trade two or three hundred thousand Spanish 
dollars. In 1805 he exchanged a small schooner built at Oahu for 
the brig Lelia Byrd, an American ship of 175 tons burden, and he 
later purchased several other foreign vessels. 

At first the trading was generally carried on in the ships, the 
natives bringing off their hogs and vegetables in canoes. The 
ships ordinarily visited several islands before completing their 
purchases. Yams could best be gotten at Kauai and Niihau; one 


g2 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


of the bays on the west side of Niihau was known to the traders as 
Yam Bay. After about 1795 the neighborhood of Honolulu 
harbor gradually came to be the principal trading center. Ships 
were frequently directed there from other places to get their 
supplies. The importance of Honolulu was still further increased 
after Kamehameha took up his residence at Waikiki in 1804. 
Storehouses of stone were built near the harbor to hold the king’s 
foreign goods, and much of the produce of the other islands was 








‘valost’pae Celoum aprons Chore 


Port of Honolulu in 1816 
By the French artist L. Choris. 


collected in ships and brought to Oahu for the use of the king and 
to supply the foreign traders. After a time some traders ventured 
to bring their goods on shore and place them in storehouses, from 
which they would sell them to the natives. This development 
took place after the beginning of the sandalwood trade, but 
permanent trading houses were not established until after the 
death of Kamehameha. 

Kauai added to the kingdom. After suppressing the revolt on 
Hawaii in 1796, Kamehameha continued to reside on that island 
for a number of years. When he saw that the affairs of the 
kingdom were at peace he turned his thought once more to the 


THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA 93 


conquest of Kauai. For this purpose several years were spent in 
building the famous fleet of peleleu canoes. ‘These peleleu canoes 
were large double canoes, each with a platform and sail. It is 
said that more than 800 of them were built. When everything 
was ready the fleet sailed to Maui, where Kamehameha stayed 
for a year, and then went on to Oahu. 

It was at this time that the terrible pestilence called Okuu 
(probably the cholera) swept over the islands. Great numbers 
of the people died. Kamehameha himself was stricken down 
and barely escaped death. Before the scourge finally passed off, 
all the other great chiefs had perished. This pestilence occurred 
in the year 1804 and because of it Kamehameha was compelled 
once more to postpone the war against Kauai; but he continued 
to make preparations on a still more elaborate scale. 

By this time he had a large number of foreigners in his service, 
including carpenters, blacksmiths, and other mechanics. These 
were employed in building small sloops and schooners. By the 
end of 1809 the king’s fleet consisted of more than forty sailing 
vessels, built at Waikiki, together with the brig Lelia Byrd. The 
young king of Kauai, Kaumualii, knew about the preparations 
Kamehameha was making, and he did what he could to put his 
island in a state of defense. Some negotiations were carried on 
between the two kings, and finally Kaumualii came to see that he 
had no choice except to surrender or to be conquered by his 
powerful neighbor. In 1810, therefore, he went up to Honolulu 
in one of the trading ships and acknowledged himself a subject of 
Kamehameha. The latter allowed him to retain the government 
of Kauai, but from that time on, Kaumualii every year paid to 
Kamehameha a tribute, consisting of a large quantity of tapa 
cloth, mats, oranges, coconuts, calabashes, spears, hogs, fans, and 
other articles. 

The Russian episode. The later years of Kamehameha’s life 
were disturbed by an attempt of a Russian adventurer to make a 
settlement on the islands and to get Kauai away from his control. 


94 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


About the beginning of the nineteenth century the Russian 
American Fur Company, chartered by the Czar of Russia, had 
secured a monopoly of the fur trade in Alaska. The company had 
difficulty in getting supplies and for that reason wished to estab- 
lish trading posts in California and the Hawaiian islands. Some 
trade developed between the islands and the Russian settlements 
in Alaska, carried on principally in American ships, and in 1812 
a Russian fort and settlement were established on the coast of 
California, north of San Francisco. Two years later Baranoff, the 
governor of the Russian company, sent a ship to the Hawaiian 
islands to purchase supplies. This ship was wrecked on the island 
of Kauai but a large part of the cargo was saved by the natives. 

Toward the end of the following year (1815) Baranoff sent a 
Dr. Scheffer in an American trading ship to try to recover what 
had been saved from the wrecked vessel and, if possible, to 
establish a trading post in Hawaii. Scheffer was kindly received 
by Kamehameha and allowed to travel about wherever he 
pleased. He spent some time on the island of Kauai, where he 
won the favor of Kaumualii by his skill as a physician. In the 
spring of 1816 Baranoff sent two ships with some Russians and 
Alaskan Indians, to be used by Scheffer in connection with the 
proposed trading post. 

Scheffer then went to Honolulu, where he was allowed to land 
his men, and proceeded to build a blockhouse and to square out a 
place for a fort. Kamehameha was at this time residing on 
Hawaii, but he was informed of Scheffer’s actions by John Young, 
who was in charge of Oahu, and immediately sent Kalanimoku 
with orders to send the Russians away. Scheffer, seeing that he 
was not strong enough to resist, put his men back on the ships and 
left Honolulu. The Hawaiians then built the fort, under the 
supervision of John Young, the work being completed about the 
end of 1816, and Captain George Beckley was placed in command 
of it. This was the fort from which the present Fort Street in 
Honolulu received its name. 


THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA 95 


After leaving Honolulu Scheffer returned to Kauai. It is 
clear that he went beyond the instructions he had received from 
Baranoff, for he tried to persuade Kaumualii to declare himself 
independent of Kamehameha and place himself under the pro- 
tection of Russia and 
to give the Russians 
a monopoly of the 
sandalwood and other 
kinds of trade. He 
presented a ship to 
Kaumualii, who in aN 
his turn assigned to 


if RY SS 
Scheffer a large tract A di ei) 

SY , \ : Rupe YY yy ca pee 
of land. The Rus- yy = me 


slans, with the assis- ruse starr ace et 
tance of Kaumualii’s 
people, then threw 
up a breastwork, 
mounted with can- 
non, at Hanalei, and 
in the early part of 
1817 built a substan- 
tial fort at Waimea, 
over which the Rus- 


OLD RUSSIAN FORT 
WAIMEA. KAUAI. 
made by 
G.EGJackson, Nav;LieuT; R.N. 


sian flag was raised. 
For a time Scheffer 
seemed to have every- 


im 1885, for the 
HAWAIAN GOVT. SURVEY. 


Reduced by W.EM. 1894, 


Scare oF FEET. 


t 50 100 08 = _2ae 





thing his own way, 
but soon Kaumualii 
was convinced by the arguments of the American traders, who 
were constant visitors at the islands, that the Russians, instead 
of being his friends, were dangerous enemies. Kamehameha also 
gave him strict instructions to expel Scheffer and his people. 
This was finally done, though not without some fighting. 


96 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


Scheffer sent one of his ships with a report to Baranoff, while 
he himself, with the rest of his men, made his way to Hono- 
lulu in a leaky vessel, suffering great hardships on the voyage. 
From Honolulu he went to Canton on an American ship, while 
another American trader carried his people to the California 
coast. The actions of Scheffer were repudiated by Baranoff, by 
the directors of the Russian American Company, and by the 
Russian government. 

Death of Kamehameha. Kamehameha resided at Oahu until 
about 1811, when he returned to Hawaii and spent his remaining 
years at Kailua. There he died, May 8, 1819. He was ill for a 
long time preceding his death and everything possible was done 
for him. Finally a heiau was built and then the priests said to 
him that a human sacrifice must be offered. But Kamehameha 
forbade this, saying, ‘‘ The men are tapu for the king,’ meaning 
his son Liholiho, who was to succeed him. After his death the 
customary human sacrifice was not offered, but all the other 
practices incident to the death of a chief were carried out. The 
heir to the throne left the place which had been defiled by death, 
going to Kohala until the conclusion of the funeral ceremonies. 
After the bones of the dead king had been prepared for burial, 
they were taken by one of the chiefs and placed in a cave, the 
location of which has never been revealed. 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


t. A man who adheres to established customs and practices is 
called conservative. One who adopts new ideas and practices is called 
progressive. Which do you think it more desirable to be? Why? 
Which do you think Kamehameha was? 

2. Give evidence from this chapter to show that Kamehameha was 
wise; that he was a keen judge of character; that he was progressive ; 
that he was conservative. 

3. Copy the following list in your notebook and put a plus sign 
before each item which you think was a wise deed or attitude of 
Kamehameha’s; a minus sign before the deed or attitude which 


THE REIGN OF KAMEHAMEHA 97 


you do not approve. Be able to give arguments to support youl 
choice : 

. Taking advice from John Young 

. Destroying hogs on Oahu 

Dividing the land among his chiefs 

. Taxing the people 

Observing strict tapus 

Believing in the war god 

. Encouraging foreign trade 

4. Gie the story of the origin of the name of Fort Street. 


“rR TAD AA SS 


For FURTHER READING 
(Chapters V—-VIII) 
GowEN, H. H. — The Napoleon of the Pacific. 


WESTERVELT, W. D. — ‘‘Kamehameha’s Method of Government,” ir 
Thirtieth Annual Report of the Hawatian Historical Society. 
ALEXANDER, W. D. — “The Proceedings of the Russians on Kauai, 


1814-1816”; Papers of the Hawaiian Historical Society, No. 6. 
CAMPBELL, ARCHIBALD. — Voyage Round the World; Chapters 8-10. 
Campbell was in Hawaii in 1809 and 1810. 

HAWAIIAN HISTORICAL SOCIETY. — Reprints, No. 3, ‘The Log of the 
Brig Hope.” The Hope was at the Hawaiian islands in 1791. 
HAWAIIAN HISTORICAL SOCIETY. — Reprints, No. 4. “The Diary of 
Ebenezer Townsend, Jr.” Townsend visited Hawaii in 1708. 


IX 


INTRODUCTION OF CHRISTIANITY 


Liholiho, Kaahumanu, and Kalanimoku. Before his death 
Kamehameha appointed his son Liholiho to succeed him as king. 
To his nephew Keku- 
aokalani he intrusted 
the care of the war 
god, Kukailimoku. 
Liholiho, who took the 
title of Kamehameha 
II, was an amiable 
prince and _ possessed 
considerable shrewd- 
ness, though he was 
far less capable than 
his father. He was 
apt to act impulsively. 
For a long time he had 
been subject to bad 
influences. Kame- 
hameha, recognizing 
the weaknesses of his 
son, appointed his fa- 
vorite queen Kaahu- 
manu, as kuhina nut, 
or premier. Under 
this arrangement Kaahumanu possessed equal authority with 
Liholiho. Kalanimoku continued to hold the position that 

98 





Kamehameha II 


INTRODUCTION OF CHRISTIANITY 99 


had been given to him by Kamehameha. After the accession 
of Liholiho, some of the chiefs who had been kept in subjec- 
tion only by fear of Kamehameha wished to divide up the 
islands into several kingdoms, as they had been before. It is 
also probable that Kekuaokalani wanted to overthrow Liholiho 
and become king in his stead. But Kaahumanu and Kalanimoku, 
who were by far the most powerful chiefs, remained loyal to the 
young king and with their help he was able to put down all 
opposition. The influence of the foreigners was also on the side of 
Liholiho. 

Overthrow of the tapu system. The first important event 
in the reign of Liholiho was the overthrow of the tapu system 
and the ancient religion of the Hawaiian people. A very im- 
portant feature of this old system was the restriction on eating, 
whereby men and women were forbidden to eat together and 
women were not allowed to eat pork, bananas, coconuts, and 
certain kinds of fish. These tapus had been sometimes violated 
secretly and for a long time influences had been at work against 
the whole system. Most important of these influences was the 
example of the foreigners, who did not observe the tapus. An- 
other was the report of the overthrow of the tapu system and 
idolatry in Tahiti. Before the death of Kamehameha many 
Hawaiians, including some chiefs of high rank, had ceased to 
believe in the gods of Hawaii. 

Soon after the death of the old king the question was discussed 
by Liholiho, the two dowager queens (Kaahumanu and Keopu- 
olani), Kalanimoku, and Hewahewa, the high priest, and it was 
secretly agreed that the whole system would be abolished as soon 
as it could be done with safety. It was first necessary for the 
young king to make sure of his throne. In these deliberations the 
two queens took the leading part and their opinions were of great 
weight, since Keopuolani, the mother of Liholiho, was the chief of 
highest rank in the entire kingdom, and Kaahumanu had great 
political influence. 


100 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


In August, 1819, a French warship visited Hawaii and the 
commander of the ship let it be known that he was on the side of 
the king. At this time Kalanimoku and his brother Boki, 
governor of Oahu, were baptized by the Catholic chaplain of the 
French ship, and Liholiho stated to the captain that he also would 
be baptized if it were not for certain political considerations. 

About the first of November the king, under the urging of 
Kaahumanu and Keopuolani, took the decisive step. A great 
feast was prepared and Liholiho, after some hesitation, sat down 
and ate with the women. The people looked on with astonish- 
ment and when they saw that no harm came to him, they shouted, 
‘The tapus are at an end, and the gods area lie!’ This action 
is called the ai noa (free eating) as opposed to the ai kapu (tapu 
eating). Immediately orders were sent to all the islands to de- 
stroy the heiaus and burn the idols. These orders were obeyed 
in most places; but some of the idols were hidden away and kept 
by those who still believed in the old religion. 

Revolt of Kekuaokalani. There were many who looked upon 
the action of Liholiho as impious and wicked. Chief of these was 
Kekuaokalani, guardian of the war god, who had tried to dissuade 
the king from taking such a step. He now gathered about him 
those who believed as he did. Among them were several priests, 
who quoted an ancient Hawaiian proverb, “ A religious chief shall 
possess a kingdom, but wicked chiefs shall always be poor.” 
The king sent two of his advisers, Naihe and Hoapili, together 
with his mother Keopuolani, to the camp of Kekuaokalani to see 
if the matter could not be settled peacefully. This attempt 
failed, and both sides prepared for the struggle which should 
determine whether the gods of Hawaii were true or false. The 
king’s army, led by Kalanimoku, had the advantage of a larger 
supply of guns and ammunition, but the opposing party fought 
with great courage. The battle, which took place near Kuamoo, 
Kona, Hawaii, resulted in a victory for the king. Kekuaokalani 
and his wife Manono were both killed fighting bravely, and their 


INTRODUCTION OF CHRISTIANITY IOI 


followers were scattered or taken prisoners. From the result of 
this battle the mass of the people concluded that their old gods 
were powerless and they willingly destroyed the idols and their 
temples. But in spite of that fact, many beliefs connected with 
the old religious system persisted in the minds of the people for a 
long time. While these events were taking place, missionaries 
were on the way to Hawaii, bringing the message of the Christian 
religion. 

Opukahaia and the Foreign Mission School. Among the many 
Hawaiians who left the islands as seamen on foreign trading 





102 ATHISTORY “OF HA WAIL 


vessels was one named Opukahaia (commonly called Obookiah), 
who was taken to the United States in 1809 by a Captain Brint- 
nall, of New Haven, Connecticut. This youth was destined to 
play an important réle in the history of his native land. At New 
At _ Haven he lived for a 

Fy af” Fi _ 2 time in the family of 

- 2 * Captain Brintnall and 

frequently visited the 
buildings of Yale Col- 
lege. On the steps of 
one of those buildings 
he was one day found 
weeping because of his 
ignorance. The inter- 
est of several students 
was aroused and they 
offered to teach him 
if he wished to learn. 
Opukahaia eagerly 
seized the opportu- 
nity.) Durineeere 
course of the next few 
years he lived in anum- 
ber of different families 


jars : - “2 and became, well 
Monument to Opukahaia at Kealakekua, known in that part of 


Hawaii 

the country. He had 
a bright and inquiring mind and the friendly disposition char- 
acteristic of his race. His thoughts were easily guided into re- 
ligious channels and he became a fervent Christian, filled with the 

desire to return as a missionary to his native land. 
Through Opukahaia attention was drawn to several other 
Hawaiian youths who were living in the United States and they 
were given similar opportunities for improvement. In 1816 four 





INTRODUCTION OF CHRISTIANITY 103 


of these youths, including Opukahaia, were taken under the 
patronage of the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign 
Missions to be educated “‘ with a view to their being sent back in 
due time to their own native isles, qualified to be employed as 
preachers or teachers.”’ In that year the Board provided for the 
establishment of the Foreign Mission School, in which these and 
other young men might be trained for missionary work among 
their own people. While a student in this school, Opukahaia died 
in 1818, but his influence lived. The desire for the Christianiza- 
tion of the Hawaiian islands which his life and experiences first 
awakened was the original reason for the sending of missionaries 
to Hawaii. 

Organization of the Sandwich Islands Mission. The intense 
interest which had developed among the Christian churches of 
New England led several young men to offer themselves to the 
American Board as missionaries, and on October 15, 1819, the 
Sandwich Islands Mission was organized at Boston as a church 
to be transplanted into the new field. The infant church had 
seventeen members: Rev. Hiram Bingham and Rev. Asa 
Thurston, preachers; Daniel Chamberlain, farmer; Dr. Thomas 
Holman, physician; Samuel Whitney and Samuel Ruggles, cat- 
echists and schoolmasters; Elisha Loomis, printer; the wives of 
these men; and three Hawaiian youths, Thomas Hopu, William 
Kanui, and John Honolii. On October 23 the members of the 
Mission sailed from Boston on the brig Thaddeus. Included in 
the company were the five children of Mr. Chamberlain and also 
George P. Kaumualii, son of the king of Kauai. This Hawaiian 
prince had been taken to the United States when about six years 
of age by a sea captain to be educated. The money to pay for 
his education was lost through the carelessness or extravagance of 
the captain, and finally George had to become a common laborer. 
During the war of 1812 he enlisted in the American navy and was 
wounded in battle. In 1817 he became a student at the Foreign 
Mission School. His religious condition was very doubtful and 


104 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


he did not become a member of the Mission, but it was hoped that 
his influence would be useful to the missionaries. 

Arrival at Hawaii. After a voyage of five months, the 
Thaddeus came in sight of the island of Hawaii, March 30, 1820. 
Snow-crowned Mauna Kea lifted its head above the clouds, 
while below the picturesque northeast coast of the island was 
spread out before the expectant gaze of the missionaries. Mes- 
sengers were sent ashore to find out the state of the country and 
the location of the king. In a few hours the news was brought 
back: ‘‘ Kamehameha is dead — Liholiho is king — the tapus 
are abolished — the heiaus destroyed — the idols burned —the 
supporters of the old order have been overthrown in battle.” 
Five days later the ship came to anchor at Kailua, the residence of © 
the king. The leaders of the Mission went ashore, paid their 
respects to Liholiho and his chiefs, stated their purpose in coming 
to Hawaii, and requested permission to land and begin the work 
which they had undertaken to do. It was their desire to locate 
part of the Mission at Kailua and part of it at Honolulu. The 
proposition was considered at length by the king and chiefs. The 
first decision was that the whole party should reside at Kailua, and 
it was only after much further argument that Liholiho finally 
agreed to the plan of the missionaries. 

The first stations. It was the king’s wish that the physician 
and two of the native youths should remain with him at 
Kailua. This was agreed to. Of the two ordained ministers, 
Mr. Thurston was selected by ballot to have charge of the 
station at that place. On the twelfth of April Mr. and Mrs. 
Thurston, Dr. and Mrs. Holman, Thomas Hopu, and William 
Kanui took up their residence on shore and thus started the 
first mission station in the Hawaiian islands. The remainder of 
the party went on to Honolulu and just a week later landed in 
that village. They were kindly received both by the natives 
and by the foreign residents and obtained temporary shelter in 
several small houses. 


INTRODUCTION OF CHRISTIANITY 105 


A few days later the Thaddeus sailed to Kauai in order to land 
George Kaumualii at his native island. It was _ considered 
advisable for Mr. Whitney and Mr. Ruggles to go with him for 
the purpose of taking the greetings of the Mission to his father 








Photograph by courtesy of the Hawaiian Mission Children’s Society. 
A view of the missionary establishment at Honolulu, taken October 
I1, 1820, by Dexter Chamberlain 


The following explanation is on the original drawing: No. 1 is the house for 
Public worship — school — and social prayer —and a part of it affords a study 
and lodging room for Mr. Bingham. It is 28 feet long and 20 wide, has 2 doors 
and three windows — the window that appears at the south end looks out towards 
the open sea which is about a mile distant. The door at the opposite end opens 
towards the mountain and towards the road leading from the village eastward to 
Witete. No. 2 is a dwelling house —it has one door and 3 windows, two rooms, 
one for a lodging room for Mrs. Loomis and the other for orphan girls. No. 3 is 
a dwelling house occupied by Capt. Chamberlin and family. It has one door and 
4 windows and 3 rooms. No. 4 isa store house about 20 feet square, built like the 
others, in the same line, and with the same materials viz. round poles from 1 to 4, 
6 in. diameter and thatched with grass — superadded to which are walls and a cover- 
ing of mortar made of clay and grass to secure it from fire and from rogues. No. 
5 is a dwelling house, now occupied by Dr. Wiliems and an unfortunate British sea- 
man, but intended as a lodging place for John Honoree and orphan boys. No. 6 is 
a small cooking house where the stove and a large boiler are set up. This is cov- 
ered with mortar. No. 7 is a Ranai or a long open building connecting the doors of 
three houses, having itself 3 entrances 2 on the south side and one on the east end. 
No. 8 the spring of water. 


and of examining the possibilities of that field for missionary 
effort. They were joyfully received by King Kaumualii, who was 
from the beginning one of the strongest friends of the Mission. 
He begged the two missionaries to settle on his island, promising 
them abundant support. After careful consideration at Honolulu 


100 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


this invitation was accepted and about the end of July Mr. 
Whitney and Mr. Ruggles returned to Kauai with their wives and 
established the mission station at Waimea. In response to the 
urgent request of Kalanimoku Mr. Loomis was sent to Kawaihae 
to teach that chief and his wife “‘ and a class of favorite youths 
whom he wished to have instructed.” | 

At all of these places the work of preaching the gospel was at 
once begun. At first it was necessary to use interpreters. Three 
months after landing at Kailua Mr. Thurston preached before 
the king the first Christian sermon ever heard by Hawaiian 
royalty, from the text, “‘ I have a message from God unto thee.” 
Besides preaching to the natives the missionaries also held 
religious services for the resident foreigners and for the sailors on 
board the ships that visited the islands. 

The first schools. One of the first things to which the mis- 
sionaries turned their attention was the work of education. 
Schools were started at the different stations, and before the end 
of 1820 these schools had about one hundred pupils of all ages 
and both sexes. Among the first pupils in the school at Kailua 
were the king and several of the chiefs. The wives of the mis- 
sionaries had an important part in the work of teaching. There 
was much difficulty in the beginning because the natives did not 
understand English and the missionaries did not know the 
Hawaiian language, so that it was necessary to use interpreters. 
At first the number of pupils was not large, but as soon as books 
had been printed in the Hawaiian language and native teachers 
had been trained, interest rapidly increased and within a very few 
years there were thousands of pupils. 

Writing and printing. The Hawaiian language had not, up to 
this time, been systematically reduced to a written form; there 
were no books written or printed in that language. Therefore, 
the missionaries first had to learn the language, then to reduce 
it to writing, to prepare schoolbooks, to translate the Bible, and 
to print these books so that they could be used in the schools 


INTRODUCTION OF CHRISTIANITY 107 


and in the religious services. All of this required much time and 
patient study. It was not until January, 1822, that the first 
printing was done in the Hawaiian language. ‘This was a little 
pamphlet containing the Hawaiian alphabet and some lessons in 
spelling and reading — the first regular textbook for use in the 





x 
ldren’s Society. 


The first school opened by the missionaries in Honolulu in May, 1820 


This is supposed to represent the interior of the building marked No. 1 in the view 
of the missionary establishment (p. 105) by Dexter Chamberlain. The following ex- 
planation is on the original drawing: The School House at Hanaroorah, drawn by G. 
Holmes, one side being supposed to be removed and giving a partial view of Mrs. 
Bingham’s room, and school, as the pupils are receiving instruction from her lips, and 
her babe sleeping by her side, rocked by a little heathen child. 


Photo by courtesy of the Hawatian Mission Chi 


schools. The alphabet and method of spelling first used were 
later changed in a few particulars when the method now in use was 
finally adopted. From this time on the mission press was kept 
busy turning out schoolbooks and religious tracts. Many 
Scripture passages were printed in these books, but the formal 
translation of the Bible was not begun until 1824. The most 
important parts were translated and printed first. The New 


108 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


Testament was completed in 1832, and by May to, 1839, the 
entire Bible had been printed in the Hawaiian language. 

Reinforcement and expansion. In 1822 a committee from the 
London Missionary Society visited the islands. With them was 
Rev. William Ellis, who had for six years been a missionary in 
Tahiti. Because the language of Tahiti was very much like that 
of Hawaii, Mr. Ellis in a few weeks found that he could speak 
Hawaiian fluently and he was the first person to preach a sermon 
‘in that language. In response to the urgent invitation of the 
native chiefs and the American missionaries, the committee 
decided that Mr. Ellis should remain at the Hawaiian islands to 
help in the work there. 

The following year a large group of new workers arrived, under 
direction of the American Board, to reinforce the Mission. This 
increase in the number of laborers made it possible to expand the 
work considerably. The station at Kailua, which was abandoned 
at the end of 1820 owing to the removal of the king to Honolulu, 
was begun again. A second station on the island of Hawaii was 
established at Hilo, and a station at Lahaina on the island of 
Maul. | 

The first fruits of Christian missionary efforts. From the 
very beginning the native chiefs took great interest in the 
work of the missionaries, particularly in the educational work. 
It was somewhat more difficult to arouse their interest in the 
new religion, though they were generally willing enough to 
listen to what the missionaries had to say. Perhaps the first 
who could be considered genuine converts to Christianity were 
Keopuolani, the queen mother; Kapiolani, a high chiefess of 
Hawaii, who gave testimony of her Christian faith by publicly 
defying the dreaded goddess Pele at the volcano of Kilauea; 
iKamakau, a chief of Kaawaloa; and Puaaiki, a blind man not 
of chiefly rank, who is better known by his Christian name of 
Bartimeus. The first to be baptized was Keopuolani, that 
sacrament being administered to her on September 16, 1823, just 


INTRODUCTION OF CHRISTIANITY 10g 


an hour before her death. From the first Kaahumanu was 
friendly to the missionaries personally, but for some time did not 
show much interest either in learning to read and write or in hear- 
ing the gospel message explained. Her real interest in these 
things dates from about the beginning of 1824. During that 
and the following years the Christian workers were greatly 
encouraged. The congregations grew rapidly in size and many 
of the natives applied for baptism and admission to the church. 
The missionaries were slow about granting these requests, since 
they wanted to be sure of the steadfastness of the converts. 
July to, 1825, the blind man Puaaiki was baptized and admitted 
at Lahaina, and on December 5 of that year eight Hawalians were 
received into the church at Honolulu. Among these were 
Kaahumanu, Kalanimoku, and several others of high rank. 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


1. If you had lived in New Haven in 1818, would you have wished 
to come to Hawaii as a missionary? ' Give reasons for wanting to 
come; for not wanting to come. 

2. Copy in your notebook and check the word which best describes 
Liholiho’s action on breaking the tapus: a. rash, 6. rude, c. careless, 
d. bold, e. wicked, f. courageous. 

3. If you had been in Kaahumanu’s place, would you have wel- 
comed the party on the Thaddeus? Give reasons for and against. 

4. Compare the first schools of the missionaries with schools to- 
day as regards: a. buildings, b. pupils, c. language used, d. subjects 
studied. 

5. If you had lived in those early days, would you have gone to 
school? Why? 


For FURTHER READING 


Dwicut, E. W. — Memoirs of Henry Obookiah. 
Gutick, Rev. AND Mrs. O. H. — The Pilgrims of Hawaii. Contains 
many extracts from letters and journals of the missionaries. 


xX 
SANDALWOOD DAYS 


Importance of sandalwood trade. ‘The fur trade first made the 
Hawaiian islands well known and important in the commercial 
world. Furs, of course, were not obtained at the islands; the 
traders came here to rest and to get needed supplies of food stuffs. 
Sandalwood was the first Hawaiian product that became really 
profitable as an article of export. This fragrant wood was in 
great demand in China, where it was used in the manufacture of 
incense for the temples and in the making of small articles of 
furniture. The Chinese were willing to pay high prices for it. 
During the first quarter of the nineteenth century, so far as the 
Hawalian islands were concerned, sandalwood was king in an 
economic sense. | 

Origin and early development. In its origin the Hawaiian 
sandalwood trade was an outgrowth of the fur trade. It is not 
known exactly when it began, but it is probable that the fur traders 
discovered sandalwood on the islands about the year 1790. An 
attempt was made to develop the trade at that time, but for some 
reason it did not succeed. It was not until about fifteen years 
later that the trade in sandalwood began to assume large pro- 
portions and the year 1810 can be taken as marking roughly the 
beginning of the period in which the sandalwood trade was the 
predominant interest on the islands. The sandalwood trade, like 
the fur trade, was almost monopolized by American traders. 

At first sandalwood was merely a side issue of the fur trade. 
The traders went first to the northwest coast of America, where 
they obtained as many furs as they could during the season. 

IIo 


SANDALWOOD DAYS TL 1 


Going from there to Hawaii, they completed their cargoes with 
sandalwood, the whole being exchanged in China for tea, silk, and 
other Chinese goods which could be sold to advantage in the 
United States. This system continued to be followed for many 
years, but soon after 1810 some traders began to deal in sandal- 
wood also as a separate branch of commerce. It is probable 
that Jonathan Winship, Nathan Winship, and William Heath 
Davis were the first to go into the business in this way. 
Aroyalcontract. These three men, each in command ofa ship, 
had been for some years engaged in the fur trade along the 
American coast In codperation with the Russians. They had 
visited the Hawaiian islands a number of times and become 
familiar with their commercial possibilities. In the fall of 1811 
they stopped at the islands on their way to China, each vessel 
taking on board, in addition to its cargo of furs, a considerable 
quantity of sandalwood. Six months later they returned to 
Hawaii and on July 12, 1812, signed an agreement with Kame- 
hameha, by which they were given a monopoly of the business of 
exporting sandalwood and cotton for a period of ten years. 
Kamehameha agreed to gather the sandalwood for the ships and 
in return he was to receive one fourth of the net proceeds of the 
sale of this wood, to be paid to him either in cash or in such 
products and manufactures of China as he might see fit to order. 
One cargo of sandalwood was taken to China under this 
agreement, and then the breaking out of the War of 1812 between 
the United States and England prevented the further carrying out 
of the contract. During the war the Winships and Davis resided 
and made their headquarters on the Hawaiian islands and in spite 
of the danger from English warships succeeded in carrying on a 
profitable trade between China, Hawaii, the South Sea islands, 
and the Russian and Spanish settlements on the coast of America. 
Policy of Kamehameha. Sandalwood became a source of 
wealth to the king. Kamehameha retained in his own hands an 
absolute monopoly of the trade and the business was carried on 


| 112 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


under his direction. None of the other chiefs was allowed to 
share in it and none of them received any benefit from this 
traffic during his lifetime, even in the form of gifts from the king. 
The Chinese, European, and American goods and Spanish dollars 
obtained by him were stored in warehouses, where they remained 
for the most part unused until after his death. To a certain 
extent this policy resulted in a restriction of the sale of sandal- 
wood and in a conservation of the supply ; but it also resulted in 
some dissatisfaction among the chiefs who wished to share in 
the profits. 

In 1816 Kamehameha purchased two sailing vessels, the 
Albatross, formerly commanded by Nathan Winship, and the 
Forester,an English ship, whose name was changed to Kaahumanu, 
in honor of the queen. These ships were paid for with sandal- 
wood. The Kaahumanu was put under the command of Captain 
Alexander Adams, an Englishman in the royal service, and was 
sent the following year to China with a cargo of sandalwood for 
the king. A safe voyage was made, but the port charges and 
other expenses at Canton ate up most of the profits of the enter- 
prise. From this venture Kamehameha learned of the practices 
of civilized governments in the regulation of their ports, and he 
immediately established a set of charges to be paid by ships 
visiting the port of Honolulu. Before his death Kamehameha 
bought two or three other foreign ships in exchange for sandal- 
wood. 

Policy of Liholiho. When Liholiho came to the throne his 
position was not very strong and he found it best, in order to win 
the support of the chiefs, to allow them to share in the sandal- 
wood trade. The king himself had extravagant ideas and the 
chiefs followed his example; they all began to cut sandalwood and 
to buy foreign merchandise without any thought for the future. 
The buying of foreign ships became a sort of mania. In the three 
years Immediately following the death of Kamehameha, Liholiho 
and the principal chiefs bought no less than eight sailing ships, 


SANDALWOOD DAYS 1th A 


at a total cost of more than three hundred thousand dollars. 
European, Chinese, and American merchandise was also pur- 
chased in immense quantities. Certain American trading houses 
made a practice of sending out ships and cargoes for the special 
purpose of selling them to the Hawaiian chiefs. 





From a picture owned by William E. Silsbee. 


Cleopatra’s Barge 


One of the vessels bought by the Hawaiian chiefs and paid for with sandalwood. 
The background is not Hawaiian. 


Kamehameha had always paid at the time of purchase for 
whatever he bought; but after the death of that wise king, 
Liholiho and his chiefs frequently gave promissory notes for large 
amounts, payable in sandalwood. Competition among the 
traders became so keen that they encouraged the chiefs to buy on 
credit if they did not have a supply of sandalwood on hand. One 
trader, in describing how he persuaded Kaumualii to buy another 
ship and cargo after he had already bought one, wrote as follows: 
“TI treated him with every attention and honour, made him 


114 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


handsome presents, and gave him elegant dinners. After much 
trouble and difficulty I succeeded in selling the Brig and Cargo,”’ 
for which Kaumualii gave his note for $77,000 worth of sandal- 
wood. 

Routine of the sandalwood trade. The sandalwood was 
bought and sold by weight, the unit being the pzcul, which 
weighed 1333 pounds. ‘The price depended upon the quality of 
the wood and upon the condition of the Canton market. At the 
islands the traders paid from seven to ten dollars per picul for 
wood which they sold in China at a profit of three or four dollars 
per picul. In the later years the price was not so high. The 
traders paid for the wood not in cash, but in merchandise on which 
they themselves fixed the prices in such a way that the Hawaiians 
were compelled to pay exorbitantly for all the goods they received. 
The traders made two profits, one on the goods they sold and one 
on the sandalwood they bought, and both these profits were made 
at the expense of the Hawaiians. 

At the beginning of the reign of Kamehameha there was an 
abundance of sandalwood on all the largerislands. It grew on the 
mountains, and, because there were no roads and no beasts of 
burden, it was very hard to get it down to the seashore for the 
ships. Several travelers have described the way in which this 
was done. One of these visitors, who was at the islands in 1822, 
says that the sandalwood “is brought from the woods in logs 
three or four feet long, and from two to seven or eight inches in 
diameter. There being no carriages on the island, these logs are 
carried down to the seaside on the heads and shoulders of men, 
women, and children (for all bear a part in the busy scene) and 
lodged in large storehouses, to be ready for shipment. .. . For 
conveying their sandalwood from the distant parts of Woahoo and 
the other Sandwich Islands to the port of Hannah-rourah, about 
twelve small brigs and schooners are now employed.” 

At one place this traveler found the chief “in high good 
humour, . . . busily employed in weighing the sandal-wood on 


SANDALWOOD DAYS 115 


the beach, and shipping it on board the two vessels which lay in 
the roadstead. At a little distance from his own hut was a large 
storehouse, not less than fifty feet in length by thirty in breadth, 
and about thirty feet high, where the sandal-wood was piled up 
and kept ready for embarkation; work people of both sexes and 
all ages were employed in carrying it down to the beach. The 
chief and his attendants directed their operations; and one 
confidential man, whose duty it was to see fair play, stood over the 
weighing machine with the American captain for whose ship the 
freight was destined.”’ 

Another visitor, who made a tour around the island of Hawaii 
in 1823, saw the collection of sandalwood going on in several 
places. In the district of Hilo he saw the chief “‘ and three or 
four hundred people, returning with sandal wood, which they had 
been cutting in the mountains. Each man carried two or three 
pieces, from four to six feet long and about three inches in diame- 
ter. The bark and sap [wood] had been chipped off with small 
adzes. ... It is brought down to the beach in pieces ranging 
from a foot to eighteen inches in diameter and six or eight feet 
long to small sticks not more than an inch thick and a foot and 
a half long.” 

While stopping in Kohala this traveler and his companions 
were wakened one morning before daylight “‘ by vast multitudes 
of people passing through the district from Waimea with sandal 
wood. . .. There were between two and three thousand men, 
carrying each from one to six pieces of sandal wood, according to 
their size and weight. It was generally tied on their backs by 
bands of tz leaves, passed over the shoulders and under the arms, 
and fastened across their breasts. When they had deposited 
the wood at the storehouse, they departed to their respective 
homes.’ 

Effect of the sandalwood trade. Although nearly all of the 
common people were required to spend a great deal of their time 
in cutting sandalwood and carrying it down to the seashore, the 


116 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


supply obtained in this way was not large enough to pay for all 
the ships and foreign goods which were bought, and therefore in. 
the course of a few years the king and chiefs piled up a heavy 
debt, the extent of which they did not know. How this debt was 
finally paid will be told in a later chapter. 

The sandalwood trade also had a bad effect upon the common 
people. They had to spend so much of their time cutting and 


a d eons oe 


nia yi Z Gye. nee 
Ve oo Ge [BS See ae 


ee: CAG Ore Seer Lye se 


Pey es vate Peg, orz- eek he Sat 
A ee os A vere yes woe Fx 


ee ye 2c 


Gag thee 


é a 
Zz Sian, 2 . > Paula Hasn 


esc nt acteraniate 









ke 2 
From the original in the Archives of Hawait. 


A sandalwood note signed by Kalanimoku (Karaimoku) and Boki (Poki) 


carrying this wood that they could not pay as much attention as 
before to their ordinary duties. Agriculture was neglected and 
the food supply was reduced, so that there was much suffering on 
this account. The hardships endured by the natives while work- 
ing in the sandalwood forests also caused much sickness. As a 
result, many of the people died. 

The reckless way in which the trees were cut destroyed the 
forests. Very little effort was made to preserve the young trees 
or to replace those which were cut down. Ina few years sandal- 
wood almost disappeared from the islands. Even to-day, a 


SANDALWOOD DAYS Bly 


hundred years after the trade was at its height, only a few small 
groves are to be found. 

Coming of the whalers. With the destruction of the sandal- 
wood forests the Hawaiian chiefs lost an important source of 
revenue. But before the sandalwood trade was entirely ended, 
the whaling ships began to visit the islands for the purpose of 
resting from their hard voyages and buying supplies of various 
kinds, especially food stuffs, much as the fur traders had done 
only a few years before. ‘The first whalers arrived about 1820, 
and within a few years a large number of whaleships visited the 
islands twice each year, thus opening up a new and important 
source of revenue and keeping the people of the islands in contact 
with the civilized world. 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


1. Copy in your notebook and put a plus sign before the true 
statements: 
a. Sandalwood was carried from Hawaii to America by 
American traders. 
b. Kamehameha shared his sandalwood profits with the chiefs. 
c. Kamehameha put the money he received from the sandal- 
wood trade in the bank. 
d. Liholiho allowed the chiefs to share in this trade. 
2. Make a list of the good results of the sandalwood trade; of the 
bad results. Compare them. Which were greater? 
3. Look up the word conservation. Were the sandalwood forests 
conserved ? 
4. What natural resources should be conserved? Do we believe in 
conservation in Hawaii to-day? Give proof. 
5. Did the United States believe in conservation at the time of the 
sandalwood trade? Give proof of your answer. 


For FURTHER READING 


Turum, T. G.— “The Sandalwood Trade of Early Hawaii,” in 
Hawatian Annual for 1905, pages 43-74. 


XI 


FOREIGN RELATIONS 


First foreign agent. The same year that saw the coming of the 
missionaries to Hawaii saw also the appointment of the first agent 
to represent a foreign government at these islands. In Septem- 
ber, 1820, John Coffin Jones was appointed by President Monroe 
to be “‘Agent of the United States for Commerce and Seamen ”’ 
and to have general supervision of American interests at the 
Hawaiian islands. Mr. Jones was a trader who had visited the 
islands several times and was familiar with the people and their 
language. His appointment was an indication of the importance 
which American commercial interests had attained. 

Relations with England. Up to this time the official relations 
of the Hawaiian government with foreign powers, so far as it 
could be said to have any official relations, had been exclusively 
with England. The king and people looked upon Kamehameha’s 
agreement with Vancouver as placing the islands under the pro- 
tection of Great Britain. This idea was repeated by Kameha- 
meha in a letter which he sent to the king of England in 1810. 
Nor is it strange that the Hawaiian people should feel this way. 
The first foreign ships-of-war that came to Hawaii were those 
commanded by the English explorers, Cook, Vancouver, and 
Broughton. ‘The principal advisers of the king were Englishmen 
— Young, Davis, Beckley, Adams. 

Vancouver had promised Kamehameha that a ship-of-war 
armed with brass guns would be sent to him. Kamehameha in 
1810 reminded King George III of this promise, and in 1816 the 
governor of New South Wales wrote that he had received orders 

118 


FOREIGN RELATIONS 119 


from England to build such a ship and send it to Kamehameha. 
A long delay followed and the promised vessel, a small schooner 
called the Prince Regent, did not arrive until 1822, when it was 
presented to Liholiho. In acknowledgment of this gift Liholiho 
wrote a letter to King George IV, in which he said, “‘ The whole of 
these islands having been conquered by my father, I have suc- 
ceeded to the government of them and beg leave to place them all 
under the protection of your most excellent Majesty.” 

Liholiho’s visit to England. In spite of these political relations 
with England, Liholiho could not help noticing the very rapid 
growth of American interests: first, American fur traders; next, 
American missionaries; and finally, a great swarm of American 
whalers. There is reason to believe that the king became some- 
what suspicious of American designs on the islands and it is 
probable that he was afraid of the Russians. For these reasons 
he wished to make sure that the British government would pro- 
tect him in time of danger. He also wanted to travel abroad and 
see those foreign countries of which he had heard so much and 
which had been visited by so many of his people. At all events, 
in the fall of 1823, he announced his determination to visit 
England. It was thought that he would also visit the United 
States before his return to Hawai. 

Before his departure a council of the chiefs was held, at which 
Liholiho named as heir apparent to the throne his younger 
brother Kauikeaouli and placed the government, during his 
absence, in the hands of Kaahumanu as regent, with Kalanimoku 
as prime minister. 

Passage to England was engaged in an English whaleship, 
’ Aigle, commanded by Captain Valentine Starbuck. The royal 
party included King Liholiho, Queen Kamamalu, Governor 
Boki of Oahu and his wife Liliha, the chiefs Kekuanaoa, Kapihe, 
Manuia, James Young (one of the sons of John Young), and 
John Rives, a Frenchman who had been the king’s secretary. It 
was not at first intended that Rives should go, but he boarded the 


120 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


ship at the moment of departure and the king allowed him to 
remain on board. He served for a time as interpreter. 

Sailing from Honolulu November 27, 1823, ? Aigle arrived at 
Portsmouth, England, May 22, 1824. On learning of the arrival 


Theatre Royal, Covent Garden, 





om eA AS 


HIS MAJESTY | 


Having been pleased most graciously to Command, that His BOX should 
he prepared for the Reception of those ILLUSTRIOUS VISTPORS, the 


King and Queen 


OF THE 


Sawwich 
ISLANDS, 


The Publick is most respectfully informed, that they will honour =i ¢ 
THEATRE with their Presence 


This Evening, MONDAY, May 31, 1524, 


When will be performed the Tragick Play of 


PIZARRO. 


PERUVEI 
Altaliba, Mee EGERTON. 
Rolla, - - Mr. YOUNG, . 
Fernando, Miss VEDY, Orozembo, Mr. CHAPMAN, Haa'pa, Mo. BLANCHARD, 
Topac, Master LONGHURST, Huscah, Mr. NORRIS. 
Orano, Mr. MEARS, Huarin, Mr HEATH, Capal, Mr St TTON, Rama, Mr. COL LE ay 
Cora, Miss LACY 
Priests, Virgias, Batrons: in 


THE TEMPLE OF THE. SUN 


High Priest, Mr. TAYLOR, 


Pizarro, Mr. BENNETT, Alonzo, Mr. ABBOTT, 
Yas Casas. Mr. EVANS, Almagro Mr. HORREBOW, Davila, Mr. PARSLOF, - 
Gonzalo, Mr. ATKINS, Valytrde, Mr CLAREMONT, Goniez, MrRYALS, Pedro, Mr. MASON, 
Sancho, Mr, LOUIS, Sentinel, or LW ailee 
Elvire, Mrs. OGILVIE, 
To which will be added (for the 24th time). a 


XNewGrand Melo-Dramatick Egyptian Romantick Tale of Enchantment, called 


THE SPIRITS _ 


From the original in the Archives of Hawai. 


Handbill of theater attended by King Liholiho and Queen Kamamalu 
while in London 





FOREIGN RELATIONS 121 


of the distinguished visitors the British government appointed the 
Hon. Frederick Byng to have charge of the party while they 
remained in England. In London the Hawaiian king and his 
attendants created something of a sensation. They were lavishly 
entertained and visited various places of interest, including the 
parks and Westminster Abbey. On one night they occupied the 
royal box at Covent Garden theater, where they saw the play 
‘* Pizarro.” 

Death of the king and queen. On June to Manuia was taken 
ill with the measles and within a few days the whole company was 
stricken with the same disease in a violent form. ‘They were 
attended by the physicians of the king of England and all soon 
recovered except the king and queen. Kamamalu’s lungs were 
affected and on July 8 she passed away. Up to this time it was 
thought that Liholiho would recover, but his grief so depressed 
him that he grew worse and died only six days later. 

The illness of the Hawaiians had prevented an interview with 
King George before the death of Liholiho; but as soon as pos- 
sible after that event they were received in audience at Windsor 
Castle. The British king expressed to the survivors his sorrow at 
the death of their king and queen and his interest in the pros- 
perity of their native land. In the course of the interview he told 
them that the Hawaiian government should manage the internal 
affairs of the island and that the British government would pro- 
tect them from foreign dangers. As a mark of respect to the 
Hawaiian people and partly in order to counteract American 
influence at the islands, the British government ordered that the 
bodies of King Liholiho and Queen Kamamalu should be placed 
in suitable coffins and conveyed to Honolulu in the forty-six-gun 
frigate Blonde, commanded by Captain the Right Honorable 
(George Anson) Lord Byron, a cousin of Lord Byron, the poet. 

Visit of Lord Byron. The Blonde, carrying the bodies of the 
king and queen and the surviving members of the royal party, 
arrived at Lahaina May 4, 1825, and at Honolulu two days later. 


122 A HISTORY OF. HAWAII 


News of the death of Liholiho and Kamamalu had already reached 
the islands and the return of their dead bodies was the signal for an 
outburst of wailing, by which the people were accustomed to 
express their grief. Boki and his companions told Kaahumanu, 
Kalanimoku, and the other chiefs and people all that had oc- 
curred during their trip abroad. Boki in particular advised his 
fellow countrymen to pay diligent heed to the new learning 
and the Christian religion, which had made England the civilized 
country that it was. 

On the following day Lord Byron was received in state by the 
regent and chiefs at the house of Kalanimoku, at which time he 
made a speech expressing the good wishes of the king of England. 
A number of presents were distributed: a gold watch to Kalani- 
moku, a silver teapot to Kaahumanu, and a dress suit of the 
Windsor uniform with sword, hat, and feather to the young 
Prince Kauikeaouli, who was to succeed his brother Liholiho as 
king. 

On the eleventh of May the bodies of the king and queen were 
landed from the Blonde. ‘‘ The ponderous and elegant triple 
coffins, of lead, mahogany, and oak, covered with crimson velvet, 
richly studded with gilt nails and ornaments, and weighing 
together about 2,200 lb., were placed upon two wagons covered 
with black tapa, in the form of a hearse, and drawn by forty chiefs 
of the middle and lower ranks.” They were taken first to the 
church, where a Christian funeral service was held, and then to a 
house where they were kept until a proper tomb could be con- 
structed or them. 

The chiefs held a national council on June 6 and confirmed 
Kauikeaouli as king with the title of Kamehameha III. Since 
the new king was only twelve years old, the government con- 
tinued to be in charge of Kaahumanu and Kalanimoku. It was 
resolved that Kauikeaouli should receive a Christian education. - 
The chiefs adopted the principle that land should descend from 
father to son, instead of going back to the new king for reallot- 


FOREIGN RELATIONS 123 


ment at the death of each ruler. This principle of hereditary 
succession had been introduced by Kamehameha I, but Liholiho 
had shown a tendency to depart fromit. Lord Byron was present 
at this council and gave the chiefs some good advice regarding the 
government of the 
country. He also ex- 
pressed his approval 
of the work of the 
American missiona- 
ries. 

The day after this 
council the Blonde 
sailed to Hilo. That 
harbor was surveyed 
and was afterwards 
called ‘“‘ Byron’s 
Bay.”’ The volcano 
of Kilauea was vis- 
ited and various sci- 
entific observations 
were made. Before 
returning to England 
Lord Byron erected a 
monument at Keala- 
kekua Bay to the 
memory of Captain 
James Cook. 

British consul ap- 
pointed. While the Hawaiian king and his chiefs were in Eng- 
land the British government appointed Richard Charlton as 
consular agent to have charge of British interests in Hawail 
and at the Society Islands. Like Mr. Jones, the American 
agent, Consul Charlton was a trader who had business interests 
in the Hawaiian islands and had visited them several times. 


































































































CL 


ite ( 




















PN AMA ROM 


Kamehameha III in 1825 


124 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


He returned to Honolulu shortly before the arrival of the 
Blonde. 

End of the kingdom of Kauai. During the absence of Liholiho 
in England an important change took place at the islands. The 
kingdom of Kauai was brought to an end. Kamehameha had 
allowed that island to continue as a separate but tributary state, 
with Kaumualii as king. It seems that when Liholiho came to the 
throne he was afraid that Kaumualii might try to become inde- 
pendent again as he had done at the time of the Russian episode. 
Kamehameha had never visited Kauai. Liholiho determined to 
do so in order to make sure of Kaumualii’s loyalty. Accordingly, 
in July, 1821, he went over to that island. The trip was rather a 
wild and reckless one, exposing the king to all sorts of dangers. 
But he was royally received by Kaumualii, who freely placed all 
his possessions at his disposal. Liholiho confirmed him as 
tributary king of Kauai, but when he himself returned to Hono- 
lulu he took Kaumualii along with him practically as a prisoner. 
At Oahu the Kauai king was persuaded or compelled to take 
Kaahumanu as his wife. He continued to have the title of king ; 
but from this time on he had very little real authority. 

Kaumualii died in May, 1824, leaving his kingdom to Liholiho, 
with the provision that the land should continue in possession of 
the chiefs then occupying it. A weak governor was appointed 
and some dissatisfied chiefs soon raised a rebellion, with George 
Kaumualil, who had turned out to be a worthless fellow, as its 
head. The rebels had little chance of success, but several battles 
were fought before they were finally completely defeated. Kauai 
was then made a part of the Hawaiian kingdom on the same basis 
as the other islands, and Kaikioewa, a strong chief, was appointed 
governor. 

Growth of American interests. The sandalwood trade was 
almost wholly in the hands of Americans and as one result of it 
the chiefs had gotten heavily in debt to these traders. As time 
went by the traders found it more and more difficult to collect the 


FOREIGN RELATIONS 125 


amounts which they claimed were due them. The American 
whaling interests were also becoming important. The first 
whalers arrived about the same time as the missionaries, and they 
increased in number from year to year. In the course of three 
months in the spring of 1826 nearly forty American whaleships 
visited Honolulu, representing a value of nearly two million 
dollars. Many of the sailors deserted’ at the islands, causing 
trouble not only to the ships but also to the Hawaiian government 
because of their disorderly conduct. Finally the owners of the 
whaleships appealed to the government of the United States to 
send a warship to Hawaii to prevent these evils. 

Visits of American warships. In response to these appeals the 
United States ship-of-war Dolphin, in command of Lieutenant 
John Percival, was sent to the islands in the spring of 1826, 
remaining about three months, In some respects the visit of the 
Dolphin did much harm, but Lieutenant Percival was of great 
service to the whalers in preventing the desertion of sailors and 
in other ways. He also discussed the matter of the sandalwood 
debts and the chiefs agreed that all the debts should be con- 
sidered as one national debt and paid as soon as possible. 

In the fall of the same year the United States sloop-of-war 
Peacock came to the islands for a stay of about three months. 
The commander of this vessel, Captain Thomas ap! Catesby 
Jones, showed a friendly spirit toward the Hawaiians and greatly 
encouraged the missionaries in the work they were doing. He 
protected the interests of the whaleships and took up again with 
the chiefs the matter of the debts. A meeting was held at which 
the traders presented their claims. These were discussed and a 
few of them were not allowed; but the chiefs finally acknowledged 
themselves indebted to the amount of $150,000 or $200,000, which 
they agreed to pay as soon as the sandalwood could be gathered. 
The chiefs then passed a regulation requiring every man in the 
islands to bring half a picul of sandalwood or pay four Spanish 

1 Ap is Welsh, like the Gaelic Mac, for son of. 


126 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


dollars and every woman to contribute a smaller amount as a tax 
to be applied on this debt. 

First treaty with a foreign nation. Captain Jones, on behalf 
of the United States, made a treaty with the Hawaiian govern- 
ment. It provided for perpetual peace and friendship between 
the two countries and for the protection of American commerce 
on the islands. This was the first treaty ever negotiated by the 
Hawaiian government with a foreign power. It was signed 
December 23, 1826, and though it was never ratified by the 
United States government it continued to be respected by the 
Hawaiian kingdom for many years, until another treaty was 
concluded between the two nations. 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


1. Here are some reasons for Liholiho’s visit to England. Copy 
them in your notebook and put a plus sign before the one you think 
Liholiho considered the most important. Put a minus sign before the 
one you consider most important. Give reasons for your choice in 
each case. 

a. To obtain for Hawaii the protection of England. 
b. To see the world. 

c. To study the English form of government. 

d. For pleasure. 

2. Give reasons for linking the name of Lord Byron with that of 
Vancouver. 

3. Give evidence from this chapter to show (1) the increase of 
British influence in Hawaii; (2) the increase of American influence. 

4. In what way did the coming of the first whaleships give promise 
of both prosperity and trouble? 


For FURTHER READING 


Diary of Andrew Bloxam, Naturalist of the “ Blonde,’ on Her Trip 
from England to the Hawaiian Islands, 1824-25. Bernice P. 
Bishop Museum, Special Publication No. to. 


XIT 


PROGRESS OF CIVILIZATION 


In the twenty years following the introduction of Christianity 
a remarkable change took place in the Hawaiian islands. This 
was mainly due to the civilizing influence of the new religion and 
the new education that came with it; but the growth of com- 
merce and the development of industries also contributed much 
to the general result. 

A fight for law and order. For many years before the coming of 
the missionaries there had been foreign traders and some foreign 
residents at the islands, but these foreigners had not done much 
to improve the condition of the natives. There were some excel- 
lent men among them, who had introduced many of the ways of 
civilization; but there were some others of a less desirable class. 
Taken as a whole their influence was not for the best. From 
year to year a good many sailors deserted from the whaleships. 
It used to be said that these men left their consciences behind 
when they started out on a whaling voyage. At any rate the 
most of them were pretty rough characters and their conduct was 
not what it should have been. The very first law printed in 
Hawaii (1822) was made for the purpose of stopping the disorders 
caused by these foreign sailors. Their example had a bad effect 
on the Hawaiians. 

About 1825, as a result of the teachings of the missionaries, the 
chiefs passed some very strict laws in an effort to stop the evils 
that had been growing up, particularly in Honolulu and Lahaina. 
Many of the foreign sailors, supported at times by the captains of 
their ships, tried by threats and violence to prevent these laws 


127 


NOTICE. 


_S Io 


WHEREAS disturbances have arisen 


of late on shore, the peace broken, and the inhabitants annoyed, by the 
crews of different vessels having liberty granted them on shore, it is hereby 
ordered by His Majesty the King, that in future, should any seamen of what- 
ever vessel, be found riotous or disturbing the peace in any manner, he or 
they shall be immediately secured in the Fort, where he or they shall be 
detained until thirty dollars is paid for the release of cach offender. 

Masters of vessels are informed that all deserters shall be returned to their 
respective commanders. No seaman shall be left on shore without permis: 
sion from the King. 

DONE at Woahoo, this 8th day of March, 1822. 

By ordcr of His Majesty, 
JOHN RIVES, Sec’ys 


NOTICE. 


—D oS 


HIS Majesty the King, desirous of 


preserving the peace and tranquillity of his dominions, has ordered that any- 
foreigner residing on his Islands, who shall be guilty of molesting strangers, 
or in any way disturbing thé peace, shall on complaint be confined in the 
Fort, and thence sent from the Islands by the first conveyance. 
DONE at Woahoo, this 8th day of March, 1822. 
By order of His Majesty, 
JOHN RIVES, Sec’y. 





Printed at the Mission Press, Wouhvo 


The first law printed in Hawaii 


PROGRESS OF CIVILIZATION 129 


from being enforced. ‘The hostility of the foreigners was directed 
largely against the missionaries. In October, 1825, and in the 
same month in 1826 and 1827, the crews of whaling vessels 
threatened the life of Rev. William Richards at Lahaina and in 
the latter year fired several cannon shots at his house. In 
January, 1826, the crew of the United States ship-of-war Dolphin, 
commanded by Lieutenant John Percival, attacked the house of 
Kalanimoku and the mission premises at Honolulu. The chiefs 
stuck to their position, in spite of all this violence, and in Decem- 
ber, 1827, the king published a series of written laws even more 
stringent than the earlier ones. 

The end of Boki. After his return from England in 1825 Boki 
resumed his place as governor of Oahu and was appointed per- 
sonal guardian of the young king. In 1827 his brother Kalani- 
moku died. Boki seems to have had an ambition to succeed 
Kalanimoku as prime minister. He was also jealous of Kaahu- 
manu and her power, and, since Kaahumanu favored the mis- 
sionaries, Boki favored those who were opposed to the mission- 
aries. This led him into bad company and he fell into habits of 
dissipation and extravagance and tried to influence the king in 
the same direction. He even aimed to overthrow Kaahumanu 
and take her place as regent of the kingdom. About the begin- 
ning of 1829 Boki gathered a large number of followers about him 
at Waikiki and seemed determined to start a revolt. But he was 
finally persuaded to abandon his plans. He had gotten badly 
into debt, however, and this caused him much trouble. 

Toward the end of the year 1829 a ship from Australia brought 
to Honolulu a report of an island in the South Pacific said to be 
rich in sandalwood. Boki looked upon this as an opportunity 
to get out of debt. So he fitted out two vessels, the Kamehameha 
and the Becket, took on board nearly five hundred of his followers, 
and on December 2, 1829, sailed from Honolulu in search of the 
sandalwood island. Eight months later the Becket, with twenty 
survivors, returned from the south. The Kamehameha never 


130 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


came back and is supposed to have been lost at sea with Boki and 
the greater part of his followers. Disease and hunger destroyed 
most of those who had gone on the Becket. 

The passing of Kaahumanu. During these troubled years 
the regent, Kaahumanu, was at the head of the government. 
She was a powerful supporter of the missionaries and gave 
encouragement to every effort for the education and civilization 
of the people. But in June, 1832, Kaahumanu died at her home 
in Manoa Valley, near Honolulu. Kinau succeeded her as 
kuhina nui, with the title of Kaahumanu II. Up to this time 
conditions had been surely though slowly improving, in spite of 
the course of Boki and a few other chiefs and the bad conduct of 
many of the foreigners. Kinau did what she could to continue the 
policy of her predecessor but she did not have the commanding 
ability or the political strength of Kaahumanu. A reaction set 
in and for a year or two conditions were worse than ever. The 
young king fell more and more under the influence of those who 
were opposed to the American missionaries. 

In the spring of 1833 the king, who was then in his twentieth 
year, announced that he was of age and intended to take charge 
of the government himself. Many people thought that he would 
remove Kinau and appoint someone in her place from the anti- 
missionary party, but instead of that he confirmed Kinau as 
kuhina nui. After 1833 conditions gradually improved. 

The great revival. The Mission felt the effect of all these 
changes. While Kaahumanu lived, her powerful influence was a 
great help, but after her death the missionaries found their work 
much more difficult. During the years of the reaction the church 
congregations dwindled away, the increase of members was 
retarded, and many of the schools were deserted. But this was 
only a temporary loss. Between 1825 and 1840 six companies of 
new workers came from America to reinforce the Mission. New 
stations were established on all the islands, and the work of 
preaching and teaching was vigorously carried on. This ener- 


PROGRESS OF CIVILIZATION rer 


getic effort produced an abundant harvest. Statistics show that 
in the first seventeen years of the Mission only 1,259 persons were 
admitted into the Protestant church in the Hawaiian islands; 
but during the next three years (1838-1840) more than 20,000 
were admitted. This rapid increase was the result of a great 
religious revival which swept over the islands during those years. 

Progress of education. The missionaries started schools 
within a little while after their arrival and it was not long before 
these schools became very popular. As the brighter pupils 
learned to read, they were sent to open schools in the neighboring 
country districts. One of the missionaries has given an interest- 
ing account of the way in which these schools spread throughout 
the islands. 

“A young man named Moo, pipe-lighter to Hoapili, was 
regarded as rather a bright scholar; Hoapili sent him to Hawaii 
to be a teacher for the district of Puna. . . . He took a central 
post and collected a school. As soon as his scholars had made a 
little proficiency, he sent out the best of them, to the right hand 
and to the left, to be teachers of other schools; and he continued 
this course till every village of Puna was furnished with a teacher. 
A process something after this sort was simultaneously going on 
from Hawaii to Kauai.” 

As early as 1826 there were four hundred native teachers, and 
ten years after the coming of the missionaries it was estimated 
that one third of the entire population was enrolled in the schools. 
Most of the pupils learned to read, part of them learned to write, 
and a few learned the first principles of arithmetic. One strange 
thing about these early schools was the fact that all but avery 
few of the pupils were grown people. In 1829 on the island of 
Oahu only about one tenth of the pupils were children. The 
teachers had to give so much time to the grown people who wished 
to learn the palapala that they could give very little attention to 
children. Parents did not want their children to go to school 
until they themselves had learned to read. The children, too, 


12 


A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


were wild and restless and did not like to go to school any more 


than children do nowadays. 


This first school system reached its greatest development 


about 1832. 
16 





Hes ilio ia 


He apectntl aha 











Es na pokii; e akahai; e akahele; mai 
hailiili; mai kuamuamu; mai hakaka 
me ka inaina; mai nuku aku kekahi i 
kekahis e waiho i na hua hilahila. 

Mai huhu hala ole aku ia hai. Ua 
huhu hala ole o Kainai kona kaikai- 
na ia Abela, a pepehi iho la ia ia. 

Mai hoomaewaewa iki aku. Ua 
hoomaewaewa kekahi poe kamali 1 
ke kaula maikai ia FElisai, aua make 
lakou ina holoholona hihiu hae; ka- 
nahakuimamalua ka i make. 

i mai la Tesu, Ua hoopuni mai na 
iio ia’?u, ua o mai Jakou j ko’?u mau 
luna, a me ko’u mau wawae. 

A page from the first book printed for children 
in the Hawaiian language 





to bring the children into the schools. 


organized at the various mission stations. 


By that time most of the people who were interested 


had gotten all the 
knowledge the native 
teachers could give 
them. It will be re- 
membered also that it 
was about 1833 that 
the general reaction 
against the mission- 
aries became most 
severe. The schools 
therefore began to 
dwindle away. They 
were not all given 
up, but many of the 
schoolhouses were 
abandoned entirely 
and fell into decay. 
But before this time 
the missionaries had 
begun to develop a 
better system of edu- 
cation. In the first 
place, from about 
1828 they began to 
make a special effort 


Classes for children were 


A first book for 


children was published in December, 1829, and a copy given to 


each boy and girl who came to school. 


The missionaries tried to 


interest the chiefs and the parents in the education of the young, 


PROGRESS OF CIVILIZATION 133 


and in 1835 Governor Hoapili of Maui proclaimed a law requiring 
all children over four years of age to attend school. 

In the second place, the missionaries themselves gave more 
time to the work of education. At all of the mission stations 
classes were organized for the purpose of training better teachers 
for the common schools. A number of teachers were sent out 
from the United States by the American Board to have charge 
of this branch of missionary work. 

In the third place, a high school and several boarding schools 
were established for the purpose of giving more thorough training 
to boys and girls who gave particular promise of future usefulness. 
The first and most important of these was the high school or 
seminary for boys at Lahainaluna, Maui. ‘This school was begun 
in September, 1831, with Rev. Lorrin Andrews as principal. 
There was a hard struggle to get it firmly established; but in a 
few years substantial buildings and good equipment were pro- 
vided, and several more missionaries were assigned to the school 
as instructors. In 1839 the faculty of the school included three 
missionaries, a missionary teacher, and a printer. In that year 
there were about sixty students. This school was expected to be 
the “ grand nursery of education in the islands,” and its history 
has in large measure justified the expectation. 

A boarding school for boys was started at Hilo in 1836 by 
Rev. David B. Lyman. At this place much attention was given 
to manual training and agriculture. One of the principal objects 
of the Hilo boarding school was to fit boys for the high school at 
Lahainaluna. In 1838 Mrs. Titus Coan opened a boarding school 
for girls at Hilo, which continued for about eight years. The 
most important school for girls was the Central Female Boarding 
Seminary at Wailuku, Maui. This was begun in 1837 under the 
direction of Rev. J.S. Green. One of its purposes was to bring 
up a class of young women who would be proper helpmeets for 
the young men who were being educated at Lahainaluna and who 
would set a good example in the making of Christian homes. 


134 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


By 1840, therefore, the missionaries had developed a school 
system which included three kinds of schools: (1) the boarding 
schools which have just been mentioned; (2) schools at the 
mission stations, in part for the training of teachers, and in part 
for the education of children; (3) common schools, scattered 
throughout the islands and taught by native teachers. Between 
1835 and 1840 there was a great improvement in the common 
schools. Better teachers were provided from’ among the gradu- 
ates of Lahainaluna and from those trained in the station schools. 
Better schoolhouses were built in many places. A better course 
of study was introduced, including reading, writing, arithmetic, 
geography, and sacred history. In 1840 there were about 
15,000 pupils in the schools and most of these were children. 

Three other important schools, of a special character, were 
begun during this period. One was a school at Honolulu for the 
education of the young chiefs, in charge of Mr. and Mrs. A. S. 
Cooke, whose services were given by the Mission at the request of 
the older chiefs. It was a family school with about a dozen 
pupils. Mr. and Mrs. Cooke began their work as teachers of the 
young chiefs in 1839 and in the spring of 1840 the school was 
installed in a new house built for the purpose. Among the pupils 
were four boys and one girl who afterwards became rulers of the 
kingdom. In later years other children were admitted and the 
school came to be called the Royal School. Under that name it 
still exists. 
~ The Oahu Charity School was opened at Honolulu in January, 
1833, for the education of the children of foreign residents who 
had married native women. Money for its support and for the 
building of a schoolhouse was raised by subscription from the 
white residents and from officers of ships. Among the trustees 
first elected were the American and British consuls and several 
well-known merchants. The first teacher was Mr. Andrew 
Johnstone, one of the American missionaries. For several years 
this was the only school in the islands for English-speaking 


PROGRESS OF CIVILIZATION 135 


children. Pupils were sent to it from Spanish California, from 
Kamchatka, in East Russia, Asia, and from some of the islands of 
the Pacific. In after years, by successive changes, it became the 
present Pohukaina School in Honolulu. 





The Oahu Charity School 


In 1841, after several years’ discussion, the missionaries voted to 
establish a school at Punahou, near Honolulu, for the education of 
their children, and the Rev. Daniel Dole was appointed the first 
principal. The school was opened in 1842 in a building with 
adobe walls and thatched roof. Such was the humble beginning 


136 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


of one of Hawaii’s most important schools. Within a few years 
other children were admitted besides those of the missionaries. 
In 1849 the school received a charter from the government and in 
1853 a second charter, which gave it the title of Oahu College by 
which it was known for many years. Recently the school has 
resumed the earlier name of Punahou School. 

Legal and constitutional development. During the reign of 
Kamehameha I his word was supreme and he made such laws as 
he saw fit. The best known of his laws was the Mamalahoe 
Kanawat. During the reign of Kamehameha II and the early 
years of Kamehameha III the council of chiefs became more im- 
portant ; new laws were generally talked over and passed by them 
and then approved by the king and the kuhina nut. 

Before the coming of the printing press to Hawaii, laws were 
published by word of mouth by heralds officially appointed for 
that purpose. Even after the introduction of printing the oral 
method was still used to some extent. ‘Thus, in 1824, Kaahu- 
manu proclaimed a series of laws in that way at Lahaina. They 
forbade murder, theft, boxing or fighting, desecration of the 
Sabbath by work or play, and added that “‘ when schools are 
established, all the people shall learn the palapala.”’ The first 
printed law was published in March, 1822, and related to disturb- 
ances created by sailors and other foreigners. In 1825 another 
law was printed containing regulations for the port of Honolulu, 
and in 1827 the king had a set of laws printed against various 
crimes. From this time on most of the laws were printed, and 
they were also revised and improved from time to time. 

Before the coming of the foreigners, the laws were few and 
simple, since the life of the people was not very complicated. 
But after traders began to visit the islands in large numbers, and 
particularly after foreigners came to live in Hawaii, the king and 
chiefs saw that it was necessary to have laws to regulate the new 
conditions created by the haoles. Some of the foreigners objected 
to the laws that were passed; some even declared that they did 


PROGRESS OF CIVILIZATION 137 


not have to obey them and that the king and chiefs had no right 
to apply their laws to foreigners. These people caused much 
trouble for many years. Between 1830 and 1840 it began to look 
as though the very independence of the Hawaiian kingdom 
depended on getting a satisfactory adjustment of the relations 
between the natives (the Hawaiian government and people) and 
the foreigners. Even the better class of foreigners sometimes 
felt that the Hawaiian government was rather unsystematic and 
arbitrary. 

The king and chiefs wanted to do what was right, but they did 
not have knowledge and experience enough to know what was the 
best way in which to deal with these new conditions. They tried 
to find out how foreign governments managed their affairs and 
how a civilized government should be organized. ‘They received 
a great deal of good advice (and some bad) from the captains of 
foreign warships and from travelers and traders. In 1836 they 
wrote a letter to the Missionary Board in the United States asking 
for a teacher to instruct them in matters of government. Finally, 
in 1838, they invited Rev. William Richards to become their 
teacher and interpreter. Mr. Richards resigned from the Mis- 
sion and accepted the invitation. He began his new duties by 
delivering a series of lectures to the chiefs on the science of 
government. From that time until his death in 1847 Mr. 
Richards labored unceasingly in the interest of the Hawaiian 
people and their rulers. His work and his influence were of very 
great importance during this critical period of Hawaiian history. 

In 1839 the king and chiefs took a long step forward by adopt- 
ing a declaration of rights and a set of laws on the subject of 
property and taxation. In this document they declared that 
‘“‘in making laws for a nation it is by no means proper to enact 
laws for the protection of rulers only, without also providing 
protection for their subjects ; neither is it proper to enact laws to 
enrich the chiefs only, without regard to the enriching of their 
subjects also. . . . Protection is hereby secured to the persons 


138 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


of all the people, together with their lands, their building lots, and 
all their property, and nothing whatever shall be taken from any 
individual, except by express provision of the laws. Whatever 
chief shall perseveringly act in violation of this constitution shall 
no longer remain a chief of the Sandwich Islands, and the same 
shall be true of the governors, officers, and all land agents.”’ 

Before this time the common people had practically no rights, 
and the land which they occupied, their property, and their labor 
were all subject to the arbitrary will of the chiefs. 

On October 8, 1840, the native rulers promulgated a formal 
constitution, in which the declaration of rights, or constitution, of 
1839 was included. By the constitution of 1840 the king volun- 
tarily gave up part of the absolute power which he had previously 
possessed. It provided that the executive authority should be 
in the hands of the king, the premier (kuhina nui), and the four 
governors who were really agents of the king. The legislative 
power was vested in the council of chiefs (commonly called the 
House of Nobles), of which the king and premier were members, 
and in certain representatives chosen by the people. At first 
very few representatives were elected by the people; elective 
representation was a new idea and it took a long time for the 
people to get used toit. The legislative body met annually, the 
two houses sitting separately or together, as they saw fit. New 
laws had to be passed by both houses of the legislature and ap- 
proved by the king and premier. A supreme court was provided, 
to consist of the king, premier, and four other judges chosen by 
the representative body. Inferior judges were appointed by 
the governors. 

Growth of commerce. Between 1820 and 1840 there was a 
remarkable development of trade and commerce on the Hawaiian 
islands. In 1820 the sandalwood trade was the principal business 
of the Sandwich islands, but that died out in the course of the 
next ten or fifteen years. Probably the most important cause 
of development was the coming of the whalers. About 1820 


PROGRESS OF CIVILIZATION 139 


a valuable sperm whale fishery was discovered off the coast of 
Japan, and within a year or two large numbers of whalers went » 
there from the United States and some also from England and 
other countries. At that time Japan was closed to foreigners and 
Hawaii was the most convenient place for whalers to rest and get 
supplies between seasons. By 1840 the business of the islands 
was mainly with the whaleships. During this period from fifty to 
a hundred of these ships visited the ports of the Hawaiian islands 
each year. 

In the beginning about the only things purchased by the 
whalers were fresh meat, vegetables, wood, and water. After a 
while stores were opened to supply other things which were 
needed, such as flour, clothing, hardware, sailcloth, and many 
other articles. A shipyard was established for doing necessary 
repair work. Hence a large number of foreign traders, carpenters, 
and mechanics were added to the population. 

During this period also a considerable trade sprang up between 
these islands and the coast of America. Records show that large 
cargoes of goods were brought in merchant ships from America, 
Europe, and China. Part of these goods were sold to the whalers, 
part to the people residing on the islands, and part reéxported 
to California, Oregon, the Russian settlements, and other islands 
in the Pacific. Some goods were also brought in from the latter 
places, part being consumed locally and part reéxported to the 
United States, Europe, and China. Several business houses 
were established in Honolulu for carrying on these commercial 
operations. . 

Another evidence of advancing civilization was the attention 
paid to the development of the natural resources of the islands 
in spite of many discouraging conditions. The cattle and goats 
left by early navigators had multiplied to such an extent that 
hides and goat skins were important articles of export. The 
first successful sugar plantation was started before 1840, and 
well-directed efforts were being made to produce silk and coffee. 


140 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


During the first eight months of 1840 the values of exports of 
Hawaiian products were as follows: goat skins, $10,000; other 
hides, $18,500; salt, $2,225; tobacco, $300; sugar, $18,000; 
syrup and molasses, $7,300; kukui oil, $500; arrowroot, $1,700; 
supplies for ships, $16,500. 

Honolulu in 1820 and 1840. The development of the islands 
during this period is well illustrated in the growth and improve- 
ment of Honolulu. From such accounts as we have it is clear 





“rom a contemporary sketch. 


A street view at Honolulu in 1840 


that in 1820 this town was only an irregular cluster of grass 
houses, close to the harbor, with perhaps a half dozen buildings of 
wood or stone in the European style, and three or four stores. 
The whole population numbered about 3,000 or 4,000. 

By 1840 the population had doubled and there were about 600 
foreign residents. There were many substantial buildings of 
wood, stone, or adobe, and great improvement was shown even in 
the grass houses. ‘The town had spread out toward Waikiki as 
far as the Mission, and a few country residences were beginning to 
appear in the Nuuanu and Punahou districts. A system of 
broad streets had been laid out, and some improvements had been 
made along the water front. A newspaper in the English 
language, the Sandwich Island Gazette, had been published for 


PROGRESS OF CIVILIZATION I41 


three years (1836-1839), and in June, 1840, the Polynesian made 
its appearance. In October, 1840, the editor of the Polynesian 
published an article on “‘ Improvements and Changes in and 
about Honolulu,” in which he said : 

“The past twelve months have been full of activity. Streets 
have been widened, straightened, and opened, houses and stores 
built, others demolished, public works commenced, and every- 
thing now wears the appearance of progressive improvement. 

A spirit of enterprise seems to be awakened both among 
foreigners and Hawaiians, which, we surmise, is the result of a 
general prosperity. .. . The broad avenues which now inter- 
sect the town will become eventually fine streets. ... Car- 
riages, curricles, etc., are becoming quite common, and add to 
the liveliness of the place. . . . Native women are beginning to 
inquire with eager interest for the patena hou (new fashions) 
and the more substantial articles of civilization are in increased 
demand.” 

The editor gives a long list of the stores, public buildings, trades, 
and professions, which includes four churches, seven schools, a 
library and reading room, two hospitals for seamen, a govern- 
ment building, consulates of France, England, and the United 
States, four wholesale and twenty retail stores, two hotels, two 
taverns, twelve grogshops, two billiard rooms, seven bowling 
alleys, and all the various kinds of tradesmen, artisans, and me- 
chanics that would be found in an ordinary American town. 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


t. Until the reign of Liholiho the Hawaiians had never had any 
written laws. Why did they begin at this time to print their laws? 
Why were new laws needed ? 

2. During the time from 1820 to 1840 the Hawaiian Islands were 
changing from one civilization to another. Such a period is always 
difficult for a people. Name some of the conditions which showed 
what difficulties the Hawaiians were experiencing at this time. 


142 A HISTORY OF “HAWAII 


3. What country to-day is struggling between two civilizations? 
Find proofs in the newspapers of the difficulties this country is expe- 
riencing. 

4. When one people takes on the civilization of another people, there 
is always a struggle, as you have seen. Here in Hawaii we have many 
nationalities trying to take on the American civilization. List in 
your notebook four of the difficulties they have to meet. 

5. Enter in your notebook the names of four of the famous schools 
of Hawaii which were established at this time. 

6. Compulsory school age in 1840 was years ; - to-day it is 
—— years. (Copy in your notebook, filling in the blanks.) 

7. Here is a list of reasons for which schools might be organized : 
. To teach children to write. 

. To teach children to sing. 

To teach children patriotism. 

. To teach the things which will make good citizens. 

To teach children to read. 

To teach the things that are necessary so that people can 
earn a living. 





Base bes toe 


Enter the above list in your notebook and put a minus sign before the 
reason for which the Hawaiian schools were organized in 1840. Puta 
plus sign before the reason you consider the best. Explain the reason 
for your choice. 


For FURTHER READING 


ALEXANDER, W. D. — ‘‘The Oahu Charity School,” in Sixteenth An- 
nual Report of the Hawatian Historical Society. 


FREAR, W. F. — “‘Hawaiian Statute Law,” in Thirteenth Annual 
Report of the Hawatian Historical Society. 
WESTERVELT, W. D. — ‘“‘The First Twenty Years of Education in the 


Hawaiian Islands,” in Nineteenth Annual Report of the Hawaiian 
Historical Society. 


XIII 


THE CATHOLIC MISSION 


Origin of the mission. The plan to found a Catholic mission 
in the Hawaiian islands was formed as a result of the activities 
of the Frenchman, John Rives, the friend and secretary of King 
Liholiho, who had gone with the king’s party to England in 1823. 
While in England Rives was dismissed from the party and soon 
made his way to France in order to visit his family. ‘‘ After 
having visited his family, Mr. Rives entered into negotiations 
with both the French government and private parties for the 
establishment of a French settlement ” in Hawaii on land which 
he claimed to own. He made extravagant promises about what 
he would do on his return to Hawaii. As a result of these efforts 
two ships were fitted out: one, La Cométe, at Bordeaux, under 
the auspices of the French government; the other, Le Héros, at 
Havre, by a company of French capitalists. 

Rives also applied to the Seminary for Foreign Missions at 
Paris for missionaries to be sent to Hawaii. This request was 
transmitted to Rome, where it met with a favorable reception. 
A religious order recently organized in France, called The Congre- 
gation of the Sacred Hearts of Jesus and Mary, was authorized by 
the Pope to establish a Catholic mission in the Hawaiian islands. 
From this congregation the following missionaries were ap- 
pointed: Father Alexis Bachelot, as head of the mission with 
the title of Apostolic Prefect; Fathers Abraham Armand and 
Patrick Short; and three lay brothers, Theodore Boissier, 
Melchior Bondu, and Leonore Portal. The missionary party 
sailed from Bordeaux, November 20, 1826, in the ship La Comeéte, 

143 


144 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


accompanied by several mechanics under the leadership of a 
French lawyer, who was unofficially instructed by the government 
* to establish missionaries and French mechanics in the Sandwich 





The Reverend Alexis Bachelot 


Islands.” They  ar- 
rived at Honolulu, 
Tey year 7. 

Rives sailed from 
Havre in April, 1826, 
in the ship Le Héros. 
It was intended that 
this vessel should 
spend some time trad- 
ing along the coast of 
California and Mexico 
and then go on to 
Hawaii, where Rives 
said he would get 
things ready for the 
missionaries and the 
mechanics who were 
to form the nucleus 
of a French settle- 
ment. But Rives did 
not return to Hawaii 
and his failure to carry 
out his promises was a 


source of trouble to all who were involved in his schemes. He 
never had possessed as much land or as much influence in the 
government as he claimed to have, and what he did have was 


dependent on the favor of King Liholiho. 


Kaahumanu was un- 


friendly to him, and she was now in control of the Hawaiian 


government. 


Establishment at Honolulu. The Catholic missionaries landed 
from La Cométe without having obtained a formal permit and 


THE CATHOLIC MISSION 145 


rented a small inclosure containing three grass huts. Kaahu- 
manu ordered the captain of the ship to take the priests away, but 
he refused to do so and sailed before they could be put on board. 
About the end of August the French lawyer who came with the 
party obtained a piece of land from the king for the use of the 
lay brothers, and the mission establishment was moved to this 
site. In January, 1828, a chapel was opened to the public. 
Up to the end of that year five adults and twelve children were 
baptized, and during 1829, sixty-five adults and seventeen 
children. 

Persecution of the Catholics. For the first two years the 
Catholics were not disturbed. Boki and his followers were 
friendly to them and so long as he was governor of Oahu he was 
able to help them in many ways. Some of the foreigners favored 
them in the hope of hurting the Protestant missionaries. The 
latter used their influence to prevent the spread of Catholic 
doctrines. When Kaahumanu and the other chiefs who had 
accepted Christianity as taught by the Protestants saw that the 
new missionaries were meeting with some success, they tried to 
stop the Catholic mission’s further progress. In August, 18209, 
a proclamation was issued prohibiting the natives from attending 
the Catholic services. The priests were told that they might 
teach their doctrines to foreigners, but not to the natives. 

In spite of these prohibitions many of the natives continued 
to go to the Catholic chapel. Some of them were punished. 
They were confined in prison, put at the hard labor of building 
stone walls, or required to spend many days in weaving mats. 
A few were compelled to do the work of scavengers in the fort. 
This persecution of the native Catholics continued at intervals 
with greater or less severity for about eight years, but it failed to 
accomplish the desired result. 

Expulsion of the priests. When the chiefs saw that the punish- 
ment of native Catholics did not make them give up their re- 
ligious beliefs, they decided to expel the priests from the country. 


146 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


At the beginning of April, 1831, Fathers Bachelot and Short were 
called before the chiefs and told to leave the kingdom within the 
space of three months. But they gave no sign of going. Several 
months passed by. When the priests were reminded of the order 
to depart, they declared that they had no way to go and no money 
with which to pay their passage. Finally the government fitted 
out the brig Waverley and in this ship the two priests were com- 
pelled to leave the islands. They sailed from Honolulu December 
24, 1831, and were landed on the coast of California not far from 
Los Angeles. With their departure only one person, the lay 
brother Melchior, was left to look out for the Catholics in the 
islands. 

The second attempt. Brother Melchior kept his superiors 
informed of what was going on. When the king took personal 
control of the government in 1833, the Catholics decided to make 
another attempt. A lay brother, Colomban Murphy, visited 
Honolulu in 1835 to study the situation, and the following year 
there arrived a priest, Father Walsh, who was a British subject. 
He was ordered to leave. But about that time a French warship, 
La Bonite, came to Honolulu, and through the efforts of the 
French commander the chiefs gave permission for Father Walsh 
to remain and to teach foreigners, but not natives. 

Just as La Bonite was leaving, the British warship Acteon 
arrived. The commander of this vessel, Lord Edward Russell, 
negotiated a treaty between the Hawaiian government and Great 
Britain, which was signed November 16, 1836. ‘This treaty gave 
British subjects the right to trade, to reside, and to build houses 
and warehouses in Hawaii “‘ with the consent of the king.” An 
effort was made to gain permission for Father Walsh to teach 
and to baptize native Hawaiians, but without success. Never- 
theless, in the course of the next few years, he did teach and 
baptize a few of the natives. 

Return of Bachelot and Short. During their stay in California 
Fathers Bachelot and Short did not give up the idea of returning 


THE CATHOLIC MISSION AY 


to Hawaii. In this purpose they were encouraged by a letter 
from the Pope and by reports which they received from the 
islands. Finally they obtained passage on the ship Clementine 
and arrived at Honolulu April 17, 1837. The king and the 
kuhina nui, Kinau, were at Lahaina. In their absence Governor 
Kekuanaoa at first ordered the two priests to go back on board 
the ship, but later gave permission for them to remain on shore 
until the return of the king and Kinau. On April 30 the kuhina 
nui arrived at Honolulu with a decree from the king confirming 
the banishment of Bachelot and Short and ordering them to go 
away on the same vessel on which they came. 

Now it happened that the Clementine was owned by Jules 
Dudoit, a Frenchman of Honolulu, but was sailing under the 
British flag. She had been under charter to an American mer- 
chant named Hinckley, but after her arrival at Honolulu the 
cargo was unloaded and the ship returned to her owner. Dudoit, 
therefore, was not responsible for bringing the priests to Honolulu 
and he declared that he would not take them back on the Clemen- 
tine unless they came of their own free will and unless their passage 
was paid for. The chiefs declared that since the Clementine 
brought them to the islands the same vessel should take them 
away again. A hot discussion followed in which the British and 
American consuls took the part of the priests and of Dudoit. 

At last the two priests were compelled to go on board the 
Clementine. Thereupon Dudoit hauled down the British flag 
and left the ship. The flag was turned over to the British consul, 
Richard Charlton, who publicly burned it in the street, declaring 
that it had been violated by the Hawaiian government. This 
was in May, 1837. Early in July the British warship Sulphur, 
commanded by Captain Edward Belcher, and the French warship 
Venus, commanded by Captain Du Petit-Thouars, arrived at 
Honolulu. These two commanders were drawn into the con- 
troversy. After an angry interview with Kinau, Captain Belcher 
sent a company of marines to bring the two priests ashore. He 


148 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


and Captain Du Petit-Thouars then escorted them to their former 
residence. 

A few days after this the king arrived from Lahaina and held 
a long conference with the two captains. The king refused to 
change his decision 
and Captain Belcher, 
recognizing the rights 
of the Hawalian gov-- 
ernment, signed a 
pledge that Mr. Short 
would leave the 
islands at the first op- 
portunity. Captain 
Du Petit-Thouars 
signed a similar pledge 
for Mr. Bachelot. A. 
few days later the 
king and the French 
captain signed an 
agreement which gave 
to French subjects all 
rights that were en- 
joyed by subjects of any other nation in the Hawaiian islands. 
Father Short sailed for Valparaiso at the end of October. 

Arrival of two more priests. Before hearing the result of the 
second attempt of Fathers Bachelot and Short to enter the 
Hawaiian islands, the Catholic Bishop of Eastern Oceania sent 
two other priests to try to obtain a residence there. These were 
Rev. L. D. Maigret and Rev. Colomban Murphy. They arrived 
at Honolulu November 2, 1837, but were immediately forbidden 
to land. Father Murphy had only recently been ordained and 
the fact that he was a priest was kept secret. The British consul 
stated to Kinau that Mr. Murphy was not a priest and he was 
therefore permitted to take up his residence on shore, but the 


= 
—— 
aes 


Ny 





Du Petit-Thouars 


THE CATHOLIC MISSION 149 


government absolutely refused to allow Father Maigret to remain 
at the islands. 

In view of this fact, and since Father Bachelot was still at 
Honolulu waiting for a ship, the priests decided to buy a schooner 
that Mr. Dudoit offered to sell them. On this ship, which they 
renamed Our Lady of Peace, Fathers Maigret and Bachelot sailed 
from Honolulu, November 23. The latter was in poor health 
at the time, and died at sea on the morning of December 5. He 
was buried on the small island of Na, off the coast of Ponape in 
the Caroline Islands. 

End of the Catholic troubles. Shortly after the departure of 
the two priests King Kamehameha III proclaimed a law which 
absolutely forbade the teaching or practice of Catholic doctrines 
and prohibited teachers of that form of religion from entering 
the Hawaiian kingdom. A vigorous effort was made to enforce 
this law and the persecution of the native Catholics was renewed. 
As a result a large company of them left Honolulu and went to 
the district of Waianae, where the local chief was friendly to them. 
But they were not allowed to remain there permanently. 

In spite of the new law various influences were at work to put 
an end to the prohibition against Catholicism. Among these 
influences were the advice of foreign officers who visited the 
islands, the instruction given by Mr. Richards who had been 
appointed adviser to the Hawaiian government, the death of 
Kinau which occurred in April, 1839, and the fear of reprisals by 
the French government. Asa result of these influences the king, 
in June, 1839, issued an edict of toleration ordering that punish- 
ment should no longer be inflicted on Catholics. This edict and 
the visit of the French warship, Artemise, in the following month 
mark the end of the official effort to keep Catholicism out of 
Hawaii. 

Reasons for objection to Catholics. At the present time it may 
seem strange that there should have been so much objection to 
the introduction of Catholicism into Hawaii and such a deter- 


150 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


mined effort to keep out the priests of that faith. We have to 
remember that even as late as a hundred years ago there was 
much controversy between Protestants and Catholics. We must 
also remember that in Hawaii before this time there had never 
been more than one form of religion recognized. Before the 
abolition of the tapus the government of the islands and the 
religious system were closely connected. After the coming of 
the American missionaries in 1820 the Protestant form of Chris- 
tianity was accepted by the Hawaiian chiefs and became almost 
a state religion, though there was never any official connection 
between it and the government. 

The Hawaiian king and chiefs explained their opposition to 
the Catholics by saying that it was not good to have two religions 
in Hawaii, because that would create a division and lead to much 
trouble. They also said that the Catholic ceremonies were like 
the idolatry that was abolished in 1819. They declared, too, 
that the Catholic missionaries came into the islands without the 
permission of the government and therefore had no right to re- 
main. Catholic writers say that the real source of the opposition 
is to be found in the teachings of the Protestant missionaries. 
To a certain extent this is undoubtedly true. But it was the 
chiefs who applied these teachings to the conditions existing 
among their own people. There is evidence to show that the 
Protestant missionaries did not approve of the persecution of 
native Catholics. 

Looking back from the present time it is hard to see how the 
trouble could have been avoided. Nevertheless, we cannot 
doubt that both the Catholic and the Protestant missionaries 
and the Hawaiian chiefs were sincere in their beliefs and were 
trying to perform their duty as they understood it. 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


Following is a list of words, each of which represents a feeling you 
might have toward people whose religion is different from yours. If 


THE CATHOLIC MISSION I51 


you do not know all these words, look them up and talk over the 
meanings in class. The words are indifference, codperation, tolerance, 
hostility, hatred, persecution. 


1. Which of these words represents the most desirable attitude? 
2. Which represents the most undesirable attitude? 


In your notebook put your answer to question 1 at the top of the 
list, and your answer to question 2 at the bottom of the list. Then 
fill in all the other blanks in the order you think they should be 
arranged. 


—— (The answer to question 1) 
(The next best attitude) 
— (The third best attitude) 
(The fourth best attitude) 
(The next to the worst) 
—— (The answer to question 2) 





3. Which of these words best describes the general feeling in Hawaii 
at the time described in this chapter ? 

4. Which best describes the general feeling in Hawaii to-day? 

5. If we wish Hawaii to go to the top of the list above, how can this 
be brought about? 


XIV 


RECOGNITION OF INDEPENDENCE 


Policy of France. Asa result of the way in which the Hawaiian 
government treated the Catholics, it became involved in trouble 
with France. That nation took the position of defender of Cath- 
olic missionaries throughout the Pacific Ocean. During this 
period she was also trying to extend her commercial interests in 
this part of the world and to build up a colonial empire. The 
situation in the Society Islands (Tahiti) was very much like 
the situation in Hawaii, the principal difference being that the 
Protestant missionaries at Tahiti were sent out from England. 
In both places French Catholic priests were expelled by the 
native rulers. At Tahiti this occurred in December, 1836, and 
in January, 1837. One of the priests then went to France and 
Rome to lay the matter before the French government and the 
Pope. Letters were also sent to France from the American con- 
sul at Tahiti, who was hostile to the English Protestant mission- 
aries. As a result of these letters, Captain Du Petit-Thouars of 
the frigate Venus, while at Valparaiso in the summer of 1838, 
received orders from the French government “‘ to go to Tahiti, and 
demand from the queen complete reparation for the insult 
offered to France.’’ Captain Du Petit-Thouars carried out these 
orders in the fall of 1838. He also established three French 
Catholic missionaries on the Marquesas Islands. 

Visit of the Artemise. Reports were likewise sent to France 
about what was going on at the Hawaiian islands. At this 
time the French frigate Artemise, under command of Captain 
Laplace, was making a voyage around the world in the interest 


152 


RECOGNITION OF INDEPENDENCE 153 


of French commerce. While at Sydney early in 1839 Captain 
Laplace received instructions from his government to visit the 
Polynesian islands and demand satisfaction for the treatment 
which the French priests had received. At Tahiti Laplace 
compelled Queen Pomare to sign a treaty giving the most com- 
plete freedom and protection to the Catholic faith. 

The Artemise arrived at Honolulu, July 9, 1839. Captain 
Laplace had an interview with the French consul, Dudoit, and, 
without making any other investigation, sent to the king a ‘‘man- 
ifesto,” in which he accused the chiefs of having violated the 
treaty made with Captain Du Petit-Thouars, saying that “ to 
persecute the Catholic religion, to tarnish it with the name of 
idolatry, and to expel under this absurd pretext the French from 
this archipelago was to offer an insult to France.’ Laplace 
demanded that the king sign a treaty containing the following 
conditions: (1) That the Catholic worship be declared free in 
the Hawaiian islands; (2) that land be given for a Catholic 
church at Honolulu, to be served by French priests; (3) that the 
persecution of native Catholics cease; (4) that twenty thousand 
dollars be deposited with Captain Laplace as a guarantee of 
future good conduct, to be returned when France became satis- 
fied that the Hawaiian government would observe the treaty ; 
(5) that the money and the treaty, signed by the king, should 
be taken on board the Artemise by a high chief, and the French 
flag saluted with twenty-one guns. The captain added that if 
these conditions were not immediately agreed to, war would 
commence. 

When Captain Laplace made these demands, the king was at 
Lahaina. In his absence the treaty was signed by the kuhina nui 
and the governor of Oahu. The twenty thousand dollars were 
borrowed from the foreign merchants of Honolulu, and all the 
conditions were complied with. When the king arrived a day 
or two later he approved what had been done by the chiefs in 
order to save his country from the horrors of war. 


154 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


But the French captain was not yet satisfied. He had still 
another treaty which the king was also induced to sign. ‘This 
was a general treaty of friendship and commerce. ‘Two of its 
articles were very objectionable. One of them gave to French- 
men accused of crime in the Hawaiian islands the right to be tried 
by a jury of foreigners named by the French consul. The other 
provided that French merchandise, “ especially wines and 
brandies, shall not be prohibited, nor pay a higher duty than 
five per cent ad valorem.” In 1838 a law had been passed pro- 
hibiting the importation of spirituous liquors, such as brandy 
and gin, after January 1, 1839, and laying a duty of fifty cents a 
gallon on imported wines. The treaty therefore practically 
repealed this prohibition law. 

Visit of the Embuscade. Within a year after the departure 
of the Artemise, a Catholic bishop and several priests arrived 
at Honolulu to establish their mission on a permanent basis. 
A church was built and the efforts of the missionaries met with 
considerable success. Schools were begun as rapidly as teachers 
could be provided for them. As might have been expected, a 
good many small difficulties arose, particularly over the inter- 
pretation and enforcement of the school and marriage laws. 
Unfortunately, the French consul advised the Catholics to look 
to France for the enforcement of their views, and to present their 
claims to him instead of to the Hawaiian government. His 
object may have been to stir up trouble, so that France would 
have an excuse for seizing the islands. Some of the Catholics 
followed his advice, with the result that the Hawaiian government 
did not hear their complaints and had no opportunity to examine 
and correct the evils, if any existed. 

In July, 1842, a French squadron took possession of the Mar- 
quesas Islands and the commander, Admiral Du Petit-Thouars, 
sent the ship Embuscade to investigate affairs at Hawaii. A few 
days after the arrival of this ship at Honolulu the captain, Mallet, 
sent a letter to the king charging that the treaty made with 


RECOGNITION OF INDEPENDENCE 55 


Captain Laplace had been violated, and presenting a series of 
demands designed to secure special privileges for the Catholics 
in regard to schools and marriage. In reply the king denied that 
the treaty had been violated; he declared that the existing laws 
were impartial and that the courts were open to all and would 
deal justly with all. He added that he had sent ministers to 
France to try to make a new treaty. Without pressing his 
demands further Captain Mallet took his departure, promising 
to deliver the king’s letter to Admiral Du Petit-Thouars. 

Movement to secure recognition of independence. During 
these years the question was frequently asked: Will the Hawaiian 
islands continue to be independent? Some people thought they 
would fall into the hands of France, as the Marquesas Islands 
had already done and as Tahiti did soon after. But other 
influences were at work with the object of throwing Hawaii into 
the possession of Great Britain. The British consul, Richard 
Charlton, desired to bring about that result. He was constantly 
making complaints and trying to get his government to interfere 
in Hawaiian affairs. In 1840 he set up a claim for a valuable 
piece of land in Honolulu, based on a long lease which he said 
Kalanimoku had given him. It is now believed that the lease 
was fraudulent, but this claim was a source of trouble for several 
years. Under all these circumstances it seemed very important 
to the king and his advisers to obtain an acknowledgment and 
guarantee of the independence of the Hawaiian islands from 
the great powers, the United States, England, and France. 
Another reason for seeking this recognition was the fact that sev- 
eral proposals were made about this time for the development 
of the agricultural resources of the.islands by foreign capitalists. 
This development was believed to be desirable, but could not be 
carried out while the future condition of the government was 
so uncertain. 

As early as 1840 an effort was made to secure the desired 
recognition through the services of an American lawyer named 


156 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


Thomas J. Farnham, who visited the islands in that year; but 
he undertook very little and failed to accomplish anything. In 
the spring of 1842 Sir George Simpson, governor of the Hudson’s 
Bay Company in North America, visited Hawaii on a tour around 
the world. He became greatly interested and took the part of 
the king against the charges made by Charlton and others. Sir 
George advised Kamehameha to send ambassadors to the United 
States, England, and France, and offered to be one of them 





Timothy Haalilio, and William Richards 


himself, if that was desired. The king followed this advice and 
on April 8, 1842, appointed his own secretary, Timothy Haalilio, 
William Richards, and Sir George Simpson as his representatives 
for the purpose of obtaining, if possible, the recognition and 
guarantee of the independence of the Hawaiian kingdom by 
the great powers. They were also to try to make new treaties 
with those nations, to have new consuls appointed by England 
and France in place of Mr. Charlton and Mr. Dudoit, and to 
settle all existing difficulties between those nations and Hawaii. 

Before the credentials of these ambassadors were signed, 
Sir George departed for London by way of Alaska and Siberia. 
Messrs. Richards and Haalilio left Honolulu early in July, 1842, 


RECOGNITION OF INDEPENDENCE 57 


for the United States and Europe. They arrived in Washington 
in the first week of December and immediately set to work on 
the business of their embassy. After a little delay and not with- 
out some difficulty they obtained from Daniel Webster, secretary 
of state, a letter dated December 19, 1842, in which he declared 
“as the sense of the 
government of the 
United States, that 
the Government of 
the Sandwich Islands 
ought to be re- 
spected; that no 
power ought either to 
take possession of the 
islands as a conquest, 
or for the purpose of 
colonization, and that 
no power ought to 
seek for any undue 
control over the ex- 
isting Government, 
or any exclusive priv- 
ileges or preferences 
in matters of com- 
merce.” This dec- 
laration of the United States government was officially sent by 
Mr. Webster to the governments of France and Great Britain. 
Soon after receiving this letter, Messrs. Richards and Haalilio 
sailed for England. 

Cession of the islands to Lord George Paulet. The business 
of the king’s ambassadors was at first kept secret at the islands, 
but became known in the course of a few months. When this 
happened, Mr. Charlton at once departed for England in order 
to present his views to the British government. He left behind 





Sir George Simpson 


158 A HISTORY OF HAWAIL 


as acting consul a man of his own kind, named Alexander Simp- 
son, whom the king refused to receive as the representative of 
England. Both Charlton and Simpson complained loudly to the 
British naval officers on the American coast, alleging that English- 
men and their property were being mistreated in Hawaii. This 
caused the commander of the British squadron in the Pacific 
Ocean, Rear Admiral Richard Thomas, to send the frigate 
Carysfort to the islands to make an investigation. 

The Carysfort arrived at Honolulu, February 10, 1843. A 
week later her commander, Captain Lord George Paulet, sent 
to the king a series of demands based on the complaints of Charl- 
ton and Simpson and threatened an attack on the town if the 
demands were not complied with by four o’clock the next after- 
noon. In view of the circumstances none of these demands 
was just. But without any adequate means of defense and 
faced with the guns of the Carysfort, the king could do nothing 
else but yield. But he did this under protest, and at the same 
time informed Captain Paulet that he had sent ambassadors 
to England to settle all these questions. 

After the king had complied with the demands, Captain Paulet 
and Mr. Simpson had several private interviews with him, at 
which they continued to harass him. Finally the King decided 
to end his worries by temporarily ceding his Kingdom to Great 
Britain; therefore, on February 25, he signed a provisional 
cession of the Hawaiian islands to Captain Paulet as represent- 
ative of the Queen of England, subject to the decision that 
would be made in London on all questionsin dispute. There 
were reports that a French fleet was on its way to Hawaii; and 
Paulet, in his official report, says that the fear of this French 
fleet was what led the King to make the cession. 

Government by the British Commission. On the same day 
Captain Paulet issued a proclamation declaring that the existing 
laws should remain in force, and providing that the government, 
so far as the natives were concerned, should be carried on as 


RECOGNITION OF INDEPENDENCE 159 


before by the king and his chiefs and officers, and so far as foreign 
residents and foreign relations were concerned, by a commission 
consisting of the king, or a deputy appointed by him, Captain 
Paulet, a Mr. D. F. Mackay, and Lieutenant Frére of the Carys- 
fort. The king appointed Dr. Judd as his deputy. 

The Commission proceeded to govern the country in a very 
high-handed manner. The British flag was raised over each 
island and all Hawaiian flags destroyed. ‘The land claimed by 
Charlton was seized, the occupants being driven out and the 
houses torn down. ‘The three government schooners were taken 
over and their names changed to Albert, Adelaide, and Victoria. 
The king’s right to govern the natives was interfered with, and 
some desirable laws were abrogated. A regiment of native 
troops, called the “‘ Queen’s Regiment,” was enlisted and the 
Hawaiian treasury compelled to pay for their support. As a 
protest against the actions of the Commission Dr. Judd resigned 
on May to, and after that the king was no longer represented. 
One of the most interesting circumstances is the fact that Dr. 
Judd secretly took the government records and concealed them 
in the royal tomb for fear that the Commission might seize them. 
In that place he carried on his work as an officer of the king, using 
the coffin of Kaahumanu as a table. 

Mission of J. F. B. Marshall. Captain Paulet appointed 
Alexander Simpson to carry letters to the British government, 
and it was arranged that the Albert should take him to Mexico. 
As the result of a previous agreement, an American company 
in Honolulu had the right to send an agent to Mexico on the 
Albert. It was of great importance to the Hawaiian government 
that a correct account of recent events should be sent to London. 
It was therefore arranged that the agent of the American com- 
pany, J. F. B. Marshall, should be commissioned as the king’s 
ambassador for the purpose of carrying letters to the governments 
of Great Britain and the United States and codperating with 
Sir George Simpson and Messrs. Richards and Haalilio. This 


160 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


was done secretly, so that Paulet and Simpson knew nothing 
about it. The Albert sailed from Honolulu, March 11, carrying 
the two messengers, one with letters from Captain Paulet, the 
other with letters from King Kamehameha. 

Restoration by Admiral Thomas. Assoon as Admiral Thomas, 
who was at Valparaiso, learned of the doings of Captain Paulet, 
he at once sailed for Hawaii on his flagship, the frigate Dublin. 
Upon arrival at Honolulu, the admiral had an interview with 
the king and it was soon made known that the independence of 
the islands was to be restored. July 31 was set as the day for the 
formal act of restoration, and the place selected was the plain 
east of town at the spot now known as Thomas Square. In 
the morning a brilliant and impressive ceremony was enacted 
in the presence of a multitude of natives and foreigners. The 
British flag was lowered and the Hawaiian flag raised, saluted 
by the guns of the warships in the harbor and by those of the 
forts on land. In the afternoon a thanksgiving service was held 
in the Stone Church (Kawaiahao). It was on this occasion that 
Kamehameha III uttered the words which have become the 
motto of Hawaii, Ua mau ke ea o ka aina i ka pono (The life of 
the land is preserved by righteousness). 

On the same day the king and the admiral signed some articles 
of agreement which, in a friendly way, secured to British sub- 
jects all the rights and privileges which they could reasonably 
expect. Admiral Thomas remained at the islands for seven 
months, residing on shore, until the arrival of General William 
Miller, the new consul general for Great Britain. The course 
of Admiral Thomas was fully approved by his government. 

Recognition of Hawaiian independence. Messrs. Richards 
and Haalilio reached London, February 18, 1843. Sir George 
Simpson had already arrived and the three ambassadors im- 
mediately set to work. In their negotiations they received much 
valuable assistance from the powerful and influential Hudson’s 
Bay Company and from the United States Minister to Great 


RECOGNITION OF INDEPENDENCE 161 


Britain. The first interview with the Earl of Aberdeen, secretary 
of state for foreign affairs, was not very favorable, but the 
Hawaiian ambassadors gave him a statement of their case and 
then went on to Paris. On March 17 they had an interview with 
M. Guizot, French minister of foreign affairs, who stated that 























are 
iol 
| Ks ! EE 


ail 
ate it 























The church was dedicated in 1842. This picture is from a sketch by Reverend 
Hiram Bingham, printed in 1846. The sketch is inaccurate in some particulars and 
is supposed to represent the original plan for the building. 


he had no objection to acknowledging the independence of Hawaii, 
but could not at that time promise anything about a new treaty. 
Back in London a few days later, the three envoys found that 
M. Guizot’s statement had had an important effect on the 
British officials. On April 1, 1843, Lord Aberdeen wrote an 
official letter in which he said that the British government 
was willing and had determined to recognize the independence 
of the Hawaiian islands under their present king. 


162 A “HISTORY OF HAWAII 


Soon after the receipt of Lord Aberdeen’s letter, Sir George 
Simpson took his departure for America and Messrs. Richards 
and Haalilio returned to Paris in order to get a written recog- 
nition of independence from the French government and, if 
possible, to negotiate a new treaty. But M. Guizot kept putting 
the matter off, and before anything had been done by him, news 
reached Europe, about the first of June, that the islands had 
been ceded to Lord George Paulet. This was a terrible blow 
to the Hawaiian ambassadors. For the time being their efforts 
were completely blocked at Paris. Alexander Simpson and 
J. F. B. Marshall arrived in London about the end of June with 
their letters from Honolulu. Messrs. Richards and Haalilio 
therefore returned to London about the middle of July. 

The British government had already decided not to keep 
possession of Hawaii permanently, but there were two things 
which had to be done: (1) to settle the difficulties raised by 
Charlton and Simpson; and (2) to get from France a formal, 
written acknowledgment of Hawaiian independence. ‘These 
two things required much hard work on the part of the Hawaiian 
envoys and long negotiation between the French and British 
governments. France was not willing to give her recognition 
until England gave up her possession of the islands, and England 
did not wish to give up the islands until she was sure that France 
would not take possession of them. 

In the course of a few months both of these questions were 
settled in a satisfactory manner. Messrs. Richards and Haalilio 
presented a strong defense against the charges of Charlton and 
Simpson. On the advice of the American Minister in London they 
agreed to submit all these claims to the legal advisers of the British 
government. The decision of the legal advisers was in favor of 
the Hawaiian government on every point except that of Charlton’s 
land claim. ‘This claim was not finally settled for several years. 

The governments of France and England at length came to 
an agreement on the question of Hawaiian independence. On 


RECOGNITION OF INDEPENDENCE 163 


November 28, 1843, Lord Aberdeen and the French ambassador 
in London signed a joint declaration to the effect that those 
governments, “ taking into consideration the existence in the 
Sandwich Islands of a government capable of providing for the 
regularity of its relations with foreign nations, have thought it 
right to engage reciprocally to consider the Sandwich Islands 
as an independent state, and never to take possession, either 
directly or under the title of a protectorate, or under any other 
form, of any part of the territory of which they are composed.” 

The independence of Hawaii was in this way fully recognized, 
but Messrs. Richards and Haalilio were not able to secure new 
treaties with France and England. In the spring of 1844 they 
returned to the United States, and from there sailed in November 
for the islands. Haalilio died at sea a few days out from Boston. 
Mr. Richards arrived at Honolulu in March, 1845, after an 
absence of nearly three years. 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


t. One day, in a small school, there was enrolled a boy who was 
bigger and stronger than most of the other children. Soon after he 
became a member of the class he brought his bat and ball to school, 
but he did not welcome all the boys when they wanted to play. In- 
stead, he ordered the younger boys about and even hit some of the 
smaller ones. Ina short time he became the “boss” of the playground. 
The younger children feared him and the older ones felt powerless to 
do anything to him, because he was always boasting about what he 
and his “gang” of friends could do. 

a. Have you ever had anything like this happen to you? 

b. On which side were you, that of the big boy and his gang, or 
that of the group of pupils who had no defense against the 
gang? 

c. What excuses or reasons can you give which might explain or 
excuse the action of the big boy and his friends? 

d. If you were one of the group who suffered because of the acts 
of the big boy’s group, what reasons would you give to show 
that the activities of the gang should be stopped or checked ? 


164 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


e. To whom would you go first to get the difficulties remedied ? 
If that was of no avail, to whom would you go next? 

f. What are your ideas about how big, strong pupils should act 
towards those who are not so big and strong? 

2. In this chapter the representatives of and behaved 
towards the government very much as the big boy behaved toward 
the smaller ones. The king could not because his was not 
equal to that of the or captains. (Copy in your notebook, 
filling in the blanks.) 

3. What reasons can you give which will explain why these officers 
acted toward Kamehameha III in this way? 

4. Why did the king cede the government to Captain Paulet? 

5. How was the request for recognition of the independence of 
Hawaii received in France, England, and the United States? 

6. From your study of European and American history can you 
think of any cases in which similar instances occurred ? 

7. Do you know of any occasion on which the United States govern- 
ment has tried to prevent such acts on the part of another govern- 
ment ? 

8. In the world to-day there are many strong and many weak 
governments. In the following list choose the statement which best 
describes what you think the attitude of strong toward weak govern- 
ments should be. Give reasons for your choice. 

a. Attempt to help them by taking possession of them. 
b. Attempt to gain power over them. 

c. Ignore them. 

d. Protect them against other strong governments. 




















XV 


ORGANIZATION OF THE GOVERNMENT 


By the action of the United States, Great Britain, and France, 
Hawaii had been admitted into the family of civilized nations. 
But in order to get along harmoniously in this new relationship, 
it was necessary for the Hawaiian government to be organized 
somewhat in the same way as other civilized governments. ‘The 
simple system which had been sufficient when the king had only 
his own people to deal with was not satisfactory when there 
were many foreigners in the islands and when it was necessary 
to have many dealings with foreign governments. During the 
next few years the Hawaiian government was reorganized into 
a modern constitutional monarchy with the constitution of 1840 
as a foundation. The details of this important development 
were worked out by a small group, including the king and chiefs 
and other members of the legislature, and Dr. G. P. Judd, John 
Ricord, and William L. Lee. 

The king and chiefs. Foremost were the king and chiefs, 
for under the old system they had possessed all authority. Under 
the new system they had to give up many of their old powers and 
rights, but they were wise enough and patriotic enough to do this 
willingly when they saw that it was necessary for the good of the 
nation. Kamehameha III was probably the most beloved of 
all the Hawaiian monarchs. After his death one who knew him 
well said of him, “‘ Much of the good which has been accomplished 
during his reign, much of the evil which has been prevented, and 
many of the happy changes which have taken place were doubt- 
less brought about through the soundness of his judgment and the 

165 


166 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


mildness of his character. He was gifted by the god of nature 
with many of those traits which qualify a person to be a good 
ruler in trying scenes and in peaceful times. He enjoyed the 
love of his people and 
the respect of foreign- 


9) 


ers. 

Dr.G.P. Judd. As 
a result of the trouble 
which they had with 
foreign residents and 
foreign governments, 
the king and chiefs 
saw that it would be 
good for them to have 
the advice and assist- 
ance of some foreign- 
ers whom they could 
trust. This was the 
reason for the employ- 
ment of William Rich- 
ards. Then when Mr. 
Richards was ap- 
pointed as the king’s 
ambassador to the 
United States, France, and Great Britain, Dr. G. P. Judd was 
selected to take his place. Dr. Judd had come to Hawaii in 
1828 as a medical missionary. Through his work as a physician 
the native rulers came to know and trust him, while he in turn 
came to know and love the Hawaiian people. He was a man of 
energy and firmness of character, who was not afraid to do what 
he thought was right, even if that made enemies for him. With 
the exception of the king Dr. Judd was the most influential 
member of the Hawaiian government during most of the time 
between 1842 and 1854. One of the ways in which he helped the 





Kamehameha III as a young man 


ORGANIZATION OF THE GOVERNMENT 167 


king was by securing for him the services of other capable for- 
eigners — such men as John Ricord and Robert C. Wyllie. 

The Treasury Board. One of the first and most important 
things to be done was to get the financial affairs of the kingdom 
in good order. The government was badly in debt and up to this 
time. no distinction had been made between the property and 
revenue of the king and that of the government. On the advice 
of Dr. Judd a Treasury Board was appointed, May 10, 1842, 
consisting of Dr. G. P. Judd, Timothy Haalilio, and John Ii. 
The property of the government was separated from the private 
property of the king and the Treasury Board was given control 
of the income from the 
property of the gov- 
ernment and of all 
money paid for taxes. 
Within a few -years 
the finances of the 
government were re- 
duced to a system and 
the government busi- 
ness was conducted 
with much greater 
economy. By 1846 
the national debt had 
been paid off. 

John Ricord. Dur- 
ing this period (1840- 
50) many lawsuits 
were brought against 
the government by 
foreigners living in 
Hawaii. It looked as though these foreigners wanted the Ha- 
waiian government to be weak and helpless, so that they could 
do as they pleased. Up to 1844 the government had no compe- 





168 . A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


tent legal adviser, though the need of one was very great. At 
the beginning of that year a young lawyer named John Ricord 
arrived at Honolulu from Oregon. He was a native of New 
Jersey and had been educated as a lawyer in New York state. 
He was a man of much natural ability, of good education, and 
possessed of an energetic personality. Dr. Judd persuaded him 
to remain at Honolulu and become the attorney general of the 
government. On March g, 1844, he was appointed to that 
office by King Kamehameha. During the next few years he 
performed services of the highest value by defeating the various 
attacks that were made upon the government in the courts, by 
advising the other officers of the king, and by formulating the 
plan or system of government which was soon put into operation. 
He made many personal enemies, but was absolutely loyal to the 
king. . 
The Organic Acts. In the spring of 1845 Attorney General 
Ricord made a famous report to the legislature. He carefully 
analyzed the constitution of 1840, gave a general outline of the 
way in which the government ought to be organized, and showed 
how this could be done in accordance with the constitution. The 
legislature then passed a resolution directing Mr. Ricord to draw 
up laws providing for the new organization. This was done, 
and in less than a year two of the laws, known as Organic Acts, 
were finally passed by the legislature and approved by the king. 
They provided that the executive branch of the government 
should be divided into the five departments of the Interior, For- 
eign Relations, Finance, Public Instruction, and Law, each pre- 
sided over by a minister appointed by the king. The work of 
each department was carefully and minutely regulated, so that 
all the business of the government would be properly attended to. 
The King’s ministers. Even before the Organic Acts became 
law, ministers had been appointed for some of the departments. 
Dr. Judd was appointed Secretary of State for Foreign Affairs 
in November, 1843, but he soon found that his various duties 


ORGANIZATION OF THE GOVERNMENT 169 


were too heavy for one man to carry. In the spring of 1845 he 
persuaded Robert C. Wyllie to take charge of the department of 
foreign affairs. Dr. Judd then became Minister of the Interior 
until the spring of 1846. At that time the Ministry was com- 
pletely organized as 
follows: John Young 
(son of the old adviser 
of Kamehameha I), 
Premier and Minister 
of the Interior; Robert 
C. Wyllie, Minister of 
Foreign Relations; Dr. 
G. P. Judd, Minister 
of Finance; William 
Richards, Minister of 
Public Instruction; 
John Ricord, Attorney 
General. These min- 
isters, together with 
other persons who 
might be appointed by 
the king, comprised 
the privy council of 
state. The law pro- 
vided that no alien 
could be a minister of 
the king. Therefore 
those ministers who were foreign born became naturalized 
Hawaiian citizens. , 

Mr. Wyllie was a most interesting character. Born in Scotland 
and educated for the medical profession, he had traveled in nearly 
all parts of the world while still a young man. He lived for many 
years in South America and Mexico, in which places he accumu- 
lated a good sized fortune as a merchant. He then resided for 





Robert Crichton Wyllie 


170 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


some years in London, returned to America, and in 1844 came to 
Honolulu as secretary to the new British consul general, William 
Miller, who was appointed to take the place of Richard Charlton. 
Soon after his arrival he published in the Friend a valuable series 
of notes on the Hawaiian islands. 

Organization of the courts. Under the old system of govern- 
ment, the governors of the various islands had been judges, 
and after the granting of the constitution of 1840 the governors’ 
courts continued to be the principal courts of the kingdom. Most 
important of all was the court of Governor Kekuanaoa of Oahu, 
for here were tried nearly all cases in which foreigners were 
involved. Kekuanaoa was a man of great ability, but not 
acquainted with the legal systems of civilized governments; he 
therefore had much trouble in deciding legal questions which 
arose in the course of these trials. After a time he adopted the 
practice of having Dr. Judd and Attorney General Ricord sit 
with him in such cases. In fact, in some instances, Mr. Ricord 
not only acted as prosecuting attorney but also wrote the opinions 
which Governor Kekuanaoa delivered on points of law. Finally, 
in September, 1845, the governor appointed Lorrin Andrews to 
act as his substitute in foreign cases. In the following year a 
temporary law was passed providing for a higher court at Hono- 
lulu with one or more judges to try important cases and decide 
appeals from lower courts, and for police courts at Honolulu 
and Lahaina. Mr. Andrews and William L. Lee were appointed 
as judges of the higher court of Honolulu. 

Mr. Lee was a young lawyer who had stopped at Honolulu 
on his way to Oregon. He had a fine legal education and his 
arrival in Hawaii at this time was a most fortunate circumstance. 
He was persuaded to remain at the islands and become one of 
the judges, a position for which he was well fitted both by char- 
acter and by training. To him belongs much of the credit for 
making the Hawaiian courts respected at home and abroad. 
Judge Andrews had come to the islands in 1828 as a missionary 


ORGANIZATION OF THE GOVERNMENT 171 


and was for many years connected with Lahainaluna Seminary. 
Though not specially trained as a lawyer, he was a man of learning 
and ability and proved to be a capable judge. 

Attorney General Ricord began the preparation of a law per- 
manently to organize the judiciary department, but before its 
completion he resigned his position and left the islands. The 
law relating to the 
courts was then com- 
pleted by Judge Lee, 
and, after discussion 
and amendment, was 
passed by the legisla- 
ture and approved by 
the king in Septem- 
ber, 1847. This was 
the third and last of 
the Organic Acts. 
The most important 
court created by this 
act was the Superior 
Court of Law and 
Equity, to consist of 
a chief justice and two 
associate justices. 
This was practically 
a supreme court in all except name. Below this were four 
circuit courts, taking the place of the governors’ courts, and 
below these were twenty-four district courts, including the police 
courts at Honolulu and Lahaina. The old supreme court, created 
by the constitution of 1840, was continued in existence, but most 
of its work was taken from it and given to the Superior Court of 
Law and Equity. This act also prescribed the way in which 
trials and lawsuits should be conducted. 

Judge Lee was elected chief justice of the Superior Court and 





William L. Lee 


172 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


with him were associated Lorrin Andrews and John li. Mr. 
was a native Hawaiian who had been raised as a boy companion 
of Kamehameha III and with him instructed in the old Hawaiian 
lore and arts. He had also been carefully educated in the 
mission schools and had already held several positions of respon- 
sibility. His life, as citizen and as judge, was one of great use- 
fulness to the nation. 

Change in the land system. Up to 1840 all the land of the 
kingdom was controlled by a kind of feudal system. The theory 
was that all the land belonged to the king. He kept part of it 
for his own use and divided the remainder among the various 
chiefs. The chiefs in turn divided their lands among others, and 
so on down to the commoner, who received a small patch of land 
—as much as he could occupy and cultivate. None of those 
who received land owned it in fee simple (that is, in the way land 
is now owned), but each one had to pay something every year 
(either labor or the product of labor) both to the chief from 
whom he received the land and to the king. Besides this, the 
land might be taken away from him at any time and given to 
someone else. 

There were many objections to this system. It frequently 
worked a hardship on poor tenants who were driven from their 
land without any good cause. Then again, no one wanted to 
spend time and labor in improving land which he might have to 
give up at any moment. The system also led to much trouble 
with foreigners. They sometimes received grants of land, but 
they did not always understand the system of landholding, 
and disputes and _ ill-feeling often resulted. Some foreign 
residents wished to establish plantations, but before doing so 
they desired to have a secure title to the land which they were 
planning to cultivate. 

About 1840 or soon after, the king and chiefs came to the con- 
clusion that this system of landholding ought to be changed, and 
that they ought to adopt the system used in other civilized coun- 


ORGANIZATION OF THE GOVERNMENT 173 


tries. The difficulty was to know how to make this change. 
After careful investigation it was seen that there were only three 
parties who had an interest in the land: (1) the king; (2) the 
chiefs; (3) the tenants or commoners. The question was: how 
to divide the land between these parties. This was a hard prob- 
lem to solve, but it was finally done in the following way : 

All the land in the kingdom was first divided between the 
king and the chiefs. This division is known as the Mahele 
(division) and is recorded in the Mahele Book. The king then 
divided his portion into two parts, the smaller of which (known 
as the Crown Lands) was reserved for his own use and benefit, 
while the other part (known as Government Land or Public 
Land) was set apart for the government. The chiefs also gave 
up one third of their lands to the government. This did not end 
the matter, however. There were still two classes of people who 
had a right to receive land. First, and most important, were 
the tenants or common people who actually cultivated the soil ; 
second, the foreigners who had received grants of land from the 
king or chiefs. The law required that the rights of all these 
people should be respected, and therefore the king, chiefs, and 
government had to give up additional land to satisfy these rights. 
‘The tenants or common people received the pieces of land which 
they occupied and cultivated. These were called kuleanas and 
varied in size from one to forty acres. Foreigners received the 
lands which had previously been granted to them. 

A Board of Commissioners to Quiet Land Titles was appointed, 
and every person having a right to receive land, whether chief, 
commoner, or foreigner, was required to present his claim to this 
Board. The Board then investigated the claim and, if it was 
valid, gave the claimant an award. He could then take the 
award to the minister of the interior and, upon paying a 
certain sum of money, receive from him a royal patent. By this 


process the claimant was able to obtain a fee-simple title to his 
land. 


174 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


A law was also passed under which the government lands 
could be sold in small lots at a low price. In this way the com- 
mon people could get additional land if they wished to do so. 

The constitution of 1852. During the ten years from 1840 
to 1850 Hawaii made rapid progress in governmental organization 
and experience, and at the end of that period the time seemed 
appropriate for framing a new constitution. Accordingly, in 
1851, three commissioners were appointed to revise the constitu- 
tion and report to the legislature in 1852. The commissioners 
were Dr. Judd, appointed by the king, Judge , appointed by 
the House of Nobles, and Judge Lee, appointed by the House of 
Representatives. The new constitution, written chiefly by Judge 
Lee, was submitted to the legislature in 1852 and, after discussion 
and amendment, was passed by the two houses and approved by 
the king. 

The constitution of 1852 provided a governmental organization 
in accordance with the developments which have been described 
in this chapter. It was a liberal constitution, giving the people 
an opportunity to have a share in the making of laws and in the 
administration of the nation’s business. 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


1. In your European history you have read much about the feudal 
system. Who owned the land under this system? What were some 
of the evils of this system? What pride could the serf take in the 
development of his home? What security did the serf have? What 
security did the lord have? 

2. What was the Great Mahele? Before its enactment to whom 
had all the land belonged? How did the method of land holding af- 
fect the attitude of the Hawaiian commoner toward his kuleana? 
After the Mahele, who owned the land? How much was given to 
each group? Describe the method used in dividing the land. What 
does it mean to hold Jand in fee simple ? 

3. Have you ever built a small house to hold chickens? Did you 
have an architect draw you a plan for the house? Why? Whena 


ORGANIZATION OF THE GOVERNMENT 175 


large building is being built, the contractor needs, as guides, a planand 
a list of materials and building rules called specifications to help him. 
Without these what do you think would happen to the building? In 
a government a constitution, or description of government, takes the 
place of the plan and specifications. Show how the constitution of 
Kamehameha III was like a building plan and specifications. Explain 
why it was that the Hawaiian kings had not needed a constitution 
before 1840. 


OVE 


END OF FOREIGN DIFFICULTIES 


Continuance of difficulties. After the three great powers, 
the United States, Great Britain, and France, had recognized 
the independence of Hawaii, it might reasonably be expected 
that there would no longer be any serious trouble with those 
nations. Nevertheless there continued to be trouble for at 
least ten years, and at times the independence of the kingdom 
seemed to be in danger. None of the great nations of the world 
seemed to be willing to treat the Hawaiian kingdom as an equal. 
It will be remembered that in the treaty made by Captain Laplace 
in 1839, the French were given some special privileges. British 
and American citizens were not satisfied until the same privileges 
had been given to them. In addition to all this many of the 
officials sent out to represent the three great powers acted in 
disagreeable and unreasonable ways and frequently stirred up 
hard feelings. 

Policy of Mr. Wyllie. The task of dealing with this problem 
fell at first on Dr. Judd; but after the beginning of 1845, on 
R. C. Wyllie. As minister of foreign relations Mr. Wyllie proved 
to be a courageous and untiring defender of the rights of the 
king and his government. He tried to negotiate fair and honor- 
able treaties with foreign countries and finally succeeded in doing 
this in most cases. He found that the Hawaiian government 
could ordinarily get better treatment by appealing directly to 
the foreign governments themselves than by dealing with their 
representatives in Hawaii. In order to show the world that the 
Hawaiian government acted honorably and that on many oc- 

176 


END OF FOREIGN DIFFICULTIES 177 


casions foreigners were unreasonable in their demands and unjust 
in their statements, Mr. Wyllie published much of the corre- 
spondence between the Hawaiian government and foreign repre- 
sentatives. In the course of the next ten years he had the satis- 
faction of seeing the independence of Hawaii firmly established. 

Relations with the United States. In 1843 a commissioner, 
George Brown, was appointed to represent the United States 
in Hawaii. Mr. Brown was the first diplomatic (as distinguished 
from consular) official to be sent by any foreign power to this 
kingdom. He proved to be the wrong man for the place, acting 
in a disrespectful and insulting manner, and the king soon asked 
the president of the United States to recall him. 

The next United States commissioner, Anthony Ten Eyck, 
was much like Mr. Brown and it was not long before he became 
involved in difficulties with the Hawalian government. He also 
tried very hard to negotiate a treaty which would give to Ameri- 
can citizens in Hawaii the special privileges that Captain La- 
place’s treaty gave to Frenchmen. His conduct finally became 
so unreasonable that the king refused to have any further dealings 
with him. 

In 1849 a special ambassador, James J. Jarves, sent by the 
king to Washington, negotiated a fair and reasonable treaty with 
the United States, which went into effect in 1850. The kingdom 
of Denmark had already, in 1846, made such a treaty with the 
Hawaiian kingdom. 

Luther Severance, who arrived in 1851 as commissioner from 
the United States, was the first diplomatic representative of that 
country to conduct himself in a dignified manner and show 
proper respect for the king and government of Hawaii. His 
example was followed by his successors. 

Relations with Great Britain. In the spring of 1844 William 
Miller arrived in-Honolulu as British consul general, taking 
the place of Richard Charlton. Mr. Miller brought with him 
a new treaty, somewhat like that of Captain Laplace, which the 


178 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


king signed under protest and in the expectation that a more 
acceptable treaty would soon be made. In 1846 the British and 
French governments sent out new treaties, exactly alike, not 
quite so bad as the 
other treaties, but still 
containing two objec- 
tionable articles. The 
king considered it ad- 
visable to sign these 
also and to continue 
the effort to get just 
treaties with those 
powers. This was 
finally accomplished 
in 1851 with Great 
Britain, and in 1858 
with France. 

The only serious 
cause of dispute with 
Great Britain during 
this period was over 
the question of Rich- 
ard Charlton’s land 
claim. It will be re- 
membered that this 
claim was one of the 
grounds for the ac- 
tions of Captain 
Paulet in 1843 and that it was one of the questions left to the 
decision of the law advisers of the British government. Their 
decision was that Mr. Charlton should be given undisturbed 
possession of the land if he produced the original grant from 
Kalanimoku and showed that it was genuine. There was a dif- 
ference of opinion as to the meaning of this decision and as to 





Seal of Danish Treaty of 1846 





af Huds BMaade Konge til Danmark, de Venders 






ae ( : 
So) {> 


~ 





og others Aertug til Slesvig, Wolltcen, Stormarn, , 
Ditmarsken, Lanenborg og Modenborg, &c Xe 





\ 
\ 


7 Stree wt fore lft ag Searkinf ty Soo La hon| 


Cae ' 
Steere sheccll be purysetiect pence and Cat yee be, 


Qjore vitterliat: 





cae em—a 





Lipase oes nf Yyawatt. Gare! MI rrvr'gb sve Ee, 
VO Wy llit, y Gopor for Wer Bunt Gale, 
Ue tf Ci mcs Cw 
lun, Speen Cnidersen Mille Da Log at pales ee 
her Sranaretnny O9.m, tadur (9 Goteten fo Ce 
. nolule fpetiS. Srtat rr O95 fon GD 
By tve forr Qh fore frbgec 


; IC Gnem7 beiratle Cfaccd EL apg (ewveredecre cred 








eared Ccera seed of r20cke cal a tbe cart sheeithe exist | 
Z Gog 
feleveere Deyeoiece tK caret the 4 HMaMAMC7 EC |. Ltteeveds 






lthee follere, 7 7 Porad Lecleds “ave xe a Chel SfOCOSTO SE, pl a, 





thal relented beemw srecedecatly cg yA StOTe cored 





e Z 
egrecke Celiveert Chee ae 27evIteweXds uf Zevose RR 
«ned thee UM Berea eee cA Cette S 
CLc#- 7. 






Waeat is geht he eng a Qrrnrarck ase’ 





First Page of Danish Treaty of 1846 

















180 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


the way in which it should be carried out. ‘This led to a long 
and sometimes bitter correspondence between Consul General 
Miller and the Hawaiian minister of foreign relations; the con- 
troversy was not finally closed until 1847. The result was that 
Charlton got possession of the land in dispute, although there 
is strong evidence to show that his grant was either forged or 
obtained under a misunderstanding. 

Relations with France. As soon as news reached Hawaii of 
the recognition of independence by France and England, the 
attitude of the French consul, Mr. Dudoit, changed completely 
and thereafter his relations with the government were of the most 
friendly character. In 1846 the $20,000 taken by Captain La- 
place in 1839 was brought back by a French admiral, the boxes 
in which it was originally packed never having been opened. 

But these pleasant relations with France continued for only a 
few years. In the beginning of 1848 a new French consul, 
named Patrick Dillon, arrived at Honolulu. He proved to be 
a trouble maker, hunting diligently for causes of complaint, and 
trying to create ill feeling between the Catholics and the govern- 
ment. He also made ungrounded charges that the treaty with 
France was not being observed. In April, 1849, matters came 
to a crisis. The Hawaiian government referred to the French 
government all the questions in dispute and asked the king of 
France to recall M. Dillon. About the same time the latter 
appealed for support to the French commander in the Pacific, 
Rear Admiral de Tromelin. | 

In the middle of August the admiral came to Honolulu with 
two warships, the Poursuivante and the Gassendi, and, after con- 
sulting with Consul Dillon, sent to the king a series of ten de- 
mands, based upon the charges which had been worked up by 
the consul. He also made threats as to what he would do if the 
demands were not granted. The king returned a courteous reply, 
repelling the charges and refusing to grant the demands. There- 
upon the admiral landed an armed force, which took possession 


END OF FOREIGN DIFFICULTIES 181 


of the fort, the custom house, and other government buildings. 
The king’s yacht was confiscated and a number of merchant 
vessels in the harbor were seized. The fort was completely 





From a daguerreotype made in Paris; photograph by Norman Ji¥. H ill. 
Dr. Judd and the two princes 
Prince Alexander on the left of the picture, Prince Lot on the right. 


dismantled and the furniture in the governor’s house in the fort 
was destroyed. After about ten days the two warships departed, 
taking Consul Dillon with them. 


182 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


While this difficulty was in progress, the British and American 
consuls protested against the actions of the French admiral, and 
through them a protest and an appeal were sent by the king to 
the British and American governments. It was also decided to 
send a special embassy to France. Dr. Judd was selected for 
this purpose, and he sailed in September, 1849, taking with him 
the two young princes, Alexander Liholiho, the heir-apparent, 
and his brother, Lot Kamehameha. They arrived in Paris about 
the end of January, 1850, and spent two months and a half in 
the vain effort to persuade the French government to right the 
wrong that had been done by Consul Dillon and Admiral de 
Tromelin and to make a new and just treaty. Having given up 
hope of success in this endeavor, Dr. Judd and the princes 
returned to the islands by way of England and the United States. 
In London Dr. Judd discussed the terms of the new treaty be- 
tween Great Britain and Hawaii, which was signed the following 
year. ‘The journey was one of great interest and profit to the two 
young princes. They received a great deal of attention wherever 
they went, and their natural intelligence, their education, and 
their gentlemanly conduct created a most favorable impression 
on those whom they met. 

Soon after the return of Dr. Judd, a French commissioner, 
M. Emile Perrin, arrived at Honolulu on the warship Serieuse, and 
took up with Mr. Wyllie the questions at issue between the two 
countries. After an extensive discussion, both orally and in 
writing, M. Perrin, on February 1, 1851, brought forward again 
the same ten demands that had first been presented by Admiral 
de Tromelin. The spirit in which the French commissioner 
carried on the negotiations and the presence of the French war- 
ship in the harbor created great alarm. 

Finally, as a measure of self-defense, the king signed a secret 
proclamation putting the islands under the protection of the 
United States until the relations between France and Hawaii 
should be placed on a proper basis. This proclamation was to 


END OF FOREIGN DIFFICULTIES 183 


be used only in case of emergency. It was put in the hands of 
the American commissioner, Mr. Severance, with the request 
that he act according to it in case the American flag should be 
raised above the Hawaiian flag. This was on March 10. M. 
Perrin soon got wind of what had been done. He saw that he 
had gone too far and immediately began to talk more moderately. 
He practically withdrew part of his demands and a declaration 
was drawn up and signed by him and Mr. Wyllie, covering the 
other points. M. Perrin then returned to France for further 
instructions. From this time on there was no serious trouble 
with France. : 

Change in attitude of the United States toward Hawaii. When 
this incident was brought to the attention of Daniel Webster, sec- 
retary of state of the United States, he instructed Mr. Severance 
to return to the Hawaiian authorities the proclamation in 
reference to a protectorate. At the same time he stated clearly 
the policy of the United States, which was to respect the inde- 
pendence of the Hawaiian islands, to have no thought of obtain- 
ing possession of them, and to insist that no other nation should 
take possession of them. 

But very soon the attitude of the American nation toward 
Hawaii was greatly changed by a series of important events. In 
1846, a long dispute between the United States and Great Britain 
was settled by giving the United States possession of the territory 
now included in the states of Oregon and Washington. In the 
same year the United States went to war with Mexico, and as a 
result of that war California became a part of the American 
nation. This brought the United States very close to Hawaii 
and gave the American people a greater interest in the Pacific 
Ocean and in the trade with Asia. Then in 1848 gold was dis- 
covered in California and thousands of people came there to live 
and to make their fortunes. In a little while California became 
a populous state. These developments stirred the imagination 
of the American people. The idea of expansion took possession 


184 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


of many of them. They said it was the “ manifest destiny ”’ (or 
fate we would say) of the United States to include all of North 
America, as well as Cuba and Hawaii. 

During this period there were in California many persons of an 
adventurous and reckless character who were very willing to 
help along this ‘‘ manifest destiny’ by organizing bands of 
filibusters to conquer the neighboring states of Mexico and per- 
haps also the Hawaiian islands. These people were greatly 
excited by the reports of the French attitude toward Hawaii, 
and in the fall of 1851 there was much talk of filibusters going 
from California to the islands. . The king and his advisers began 
to have some fear of danger from that direction. 

Franklin Pierce, who became president of the United States 
in 1853, was favorable to the idea of ‘‘ manifest destiny,” though 
he did not approve the actions of filibusters. His secretary of 
state, W. L. Marcy, thought the islands would some day become 
a part of the United States and he was willing and glad to have 
them come in whenever they were ready to do so. He also tried 
to find out what France would think of such a movement. 
President Pierce appointed a new commissioner, David L. Gregg, 
to take the place of Mr. Severance. Mr. Gregg expected that 
the islands would soon be annexed to the United States. 

Political disturbance in Hawaii. At the same time there was 
a great deal of political disturbance in Hawaii. There were 
various reasons for this. The native population was growing 
smaller year by year and some people predicted that the Hawaiian 
race would soon be extinct. After the settlement of California 
the number of Americans living in the islands was greatly in- 
creased. A large number of these American residents wanted to 
see the American flag flying over them. ‘‘ Annexation ”’ was 
freely talked about. There was also believed to be danger that 
revolutionists would overthrow the native monarchy, set up a 
republic, and then later join the United States, much as Texas 
had done some years before. Many of the newcomers and many 


END OF FOREIGN DIFFICULTIES 185 


of the old residents were violently opposed to certain members 
of the government who had formerly been missionaries, whose 
influence was generally thought to be against annexation, and 
who sought to strengthen the government by having foreigners 
become Hawaiian subjects. They were particularly hostile to 
Dr. Judd and to Richard Armstrong who had become minister 
of public instruction on the death of Mr. Richards in 1847. 

In the spring of 1853, smallpox broke out in the islands. The 
government took vigorous steps to prevent the spread of the 
disease but without success. Before the epidemic was stopped, 
two or three thousand natives died. The opponents of Dr. Judd 
and Mr. Armstrong took advantage of this pestilence to stir up 
sentiment against them. Among other things they said that 
these two men were responsible for the spread of the smallpox. 
Meetings were held, a committee appointed, and a petition drawn 
up, asking the king to dismiss Judd and Armstrong from the 
ministry. The king hesitated. He did not like to yield to this 
petition, and yet he was afraid there would be serious trouble if 
he retained these two men, particularly Dr. Judd, in the cabinet. 
He asked the advice of the chiefs who were members of the 
privy council, and they voted, five to four, that it would be 
proper to ask the two ministers to resign. The king delayed for 
two weeks longer and then asked for Dr. Judd’s resignation. At 
this moment all the ministers resigned, and the king then reap- 
pointed all of them except Dr. Judd. His place as minister of 
finance was taken by E. H. Allen, who had been for four years 
the American consul at Honolulu. 

Annexation Treaty of 1854. While this agitation was going 
on, a petition was presented to the king, asking him to take steps 
to bring about the annexation of Hawaii to the United States. 
This proposal was given very serious consideration by Kame- 
hameha IIT and his advisers, and finally, in February, 1854, the 
king instructed Mr. Wyllie to take up the subject with Mr. 
Gregg, the new commissioner from the United States, to find 


186 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


out on what terms annexation could be brought about, and to 
negotiate a treaty for that purpose, subject to the approval of 
the king, the cabinet, and the heir-apparent, Prince Alexander 
Liholiho. There were two principal reasons for this action. One 
was the danger of revolution within the kingdom. The other was 
the danger of some attack from without, either by filibusters from 
California or by some foreign power. If the native monarchy 
could not be maintained, it was felt that annexation to the 
United States, by means of a treaty, was the best course to follow. 
Therefore the king and his advisers wished to have a treaty of 
annexation ready, to be used in case of emergency. 

The preparation of the treaty was in the hands of Mr. Wyllie 
and Mr. Gregg, and their negotiations went on slowly through 
the summer of 1854. There were two important points on which 
they could not agree. Mr. Wyllie, by order of the king, insisted 
that Hawaii should be admitted into the American Union as a 
full-fledged state and not as a territory. He also required that 
the United States pay $300,000 yearly to the king and to the 
native chiefs and officials who would lose their places as a result 
of annexation. Mr. Gregg did not believe his government 
would ratify a treaty with those two articles included. He said 
the question of admission as a state would have to be left to 
Congress, and he thought a yearly payment of $100,000 was 
enough. But he finally agreed to include the two articles in the 
treaty and refer the whole matter to the president for decision. 
The treaty was then written out, signed by Mr. Gregg and Mr. 
Wyllie, and submitted to the king, the cabinet, and Prince 
Alexander Liholiho for approval. 

Weeks passed by without any action on the treaty. The delay 
was due mainly to Prince Alexander, who was not in favor of 
annexation except as a last resort. It is possible that Mr. Wyllie 
encouraged him in this waiting policy. In November Mr. Wyllie 
received a report that a band of filibusters was coming from 
California to overthrow the government, and that this could 


END OF FOREIGN DIFFICULTIES 187 


only be avoided by immediate annexation. The Hawaiian 
authorities interpreted this report as an attempt to force the 
king to sign the treaty without further delay. It happened that 
there were British, French, and American warships in the harbor. 
On the request of the king the commanders of these ships prom- 
ised their aid in pro- 
tecting the govern- 
ment from the threat- 
ened attack. 

This incident made 
Prince Alexander and 
Mr. Wyllie even less 
willing to have the 
treaty approved. 
They thought it 
showed that the king’s 
government would al- 
ways be protected by 
the great powers, and 
that annexation was 
not so necessary after 
all. Still they could 
not always be sure of 
having powerful war- 
ships in the harbor, 
and it is possible that | ee Oe! 
the treaty would have Krom a daguerreotype in the Stangenwald Collection. 
been signed by King Kamehameha III 
Kamehameha III if he had lived. His death, December 15, 
1854, put a stop to the whole matter. It was afterwards found 
out that the treaty as drawn up would not have been approved 
by the president of the United States if it had been presented 
to him. 

The death of Kamehameha III marks the end of an epoch. 





188 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


Thereafter, the independence of Hawaii was never seriously 
endangered by an outside force, though the question of annexa- 
tion to the United States came up again and again. But for some 
time after the death of Kamehameha III American influence 
was not as powerful as it had been during his reign. 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


You have learned about the earlier difficulties. which Hawaii had 
with more powerful countries. This chapter describes further dif- 
ficulties of the same type. Compare the part played by France, Great 
Britain, and the United States in the earlier troubles with their actions 
described in this chapter. What acts cf the United States in Texas 
and Mexico made this country change its attitude toward Hawaii for a 
time? Do you think that annexation of Hawaii by the United States 
was or was not justified in 1854? Give reasons for your answer. 
Which do you consider better — the attitude of the United States 
toward Hawaii as described in Chapter XIV, or as described in this 
chapter? Why? 


For FURTHER READING 


ALEXANDER, W. D. — ‘‘The Uncompleted Treaty of Annexation of 
1854.”’ Papers of the Hawatian Historical Society, No. 9. 


XVII 


THE WHALING ERA 


During the reign of Kamehameha III and that of his suc- 
cessor, Kamehameha IV, the prosperity of Hawaii, in a com- 
mercial way, was chiefly dependent upon the whaling industry. 
In an earlier chapter it was pointed out how the coming of the 
whalers resulted in the growth of Honolulu, the building up of 
trade, and the increase of the foreign population in the period 
before 1840. This development was one of the reasons for the 
reorganization of the government on a constitutional basis and 
for the change in the land system. The whaling industry was 
therefore beneficial to Hawaii in these ways, but it also had some 
injurious effects. The whaling era in Hawaii lasted for about 
sixty years (1820-1880), but it was at its height during the 
twenty years from 1840 to 1860. 

Why the whaling was important. It is impossible to under- 
stand the history of this period without knowing something 
about the whaling industry. Nowadays we hardly ever hear 
of whalers, but seventy-five or a hundred years ago whaling 
was of great importance. At that time there were no electric 
lights and no kerosene oil. Whale oil was used in lamps and in 
the manufacture of candles. These lamps and candles were the 
chief sources of artificial light. Most of the lubricating oil for 
use in machinery was made from whale oit. Many articles which 
are now made out of thin steel, celluloid, or rubber were then 
made out of whalebone. So that there was a great demand for 
whale oil and whalebone, and hundreds of ships scoured the 
seas in search of whales. The Americans were the most enter- 

189 


1gO A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


prising whalers and there were several towns in New England, 
such as Nantucket and New Bedford, which did nothing else 
except carry on whale fishery. 

Whalers in the Pacific Ocean. Whalers first came into the 
Pacific Ocean before the year 1800. They operated along the 
coast of Chili, and gradually spread out northward along the 
American coast and westward into the middle of the Pacific. 





Photograph by courtesy of State Street Trust Company, Boston. 
A whaling scene off the island of Hawaii in 1833 


By 1820 they had reached the sperm whale fishing grounds off 
the coast of Japan. From that year the Hawaiian islands became 
an important place of resort for the whaleships, which stopped 
here on their way to and from that region. 

Rapid increase after 1840. About 1840, new and very valu- 
able whale fishing grounds were discovered along the northwest 
coast of America, in the Okhotsk Sea, and in the Arctic Ocean 
north of Bering Strait. This resulted in a tremendous increase 
in the number of whaleships which cruised in the region north of 
Hawaii, and which visited the ports of the Hawaiian islands. 


THE WHALING ERA IQI 


Statistics show that in 1840 there were eighty-six arrivals of 
whaleships at Honolulu and Lahaina, while in 1843 there were 
three hundred eighty-three, and in 1846, five hundred ninety- 
six. That was the largest number of arrivals in any one 
year, but the industry increased in value for at least ten years 
after 1846, although the number of ships was not so large. The 
average number of arrivals between 1840 and 1860 was about 
four hundred each year. 

Financial gain from visits of whaleships. In order to supply 
the wants of the ships it was necessary to bring in large quantities 
of goods from the outside world. In 1843 goods to the value of 
about a quarter of a million dollars were imported into the 
islands. By 1847 the value of imports was nearly three times as 
great as in 1843. In the beginning of 1848, the editor of the 
Polynesian made the following statement: ‘“‘ During the past 
five years the commerce of the Hawaiian Islands has increased 
rapidly. From being a place hardly known in the commercial 
world, we have come to be quite a lion in commerce. ... New 
traders have flocked in — new stores and warehouses have sprung 
up — our mechanics have had abundance of employment, and 
the few natives engaged in agriculture have reaped a rich har- 
vest.” 

The financial gain from the visits of the whalers was seen in 
various ways. ‘The revenue of the government was increased by 
the duties paid on imported goods and by the port charges col- 
lected from the owners of the ships. The business of the mer- 
chants and mechanics was increased. The farmers had a good 
market for the potatoes, vegetables, beef, and other things 
which they raised. In fact the economic life of the islands was 
quite tied up with the whaling industry. As early as 1844, R. C. 
Wyllie wrote that “‘ the prosperity of these islands has depended, 
and does depend, mainly upon the whaleships that annually flock 
to their ports.”” The importance of this industry was so clearly 

recognized that the government passed numerous laws to en- 


192 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


courage the visits of whaleships, giving them special privileges 
of various kinds. 

When the whaleships came into port. There were two seasons 
each year when the whalers came to the islands, one in the 
spring and one in the fall. At those times the ports of Honolulu 
and Lahaina were crowded with ships. There was great rivalry 
between these two ports for the honor of having the largest 
number of ships. Up to 1840 Honolulu had the lead; from 1841 
to 1849 the larger number went to Lahaina; then for a few years 
they alternated; but after 1855 Honolulu again took the lead 
and rapidly outstripped the Maui port. Honolulu had much 
the better harbor, but many shipmasters preferred Lahaina be- 
cause at that place potatoes and other supplies were abundant 
and cheap and there were fewer temptations to sailors and less 
drunkenness and desertion. 

In many seasons there were more than a hundred ships in port 
at one time; in some seasons as many as a hundred and fifty. 
It is said that at times the ships were moored so close together at 
Honolulu that a person could walk from one end of the harbor to 
the other on the decks of the ships without going on shore. 

At such times as this there would be thousands of sailors in 
port and that naturally meant that times were lively. A sailor 
on a whaleship had a hard life, and when he got on shore for a 
little while he wanted recreation and entertainment in many 
different ways. During the whaling season there was always a 
great deal of noise and disorder, drunkenness and gambling, and 
even worse evils. Sometimes a riot would get started and then 
the police officers would have their hands full in putting down the 
disturbance. The most famous incident of this kind was the 
sailors’ riot in November, 1852. 

Sailors riot of 1852. A drunken sailor named Burns had been 
locked up with a number of others in a cell in the fort. During 
the night he made such a disturbance that the constable went 
in to quiet the noise. Burns was struck on the head by the 


THE WHALING ERA 193 


constable’s club and died a few hours later. During the follow- 
ing day a crowd of sailors gathered about the fort and demanded 
that the constable be turned over to them. No particular 
trouble occurred that day, but the next afternoon, after the 
funeral of Burns, another mob of sailors gathered in the streets, 


a 








From a painting in Bishop Museum : photograph by Williams. 
Interior of the fort, Honolulu 


armed with clubs, many of them inflamed with liquor. Part of 
them gathered about the fort, while others went to the police 
station. They drove out the police officers, broke up the furni- 
ture, and set fire to the building, which was burned to the ground, 
together with two small neighboring buildings. The immense 
fleet of whaleships in the harbor narrowly escaped destruction. 
During the rest of the evening the sailors rioted about town, 
breaking into saloons, and threatening to attack the homes of 
Dr. Judd and Mr. Armstrong. 


194 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


By the next morning it was seen that vigorous steps would 
have to be taken to put an end to the riot. A military company 
to codperate with the police was organized by the foreigners 
living in Honolulu, and the captains and officers of the ships prom- 
ised their aid in restoring order. The regular soldiers were 
called out, and the foreign company, the police, and the soldiers 
were drawn up inside the fort, prepared for action. When all 
was ready, Governor Kekuanaoa ordered the unarmed natives 
outside the fort to clear the sailors from the streets. This was 
accomplished in a couple of hours, practically without bloodshed. 
Part of the sailors were arrested and locked up in the fort, and 
the rest of them were sent back to their ships and made to stay 
there. In this way the disturbance was ended. The riot was an 
illustration of what might happen at almost any time during the 
whaling season. 

What the whalers bought. Aside from rest and recreation, 
the main purpose of the whalers in coming to Hawaii was to 
purchase supplies of various kinds and to repair and refit the 
ships. Part of the supplies which they bought were raised in the 
islands. The records contain some interesting lists showing 
what kinds of things were bought. Seventy-four ships which 
visited one port in the fall of 1851 and spring of 1852 purchased 
149 cords of firewood, 1,350 barrels of Irish potatoes, 1,750 
barrels of sweet potatoes, 3,700 pumpkins, 1,550 bunches of 
bananas, 2,900 gallons of molasses, 3,000 pounds of sugar, 31,200 
pounds of fresh beef, and 1,000 pounds of coffee. For these 
supplies the ships paid about $12,000. Other articles were also 
bought by many ships, such as turkeys, hogs, goats, coconuts, 
breadfruit, taro, cabbages, oranges, pineapples, melons, and 
leather. It was estimated that supplies of this kind sold to 
whaleships at Honolulu in 1846 amounted to $45,000, while in 
1859 they amounted to $85,000. 

But the greater part of what was required by the whaleships 
had to be imported from the United States, Europe, or Asia — 


THE WHALING ERA 195 


such things as ropes and cables, iron and copper, ship timbers, 
tar and rosin, canvas for sails, flour, rice, clothing, and a variety 
of other things. In addition to all this, the ships’ officers and 
sailors on their own account spent a large amount of money 
while they were in port, so that the sales each year to the whaling 
fleet ran up into hundreds of thousands of dollars. 

Honolulu as a whaling center. In the early years the whale- 
ships ordinarily stayed in the Pacific Ocean only one year. They 








Photograph by courtesy of State Street Trust Company, Boston. 


Capturing a sperm whale 
A whale will usually turn on its back when dying. 


would come out in the winter around Cape Horn, stop at the 
Hawaiian islands in the spring, spend the summer on the whaling 
grounds to the north, and then return to their home ports in 
New England the following winter, stopping on the way at 
Hawaii in the fall. Gradually this system changed and the ships 
began to stay out two or more years. When they did this, the 
plan was to spend the summer on the northern whaling grounds 
and the winter down along the equator. In the spring and fall 
they visited the islands to repair and refit the ships. Very often 


196 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


they would leave their oil and bone in storage at Honolulu, or ship 
it home as freight in ordinary merchant ships. Under this 
system the importance of Honolulu as a whaling center was 
greatly increased and the profits to her business men were corre- 
spondingly greater. The people in New England began to com- 
plain that Honolulu was getting all the profits from the business. 

Whaling as a Hawaiian industry. In another way Honolulu 
became a whaling center. Local business men engaged in the 
industry by sending out whaling ships on their own account. A 
first attempt along this line was made as early as 1831, but nothing 
of much importance was done until after 1850. In the year 
1856 there were fifteen Honolulu whalers, several of which brought 
back good cargoes of oil and bone. During the course of fifteen 
years twelve ships on the average were sent out from Honolulu 
each year. After that the number decreased and they finally 
disappeared in 1880. 

Hawaiian seamen. [rom the very beginning it was customary 
for the captains of whaleships to hire native Hawaiians as sailors. 
So many natives left the islands in this way that the government 
found it necessary to make laws and regulations on the subject. 
Thus it was provided that if a shipmaster wished to take a native 
as a sailor, he must first get the permission of the governor of the 
island. He also had to promise, under bond, that he would 
bring the native back at the end of two years. But these laws 
were not always strictly obeyed. 

It is Impossible to tell how many native Hawaiians left the 
islands in this way, but in 1845 the number officially reported was 
651, in 1846, 534, and in 1847, 659. In the report of the minister 
of the interior in 1846, it is stated that “‘ the whole number of 
those who have left and not returned is not known. The number 
of those constantly sailing about the ocean cannot be much less 
than 3,000. .. . We have heard that there is no port in this 
ocean untrodden by Hawaiians; and they are also in Nantucket, 
New Bedford, Sag Harbor, New London, and other places in the 


THE WHALING ERA 197 


United States. All these are in the prime of life, and many who 
go never again return to this country. There are perhaps 15,000 
young men of the Hawaiian Islands, between the ages of fifteen 
and thirty years, one fifth of whom are wandering on the ocean 
or in foreign lands.”” This meant a great loss to the nation. 

_ Decline of the whaling industry. The last big year of the 
whaling era in Hawaii was 1859. In that year the arrivals totaled 
five hundred forty-nine. The outbreak of the Civil War in the 
United States caused the withdrawal of many whalers from the 
Pacific Ocean. In 1862 there were only seventy-three arrivals 
of whaleships in Hawaiian ports. After that, and particularly 
after the close of the war, an attempt was made to revive the 
industry. By 1867 the arrivals in Hawaiian ports had in- 
creased again to two hundred forty-three, but this was followed 
by another rapid decrease. The whaling industry had received 
almost a deathblow from the discovery of petroleum in 1859. 
As a result of that discovery kerosene oil made from petroleum 
rapidly took the place of whale oil for lighting purposes, and 
lubricating oils made from petroleum took the place of those 
made from whale oil for use in machinery. Following this 
decline came a serious disaster to the whaling fleet in 1871, when 
more than thirty ships were lost in the ice fields north of Bering 
Strait. From that year the whaling industry ceased to be of very 
great importance in the business life of the Hawaiian islands, 
though for a long time a few whaleships continued to come here 
each year. 

QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


Make a list of the benefits to Hawaii of the whaling industry; of 
the injuries done to Hawaii by the whaling industry. Must benefits 
always be accompanied by injuries? Give reasons for your answer. 
Could some of these injuries to Hawaii have been avoided? How? 


For FURTHER READING 


SPEARS, J. R. — The Story of the New England Whalers. 


XVIII 


EARLY AGRICULTURAL ENTERPRISES 


All through the years of the whaling era people frequently 
asked the question: What would be the result if the whaleships 
should cease coming to Hawaii? Those who thought seriously 
on the subject saw that if that did happen the economic prosperity 
of the islands would be destroyed and there would be “ hard 
times,’’ unless something was developed to take the place of the 
whaling industry. Those who had the welfare of the nation at 
heart advised the people of Hawaii, both native and haole, to 
prepare for the possible loss of the whalers by developing the 
agricultural resources of the kingdom. But this advice was not 
followed as extensively as it should have been. Men recognized 
that the whaling era was likely to end sooner or later, but while 
it lasted they could make money more easily by doing business 
with the whalers than by investing their capital in agricultural 
enterprises, such as sugar, coffee, cotton, or tobacco plantations. 
And for a long time the land system and the land laws made 
it hard to establish and develop plantations. Still, in spite of 
various difficulties, a number of interesting agricultural enter- 
prises were set on foot during the first half of the last century. 
While many of these enterprises failed, the experience gained 
was of permanent value. 

Introduction of plants. The agriculture of the ancient Ha- 
walians was confined mainly to the raising of taro and sweet 
potatoes. The cultivation of these plants had been brought to a 
high degree of perfection, involving the laying out of fields and 
the building of elaborate irrigation systems. Some other kinds 

198 


EARLY AGRICULTURAL ENTERPRISES 199 


of vegetable foods*dents sed by the natives, but on the whole 
their agricultural products were comparatively few. The early 
traders and explorers, notably Vancouver, left many kinds of 
seeds and plants and introduced useful animals. Some of the 
early foreign residents did much good in a similar way. 

Most important of these was a Spaniard named Francisco de 
Paula Marin, commonly called Manini. This man came to 
Hawaii before the time of Vancouver, and was for many years 
a friend and adviser of Kamehameha I. He had a house and 
garden at Honolulu, where he raised a great variety of plants 
and fruit trees, many of which had never been grown in Hawaii 
before his time. He also made nails, tiles, soap, sugar, molasses, 
castor oil, candles, cigars, wine, brandy, and beer. It is said 
of him that he was not very generous in giving seeds and plants 
to other people, but notwithstanding that fact he must be given 
credit for a large amount of useful work. 

With the coming of the missionaries in 1820 a new impetus 
was given to agricultural effort in the islands. In the first band 
of missionaries a farmer was included. This shows the practical 
side of the missionary program. It is true that for various 
reasons, which were not at all his fault, the services of this farmer 
did not prove as useful as had been hoped, and he soon returned 
to the United States. Nevertheless, the missionaries, both by 
practice and teaching, did much to encourage agriculture. They 
introduced seeds, plants, and tools in many parts of the islands, 
and showed the natives how to use all of them. 

Beginning of sugar industry. From the fact that sugar cane 
grew luxuriantly on all the islands of the group, it was very early 
felt that the manufacture of sugar would be a profitable industry 
if it were properly managed. Sugar is said to have been made 
as early as 1802 by a Chinese on the island of Lanai. The 
Spaniard, Paula Marin, made some sugar in February, 1819, and 
there are various accounts of the making of sugar and molasses 
on a small scale, here and there, from that time down to 1835. 


200 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


In some cases this was done under the , _.snage of the chiefs. 
There is some reason for believing that a small cargo of sugar was 
shipped to California in 1827, and there is evidence to show that 


another cargo was shipped to New South Wales, Australia, 





_——S ey 
nono ask 


Ye Rae 


From the Hawaiian Spectator, January, 1839. 
A sugar cane mill operated by Chinese on the island of Kauai about 1837 








probably about 1833. All of this early sugar was of poor quality, 
the mills used being very crude affairs. 

A plantation in Manoa Valley. From an early day plans were 
suggested for the systematic development of agriculture. The 
scheme of John Rives for a French colony was referred to in an 
earlier chapter. The first attempt that had any chance of success 
in carrying on agricultural-operations on a large scale was made 
in 1825 by John Wilkinson. This man had come from England 
with Lord Byron in the Blonde. Governor Boki had encouraged 
him to come and promised to help him get started. Manoa 
Valley near Honolulu was selected as a good place for a planta- 
tion and work was begun in the fall of 1825. Many difficulties 
had to be met. Tools were lacking, and the ground was broken 
up with the 0-0, or digger, used by the natives. The cost of 
labor, at the rate of twenty-five cents a day, used up a large 
amount of money. Wilkinson died in the spring of 1827. At 
that time he had more than a hundred acres of sugar cane and a 
considerable number of coffee trees growing. Boki and some 


EARLY AGRICULTURAL ENTERPRISES 201 


of the foreign residents of Honolulu then took charge of the 
plantation. At intervals during the years 1826-1829 cane was 
cut and manufactured into sugar, molasses, andrum. Small 
quantities of coffee are said to have been picked by the natives. 
But the enterprise proved unprofitable and was abandoned, 
probably in 1829. 

Koloa plantation. Between 1825 and 1830 it became per- 
fectly clear that sandalwood, the principal source of revenue up 
to that time, was about all gone. The chiefs and their foreign 
advisers had to look elsewhere for an income. This made them 
think of developing the natural resources of the islands. At 
that time the great obstacles were the system of landholding and 
the absolute control which the chiefs had over the time and labor 
of the common people. This discouraged industry on the part 
of the natives and prevented foreigners from doing anything. 
The chiefs would not sell land to them and did not even like to 
rent land on terms that the foreigners would accept. In 1835, 
however, the American firm of Ladd and Company succeeded 
in obtaining from the king and the governor of Kauai a fifty- 
year lease of a tract of land at Koloa, Kauai, for the purpose of 
raising cane and manufacturing sugar. The lease also gave them 
the right to hire natives to work for them. This marks the 
beginning of the first successful sugar plantation. There was 
difficulty in getting started, due to inexperience and to the lack 
of agricultural implements and draft animals. The ground was 
first broken with a plow pulled by natives. The laborers were 
paid twelve and a half cents a day and were furnished with food 
(fish and poi), the cost of which was estimated at one cent a day 
for each man. Being paid for their work was a new experience 
for the natives, and a traveler who visited the place in 1837 wrote 
that it was an incentive to industry and thrift. 

The first mill was a rough wooden affair, but an iron mill was 
set up about the end of 1837, and an improved mill, to be run 
by water power, was erected in 1841. The first sugar was made 


202 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


in the fall of 1837, but it was of poor quality. It was not until 
about 1842 that sugar of even fair quality was produced. 

Attempt to raise silk. Another interesting experiment carried 
on at Koloa was the attempt to produce silk. In 1836 two 
Americans, Sherman Peck and Charles Titcomb, leased some 
land from Ladd and Company and set out a large number of 
mulberry trees, the leaves of which are used to feed the silk- 
worm. Eggs of the silkworm were brought from China and 
America, and one of the partners made a visit to the United 
States for the purpose of buying the necessary machinery. Some 
trouble was met at first in getting the eggs to hatch properly, 
but this was finally overcome, and cocoons of good quality were 
obtained. Native women were taught to reel the silk, at which 
work they proved to be quite skillful. In August, 1840, a small 
shipment of raw silk was sent from this plantation to New York. 
A second plantation was started at Koloa by the firm of Stetson 
and Company. Ladd and Company had a financial interest in 
both these plantations. A plantation was also started in Hanalei 
Valley by Mr. Titcomb, who seems to have sold his interest at 
Koloa. By the spring of 1840 the success of the industry seemed 
reasonably certain. 

Then a series of misfortunes Shears A severe drought set 
in; Insect pests attacked the mulberry trees, and violent winds 
withered the leaves and whipped them from the trees. These 
disasters proved too serious for the Koloa plantations. The 
silk industry was abandoned and the land planted to sugar cane. 
The plantation at Hanalei was not affected in the same way. 
That location was better adapted to the business, and Mr. 
Titcomb carried on for a few years longer. But even there the 
returns were too small and too slow to balance the trouble and 
expense, and about 1845 the effort was given up. 

Experiments with cotton. It is not known with certainty 
when the development of the cotton industry was first suggested. 
As early as 1825 it was reported that the natives were beginning 


EARLY AGRICULTURAL ENTERPRISES 203 


to cultivate cotton “ of a very superior quality.” . In 1832 the 


missionaries wrote to the American Board recommending that 
an attempt be made to teach the natives how to make cotton 
cloth. In one letter they stated that “the cotton tree grows 
here most luxuriantly, and the cotton is of the best kind. It 
therefore seems to us a most desirable object that there should 
be some means for manufacturing it.” The recommendation 
was adopted and the Board sent out a young woman, Miss 
Lydia Brown, with some apparatus, to teach the art of spinning 
and weaving. ‘The work was begun in July, 1835, at Wailuku, 
Maui, with a small class of young women. The pupils mani- 
fested great interest and soon learned to spin and to knit. Weav- 
ing was more difficult, but after a time the natives learned how 
to operate the loom. A year and a half later a class was gradu- 
ated, “‘ clothed in garments of their own manufacture.”’ 

Governor Kuakini of Hawaii visited the school at Wailuku and 
became greatly interested in this new enterprise. In 1837 he put 
up a stone building at Kailua, to be used as a cotton factory. At 
this place the spinning was done by girls and women, and the 
weaving by young men who were taught by an American weaver. 
By the spring of 1839, about six hundred yards of cloth had been 
made at Wailuku and about four hundred yards at Kailua, a small 
part of this being woven by the natives without any assistance. 

Cotton was planted at several of the mission stations and at 
other places. There is a record of one field of fifty-five acres 
at Haiku, Maui. For a few years much interest was shown in 
this business; then other things drew attention away from it, 
and about 1840, or soon after, the cotton industry was abandoned 
for the time being. It was revived during the period of the 
American Civil War and some cotton of good quality was raised 
and exported. After the close of the war the enterprise was 
given up. 

Beginning of coffee industry. Coffee was first raised on the 
Manoa plantation of John Wilkinson, the plants having been 


204 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


brought from Brazil in the frigate Blonde. Some plants brought 
from Manila by the British Consul Charlton were also set out in 
Manoa Valley. In 1828 or 1829, the growing of coffee was 
begun on the island of Hawaii, in Hilo and Kona, by the mission- 
aries. From there it was taken to Kauai anda plantation started 
at Hanalei in 1842. A few years later Charles Titcomb laid 
out another coffee plantation in that valley, after the failure of 
his silk enterprise. : 

Early prospects of success were blasted by floods, labor troubles, 
and a severe drought which occurred in 1851. ‘This was fol- 
lowed by a blight, which resulted in the abandonment of coffee 
raising on Kauai. But on the other islands, and particularly on 
Hawaii, the coffee industry became a permanent one, although 
statistics show that the output varied greatly in quantity from 
year to year. 

Effect of settlement of California. Aside from the efforts to 
develop the sugar, silk, cotton, and coffee industries, agricultural 
activity in the islands was confined almost exclusively to the 
growing of vegetables, especially potatoes, to supply the whale- 
ships. Some tobacco was raised by the natives for their own use, 
and about 1850 an effort was made to develop that industry, but 
without success. The raising of wheat and corn was carried on 
in a small way, chiefly by some of the missionaries and by native 
Hawaiians under their encouragement. The acquisition of 
California by the United States (1846) and the rapid settlement 
of that state after the discovery of gold (1848), gave a great 
stimulus to Hawaiian agriculture. Those startling events opened 
a near-by market for sugar and coffee, and created a big demand 
for produce of all kinds. There was a veritable boom in the 
potato business. In the years 1849-1855 more than two hundred 
thousand barrels of potatoes were exported from the islands, 
nearly all to California. The wheat crop was increased, flour 
mills erected, and for a few years flour was exported to the 
Golden State. This did not last, however. California soon 


EARLY AGRICULTURAL ENTERPRISES 205 


began to raise her own potatoes and wheat. But the market for 
sugar and coffee remained. In 1854, when Kamehameha III 
died, those were the staple products of the country and the ones 
which gave greatest promise for the future. 

Royal Hawaiian Agricultural Society. In August, 1850, the 
Royal Hawaiian Agricultural Society was organized. This 
showed the growing importance of agriculture and was at the same 
time a recognition of the need of study and united effort for the 
future. In the call for the first meeting it was pointed out that 
the prospects of Hawaii had been greatly changed for the better 
by two recent developments: (1) the extension of the United 
States to the Pacific Coast; (2) the change in the Hawaiian 
land system. The Agricultural Society existed for many years. 
Meetings were held annually, at which there were reports, ad- 
dresses, and discussions on agricultural topics and problems. 
In connection with the annual meeting there was an exhibit of 
agricultural products, for the best of which prizes were awarded. 
Judge William L. Lee was the first president of the society 
and its membership included some of the leading men of the 
kingdom. 

Growth of sugar industry. Following the establishment of 
the Koloa plantation in 1835, an increasing amount of attention 
was given to sugar. As early as 1838 there were said to be in 
operation, or ready to be set up, twenty mills run by animal 
power and two by water power. All of these were small, and the 
amount of sugar produced was not large. Koloa was the only 
plantation, properly so called. In that year (1838) the total 
amount of sugar exported was about forty-four tons. Two 
years later it had risen to one hundred eighty tons, but in 1841 
dropped back to thirty tons. During the next fifteen years 
several plantations were started and the average export was 
about two hundred forty tons a year. The first important 
advance in manufacturing came in 1851, with the invention 
of the centrifugal drying process. This resulted in a great 


200 A HISTORY OF.; HAWAII 


saving of time and in a great improvement in the quality of 
sugar produced. 

Outlook for the future. Up to the end of the reign of Kame- 
hameha III the history of the Hawaiian sugar industry was one 
of severe struggle for existence, with many failures and much loss 
of money. Nevertheless, progress was being made and it was 
generally believed that this was destined to be the big industry of 
the islands. But in order to make it so, the sugar planters had 
three obstacles to overcome: (1) scarcity of capital; (2) shortage 
of labor; (3) an uncertain market. 

(t) Many of the early plantations were founded on money 
borrowed at a high rate of interest. Many planters did not have 
enough capital to sustain them until the profits began to come 
in. The greater part of the money available at the islands was 
invested in commercial enterprises more or less closely connected 
with the whaling industry, and the business men who controlled 
those enterprises were very slow about putting money into sugar. 
The firm of C. Brewer and Company was probably the first com- 
mercial house to do this. 

(2) The shortage of labor was due to the decrease in the native 
population. It has generally been stated that at the time of the 
discovery by Captain Cook the population of the islands was 
about 300,000. In 1823 the missionaries estimated the number 
of natives at 142,000. According to the census of 1832 it was 
about 130,000. By 1853 it had fallen to 70,000. Hundreds of 
the native youth, who would have made good plantation laborers, 
left the islands on whaleships. Many of those who stayed at 
home found other kinds of employment and could not be induced 
to work on the plantations; or they demanded such high wages 
that the planters could not afford to employ them. Under these 
circumstances it was proposed that Chinese coolies should be 
brought to the islands under contract to work on the plantations. 
The project was taken up by the Royal Hawaiian Agricultural 
Society, and in January, 1852, about two hundred Chinese ar- 


EARLY AGRICULTURAL ENTERPRISES 207 


rived from Hong Kong in the ship Thetis. In August, a hundred 
more arrived. These were the first of the many thousands of 
laborers brought from abroad to supply the needs of the sugar 
plantations. 

(3) It has been mentioned that California afforded a market 
for Hawaiian sugar. There were, however, two drawbacks to 
that state as a permanent market. One was the competition 
with sugar sent from the Philippine Islands. The other was the 
tariff duty which had to be paid on all sugar imported into the 
United States. The Hawaiian sugar planters found it very 
hard to overcome these two handicaps and still make a profit on 
their investments. This caused many of them to favor the 
annexation of Hawaii to the United States. 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


1. In what respects may the tourist trade to-day be compared with 
the whaling trade of seventy-five years ago. Is it likely to end as 
the whaling trade did? Why? 

2. Name unsuccessful agricultural experiments made in Hawaii 
seventy-five years ago. 

3. The cultivation of sugar was finally successfully established. 
What three things were lacking to make it a success at first? How 
was each obtained ? 

4. What were some of the good effects of importing labor at this 
time? Some of the bad effects? Which do you think greater? Why? 

5. It is not easy to get plantation laborers to-day. Is there any 
way to get them besides bringing in more foreigners? What? How? 
What do you consider the best plan for securing plantation labor? 
Why? 


XIX 


A NEW KING AND A NEW POLICY 


Kamehameha IV. After the death of Kamehameha III, the 
people affectionately referred to him as “ the good old king.” 
This was by way of 
contrast to the new 
king. Kamehameha 
III was not an old 
man when he died, 
but his reign had been 
long and crowded with 
important events. His 
successor, Prince Al- 
exander Liholiho, was 
proclaimed king, De- 
cember 15, 1854, under 
the title of Kameha- 
meha IV, and was 
formally inaugurated 
on the eleventh of 
3 January in the Stone 

aires Church (Kawaiahao). 
igs The new king lacked 
a month of being twenty-one years of age at the time of his 
inauguration. He was the son of Kinau and Governor Keku- 
anaoa, and was therefore a grandson of Kamehameha I and 
a nephew of Kamehameha III. He had inherited all the mental 
keenness of the Kamehameha line and had received a thorough 


208 





A NEW KING AND A NEW POLICY 209 


education both in Hawaiian and in English. He spoke and 
wrote both languages with great fluency. Kamehameha III had 
been extremely democratic in his views and habits; Kameha- 
meha IV was more inclined to be aristocratic, and the etiquette 
and ceremonial of the royal court became more noticeable during 
his reign. 

Change of policy. During the reign of Kamehameha III 
American missionary influence and American influence in general 
had been very powerful. Kamehameha IV wished to strengthen 
his government and to perpetuate the independence of his king- 
dom. He recognized the immense benefits that Hawaii had 
received from the American missionaries and from American 
commercial and agricultural enterprises, but he feared that the 
preponderance of American interests would lead finally to the 
annexation of Hawaii to the United States. His policy, therefore, 
was to remove the influences which tended toward annexation, 
or to introduce and foster other influences to counteract them. 
He had still other reasons for pursuing such a course. When he 
and his older brother Lot visited America and Europe with Dr. 
Judd in 1849-50, the young princes are said to have been offended 
by the treatment they received in some parts of the United 
States, and to have been greatly impressed with the excellence 
of British institutions. At any rate they seem to have brought 
back with them a great admiration for the British form of govern- 
ment and the English church. 

In June, 1856, the king was married to Miss Emma Rooke, 
a granddaughter of the Englishman, John Young, the friend and 
adviser of Kamehameha I, and great-granddaughter of Keliimai- 
kai, the younger brother of Kamehameha I. In infancy she had 
been adopted by her uncle, Dr. T. C. B. Rooke, an English 
physician of Honolulu. She had been educated first in the 
Young Chiefs’ School by Mr. and Mrs. A. S. Cooke, and after- 
wards by an English governess in the family of Dr. Rooke. 
Queen Emma was a woman of culture and refinement, with a 


210 A HISTORY OF- HAWAII 


kindly and lovable character —a gentlewoman in the finest 
sense of that word. But her sympathies, naturally and properly, 
were English, and this had an important effect on the king. At 
the royal wedding the 
form of service used 
was that of the Church 
of England. 

The change of policy 
was not carried out 
suddenly or harshly, 
but it was begun and 
gradually furthered 
very soon after Kame- 
hameha IV came to 
thessthrone.. InAstie 
summer of 1855 the 
American commis- 
sioner wrote that it 
seemed to be “ the de- 
termination of the 
authorities to get rid 
altogether of all mis- 
sionary influence in 
the administration of 
affairs.” At that time there was no member of the cabinet who 
had ever been connected with the American missionary enter- 
prise, and an Englishman had just taken the place of a former 
missionary as editor of the government newspaper, the Poly- 
nestan. 

Nonmissionary American influence continued to be strong for 
several years longer. Until his death in 1857 Chief Justice Lee 
was the most powerful member of the government and was the 
most trusted adviser of the king. David L. Gregg, the American 
commissioner, was also a close friend of the king. In 1858 he 





Queen Emma 


A NEW KING AND A NEW POLICY Zr 


became the Hawaiian minister of finance, a position which he 
held for four years. Mr. Gregg was a Catholic and that fact 
and some of his personal habits made him objectionable to the 
missionary party. But he was a man of ability and good educa- 
tion, and at all times warmly defended American interests. As 
a result of the action of the House of Representatives, he was 
forced to resign in 1862. By the end of the reign of Kamehameha 
IV there was not one American in the king’s cabinet. Mr. Wyllie 
was the leading figure in the government. 

Reciprocity. It was the wish of the king and his councilors 
to promote the development of the resources of the kingdom, and 
to remove all causes of discontent with the existing government. 
The Hawaiian sugar industry was seriously handicapped by the 
United States tariff laws. Many of the planters, Americans by 
birth, felt that if Hawaii were a part of the United States the 
prosperity of the country would be greatly increased, since it 
would not be necessary to pay the heavy duties on sugar imported 
into California and Oregon. ‘They were therefore inclined to 
look favorably on annexation projects. But there was another 
way in which the desired result could be brought about. This 
was through a reciprocity of trade, by which Hawaiian products 
would be admitted into the United States and American prod- 
ucts would be admitted into Hawaii, both free of duty. The 
Hawaiian government desired to bring about an arrangement of 
this kind. 

Already, in 1848 and 1852, such a reciprocity of trade had been 
suggested, discussed, and formally proposed by the Hawaiian 
government, but the proposition had not received a favorable 
response from the United States. Now, in 1855, Chief Justice 
Lee was sent to Washington as a special ambassador for the pur- 
pose of trying to secure a reciprocity treaty. Mr. Gregg, the 
American commissioner, strongly recommended such a treaty. 
President Pierce and Secretary of State Marcy were favorable 
to the project, and a treaty was soon drawn up and signed by 


21:2 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


Mr. Marcy and Judge Lee. 


Unfortunately it never went into 


effect, since the United States Senate refused to ratify it, due 
largely to the opposition of the sugar planters of Louisiana. 


The Prince of Hawaii 





Another attempt was 
made in 1863, but it 
failed because of the 
Civil War then in 
progress in the United 
States. 

The Prince of Ha- 
waii. On May 20, 
1858, a son was born 
to the king and queen. 
This event gave great 
happiness to all classes 
of the population. It 
seemed to be an as- 
surance that the dy- 
nasty of Kamehameha 
would continue to rule 
in Hawaii. By royal 
proclamation the little 
heir to the throne re- 
ceived the official title 
of the Prince of Ha- 
waii. The name given 
to him was Albert 
Edward Kauikeaouli. 
The young prince 


proved to be a bright and attractive child, though not of a very 
rugged constitution. The king and queen were passionately fond 
of him, and he was greatly loved by all who knew him. The 
brief life of the prince was closely connected with the establish- 


ment of the Episcopal Church in Hawaii. 


A NEW KING AND A NEW POLICY 213 


The Episcopal Church. From an early date there had been 
in Honolulu a number of English and American residents who in 
their homelands had been members of the Church of England or 
of the Protestant Episcopal Church of the United States. From 
time to time the organization of an Episcopal Church had been 
suggested, but nothing definite had resulted from these sug- 
gestions. Now the king and queen were interested in such a plan. 
After the birth of the Prince of Hawaii they are said to have 
desired that the child’s education should be under the direction 
of a tutor belonging to the Episcopal Church, perhaps a clergy- 
man of that faith. Mr. Wyllie had written several times to 
Bishop Kip of California, asking him to send a clergyman to 
Hawaii, but Bishop Kip had no men to spare for work outside of 
his own field, although he was greatly interested in the subject. 

In 1859 an appeal was sent to the Church of England, asking 
for the establishment of a church in Honolulu. King Kame- 
hameha offered to give a site for the church and parsonage, and 
to contribute a certain amount annually for the support of a 
clergyman. This appeal met a favorable response. The plan 
finally made in England for the mission included the sending of 
a bishop and several clergymen from that country, to be aug- 
mented by several clergymen from the United States. It was 
the intention that the English and American branches of the 
Episcopal Church should codperate in the enterprise; but the 
Civil War in the United States interfered, and therefore the mis- 
sion as established was distinctly English in tone. 

It was expected that the introduction of this religious body 
would be marked by the christening of the Prince of Hawaii. 
Queen Victoria of England had consented to be the godmother of 
the Hawaiian royal child. The baptism was to be administered 
by the new bishop, the Right Rev. T. N. Staley, but when he and 
his party arrived at Honolulu, October 11, 1862, the prince was 
dead. The boy had been attacked with brain fever a few weeks 
before and had died after an illness of eight days. When it was 


214 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


seen that he could not survive, the baptismal ceremony was per- 
formed by the pastor of Kawaiahao church, using the ritual of 
the Church of England. 

Soon after the arrival of Bishop Staley, a charter of incorpora- 
tion was granted for the new religious organization. The name 
given to it was the Hawaiian Reformed Catholic Church, but it 
was commonly called the English Church. The king and queen 
were the first communicants, and the church continued to have 
their earnest patronage. The king further showed his interest 
by translating into the Hawaiian language the English Book of 
Common Prayer. 

The Hawaiian Board. The establishment of the Episcopal 
Church in Hawaii was almost simultaneous with an important 
change in the organization and control of the pioneer American 
mission. Up to this time the work of that mission had been under 
the direct control of the American Board of Commissioners for 
Foreign Missions. For some years the Board had looked upon 
Hawaii as a Christian nation and had felt that the time was near 
when the religious work should be left in the hands of the Ha- 
waiian churches — that these churches should be self-governing 
and, so far as possible, self-supporting. As early as 1848 some 
steps had been taken in that direction. In 1863, Dr. Rufus 
Anderson, Foreign Secretary of the American Board, visited the 
islands in order to examine the situation and assist in working out 
a new plan for carrying on the work. 

The result was that the American Board practically withdrew 
from the field, leaving the general work of the Hawaiian churches 
under the jurisdiction of the Hawaiian Evangelical Association. 
The membership of that organization up to this time had been 
confined to the missionaries. It was now enlarged to include 
the native pastors and also the lay delegates elected from the 
different islands. Four subordinate island associations were 
organized to take care of local church affairs. The Hawaiian 
Evangelical Association now elects an executive body, commonly 


A NEW KING AND A NEW POLICY 215 


called the ‘‘ Hawaiian Board,” which manages the business of 
the association. 

The Catholic mission. In 1841 the bishop in charge of the 
Hawaiian mission of the Catholic Church went to France for the 
purpose of getting a 
reinforcement and 
financial assistance. 
He was successful in 
this effort, but he and 
all the new mission- 
aries were lost at sea 
on the return to Ha- 
wall. After some de- 
lay Rev. L. D. Maigret 
was appointed bishop, 
and under his super- 
vision the work of the 
Catholic Church was 
carried on for more 
than thirty years. By 
the beginning of the 
reign of Kamehameha 
IV the work was 
thoroughly estab- 
lished. From Oahu missionaries had been sent to the other 
islands, where they met with encouraging success. Schools were 
organized, and in the Koolaupoko district of Oahu was estab- 
lished in 1846 the College of Ahuimanu, a school somewhat like 
the Lahainaluna Seminary. In 1859 ten Sisters of the Congre- 
gation of the Sacred Hearts arrived at Honolulu and opened a 
boarding and day school for girls. 

The Mormons. Missionaries of the Mormon church first 
came to Hawaii in December, 1850, and others were sent out 
from Utah during the next few years. Their work was actively 





Bishop Maigret 


216 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


carried on and met with considerable success, particularly on the 
island of Maui. In 1855 a piece of land was leased on the island 
of Lanai, to be used as a gathering place. In 1858 all the mis- 
sionaries were recalled to Utah on account of the ‘‘ Mormon War,” 
and the native members were left to look out for themselves. 
In 1861 Walter Murray Gibson arrived from Utah and assumed 
the leadership of the Mormons in Hawai. This man, who 
afterwards became very prominent in Hawaiian politics, used 
the Mormons to advance his own personal interests. He was 
expelled from the church in 1864 and other missionaries were 
sent from Utah to take charge of the work. Through Gibson’s 
actions the Mormons lost their property on Lanai. Soon after- 
wards they bought the land at Laie, Oahu, which was made the 
headquarters of the Mormon church in Hawaii. The mission- 
aries of this church have labored zealously and effectively. Even 
those who disagree with their religious doctrines admit that their 
influence on the people has been good. 

The Queen’s Hospital. The decrease of the native population 
was a matter of serious concern to the king and to all friends of 
the race. Various reasons have been given for this decrease. 
The birth rate was low and the death rate high. Epidemics, such 
as measles in 1848 and smallpox in 1853, carried off thousands of 
the people. At all times disease was terribly prevalent, and 
very little effort was made to prevent it. Kamehameha IV, in 
his first message to the legislature in 1855, said that the decrease 
of the population was a subject “in comparison with which all 
others sink into insignificance; for our first and great duty is 
that of self-preservation. Our acts are in vain unless we can 
stay the wasting hand that is destroying our people.... I 
think this decrease in our numbers may be stayed; and happy 
should I be if, during the first year of my reign, such laws 
should be passed as to effect this result. I would commend to 
your special consideration the subject of establishing public 
hospitals.” 


A NEW KING AND A NEW POLICY 217 


In spite of the earnest appeal of the king in 1855, and again 
in 1856, the legislature made no appropriation for this important 
object. Finally, in 1859, the king and queen themselves under- 
took to raise money for a hospital. They went about with a 
subscription list and in the course of a few weeks succeeded in 
obtaining pledges for a substantial amount. A board of trustees 
was elected, and before the end of 1860 the hospital building was 
completed. The Queen’s Hospital is the finest monument to 
the memory of King Kamehameha IV and Queen Emma. 

Rehabilitation through immigration. Besides the problem of 
saving the Hawaiian race from destruction by disease and other 
causes, the question was raised as to whether the native stock 
could not be renewed and given a fresh start. It was thought 
that this might be done by immigration. The Chinese who had 
been imported had failed to come up to expectations. In the 
same speech in which he recommended the establishment of 
hospitals, the king said that, in view of this partial failure of the 
Chinese experiment, “it becomes a question of some moment 
whether a class of persons more [like] the Hawaiian race, could 
not be induced to settle on our shores. It does not seem im- 
probable that a portion of the inhabitants of other Polynesian 
groups might be disposed to come here, were suitable efforts 
made to lead them to such a step. In a few days they would 
speak our language with ease; they would be acclimated almost 
before they left the ships that conveyed them hither; and they 
might bring with them their wives. ... Such immigrants, 
besides supplying the present demand for labor, would pave the 
way for a future population of native born Hawaiians, between 
whom and those of aboriginal parents no distinguishable difference 
would exist.” 

This idea of rehabilitation through immigration was much 
discussed both in the reign of Kamehameha IV and at a later 
time. In 1855 there was no money available to put the idea into 
practice, but in 1859 a few South Sea islanders were brought in as 


218 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


a private venture to work on the Koloa plantation. At a later 
time the experiment was tried on a larger scale, but without very 
great SUCCESS. 

Death of Kamehameha IV. Kamehameha IV suffered much 
from asthma and his naturally strong constitution was con- 
siderably weakened by it. He was not always as careful of his 
physical health as he should have been. ‘The death of his son, 
the Prince of Hawaii, left him heartbroken, and from that time 
his health failed rapidly. He died on November 30, 1863, after 
a brief illness. In his mental attainments, it is probable that 
Kamehameha IV was the most brilliant of all the Hawaiian 
monarchs. 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


1. This chapter describes new influences affecting Hawaii’s life. 
Name four of them. 

2. What new influences can you think of that are affecting Hawaii 
to-day? 

3. Do you think Hawaii is changing more or less at present than it 
was in the time of Kamehameha IV? Give reasons for your answer. 

4. Changing conditions and influences mean adjustments to meet 
the changes. What adjustments were made in the time of Kameha- 
meha IV? What adjustments are being made to-day? 

5. Describe the beginning of the Queen’s Hospital. 


XX 


THE LAST OF THE KAMEHAMEHAS 


Kamehameha V. After the death of the Prince of Hawaii 
Kamehameha IV had named his own older brother, Lot Kame- 


hameha, as his suc- 
cessor on the throne. 
When Kamehameha 
IV died, Prince Lot 
was immediately pro- 
claimed king under 
the title of Kameha- 
meha V. The new 
king was a man of 
interesting and force- 
ful character. Like 
his brother he was 
well educated. He 
had visited Europe 
and America with Dr. 
Judd in 1849-50. In 
1860 he traveled on 
the Pacific Coast, vis- 
iting British Columbia 





Kamehameha V 


and California. Kamehameha V did not possess the intellectual 
brilliancy of his predecessor, but had more ability and experience 
in practical affairs. He was minister of the interior during the 
last six years of his brother’s reign, and for more than a year had 
charge of the department of finance. As king he took a close 


219 


220 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


personal interest in the conduct of the government. He pre- 
sided over the meetings of the cabinet and the privy council 
and discussed thoroughly with his ministers all important ques- 
tions. In his choice of ministers he was careful to select men 
who believed as he did, and he gave them loyal support at all 
times. He was positive in his ideas, and some of his measures 
stirred up violent opposition; but there can be little doubt that 
he honestly tried to do what he thought was best for the nation. 

Kamehameha V has been called the ‘‘ last great’ chief of the 
olden type.’’ He was the grandson and heir of the conqueror, 
Kamehameha I, and he believed that fact gave him the right to 
rule. In his opinion it was the right and the duty of the chiefs 
to lead and direct the common people. He was somewhat 
despotic in his way of thinking and acting, but it was a benevolent 
despotism. He wanted all of his subjects to be industrious and 
economical, not to waste their time and money foolishly. He 
also tried to protect them from danger. When someone proposed 
to repeal the law against selling intoxicating liquor to natives, 
the king said: “I will never sign the death warrant of my 
people,’ and the proposition was defeated. 

Kamehameha V believed that a strong native monarchy was 
the best form of government for Hawaii. He did not like the 
constitution of 1852. He said it was far ahead of the develop- 
ment of the people and the needs of the country. He thought 
it gave too much power to the people and put too much restric- 
tion on the authority of the king. He did not believe in universal 
suffrage, but thought the privilege of voting should be granted 
only to those who had some property and some education, who 
thereby showed that they were industrious and intelligent. He 
believed that universal suffrage would eventually lead to the 
establishment of a republic in Hawaii, and that the republic 
would end in annexation to the United States. He was afraid of 
the American influence. He said, “‘ Hawaii has scarcely emerged 
from a feudal state, and already the American influence pushes us 


THE LAST OF THE KAMEHAMEHAS 221 


toward a republic.”” The king therefore felt that the first and 
most important thing to do was to revise the constitution of 
1852 or to make an entirely new one. It can be said that the 
political ideas of Kamehameha IV were much like those of 
Kamehameha V, but the former did not have as much strength of 
purpose as the latter. 

The constitution of 1864. When Kamehameha V was pro- 
claimed king he did not take the oath to maintain the constitu- 
tion of 1852. Nor did he call the legislature to meet at the 
customary time (April, 1864). Instead, on May 5, 1864, he 
issued a proclamation calling for the election of delegates to a 
convention to consider changes in the constitution. This action 
aroused a storm of opposition. A convention was not the method 
of amendment provided for in the constitution, and the opposi- 
tion declared that it was revolutionary. But the constitutional 
mode of amendment was too slow to suit the purposes of the 
king, and the judges of the Supreme Court said that a con- 
vention such as the king proposed was a proper body to frame 
a new constitution. Kamehameha made a tour around the 
islands, explaining the changes he wished to make. Mr. Wyllie 
went with him and made a number of speeches, violently attack- 
ing the constitution of 1852. These speeches of Mr. Wyllie 
really hurt the king’s cause more than they helped it. The 
majority of the delegates chosen in the election were opposed to 
the king’s plan. 

The convention met July 7, 1864. It was composed of the 
king, the nobles, and the delegates elected by the people. From 
the very beginning there were long and bitter debates over 
nearly every question that was brought up. But the king’s 
party, having the support of most of the nobles, was successful 
until the convention came to the question of a property quali- 
fication for voters. To the king that was the most important 
point; but the delegates refused to yield. The debate went 
on for five days. Finally, on August 13, the king made a speech 


222 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


in which he said that it was useless to spend more time in argu- 
ment. He then declared that, as the constitution of 1852 had been 
granted by the king, the king had the right to take it away again. 
‘“‘T therefore take away the constitution of 1852, and I will give 
you a constitution.”’ The convention was then dismissed. 

A week later the king proclaimed a new constitution, which 
was a revision of the constitution of 1852. It was drawn up by 
the king with the advice of the cabinet. As might be expected, 
the new constitution gave the privilege of voting only to those who 
had a certain amount of property, and who, if born since 1840, 
were able to read and write. A number of other changes were 
made the effect of which was to increase greatly the power of 
the king and make it possible for him to do almost anything he 
wished with the government. 

In spite of the despotic way in which this constitution came 
into existence, it continued to be the fundamental law of the 
land for nearly a quarter of a century. The action of the king 
and his cabinet was bitterly criticized, and it was pointed out 
that, if the king could give and take away the constitution at 
his own pleasure, there was no safeguard for the rights of the 
people. There soon came to be two political parties, one which 
defended the new constitution and favored the strengthening of 
the royal power, and one which favored a more liberal govern- 
ment and demanded the restoration of the constitution of 1852. 
The latter party was particularly bitter against the members 
of the cabinet and accused them of misleading the king and of 
using improper methods of controlling the elections. The two 
parties were not organized like present-day parties and had no 
distinct names, but the issues between them were clearly defined. 
In addition to this political struggle an effort was made by some 
people to create a race issue, to array the natives against the 
foreigners, particularly against the Americans. As for the king 
himself, few people doubted that he was an honest man who had 
no wish to be a tyrant. 


THE LAST OF THE KAMEHAMEHAS 223 


Problems. During the reign of Kamehameha V, Hawaii was 
confronted with some serious problems inherited from preceding 
years. The native population continued to decrease. Be- 
tween 1853 and 1866 it dropped from 70,000 to 57,000. Before 
the end of this reign the whaling industry entered upon its final 
decline. Agricultural development was still handicapped by a 
shortage of labor and by the lack of a profitable market. It is 
true that while the Civil War was in progress in the United States, 
the Hawaiian sugar industry was greatly stimulated, because the 
supply of sugar from the Southern states was cut off. The price 
was high and that made it possible for the island sugar producers 
to pay the United States tariff duties and still make a good profit. 
The planters, therefore, proceeded to take advantage of this 
favorable opportunity. New plantations were started and old 
ones enlarged. ‘This in turn still further increased the demand 
for labor. With the fall in prices after the end of the war, the 
American tariff duties again became a serious obstacle to Ha- 
walian agriculture. 

Labor and population. Kamehameha V came to the throne 
just at the moment when the sugar industry was feeling the full 
effect of the stimulus given by the Civil War. About three 
months after the accession of the new king a Planters’ Society 
was organized, whose main purpose seems to have been to solve 
the labor problem. It was the policy of the government to 
encourage the growth of agriculture on which the future of the 
country depended; therefore, as soon as the new ministry was 
organized in 1864, attention was given to the needs of the planters. 
There was considerable difference of opinion among the planters 
as to the country from which laborers should be brought. Prac- 
tically all who had been imported up to this time were Chinese, 
and they had not been entirely satisfactory. During the preced- 
ing four years very few had been brought in. The government 
wished to codperate with the planters, but was determined to 
exercise some control in order to protect the native population. 


224 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


The king and his advisers were anxious to bring in immigrants 
who would readily assimilate with the Hawaiians and thereby 
strengthen and perpetuate the native race. The planters wished 
to have a continuous supply of good laborers at a low cost. The 
question was whether these two objects could be reconciled. 
There were believed to be five principal sources of supply: the 
South Sea Islands (Polynesia), Malaysia, India, Japan, and 
China. The government looked with greatest favor upon the 
first three; the planters were inclined to favor India and China. 
It was recognized by all that an abundant and cheap supply of 
laborers could easily be gotten from China, but both the govern- 
ment and the planters wished to try some other source of supply. 
Europe was thought of, but the difficulty and expense of bring- 
ing laborers from there were considered too great. 

In December, 1864, a law was passed creating a Bureau of 
Immigration, “‘ for the purpose of superintending the importa- 
tion of foreign laborers, and the introduction of immigrants.” 
This Bureau immediately took steps to encourage the bringing 
of South Sea islanders to Hawaii. In April, 1865, the Bureau 
sent Dr. William Hillebrand as a special immigration commis- 
sioner to the Orient. He was instructed to go first to China 
and to send back five hundred Chinese coolies, who were to be 
selected with great care. He was then to proceed to the East 
Indies (India and Malaysia) to investigate the possibility of 
obtaining from there a desirable class of laborers. Dr. Hille- 
brand faithfully carried out these instructions. Before the end 
of 1865 coolies to the number of more than five hundred arrived 
from China as the result of arrangements made by him. Neither 
at this time nor later was it found practical to obtain laborers 
from India or Malaysia. 

In 1868 the Hawaiian consul in Japan arranged to have labor- 
ers sent from that country, and one hundred forty-eight Japanese 
arrived during the summer of that year. But after that no more 
laborers came from Japan for nearly twenty years. During the 


THE LAST OF THE KAMEHAMEHAS G25 


session of the legislature in 1868 a law was passed to promote 
the introduction of Polynesians, and the sum of $36,000 was 
appropriated for that purpose. 

The work of the Bureau of Immigration was supplemented 
by the efforts of private parties, who from time to time received 
permission from the Bureau to import laborers. During the nine 
years of the reign of Kamehameha V a little over two thousand 
immigrant laborers (men, women, and children) were brought to 
Hawaii. Of this number nearly seventeen hundred were Chinese 
and about two hundred were South Sea islanders. The expense 
of bringing in these laborers, amounting to $120,000, was divided 
about equally between the government and the planters. The 
laborers were hired out to the planters under contracts for periods 
of three, four, or five years. 

The effort put forth during this reign did not solve either the 
problem of labor or the problem of population. Between 1866 
and 1872 the number of native Hawaiians continued to decrease, 
and in the latter year the total was less then 50,000. The 
planters were still calling for more laborers. In 1872, the last 
year of the reign of Kamehameha V, the subjects of Jabor and 
population were very live topics of discussion in the Hawaiian 
kingdom. 

Striving for reciprocity. The period of the Civil War in the 
United States (1861-1865) was one of great prosperity for the 
sugar planters of Hawaii. Under the stimulus of high prices, 
the production of sugar increased by leaps and bounds. In 1860 
the amount of sugar exported was less than 1,500,000 pounds. 
In 1865 it was more than 15,000,000 pounds. But the drop in 
prices after the close of the war brought on a severe crisis in the 
business of the islands. Relief was needed, and this fact brought 
to the front the question of a reciprocity treaty with the United 
States. 

During the winter of 1866-1867, General E. M. McCook, United 
States minister resident in Hawaii, visited Washington. While 


220 A’ HISTORY: OF HAWAII 


there he sought and obtained from the secretary of state, Mr. 
Seward, authority to negotiate a reciprocity treaty. At the very 
moment of Mr. McCook’s departure from Honolulu, some of 
the sugar planters asked the Hawaiian government to make 
another effort to secure such a treaty. After careful considera- 
tion, it was decided to send the minister of finance, C. C. Harris, 
to the United States with instructions to study the situation and, 
if possible, to negotiate a treaty of reciprocity, that is, a treaty 
that should be of mutual benefit to both nations. As chance 
would have it, Mr. McCook, returning from Washington, and 
Mr. Harris, on his way thither, met in San Francisco. Each 
being furnished with the necessary authority, they proceeded 
to draw up a treaty, which was signed in that city, May 21, 
1867. Mr. Harris then continued his journey to Washington, 
to urge the ratification, or approval, of the treaty, and Mr. 
McCook returned to Honolulu. 

At the islands, the news of the negotiation of a reciprocity 
treaty was received with joy, though its terms were not all that 
had been desired. With as little delay as possible the treaty was 
ratified by the Hawaiian government. At Washington it met 
a different fate. The treaty was promptly approved by the 
president and sent to the senate for ratification. At that point 
many obstacles were in its way: Congress was busy with prob- 
lems of reconstruction following the Civil War; there was a 
bitter struggle in progress between President Johnson and 
Congress; the United States had an enormous debt and there 
was serious objection to any measure that would cut down the 
income of the government, as this treaty would do; a reciprocity 
treaty with Canada had only recently been terminated by the 
United States; opponents of the Hawaiian treaty argued that 
the United States would get little or no benefit from it, but 
would lose a large amount of revenue; they declared that the 
treaty was drawn in the interest of the sugar planters of Hawaii 
and the sugar refiners of California. In the Senate a strong 


THE LAST OF THE KAMEHAMEHAS 220) 


fight was made for the treaty, led by Senator Charles Sumner of 
Massachusetts. Mr. McCook visited Washington again in the 
winter of 1867-68 and used his influence in favor of ratification. 
The Hawaiian government kept a minister at Washington for the 
same purpose. But it was very hard to get the Senate even to 
consider the treaty. The subject was postponed from time to 
time, and did not come to a final vote until June 1, 1870. By that 
vote the treaty was defeated. 

The spread of leprosy. Leprosy is supposed to have been 
introduced into Hawaii in the reign of Kamehameha III. It is 
believed that it came from China, and this belief is supported 
by the common Hawaiian name for leprosy, Mai Pake (Chinese 
disease). At first nothing was done to fight the disease, but its 
spread over the islands had become so noticeable by the begin- 
ning of the reign of Kamehameha V that it created some alarm. 
In his address to the legislature in October, 1864, the king said, 
‘““The increase of leprosy has caused me much anxiety, and is such 
as to make decisive steps Imperative upon us.”” At this session of 
the legislature, a law was passed “ to prevent the spread of lep- 
rosy.” In accordance with this law, a receiving station was es- 
tablished at Kalihi, near Honolulu, and a small peninsula on the 
north side of Molokai was selected as a site for a leper settlement, 
to which might be sent those lepers who were considered incurable. 
The policy of separating the lepers from the rest of the popula- 
tion was put into operation. By the end of the reign of Kame- 
hameha V about eight hundred lepers had been removed to the 
Molokai settlement. Nearly all of these were native Hawaiians. 

Death of the king. During the latter part of the year 1872, 
the king was ill for several months. The fact was not publicly 
announced, but it was quite generally known. Nevertheless, 
his death was not expected, and preparations were being made 
for the proper observance of the royal birthday, on the morning 
of December 11, when word passed through the city that the 
king was dying. Before noon he was dead, after a reign of a 


228 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


little more than nine years. The day of festivity was turned 
into a day of mourning. 

‘“‘ On the next day the dead king lay in state in the throne-room 
of the palace, while his ministers, his staff, and the chiefs of the 
realm kept watch over him, and sombre kahilis waving at his 
head beat a sad and silent dead-march for the crowds of people, 
subjects and aliens, who continuously filed through the apart- 


ment for a curious, farewell glance on the last of the Kame- 


hamehas.”’! 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


1. After copying them in your notebook, put a minus sign before the 
statements given below which you think best express Kamehameha V’s 
ideas. Give reasons for your choice. Put a plus sign before those 
statements which express present practices. Give reasons for your 
choice. Put a double plus sign before the practice you think most 
desirable. Give reasons. 

a. All men and women over twenty-one years should vote. 
b. All men possessing some property should vote. 
. People who cannot read and write should not vote. 
. As the king gives the constitution, the king can change it. 
e. The consent of the people is necessary before a change in the 
constitution can be made. 
f. No one should vote who does not possess a certain amount of 
property. 

2. Are the Hawaiian people more like the Chinese, the Japanese, or 
the Polynesian South Sea islanders? Which of these groups do you 
think make the best immigrants to the Hawaiian islands? Why? 
Give arguments on both sides. 

3. Argue for and against a reciprocity treaty with the United 
States. Imagine yourself a sugar planter in the Hawaiian islands 
and give your reasons for or against the treaty. Imagine yourself a 
Congressman in Washington and give his arguments for or against. 


jot Asx 


For FURTHER READING 


Lyman, R. A. — “Recollections of Kamehameha V,” in Third Annual 
Report of the Hawatian Historical Society. 


1Dole, S. B.— “ Thirty Days of Hawaiian History,” p. 31, Twenty-third An- 
nual Report of the Hawaiian Historical Society. 


XXI 


KINGS BY ELECTION 


A vacant throne. The death of Kamehameha V left the 
kingdom without a king. The late monarch had no direct heir 
to succeed him on the throne. By the constitution of 1864 his 
sister, the Princess Victoria Kamamalu, was the next in line of 
succession, but she had died in 1866. Under these circumstances 
Kamehameha V had the right, with the consent of the nobles, to 
appoint his successor; but he had failed to do so. It is true 
that on his deathbed he had asked the Princess Bernice Pauahi 
(Mrs. Charles R. Bishop), a direct descendant of Kamehameha I, 
to succeed him as ruler of the kingdom, but she had refused to 
accept the appointment. The throne was therefore vacant, 
and it was the duty of the legislature to elect a new king from 
among the native alii. It was a new and strange situation. 
Never before had the common people or their elected repre- 
sentatives had anything to say about who should rule over them 
as Mot. 

Who shall be king? On the day after the king’s death the 
members of the cabinet issued an order calling the legislature to 
meet on January 8, 1873, for the purpose of electing a new king. 
There were several possible candidates for the throne, but only 
two became active candidates — William C. Lunalilo and David 
Kalakaua. Lunalilo was looked upon as the highest chief by 
birth in the kingdom. He was well educated and was popular 
with all classes of the people. He had not, however, been much 
in favor with the late king. He was liberal in his views and it was 
known that he did not approve the action of Kamehameha V 


229 


230 A HISTORY OF HAWAIL 


in changing the constitution. It was generally believed that 
he favored American rather than English influence. Kalakaua 
also belonged to a family of high rank, being a descendant of 
Keaweaheulu and Kameeiamoku, two of the great chiefs who 





Kaumakapili church 


aided Kamehameha I in the conquest of the kingdom. Likewise, 
he was well educated, and had been in public office during the 
reign of the king who had just died. As between these two alii, 
the choice of the people seemed to rest on Lunalilo. On the 


KINGS BY ELECTION gat 


very day after the death of Kamehameha, a mass meeting of 
natives, held in Kaumakapili church, voted unanimously and 
enthusiastically that Lunalilo was their choice for king. 

Lunalilo’s address to the people. A few days later Lunalilo 
published an address in which he said it was desirable that 
the people themselves should have a chance to express their 
views on the question as to who should be king. He wished to 
submit his claim to their decision, and he recommended that a 
vote should be taken on January 1, 1873, so that the wishes of 
the people might be made known. Speaking for himself, he said, 
“The only pledge that I deem it necessary to offer to the people 
is that I will restore the constitution of Kamehameha III of 
happy memory [the constitution of 1852], with only such changes 
as may be required to adapt it to present laws, and that I will 
govern the nation according to the principles of that constitution 
and a liberal constitutional monarchy.”’ 

This address of Lunalilo was received with enthusiasm, and 
preparations were made to hold an election (unofficial, of course), 
as he recommended. The day after Christmas a large mass 
meeting was held in Kaumakapili church, at which the candidacy 
of Lunalilo was indorsed and a committee appointed to make 
arrangements for the election. A resolution was unanimously 
adopted ‘‘ that we the people [of Honolulu] do hereby instruct 
our four representatives in the Legislative Assembly to vote for 
Prince W. C. Lunalilo for king, and for no one else.”’ 

Kalakaua’s address. On December 28, Kalakaua published 
an address to the people. It was written in the ancient poetical 
and figurative style and began with the words, ‘‘O my people! 
My countrymen from Old! Arise! This is the voice!’’ The 
address of Lunalilo was referred to as “a voice grating on the 
ear.’’ Kalakaua urged the people not to vote on the first day 
of January, and made the charge that foreigners were back of 
Lunalilo. He then gave his own platform, in which he promised, 
if elected, ‘‘ to preserve and increase the people, so that they 


232 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


shall multiply and fill the land with chiefs and common people; ”’ 
“to repeal all the personal taxes, about which the people 
complain;” ‘to put native Hawaiians into government 
offices, so as to pay off the national debt.” He also promised 
the ‘“‘ amending of the constitution of 1864,” but added, “ Be- 
ware of the constitu- 
tion of 1852 and the 
false teachings of the 
foreigners who are 
now grasping to ob- 
tain the control of 
the government if W. 
C. Lunalilo ascends 
the throne.”’ 

Election of Lunalilo. 
The address of Kala- 
kaua seemed to fall on 
deaf ears. When the 
first day of January 
came around, the 
people put aside their 
ordinary labors and 
went to the polls to 
cast their ballots for 
king, as Lunalilo had 
recommended. And 
when the ballots were 
counted at the end of the day, it was found that the vote was 
almost unanimous for Lunalilo. A week passed, and then the 
Legislative Assembly met for the purpose of electing a new king, 
as the constitution required. The legislative hall was crowded 
with spectators and a great throng of people surrounded the build- 
ing. The magic name, Lunalilo, was in theair. Would the legis- 
lators confirm the choice of the people? After some prelimi- 





Lunalilo 


KINGS BY ELECTION 73 


naries, the balloting began. One by one the votes were cast. 
One by one they were counted. ‘The first was for Lunalilo — and 
so were all of them to the very last! Lunalilo was king! — “ the 
people’s king!”’ On the following day the new sovereign was duly 
inaugurated in a brilliant ceremony at Kawaiahao church. 

Beginning of Lunalilo’s reign. After the election of the king 
the legislature remained in session for a few days. In accordance 
with his promise, King Lunalilo submitted to the legislature 
several proposed amendments to the constitution. The most 
important of these was one to do away with the property quali- 
fication for voters. These amendments were approved by the 
legislature and, as the constitution required, then left to be 
voted on by the next legislature. On January to, 1873, the king 
announced the names of his cabinet ministers. With one excep- 
tion the new ministers were all of American origin, and two of 
them came from missionary families. At the time of his election 
Lunalilo enjoyed a most remarkable popularity among nearly 
all classes of the population. Unhappily, before the end of his 
short reign, much of this popularity was lost. 

Further efforts for reciprocity. Kamehameha III, Kame- 
hameha IV, and Kamehameha V had each sought to make a 
reciprocity treaty with the United States. Lunalilo was urged 
to follow their example. The need for such a treaty was greater 
than ever before. The business and agricultural interests of 
the country were in bad condition. This was due to the decline 
of the whaling industry, the scarcity and high cost of labor for 
the plantations, the low price of sugar in the San Francisco 
market, and the high duties which had to be paid on sugar 
imported into the United States. It was believed that a reci- 
procity treaty would change the situation and bring prosperity. 
Annexation to the United States was advocated by some people 
as the best remedy for the existing state of affairs, but the 
Hawaiian government and the native population were so op- 
posed to this that it was not worth talking about. 


234 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


In February, 1873, the Honolulu Chamber of Commerce 
adopted a resolution asking the king to make another effort to 
secure a treaty of reciprocity. The subject was discussed in 
public and in private, in the newspapers, in the meetings of the 
cabinet, and between the minister of foreign affairs and the 
United States minister resident. From this discussion it became 
clear that the United States government would do nothing unless 
the Hawaiian government had something valuable to offer in 
exchange for such a treaty. Someone had suggested that Pearl 
River lagoon might be given to the United States for use as a 
naval station, and in June the king, upon the advice of his cabinet, 
consented to have such an offer made. This “ Pearl River 
scheme,” as it was called, was opposed by many, particularly 
by the native Hawaiians. The opposition became so strong as to 
make it certain that the legislature would not approve a treaty 
including the cession of Pearl River lagoon to the United States. 
Therefore, in November, the king withdrew the offer. The 
United States government had shown little interest in the pro- 
posed reciprocity treaty, even with the cession of Pearl River, 
and the whole project was very soon dropped. 

Before this time the planters had begun to ship part of their 
sugar to Australia and New Zealand in the hope of finding 
there a new and profitable market. In 1873 the exportation to — 
those countries was greatly increased and the possibility of reci- 
procity with Australia and New Zealand became a topic of 
discussion. 

Fighting leprosy. The steps taken during the preceding reign 
to prevent the spread of leprosy had not been entirely successful. 
The settlement on Molokai had been made as comfortable and 
attractive as possible, and the lepers confined there were well 
treated. But this policy of segregation had not been completely 
carried out. There were many lepers still at large. The natives 
did not realize how terrible the disease was. Being sent to 
Molokai seemed to many of them like a death sentence. Lepers 


KINGS BY ELECTION 235 


were concealed by their families and friends, and this, of course, 
caused the disease to spread still more. 

During the reign of Lunalilo, the Board of Health made a 
vigorous effort to enforce the law and to separate all of the lepers 
from the rest of the population. Nearly five hundred were 
taken to the Molokai settlement during the year 1873. This was 
a very much larger number than had ever before been sent there 
in a single year. The enforcement of the law was a disagreeable 
and painful duty, but it was necessary in order to protect those 
who were free from the disease. One unfortunate result was a 
feeling of bitterness and opposition to the government. 

Mutiny at the barracks. During the early part of September 
an episode occurred which for a time threatened to be serious. 
This was a mutiny among what were called the Household Troops. 
These troops were the military force of the kingdom, but their 
duties ordinarily amounted to little more than standing guard 
over some of the government buildings and serving as an escort 
of honor to the king. ‘Their chief officers were a drillmaster, who 
was an Austrian named Captain Jajczay, and an adjutant general, 
who had charge of supplies and equipment. Captain Jajczay was 
a strict disciplinarian and was not liked by the soldiers. They 
also claimed to have some grievance against the adjutant general. 

One day when Captain Jajczay tried to punish some of the 
men for a serious neglect of duty, they made an attack upon him 
but were prevented from causing any serious injury. That was 
the beginning of the mutiny which lasted for five days. The 
mutineers had possession of the barracks on Palace Walk (now 
Hotel Street), and during the first night they brought over several 
cannon from the palace grounds and prepared to hold their 
position. They said they would not return to their duties until 
the drillmaster and adjutant general were dismissed. Many 
of the native Hawaiians sympathized with them, and it was 
feared that an attack on the barracks would lead to riot, blood- 
shed, and possibly even to civil war. 


236 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


During this time King Lunalilo was ill at his cottage at Waikiki. 
He was the commander-in-chief of the troops, and, after other 
efforts had failed, the settlement of the difficulty was referred to 
him. On the fourth day the king talked to some of the soldiers 
who came to see him. The next morning he sent a letter, telling 
the men to obey the laws, leave the barracks, and return to their 
homes; if they did so, he would forgive their disobedience. The 
soldiers did as the king told them and thus the mutiny was 
ended. On the following day the king issued an order disbanding 
the Household Troops. 

Illness and death of the king. Before he had been on the 
throne more than half a year, Lunalilo was stricken with tuber- 
culosis. Under the attack of that disease the king failed rapidly. 
In November he was taken to Kailua, Hawaii, in hope that the 
change of climate would effect an improvement in his condition. 
When he returned to Honolulu two months later, it was clear 
that he could not live much longer. The end came on the third 
of February, 1874, a-year and twenty-five days after his accession 
to the throne. The remains of this good king rest in the mauso- 
leum in Kawaiahao churchyard. But his best monument is the 
Lunalilo Home for poor, aged, and infirm Hawaiians, which was 
established under the terms of his will. 

Election of Kalakaua. The death of Lunalilo left the throne 
vacant for a second time. He had never married and therefore 
had no direct heir. He had been repeatedly and strongly advised 
to appoint his successor in the constitutional manner; but like 
Kamehameha V, he had failed to do so. It was, therefore, again 
necessary for the legislature to elect a king. The cabinet ap- 
pointed February 12, 1874, nine days after the death of Lunalilo, 
as the time for the Legislative Assembly to meet for this purpose. 

While Lunalilo was still living, there was much discussion 
as to who would be the next king. Among the male alii of the 
kingdom David Kalakaua was quite generally conceded to have 
the strongest claim. His cause was taken up by the newspapers, 


KINGS BY ELECTION 237 


which asserted that he was as surely the choice of the people as 
Lunalilo had been the year before. But, as events showed, this 
was not quite true. On February 4 Kalakaua formally an- 
nounced that he was a candidate for the kingship. On the 
next day a similar announcement was made by Queen Dowager 
Emma, the widow of Kamehameha IV, who claimed that she 
was the real choice of the late King Lunalilo. Soon after the 
death of her husband Queen Emma had made a visit to England 
and other foreign countries, and since her return she had been 
living quietly, devoting herself to works of benevolence. She 
was loved and respected by natives and foreigners alike; but 
many people did not like the idea of making her the sovereign 
of the kingdom. One newspaper said, ‘‘ The Hawaiian people 
will love her as a benefactress and hate her as a politician.” 

In the short campaign which followed, Queen Emma won 
the support of many of the natives, mainly on Oahu. The 
English element, very naturally, were favorable to her cause. 
The greater part of the foreigners, including nearly all the Amer- 
icans, were for Kalakaua. He also had a strong following among 
the natives, more especially on the outer islands. When the 
Legislative Assembly met, thirty-nine of the members voted 
for Kalakaua and six for Queen Emma. Kalakaua was there- 
fore declared elected, and he took the oath of office as king of 
Hawaii at noon of February 13, 1874. In order to prevent the 
possibility of the throne again becoming vacant, King Kalakaua 
immediately appointed and proclaimed his younger brother, 
William Pitt Leleiohoku, as his heir. 

The election riot. While the election was in progress in the 
courthouse, the building was surrounded by a great crowd of 
people, composed mainly of the supporters of Queen Emma. 
As soon as the vote was taken, a committee was appointed to 
notify Kalakaua of his election. ‘The members of the committee, 
on attempting to leave the courthouse, were attacked by the 
crowd and some of them wounded before they could get back 


238 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


into the building. The mob then forced its way into the building 
and destroyed furniture, books, and papers in the various offices. 
The native members of the legislature were assaulted and many 
of them cut and bruised. In this emergency, in order to prevent 
further destruction of property and possible loss of life, the 
newly elected king, the minister of foreign affairs, and the gover- 





weg COURT HOUSE, §_ 


: Ne 
POOR ge (Ne cea AEP [Ss aS ~atv inten: ox . wh 
Sn ee x cs 


Senet ee Y 











a ss 


From the lithograph by Emmert, published in 1854. 
The Court House 


nor of Oahu asked the American minister and the British com- 
missioner to land marines from the warships Tuscarora, Ports- 
mouth, and Tenedos, which were anchored in the harbor. This 
request was promptly granted and by nightfall order was restored. 
The following day Queen Emma acknowledged Kalakaua as 
king and advised her followers to do the same. The American 
and British marines remained on shore for about a week, at the 
end of which time it was considered safe for them to return to 
their ships. 


KINGS BY ELECTION  . 239 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


1. Copy in your notebook, filling in the blanks: 

a. Kamehameha I became king of Hawaii by —— 

b. Until the time of Lunalilo the rulers were the king. 

c. Lunalilo and Kalakaua were —— kings by the Give 
the good points of each method stated above; the bad 
points of each. Which is the most democratic? Least 
democratic? Does the way in which the governor gets his 
position to-day most resemble that described in a, b, or c? 
Are all governors chosen in this way? Why is ours so 
chosen? The method by which the governor of Hawaii 
gets his position has both good and bad points. Indicate 
both. 

2. For what good work is Lunalilo remembered ? 
3. What were the effects of each of the following on the agriculture 
of the Hawaiian islands? Show how these effects came about. 

a. Duty laid on sugar by the United States. 

b. Refusal of the United States to accept Pearl River and grant 
reciprocity. 

c. Lack of import duties in Australia. 

4. The question of a tariff is a very complicated one, as you have 
seen in United States history. 

a. If you had owned stock in a Hawaiian plantation seventy- 
five years ago, would you have wished a high United States 
tariff on sugar? Why? 

b. If you owned stock to-day in a sugar plantation in Hawaii, 
would you wish a high tariff on sugar? Why? 

c. If you had a wheat farm in Nebraska, would youwishahigh 
tariff on sugar? Why? 

d. From the above can you give reasons why all people do not 
agree about the tariff? 











For FURTHER READING 


Dote, S. B. — “Thirty Days of Hawaiian History,” in Twenty-Third 
Annual Report of the Hawatian Historical Society. 


XXIT 
CHANGES DURING A THIRD OF A CENTURY 
(1840-1874) 


With the election of Kalakaua a new dynasty came to the 
throne of Hawaii. In that sense it was the beginning of a new 
political era. It was the beginning of a new era in some other 
respects also — economic and social. After 1874 events hurry on 
rapidly toward the end of the monarchy. The death of Lunalilo 
came just at the end of a third of a century of constitutional 
government, thirty-three and a half years after the granting of 
the constitution of 1840. During this third of a century many 
important changes had taken place in economic and social con- 
ditions in Hawaii. | 

Population. In 1840 the total population of the islands was 
about 100,000. By 1872, a year in which the census was taken, 
the total had shrunk to little more than half, being less than 
57,000. This meant deserted villages, abandoned taro patches, 
and schools and churches becoming smaller and fewer year by 
year. In 1840 there were less than a thousand foreigners, that 
is, less than one per cent of the whole population. In 1872 there 
were more than 5,000 foreigners, nearly ten per cent of the whole 
population. Of these foreigners, in 1872, more than a third 
were Chinese; a little more than half were of Caucasian blood. 
The tragic fact of Hawaiian history is this wasting away of the 
original dwellers in the land, and their gradual replacement by 
alien races. 

It was not merely the common people who were decreasing 
in number. The same thing was true of the chiefly families. 


240 


CHANGES DURING A THIRD OF A CENTURY 241 


During this period of thirty-three years the nation had been 
called to mourn the death of four kings. The house of Kame- 
hameha was almost extinct. There remained, indeed, only a 
handful of chiefs of high rank. In 1841 occurred the death of 
Kapiolani, who had defied the goddess Pele; in 1844, Governor 
Kuakini; in 1845, Kekauluohi, kuhina nui and mother of Luna- 
lilo; in 1855, Paki, father of Princess Bernice Pauahi (Mrs. 
Bishop) ; in 1868, Kekuanaoa, father of two kings and one of 
the grand old men of Hawaii. Most of the foreigners who helped 
the old chiefs to organize the government had also passed off the 
stage. In 1847 occurred the death of Richards; in 1857, that 
of Lee; in 1860, Armstrong; in 1865, Wyllie; in 1873, Dr. Judd. 

Education. Up to 1841 the work of education was carried 
on by the missionaries without any aid from the government. 
In that year a general school law was passed, which provided for 
the organization of the common schools and their support by the 
people. This simply meant that the government would take 
over the work of primary education from the missionaries as fast 
as it could. The school department was organized in 1846, 
when William Richards was appointed minister of public instruc- 
tion. For a long time the common schools were divided into 
Protestant schools and Catholic schools, but after 1854 this 
separation on account of religion gradually ceased to exist. 

At first the government took over only the common schools, 
taught in the Hawaiian language by native teachers. Besides 
these common schools, there were several “ select schools,” that is, 
schools of higher grade than the common schools, such as the 
school for the young chiefs, which was supported by the govern- 
ment, the Oahu Charity School, supported by the foreign resi- 
dents of Honolulu, and the boarding schools, such as Lahainaluna 
Seminary, Hilo Boarding School, and Punahou School, con- 
ducted by the Protestant missionaries, and a number of boarding 
schools carried on by the Catholics. It was the policy of the 
government to take over the support of these select schools as 


242 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


rapidly as it could, either by making them government schools 
or by paying part of their expenses. In 1849 Lahainaluna. 
Seminary was transferred to the government, and not long after- 
wards the Oahu Charity School became a government school, 
supported by a special tax on foreigners. Its name was changed 
to the Honolulu Free School. ; 

The number of select schools increased from year to year. 
In 18409 there were 13 select schools, with about 500 pupils; in 
1874 there were 46 such schools, with more than 2,000 pupils. 
But the number of common schools steadily decreased. In 1849 
there were 540 common schools, with about 15,000 pupils; in 
1874 there were only 242 common schools, with less than 8,000 
pupils. This decrease was due chiefly to the falling off of the 
native population, but in part to the fact that more children 
attended the select schools where they could get a better educa- 
tion. 

One interesting development during this period was the in- 
creasing study of the English language by Hawaiian children. 
In 1854 a special law was passed “ for the encouragement and 
support of English schools for Hawaiian youths.” By 1874 
nearly a fourth of all the school children in the kingdom were 
studying English. That language was taught in all the select 
schools, but not in the common schools. The common schools 
were free, but a small tuition fee was charged in the government 
English schools. 

Another important development was the greater attention paid 
to the proper education of Hawaiian girls. This was strongly 
recommended as early as 1855 and again in 1858 by Mr. Arm- 
strong, who was at the head of the school department. Beginning 
about that time, ‘‘ family schools”? and seminaries were estab- 
lished for the training of girls, and these received some financial 
assistance from the government. 

In general it may be said that by 1874 there was a great im- 
provement in the schools of the kingdom; there were better 


€Sgr ul nynjouoy jo ied ssouisng oy] 








244 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


schoolhouses, better trained and better paid teachers, better 
books, and a better course of study. But even at that they still 
fell far short of the highest standards. 

Industry. In 1840 the economic prosperity of Hawaii was 
mainly dependent upon the visits of the whalers. That industry, 
as we have already seen, grew rapidly, reached its zenith about 
1859, and then dropped off to a position of minor importance. 
The production of sugar took its place as the dominant industry, 
and, long before the beginning of Kalakaua’s reign, was the main 
resource of the islands. For a long time coffee was second in 
importance as an agricultural product, although it was greatly 
hindered by the coffee tree blight. About 1862 the rice industry 
came to be second in importance, and coffee dropped back to 
third place. 

The first serious attempt to produce rice was made in 1858 on 
the experimental farm of the Royal Hawaiian Agricultural Society 
by H. Holstein. The experiment was made with rice seed from 
the East Indies and was not very successful. Two years later 
Mr. Holstein obtained and planted rice from South Carolina. 
This gave promise of success, and in 1861 a veritable craze for 
rice planting swept over the islands. In many places taro was 
pulled up and rice planted in its stead. This came near causing 
a taro famine for a year or two. In 1862 the quantity of rice and 
paddy, or unhusked rice, exported was more than goo,ooo pounds. 
In 1874 it exceeded 1,600,000 pounds. The quantity produced 
was even greater, a considerable amount being consumed in the 
islands. After the first few years this industry was carried on 
mainly by the Chinese. 

Commerce. In spite of the steadily decreasing population 
Hawaii became more and more important as a commercial center. 
This is shown most clearly by an examination of statistics of 
imports, exports, and customhouse receipts. In 1844, the first 
year for which there are reliable figures, the value of goods im- 
ported was $350,000; in 1874 it was $1,300,000. The value 


CHANGES DURING AVTHIRDVOF7A CENTURY 245 


of goods exported in 1844 was $170,000; in 1874, $1,840,000. 
In 1844 the receipts at the customhouse were $14,000; in 1874, 
$184,000. We must also take into consideration the fact that 
business was poor in 1874; it had been much better during the 
preceding ten years. 

One very important indication of the economic strength of a 
country is the annual “ trade balance,” that is, the difference 
in money value between the value of imports and exports. If 
imports are larger than exports, the trade balance is said to be 
against the country ; but if exports are greater than imports, the 
trade balance is in favor of the country. In 1844 and for many 
years the trade balance was very. heavily against the Hawaiian 
islands. It was not until 1869 that it was turned in their favor. 
The change at that time was due mainly to the growth of the 
sugar industry. 

Transportation. In 1840 transportation, both interisland and 
to foreign lands, was more or less irregular and was carried on 
entirely in small sailing vessels. As years passed, larger and 
faster ships were put into use and something like a regular service 
was established. The final improvement in this kind of transpor- 
tation came with the advent of the “clippers,” in a regular 
packet line between Honolulu and San Francisco— fine sailers 
like the Restless, Yankee, Fanny Major, Comet, Smyrniote, and 
D. C. Murray. Perhaps the most famous sailing vessels in the 
interisland service were the Emma Rooke and the Nettie Merrill, 
both of which were built in New England and arrived at the 
islands in the spring of 1860. A race between these two schooners 
soon after their arrival created great excitement. 

But at best sailing vessels were slow and uncertain, and people 
dreamed of the day when there would be steamers running be- 
tween the different islands of the group and between Hawaii and 
foreign lands. By 1874 this dream had come true. First were 
the interisland steamers. Just at the end of 1851 and beginning 
of 1852 a steamer came down from California and made one 


”) 


246 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


round trip between Honolulu and Lahaina. In 1853 the Ha- 
wailan Steam Navigation Company was organized in San Fran- 
cisco and established a more or less regular interisland service 
which continued for a little over two years. The Akamai was 





The Steamer Akamai 


the first steamer used by this company. After the failure of this 
enterprise the government proposed to go into the steamship 
business, either directly or by giving aid to private parties, but 
was slow in getting started. 

The Honolulu firm of C. A. Williams and Company built the 


CHANGES DURING A THIRD OF A CENTURY 247 


steamer Kilauea and put it into service in the summer of 1860. 
This famous vessel had an interesting history — frequently 
changing owners because she rarely paid expenses — run on 
the rocks several times — pulled off, repaired, and put back into 
service — at one time laid up more than a year — for seventeen 
years a familiar and welcome visitor in the ports of the islands. 
Most of the time the government had an interest in the Kilauea, 
and in the later years was the sole owner. 

Steamers to and from San Francisco and Australia followed 
within a few years. Just asin the case of the interisland steamers, 
the subject was discussed for a long time before a regular service 
was established. In 1854 two round trips were made by steamers 
from San Francisco, and twelve years later the steamer Ajax 
made two round trips. In the following year (1867) the Idaho 
began what proved to be a practically continuous steam service 
to San Francisco. In 1870 a steamer came from Australia as 
the pioneer from that direction. After that year, though steam- 
ers and companies often changed, Hawaii was never for very long 
without steamer connection with the Pacific Coast of America 
and the Australian colonies. 

Honolulu in 1874. In 1840 Honolulu and Lahaina were the 
leading towns in the kingdom. By 1874 the importance of 
Honolulu had greatly increased, that of Lahaina had decreased. 
Wailuku had become the leading town on Maui, and Hilo had 
taken the place of Lahaina as the second town in the kingdom. 
Honolulu was the seat of government, the center of trade and of 
intellectual and religious activity — in short, it was the metropolis 
of the country. It had about one fourth of the whole population 
of the nation, and one half of the foreigners. 

A great change had taken place in the appearance of Honolulu. 
Travelers who visited the islands about 1874 spoke of this city 
as an oasis of green trees, shrubs, and flowers. One of them 
writes that the town ‘‘ looks small and insignificant from the 
harbor, but on going ashore . . . we get glimpses of fine public 


248 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


buildings and numerous shops and stores, of neat houses nestling 
among bowers of shrubs and flowers, and evidences of a busy 
trade and considerable population.’”’ Another one speaks of 
Honolulu as “ nestling among cocoanut trees and bananas, um- 
brella trees and breadfruits, oranges, mangoes, hibiscus, algaroba, 
and passion flowers, almost hidden in the deep, dense greenery.” 
Practically all of these trees and shrubs had grown up within the 
preceding twenty-five or thirty years. 

The town was spreading out in all directions, but Waikiki 
and Manoa and Kalihi were still a long way off. A great im- 
provement was to be seen in the dwelling houses and in the 
stores and public buildings. Indeed, many of the buildings of 
that day, both public and private, are still standing. Kawaiahao 
_ church rose conspicuously on the eastern edge of town, with the 
mission houses just beyond. Nearer the business district was 
the imposing government building, Aliiolani Hale, now the 
Judiciary Building, which had just been completed. Another 
new building was the Royal Hawaiian Hotel, built by the govern- 
ment for the accommodation of tourists and travelers and occu- 
pied in recent years by the Army and Navy Y. M. C. A. 

In the harbor and along the waterfront important changes 
had been made. The harbor had been deepened by dredging. 
A long seawall had been built, lined with wharves and ware- 
houses. The reef below the fort had been filled up, thus adding 
a valuable piece of land to the waterfront area. The fort had 
disappeared. That historic structure had long ago ceased to 
have any practical value as a fort, and the ground on which it 
stood was needed for other purposes. In 1852 the legislature 
passed a resolution directing the minister of the interior to tear 
down the fort, and this was done in 1857. The coral blocks were 
used in building the seawall. 

One feature of Honolulu life noticed by all visitors in that 
period was the almost universal habit of riding horses. This 
was particularly true of the natives. The Hawaiians had become 


CHANGES DURING A THIRD OF A CENTURY 249 


a nation of horseback riders. The following description is taken 
from a letter written in 1873: ‘‘ Saturday afternoon is a gala day 
here. . . . The women seemed perfectly at home in their gay, 
brass-bossed, high-peaked saddles, flying along astride, bare- 
footed, with their orange and scarlet riding dresses streaming 
on each side beyond their horses’ tails, a bright kaleidoscopic 
flash of bright eyes, white teeth, shining hair, garlands of flowers, 
and many-colored dresses; while the men were hardly less gay, 
with fresh flowers round their jaunty hats, and the vermilion- 
colored blossoms of the Ofia round their throats. Sometimes 
a troop of twenty of these . . . female riders went by at a time, 
a graceful and exciting spectacle.” 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


t. Whenever a new civilization is forced upon a primitive people, 
there is commonly a decline in population. The following list gives 
possible causes. Discuss those which you think have most affected 
the Hawaiian people. Compare them with the reasons which caused 
the Indian population of North America to decrease. 

a. Battles and wars. 
b. Disease. 
c. Destruction of the food supply. 
d. Rapid imposing of a culture which fails to meet the needs of 
the primitive people. 
Customs of dressing and living. 
Introduction of liquor. 
. Taking of homes and land from the original owners. 
. Forcing the natives to do hard and uncongenial work. 
7. Destruction of the forests. 
j. Killing wild animals which furnished food and clothing. 

2. Many changes in the schools are described in this chapter. 
Name them. Which is the most important? 

3. Describe Honolulu as it was in 1874. We notice some of these 
features to-day. What are they? What are some of the features of 
Honolulu which particularly charm strangers who come here to-day? 

4. Discuss the changes in agriculture, trade and commerce described 
in this chapter. What shows that trade and commerce are increasing 
to-day ? 


2 Poe TH OD 


XXITI 


RECIPROCITY AND ITS EFFECTS 


Another attempt to secure a reciprocity treaty. As soon as 
Kalakaua was firmly seated on the throne, the question of a 
reciprocity treaty with the 
United States was again 
raised. The king mentioned 
the subject in his speech at 
the opening of the legislature 
in 1874. The planters pre- 
sented a petition, and the 
legislature passed an “act 
to facilitate the negotiation 
of a treaty of reciprocity.”’ 
KE. H. Allen, chief justice of 
the Supreme Court, told the 
king and cabinet that he 
thought the matter so im- 
portant that nothing should 
be left undone to secure a 
treaty. He advised the king 
himself to visit Washington, 
as that would have a favor- 
able influence. It was de- 
cided also to send Chief Justice Allen and H. A. P. Carter to the 
United States to negotiate a treaty of reciprocity, if that was 
possible. ‘These envoys departed for San Francisco in the middle 
of October on their way to Washington. 


250 





Elisha H. Allen 


RECIPROCITY AND ITS EFFECTS 251 


King Kalakaua’s visit to the United States. Just a month 
later, the king sailed for San Francisco on the United States war- 
ship Benicia, as the guest of the American government. He was 
accompanied by Governor John O. Dominis of Oahu, Governor 
John M. Kapena of 
Maui, and Henry A. 
Peirce the” United 
States minister to Ha- 
wall. This visit of 
Kalakaua to the 
United States occurred 
just half a century 
after the visit of Ka- 
mehameha II to Eng- 
land. That earlier 
visit was made for the 
purpose of strengthen- 
ing the ties of friend- 
ship between Hawaii 
and England; this 
later visit was for the 
purpose of drawing 
closer the relations be- 
tween Hawaii and the 
United States. Kala- 
kaua was the first king who had ever visited the United States 
from any country, and he was everywhere accorded all the honors 
due to the ruler of a friendly, independent nation. In Washing- 
ton he was received in state by President U. S. Grant, and all the 
members of Congress were formally presented to him. The king 
afterwards visited New York, Boston, and other places in New 
England, among them New Bedford, to which port belonged 
hundreds of the whaleships so familiar to the people of Hawaii 
in earlier years. In all these places Kalakaua and his party 





252 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


made a most favorable impression. From San Francisco he 
returned to Honolulu on the United States warship Pensacola, 
arriving at home on February 15, 1875, after an absence of three 
months. 

The reciprocity treaty. In the meanwhile the negotiation 
of a treaty was going on between the Hawaiian envoys, Messrs. 
Allen and Carter, and the American secretary of state, Hamilton 
Fish. The treaty was completed and signed January 30, 1875, 
and approved by the United States Senate a month and a half 
later. In Hawaii, it was ratified by King Kalakaua April 17, 
1875. One clause of the treaty provided that it should not go 
into effect until a law had been passed by Congress to carry it 
into operation. Such a law was passed in 1876. The Hawaiian 
legislature also passed an act to carry the treaty into effect, and 
it finally went into operation September 9, 1876. That was an 
important day in the history of Hawai. 

What the treaty provided. The treaty was not very long. 
It provided that unrefined sugar, rice, and practically all Ha- 
walian products should be admitted into the United States with- 
out having to pay any tariff duty. In return it provided that a 
long list of products and manufactured goods from the United 
States should be admitted free into Hawaii. There was one 
other very important clause by which the king of Hawaii agreed 
that as long as this treaty remained in effect he would not make 
the same kind of a treaty with any other nation, and that he would 
not “lease or otherwise dispose of . . . any port, harbor, or 
other territory in his dominions, or grant any special privilege 
or rights of use therein, to any other power, state, or govern- 
ment.” This clause was proposed by the United States, and 
it is quite certain that, without it, the treaty could not have 
been made. The treaty was to continue for at least seven 
years. At any time after the end of seven years it could be 
terminated by either Hawaii or the United States, on giving one 
year’s notice. 


RECIPROCITY AND ITS EFFECTS 253 


Why the United States made the treaty. Before 1875 the 
United States had almost a monopoly of the trade of Hawaii. 
There was a large amount of American money invested in the 
islands, particularly in sugar plantations. American influence 
was very strong. But there were also a good many English 
people here and they were trying to build up English influence. 
The sugar planters were having a hard time because of the 
American tariff duties. They were therefore looking around for 
some better market than San Francisco. In 1873 they sent 
more than a third of their sugar to Australia, New Zealand, and 
British Columbia, and it was reported to the American govern- 
ment that they were planning to send the whole crop of 1875-76 
to those places. If they did this, the United States would lose 
the trade of the islands, and Hawaii would soon drift toward 
Great Britain. To prevent any such result, the United States 
was willing to make a reciprocity treaty. The visit of King 
Kalakaua to the United States helped the matter along, by in- 
creasing the friendly interest of the American people. 

Effect of the treaty. The effect of the reciprocity treaty on the 
principal agricultural enterprises of Hawaii was amazing. In less 
than four years the production of sugar and rice was more than 
doubled. In fifteen years the amount of sugar exported annually 
increased to more than ten times what it was in 1875. In 1875 
twenty-five million pounds of sugar were shipped from the coun- 
try; in 1890, more than two hundred and fifty million pounds. 
This development of the sugar industry was more than anyone 
had even dreamed of in the old days before reciprocity. Many 
people in the United States did not believe that Hawaii could 
raise so much sugar in such a short time; and some of them 
charged that the people of Hawaii were bringing sugar from other 
countries and sending it to the United States as Hawaiian sugar. 
But an investigation was made and it was found that all this 
sugar was actually produced in the islands. 

How was this great development brought about? Two things 


254 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


were necessary, capital and labor. Now that a good market was 
assured, men were not afraid to put their money into sugar enter- 
prises. A large amount of capital was brought to the islands, 
principally from the United States, and invested in sugar plan- 
tations, sugar mills, and irrigation projects. A striking example 
is the case of Claus Spreckels. Mr. Spreckels was a wealthy 
sugar refiner of California who was opposed to the reciprocity 
treaty before it was made. As soon as the treaty went into oper- 
ation Spreckels came to Hawaii, put a large amount of money 
into sugar, and reaped a large profit on his investment. But 
by far the greater part of this development was due to the faith 
and energy of business men who had established themselves in 
Hawaii before the days of the reciprocity boom. 

One of the first effects of the treaty was a great increase in 
the importation of machinery for sugar mills. The iron works 
of Honolulu were likewise called on to increase their output. 
New and improved methods of operation were devised and put 
into use. In 1882 the Planters’ Labor and Supply Company was 
organized. This company was the forerunner of the Hawaiian 
Sugar Planters’ Association, and was formed to promote the 
interests of the planters and to furnish a means of codperation 
among them. In the same year they began the publication of 
the Planters’ Monthly under the editorial direction of S. B. Dole, 
W.R. Castle, and W. O. Smith. 

The Hamakua ditch. One of the ways in which the production 
of sugar was promoted was through the building of large irriga- 
tion projects. Irrigation had been tried in a small way before 
this time, the first plantation ditch having been dug as early as 
1857 at Lihue, Kauai. But it was after the making of the reciproc- 
ity treaty that the big ditches were constructed. The first one 
was the Hamakua ditch on Maui. In 1876 S. T. Alexander and 
H. P. Baldwin had a small plantation at Paia. They formed a 
plan for bringing water from the wet northern slopes of Mount 
Haleakala to the dry plains of central Maui by means of a ditch. 


RECIPROCITY AND ITS EFFECTS 255 


The possibility of doing this had been talked about for several 
years, but up to this time the matter had not gone any farther 
than that. With a few other men, Alexander and Baldwin ob- 
tained a lease from the government and borrowed the money with 
which to finance the project. It was an immense undertaking for 
that day, costing about $80,000. The ditch runs through an ex- 
ceedingly rough district, cut by deep gorges; to get past some 
of these gorges it was necessary to lay heavy pipes down each 
side and across the bottom, making an inverted siphon. 

“When the ditch builders came to the last great obstacle, the 
deep gorge of Maliko, it became necessary, in connection with 
the laying of the pipe down and up the sides of the precipices 
there encountered, for the workmen to lower themselves over the 
cliffs by rope, hand over hand. This at first they absolutely 
refused to do. ‘The crisis was serious. Mr. Baldwin met it by 
himself sliding down the rope, using his legs and his one arm, 
with which he alternately gripped and released the rope to take 
a fresh hold lower down. . . . The workmen were so shamed 
by this exhibition of courage on the part of their one-armed 
manager that they did not hesitate to follow him down the rope. 
To keep the heart in them and to watch the progress of the work, 
Mr. Baldwin day after day went through this dangerous per- 
formance.”’ * : 

When completed, the Hamakua ditch was seventeen miles 
long, with a daily capacity of forty million gallons. Not long 
afterwards Claus Spreckels dug a ditch in the same region, below 
the Hamakua ditch. ‘The Spreckels ditch was thirty miles long 
with a capacity of fifty million gallons daily. A few years later a 
third ditch was dug, on the other side of the plain. The result 
of all this activity is that the once barren plain of central Maui 
has been turned into a great field of sugar cane. Maui took the 
lead in ditch digging, but the other islands have since followed 
her example, with the same profitable results. 


1 BALDWIN, ARTHUR D.— A Memoir of Henry Perrine Baldwin, pp. 40-41. 


256 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


Labor, population, immigration. The great development of 
agriculture could not have been brought about without a great 
increase in the labor supply. ‘This brought to the front again the 
question of immigration. The population of the islands was at 
its lowest point about 1875. Before the next census was taken 
in 1878, it had begun to increase. But this was not because 
the native Hawaiians increased — they continued to decrease 
—hbut because of the coming in of aliens to supply the 
labor needs of the country. Since 1875 the population has 
grown steadily and at a fairly rapid rate; but it has changed 
greatly in character. In 1878 the native Hawalians were 82 
per cent of the whole population; in 1890 they were less than 
one half. 

After the reciprocity treaty went into operation the need 
of more workers rapidly became serious. The planters wanted 
cheap labor; the government wanted immigrants who would 
assimilate with the people already here, or who would at any 
rate be desirable citizens. During the next fourteen years (1877- 
1890) more than 55,000 immigrant laborers came to Hawaii. 
Half of these were Chinese, who came without asking. This 
great influx of Chinese became a matter of alarm. It was feared 
that if it continued Hawaii would become a Chinese colony, and 
her Hawaiian-Anglo-Saxon civilization would be supplanted by 
an Oriental civilization. The government took several steps to 
prevent such a result. It set up severe restrictions against the 
Chinese; and it made a strong effort to bring in immigrants from 
other countries, particularly from the Portuguese islands and 
from Japan. The Portuguese immigration proved to be very 
expensive from the financial point of view and had to be given 
up after afew years. This was unfortunate, since the Portuguese 
have proved to be good and useful citizens. The Japanese 
government at first did not wish to permit its people to come to 
Hawaii, but was finally persuaded to do so; in 1886 it made a 
treaty with Hawaii on the subject. During this period also a 


RECIPROCITY AND ITS EFFECTS 257 


number of immigrants were brought in from Germany, Scandi- 
navia, and the South Sea islands. 

Hawaii was fast getting ready to be a melting pot of the races. 
By the census of 1890 the population of the kingdom was about 
go,ooo. Of this num- 
ber, 41,000 were Ha- 
Wallans, 15,000 
Chinese, 12,000 Jap- 
anese, 9,ooo Portu- 
guese, 2,000 Ameri- 
cans, 1,000 Germans, 
and 1,300 British. 

Steamships and 
railroads. The rapid 
development of the 
sugar and rice indus- 
tries required a great 
improvement in the 
means of transporta- 
tion throughout the 
kingdom. In 1877 the 
government had the 
steamer Likeltke built 
in San Francisco. 
This ship and the old 
Kilauea were sold to S. G. Wilder, who soon after organ- 
ized the Wilder Steamship Company and put several other 
steamers into service. Steamers were also introduced by T. H. 
Hobron, T. R. Foster, and others, and in 1882 the Inter-Island 
Steam Navigation Company was organized to compete with the 
Wilder Steamship Company. In 1890 the two companies had 
fourteen steamers, some of them quite small, in operation. In 
1905 these companies were consolidated to form the present 
Inter-Island Steam Navigation Company. 





Samuel G. Wilder 


258 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


Besides the steamers there came to be a large fleet of sailing 
ships of the schooner type engaged in the interisland trade and 
in the carrying trade between the islands and foreign countries. 
Ships were constantly coming and going between the different 
ports of the kingdom. This made it easier for people to get 
about, both for business and for pleasure. It also made Hawaii 
more accessible and more attractive to tourists, who came to the 
islands in growing numbers year by year. 

The sea’ was Hawaii’s principal highway. Here it was as im- 
portant to build a ship as it was to build a road in continental 
countries. But even here the development of the agricultural 
resources of the country made it necessary to improve the means 
of communication on land. The government was called upon 
to spend large sums of money in building roads and bridges. The 
work of railroad construction was undertaken by men of energy 
and foresight, and before the end of the reign of Kalakaua there 
were thrée railroads in operation on the islands of Maui, Hawaii, 
and Oahu. 

Extension of the treaty — Pearl River grant. By the terms 
of the reciprocity treaty it could be brought to an end by action 
of either the United States or Hawaii at any time after September 
9, 1883, either country giving twelve months’ notice to the 
other country. It was certain that Hawaii would not wish to end 
the treaty, but there were many people in the United States who 
did wish to do so. They declared that Hawaii got all the benefit 
from the treaty, and that there were great evils connected with 
it. Dozens of petitions were presented to Congress, asking for 
the abrogation of the treaty. It began to look as if the United 
States would not be willing to let the treaty go on after 1883, 
although the president and his cabinet were understood to be 
in favor of it. 

The Hawaiian government proposed that the treaty be for- 
mally extended for seven years longer. The president of the 
United States referred this proposition to the Senate for its 


RECIPROCITY AND ITS EFFECTS 259 


advice, and that body advised the extension, but only under 
certain conditions. An agreement was then made between the 
two governments by which the treaty was extended for seven 
years, or longer, from 1887, and by which the United States was 
given the “‘ exclusive right to enter the harbor of Pearl River, 





From ortginal in archives of Hawaii. 


Two pages from the diary of Princess Liliuokalani containing references 
to the Pearl Harbor and Reciprocity Treaty 


in the Island of Oahu, and to establish and to maintain there a 
coaling and repair station for the use of vessels of the United 
States.’ Under this condition the reciprocity treaty remained 
in effect until the annexation of Hawaii to the United States. 
During that time the United States did not take advantage of 
the right to use the harbor of Pearl River, 


260 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


t. From what you learned of agricultural activities in the last 
chapter, explain why the need for a reciprocity treaty should be most 
keenly felt at this time. 

2. Copy the following list in your notebook and check those state- 
ments which you feel best express the attitude of the United States 
toward reciprocity with Hawaii. 

The United States government made the treaty of reciprocity 

a. To help the Hawaiian government 
b. To show its friendly feeling for Hawaii 
To aid Americans engaged in business in Hawaii 
. To get control of Hawaiian trade 
é. To keep the trade and good will of Hawaii from swinging over 
to England. 
3. Contrast Kalakaua’s and Liholiho’s motives for leaving Hawaii. 
4. a. At this time immigrants were brought to Hawaii for what 
two reasons? 
Copy the following, filling in the blanks: 
b. Immigrants came to and 
c. The greatest number came from ——. Why? 
d. Immigrants came from and —— in Europe. 

5. What are some of the difficulties met by immigrants coming to a 
new country ? 

6. When large numbers of foreign immigrants settle in a country, 
what is the danger to the country? 


5° 














For FURTHER READING 


ALEXANDER, W. D.— “History of Immigration to Hawaii,” in 
Thrum’s Hawatian Annual for 1896, pages 114-125. 

Goopate, W. W. — “Brief History of Hawaiian Unskilled Labor,” in 
Thrum’s Hawatian Annual for 1914, pages 170-191 


i 


XXIV 
THE REIGN OF KALAKAUA 


Hooulu Lahui. When Kalakaua came to the throne he an- 
nounced that his purpose was to build up the nation, Hooulu 
Lahui, and this phrase was much used during the first few years 
of his reign. In a speech at Lahaina soon after his election he 
said, ‘“‘ The increase of the people; the advancement of agricul- 
ture and commerce; these are the objects which my government 
will mainly strive to accomplish.” The advancement of agri- 
culture and commerce was accomplished by means of the reci- 
procity treaty, the effects of which were described in the last 
chapter. 

The increase of the people was a harder problem to solve, but 
it was believed to be of supreme importance. In December, 
1872, when Kalakaua was a candidate against Lunalilo, he had 
promised, if elected, “‘ to preserve and increase the people, so 
that they shall multiply and fill the land with chiefs and common 
people.” Did Kalakaua mean by this that the pure Hawaiian 
race was to “ multiply and fill the land”? If so, the promise 
was not, and could not be, fulfilled. 

The only practical method for increasing the people was 
through immigration. That method was followed, and the 
Hawaiian islands were repopulated with alien races. Little by 
little the immigrants intermarried with the Hawaiians, and there 
came to bea group of part-Hawaiians. While the pure Hawaiians 
decreased, the part-Hawaiians increased and have kept on in- 
creasing. 

The question of increasing the permanent population of the 

261 


262 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


islands was mixed up with the labor problem. In Hawaii it 
has always been hard to supply the labor needs of the sugar plan- 
tations without endangering the other interests of the country. 
It was partly in connection with the problem of immigration 


Kalakaua 





and labor that King 
Kalakaua made his 
trip around the world 
in 1881. 

Although the de- 
cline of the native 
population was not 
stopped, some things 
were done during this 
reign to improve the 
condition of the 
people. Thus in 1878 
and 1880 the legisla- 
ture appropriated 
money for a medical 
work for the instruc- 
tion of Hawaiians. 
The result was the 
preparation of a series 
of “ Sanitary Instruc- 
tions for Hawaiians,” 
which was published 
in two native news- 
papers and_ printed 
in book form. In 


these instructions, considerable emphasis was placed upon the 
necessity of taking proper care of babies. It is impossible to 
state exactly how much good was done in this way, but it is 
interesting to notice that Charles R. Bishop, in his report as 
president of the Board of Education in 1892, speaks of the 


THE REIGN OF KALAKAUA 263 


“better care of the children of the natives, which has been 
noticeable in late years.” 

The amount of money appropriated for the work of the Board 
of Health was increased from year to year and in 1890 was nearly 
three times as great as it was in 1874. This money was spent in 
the fight against leprosy, in the support of hospitals and govern- 
ment physicians, and in other ways to protect and improve the 
health of the people. 

Education. During this reign a radical change took place 
in the school system of the kingdom. One thing which stands 
out most conspicuously is the fact that the common schools, 
taught in the Hawaiian language, almost disappeared. In 1890 
less than one tenth of the school children were attending the 
common schools, while two thirds were attending the govern- 
ment English schools, and all the rest were in private schools 
where the English language was used. The reason for this was 
the desire of the Hawaiians to have their children learn English, 
since that was the business language of the islands and the one 
which would be of the greatest use to them. In 1888 the govern- 
ment English schools were made free. 

Steady progress was made in raising the standards of the 
schools. A growing school fund and larger appropriations by the 
legislature made it possible to build better schoolhouses, to 
lengthen the school term, to hire more efficient teachers, and to 
provide a better course of instruction. Progress was especially 
marked after 1887, when a new school board was appointed and 
A. T. Atkinson became the Inspector General of Schools. Nor- 
mal classes were organized for the benefit of the teachers, and 
more attention was paid to the examination of teachers and the 
granting of teachers’ certificates. Even at that time it was 
found necessary to bring teachers from abroad in order to keep 
the schools supplied. 

Before the end of Kalakaua’s reign the work of education was 
beginning to be complicated by the changing character of the 


204 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


- population. In 1890 there were more than 1,800 Portuguese 
children in the public schools. There were nearly 300 Chinese, 
and smaller numbers of American, English, and German chil- 
dren, together with a few Norwegians, Japanese, and South Sea 
islanders. . 

An interesting experiment tried in the reign of Kalakaua was 
that of sending Hawaiian youths to foreign lands to be educated 
so that they might be of greater service to the nation. Money 
was appropriated by the legislature to pay their expenses. In 
all about twenty young people were sent abroad for this purpose 
between 1880 and 1887 to Italy, Scotland, England, the United 
States, Japan, and China. The courses which they followed were 
varied — military and naval science, engineering, law, medicine, 
art, languages, and general science. A few of these Hawaiian 
youths died abroad, a few remained in foreign lands, while others 
returned to Hawaii and became useful members of the commu- 
nity. The list of students includes the names of Robert W. Wil- 
cox, a conspicuous figure in Hawaiian history, who was the 
first delegate in Congress from the Territory of Hawaii; and of 
Prince Jonah Kuhio Kalanianaole, who was the second delegate 
in Congress, where he served for twenty years, until his death 
in 1922. 

Kalakaua’s trip around the world. At the beginning of 1881 
Kalakaua announced his intention of making a trip around the 
world. Preparations were quickly made. Princess  Liliuo- 
kalani, who had been proclaimed heiress to the throne after the 
death of Prince Leleiohoku in 1877, was named as regent during 
the absence of the king. The journey began in January, 1881, 
the king being accompanied by his chamberlain, Colonel C. H. 
Judd, and by his attorney general, W. N. Armstrong, who was 
given the duty of investigating the subject of emigration in the 
various countries which they visited. The king and his party 
went first to San Francisco and from there sailed on a trans- 
Pacific steamer for Japan. 


THE REIGN OF KALAKAUA 265 


As the vessel steamed into the bay of Yeddo the king was 
greeted with a royal salute from a dozen warships and at once 
invited to become the guest of the emperor of Japan. When he 
stepped on shore, the imperial military band played the Hawaiian 
national anthem, Hawaii Ponot. ‘The reception accorded to 
Kalakaua was truly magnificent. He was the first king of a 
western, Christian nation who had ever visited Japan, and he was 
recelved with as much honor as if he had been the most powerful 
monarch on earth. From Japan the king continued his journey, 
visiting China, Siam, India, Egypt, and the great capitals of 
Europe, where he was received with the respect and consideration 
due to the head of an independent kingdom. Returning by way 
of the United States, Kalakaua arrived in Honolulu at the end of 
October, having completed the first journey ever made around 
the world by a king. The home-coming was celebrated with 
triumphal arches and commemorative meles. 

The coronation. Soon after the return of Kalakaua prepara- 
tions were begun for the coronation of the king and queen. This 
act had been authorized by the legislature of 1880, but it had 
been delayed for various reasons. It was now decided that the 
ceremony should take place on February 12, 1883, the ninth 
anniversary of the election of Kalakaua. The purpose of the 
coronation was to confirm and glorify the family of Kalakaua as 
the ruling dynasty of the kingdom, to awaken in the people a 
national pride, and to bring Hawaii to the attention of the world 
at large. 

The ceremony was held in front of the new Iolani Palace, which 
had recently been completed. A special pavilion and an amphi- 
theater were built and decorated with paintings and with the 
coats-of-arms of the nations of the earth. Foreign powers were 
asked to send representatives for the occasion; Japan sent a 
special commissioner, while Great Britain, France, and the 
United States sent warships to honor the event. 

The ritual used in the coronation ceremony was a combina- 


266 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


tion of the customs of European royalty and of the ancient 
Hawaiian chiefs. The regalia included costly crowns, ring, 
scepter, and sword of state, all of which were made in Europe, 
the priceless feather cloak of Kamehameha I, and the palaoa, 
puloulou, and kahili, as symbols of Hawaiian. chieftainship. 





Photograph by Williams. 
Crown, scepter, and sword of Kalakaua 


Two days after the coronation the statue of Kamehameha I, 
which stands in front of Aliiolani Hale, the Judiciary Building, 
was unveiled by the king. The legislature of 1878 appropriated 
the money for this statue, which was intended to mark the one 
hundredth anniversary of the discovery of the islands by Cap- 
tain Cook. The statue was designed by an American sculptor, 


THE REIGN OF KALAKAUA 267 


T. R. Gould, and was made in Italy. The original statue was 
lost at sea, but a replica was obtained and it is this replica which 
stands in Honolulu. The original statue was afterwards re- 
covered and set up at Kohala, Hawaii. 

Political struggle. During a great part of the reign of Kala- 
kaua a political struggle was in progress, which culminated in 
the revolution of 1887. Personally, Kalakaua had a very pleas- 
ant manner; he was well educated and knew how to move in 
the best circles of society ; he was a lover of music and that branch 
of art received a great stimulus during his reign; literary men, 
such as Robert Louis Stevenson, found his companionship 
agreeable and his friendship worth cultivating. Politically, 
Kalakaua was a believer in the absolute right of the king to rule 
as he saw fit. He believed not only that he possessed that right, 
but that he ought to possess it. It is therefore clear that the 
political ideas of Kalakaua were similar to those of Kamehameha 
V, who promulgated the constitution of 1864. That constitution 
left the way open for the king to do almost as he pleased, so far 
as the government was concerned. He could dismiss his ministers 
at any time and appoint others in their stead. In that way he 
was able to control the cabinet. He could appoint members of 
the legislature to public offices and in that way get their support. 
All of this was perfectly legal under the constitution of 1864. 
Kalakaua also thought that he had a right to change the consti- 
tution if he wished to do so, just as Kamehameha V had done, 
and that it was proper for him to use his personal influence in 
elections. He was probably sincere in all these beliefs, but, 
when he came to put them into practice, he very soon got into 
trouble. 

Opposed to him was a party which believed that the govern- 
ment of Hawaii was, or ought to be, a constitutional monarchy 
like that of England, in which the king, or queen, had a position 
of great dignity but very little power. They believed that the 
power should rest in the hands of the people, who, through the 


268 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


legislature, should have control of the cabinet ministers. They 
thought that the king ought not to have the right to dismiss the 
ministers at will, and that members of the legislature ought not 
to hold any other public offices. They tried in every way to keep 
the king’s power within these limits. This difference between 
the views of the king and the views of those opposed to him was 
an underlying cause of the political struggle during the reign of 
Kalakaua. The fight went on with increasing bitterness, but 
the king had the advantage because the constitution of 1864 was 
on his side. 

Another important cause of the political difficulties was the 
character of some of the ministers appointed by the king and 
the way in which they conducted the government. Kalakaua 
changed his ministers frequently, sometimes without stating 
any reason. He did this in July, 1878, and again in August, 
1880. On the latter occasion he appointed as minister of foreign 
affairs an Italian soldier of fortune named C. C. Moreno, who 
had been in the country only a short time. This action aroused 
a storm of opposition and the king concluded it was best to ap- 
point a more acceptable ministry. All this happened shortly 
before he started on his trip around the world. 

The régime of Gibson. ‘The one person who did more than 
any one else to bring on the revolution of 1887 was Walter Murray 
Gibson. This man came to Hawaii as a Mormon missionary in 
1861, but was expelled from that church in 1864. Since that 
time he had become thoroughly established in the islands, and 
had taken a large part in the discussion of public questions. 
In his younger days he had traveled in all parts of the world; 
he was well educated, intellectually keen, even brilliant in some 
ways; and he had many excellent ideas along with some that 
were not so good. He was a partisan of Kalakaua as early as 
1873, and was elected to the legislature in 1878, 1880, and 1882. 
There he was a leader of the king’s party, and in 1882 was ap- 
pointed minister of foreign affairs and head of the cabinet. 


THE REIGN OF KALAKAUA 269 


From that time until June, 1887, Gibson was continuously in 
the cabinet and was its leading member; other ministers came 
and went, but he stayed on; at times he held two positions at 
once. He was thoroughly in sympathy with the king’s views, 
and was quite unscrupulous as to the methods he used. During 
these years the poli- 
tics and government 
of Hawaii became as 
corrupt as the politics 
and government of 
some large cities in 
the United States 
about that time. 
Very naturally, in 
such a system of gov- 
ernment, a good many 
evils and abuses crept 
in. In 1882 what was 
commonly called the 
“free liquor bill’ was 
passed, under which it 
became lawful to sell 
liquor to Hawaiians, 
a thing which had 
been prohibited be- 
rath Haiti he Walter Murray Gibson 
leprosy question was handled very loosely, and the policy of 
segregation was almost abandoned. The finances were not 
properly attended to, and the national debt rose from $355,000 
in 1874 to $2,600,000 in 1890. The question of licensing the 
sale of opium became a political issue, and in 1886 a law was 
passed giving the government the right to sell an opium mon- 
opoly license for $30,000 a year. The most unfortunate thing 
was the use made of the race question. Gibson systematically 





270 A HISTORY -OF HAWAII 


tried to stir up hatred among the Hawaiians against the for- 
eigners, particularly against those who had long been living in 
Hawaii and were identified with its business and social life. 
The cry was raised, “‘ Hawaii for the Hawaiians!’’ Gibson used 
this issue to build up his own influence among the Hawaiians, 
though he himself was a foreigner. 

The Hawaiian League. About the beginning of 1887 a secret 
political organization was formed, called the Hawaiian League. 
The purpose of this League was to bring about a reform in the 
government and to secure a new and more liberal constitution. 
The organization grew rapidly and in a short time had hundreds 
of members in all parts of the kingdom. Most of the leaders of 
this movement were Hawaiian citizens — men born in Hawai 
of foreign parents or naturalized subjects of the king — and the 
membership included a considerable number of native Hawaiians. 
Within the League two factions developed: a radical group which 
favored the overthrow of the monarchy, the setting up of a 
republic, and annexation to the United States; and a conser- 
vative group which desired that Hawaii should remain inde- 
pendent and which favored a continuance of the monarchy 
under a new constitution which would take most of the power 
away from the king. If the king refused to agree to the change, 
the conservatives were prepared to join with the radicals in an 
attempt to overthrow the monarchy. The conservative group 
was the larger of the two and was able to keep control of the 
organization. The members of the League provided themselves 
with arms, so that they would be able to fight if necessary to 
accomplish their purpose. 

The Revolution of 1887. Affairs were brought to a crisis in 
June, 1887, through the publication of reports of scandals in 
connection with the granting of the opium license authorized 
by the legislature of 1886. Public opinion was greatly worked 
up by these reports, and the leaders of the Hawaiian League con- 
cluded that the time for action had arrived. A large and en- 


THE REIGN OF KALAKAUA 271 


thusiastic mass meeting was held on the thirtieth of June and 
resolutions were adopted calling upon the king to dismiss Gibson 
and other officials who were named, to appoint a new cabinet 
‘which shall be committed to the policy of securing a new con- 
stitution,’ and to promise that in future he would not interfere 
in the work of the legislature and the cabinet or in elections. 
With very little delay the king granted all of these requests. A 
new cabinet was appointed and proceeded to draw up a new con- 
stitution, which was signed by Kalakaua, July 6, 1887, and went 
into effect the next day. 

The constitution of 1887 was a revision of the constitution of 
1864. The changes were not very numerous but they were 
very important. First, it was provided that the cabinet ministers 
could not be dismissed by the king except in accordance with a 
vote of the legislature; second, that no official act of the king 
should be valid unless approved by the cabinet; third, that the 
nobles should be elected by voters who had a fairly large amount 
of property or income. The practical effect of this provision 
was to place the election of nobles in the hands of voters of 
foreign birth or foreign ancestry. Under the constitution of 
1864 the nobles were appointed by the king. Fourth, it pro- 
vided that no member of the legislature, while in that position, 
should hold or be appointed to any other public office; and fifth, 
the privilege of voting was extended to resident foreigners of 
American or European birth or descent if they took an oath to 
support the constitution. 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


1. Suppose that one morning you read headlines in the paper saying 
that the superintendent of public instruction and the territorial 
treasurer had been discharged by the governor, who had given no 
reasons for doing so, and that, from time to time, he discharged other 
officers of the government and then discharged their successors shortly 
afterward. Again, suppose you had no Board of Health to inspect 


Zi2 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


your city —or that the governor permitted certain people, on the 
payment of a large sum of money; to sell opium or other drugs — or, 
finally, that he said we must all pay ten per cent of our income to the 
government each year, to add to the money in the treasury. 

a. What do you think the people would say? 

b. Would anyone take the governor’s side? Why? 

c. Would our governor act in this way? Why? 

2. Among the things which we imagined as happening in the first 
exercise, can you find any which correspond to some of the things 
Kalakaua did when he was king? In what ways are the position of 
king and governor alike? What reasons did Kalakaua give for doing 
the things he did? What do you think of those reasons? What did 
some of the people do to show the king their disapproval? What did 
they do which put a stop to further action of the same kind? Name 
the changes in the constitution to which the king was forced to agree. 
If Kalakaua had lived a hundred years before he did, would his sub- 
jects have protested if he had acted in the same way? Why? 


For FURTHER READING 


AsHForD, C. W.— “‘Last Days of the Hawaiian Monarchy,” in 
Twenty-Seventh Annual Report of the Hawatian Historical Society. 


ee 


XXV 


THE END OF THE MONARCHY 


~ 


The fight for control of the government. The revolution 
of 1887 did not end the contest over the question of what kind of 
government Hawaii should have. The fight went on for nearly 
ten years longer, and the final result was the overthrow of the 
monarchy and the setting up of a republic. 

The events of June and July, 1887, placed the new cabinet 
ministers firmly in control of the government, but responsible 
to the legislature, and left the king with very little power. But 
Kalakaua and his supporters did not intend that affairs should 
remain in that shape any longer than was necessary. The king 
studied the constitution carefully and took advantage of all the 
authority that it did give him. He frequently refused to follow 
the advice of the cabinet, and several times the Supreme Court 
was called on to determine whether it was necessary for him to 
_ do what the cabinet wished him to do. In most of these cases 
the court decided in favor of the cabinet, but on one important 
point their decision was in favor of the king. The cabinet 
claimed that the king could not veto a bill without their consent, 
but the judges decided that he could. 

The ultimate object of the king and his party was to do away 
with the constitution of 1887 and restore the constitution of 
1864. There were two ways in which this might be done: (1) by 
means of a revolution; or (2) through political action, by getting 
control of the legislature. Both of these methods were tried. 

Revolutionary attempts. Between 1887 and 1895 there was 
scarcely a year in which there was not a revolutionary uprising 

273 


274 A? HISTORY = OF -HAWAIT 


or an attempt to get up a revolt. It is practically certain that 
the purpose of some of these revolutionary schemes was to de- 
pose Kalakaua and place his sister, Liliuokalani, on the throne. 
The most active revolutionary leader was Robert W. Wilcox. 
Wilcox was one of the students sent abroad by the govern- 
ment; he went to Italy in 1880 to study engineering and mili- 
tary science. He was recalled in 1887 by the reform cabinet, 
who did not think his education would be of much use to 
the country. He immediately tried to organize a revolt, but 
his plans were found out and he was allowed to leave the islands 
and go to California. 

Wilcox returned to Honolulu in 1889 and a revolutionary or- 
ganization was formed. On the morning of July 30, with about 
one hundred and fifty followers, Wilcox attempted to seize the 
palace and government buildings and proclaim a new constitution. 
The king was not in the palace at the time. The cabinet took 
vigorous steps to suppress the uprising. The insurgents were 
driven into a bungalow in the corner of the palace grounds and 
forced to surrender after seven of them had been killed and a 
dozen others wounded. Later, when he was tried for treason, 
Wilcox claimed that he had acted with the consent of the king, 
and he was acquitted by the jury on that ground. 


Political developments. The king had a much better chance ~ 


of success through political action. He had a large party back 
of him, but this party was somewhat weakened by the revolu- 
tion of 1887; therefore, in the election which took place in the fall 
of 1887, the Reform Party was victorious. About this time a 
political society called the Hui Kalaiaina was formed among 
the native Hawaiians. Its purpose was to get a new constitution, 
like that of 1864, and give back to the king the power taken from 
him by the constitution of 1887. By working through this 
society and in other ways, the king’s party grew stronger. The 
Reform Party was weakened by quarrels within its own ranks. 
The result was that in the legislature of 1890 the Reform Party 


eee 


THE END OF THE MONARCHY 205 


did not have a majority. In June of that year the reform 
ministry went out of office and a compromise cabinet was ap- 
pointed. At this session of the legislature an attempt was made 
to call a convention for making a new constitution, but the 
movement was defeated. 

Accession of Liliuokalani. After the close of the legislative 
session in November, 1890, King Kalakaua went to California 
on the United States cruiser Charleston for the purpose of a rest 
and in the hope that his health would be improved by the change 
of climate. Princess Liliuokalani acted as regent in his absence. 
The king’s condition grew worse instead of better and he died 
January 20, 1891, in San Francisco. His body was brought back 
to Honolulu on the Charleston, and Princess Liliuokalani was 
immediately proclaimed queen, taking the required oath to main- 
tain the constitution. The funeral of the late king, a stately and 
mournful ceremony, took place on February 15. 

The new sovereign of Hawaii, like the four who preceded her, 
was born during the early years of the reign of Kamehameha ITI, 
and like them, was educated in the school of the young chiefs. 
At the time of her accession Liliuokalani was more than fifty 
years of age, and had for many years been prominent in the social 
life of the kingdom. She was. a poet and musician of much 
ability, her musical compositions numbering more than a hundred. 
The best known of them is the beautiful song, Aloha Oe, of which 
she wrote both the words and the music. She was also a member 
of various educational and welfare organizations and took a keen 
personal interest in such work. The political ideas of Queen 
Liliuokalani were similar to those of Kalakaua, but she had 
more tenacity and strength of purpose than her royal brother. 
At the time of the revolution of 1887 she was in England with 
Queen Kapiolani, attending the golden jubilee of Queen Victoria. 
It is known that she thought Kalakaua showed weakness in 
yielding as he did at that time. She was also opposed to the 
Pearl River clause of the reciprocity treaty. 


276 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


Revolution of 1893. From the very beginning of her reign 
it was clear that Queen Liliuokalani did not like the constitu- 









oe 
a te cece Sigg 
Pal ae 
es - bs ’ 


Pe 


Wes 


fom 8 
eee ; 


és 

tem 

* sate 
Whoa, 





o* ines 
; dll “ 
Liliuokalani Photograph by Williams. 


tional limitations on her power, but no serious difficulty occurred 
until the legislative session of 1892. In that legislature the 
parties were very evenly divided, and a long contest arose over 


THE END OF THE MONARCHY a77 


three questions: (1) the control of the cabinet, the queen making 
a determined effort to put into office ministers who would follow 
her directions; (2) an opium license bill; and (3) a bill to give 
a franchise to a lottery company. ‘The party which supported 
the queen favored all of these measures, but was defeated in all 
three cases. A cabinet composed of men of the highest standing 
was finally appointed, and it was then supposed that affairs 
would run along smoothly until the next session of the legislature 
in 1894. 

But in the early part of January, 1893, a few days before the 
legislature was closed, while several members of the Reform 
Party were absent, the opium and lottery bills were brought up 
again and passed and the cabinet was voted out of office. The 
queen immediately appointed a new cabinet satisfactory to herself 
and signed the opium and lottery bills, thus making them laws. 
A day or two later, on the morning of January 14, the legislature 
was prorogued (dismissed) by the queen, and it was reported 
that in the afternoon she would proclaim a new constitution, 
similar to that of 1864. The queen believed that she had a right 
to do this if the cabinet approved. The proposed constitution 
had been drawn up some time before, but at the last moment the 
members of the cabinet were afraid that its promulgation would 
cause a revolution; for that reason they refused to sign it, in 
spite of the appeals of the queen. She therefore announced, 
during the afternoon, that she was obliged to postpone the 
matter for a while. 

There is little doubt that a large majority of the native Ha- 
waiians were in favor of a new constitution; but the action of 
the queen and her party in passing the opium and lottery bills, 
in changing the cabinet, and in attempting to proclaim a new 
constitution caused great dissatisfaction and alarm among the 
members of the Reform Party and those men who had taken 
part in the revolution of 1887. A large impromptu meeting was 
held in a down-town office and a Committee of Safety of thirteen 


278 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


members was appointed. This committee held several meetings 
to discuss what should be done and also took steps to secure a 
supply of arms and ammunition and to sign up volunteers for 
military service. A mass meeting was called for Monday after- 
noon, January 16, at the armory, to consider the situation. This 
activity alarmed the queen and the cabinet ministers and on 
Monday morning they issued a proclamation, saying that no 
change would be made in the constitution except in the manner 
provided by law. A rival mass meeting was called to meet that 
afternoon in the palace yard in order to draw people away from 
the meeting called by the Committee of Safety. 

The two mass meetings were held at the same hour. At the 
armory the actions of the Committee of Safety were approved and 
the committee was authorized to take whatever further steps 
were necessary ‘‘ to secure the permanent maintenance of law 
and order.” The opinion was expressed that the queen and 
her advisers could not be trusted any longer and that some 
decisive action was necessary. Following this meeting the 
Committee of Safety decided that the proper course was to put 
an end to the monarchy, set up a temporary government, and 
apply for admission into the United States. 

Plans were quickly made and on Tuesday afternoon, January 
17, the committee, without opposition, took possession of the 
government building and read a proclamation putting an end 
to the monarchy and establishing a Provisional Government 
‘to exist until terms of union with the United States of America 
have been negotiated and agreed upon.” The Provisional 
Government consisted of an Executive Council of four members 
to take the place of the queen and cabinet, and of an Advisory 
Council of fourteen members having legislative authority. The 
members of the Executive Council were Sanford B. Dole, pres- 
ident and minister of foreign affairs; J. A. King, minister of the 


interior; P. C. Jones, minister of finance; and W. O. Smith, 
attorney general. 


THE END OF THE MONARCHY 2710 


The selection of Judge Dole as head of the government was a 
very fortunate one, as he was born in the islands, was thoroughly 
identified with its best interests, and possessed just the qualities 
needed in such a position— courage, cool judgment, executive 
ability, a keen and logical mind, an uncompromising but yet 





Executive Council of the Provisional Government, January, 1893 
From left to right: J. A. King, S. B. Dole, W. O. Smith, P. C. Jones. 


a conciliatory disposition; and he had the full confidence and 
respect of the entire community, Hawaiians and foreigners alike. 

The Provisional Government immediately demanded from the 
queen and cabinet the surrender of the palace, the police, and 
the royal military force. This surrender was made, but it was 
done under protest. On Monday afternoon troops had been 
landed from the United States cruiser Boston for the protection 
of the lives and property of American citizens and to assist in 
preserving public order. This was done at the request of the 


280 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


American minister. The queen and her advisers declared that 
these troops were landed to aid the revolutionists and that the 
queen’s forces did not dare to attack the Provisional Government 
for fear of a conflict with the United States troops. The queen 
therefore surrendered her authority under protest and appealed 
to the United States government to restore her to the throne. 

The Provisional Government sent five commissioners to 
Washington to negotiate a treaty of annexation. Liliuokalani 
also sent agents to present her claims. An annexation treaty 
was drawn up, signed on February 14, 1893, and submitted to 
the Senate by President Harrison for approval; but no action 
was taken upon it before the change of administration which 
occurred on the fourth of March. 

President Cleveland’s attempt to restore the monarchy. Soon 
after the inauguration of President Cleveland, he withdrew the 
proposed Hawaiian treaty from the Senate and sent a special 
commissioner, James H. Blount, to Hawaii to investigate the 
situation. Mr. Blount came to Honolulu, made an investigation, 
and then went back to Washington and reported that the over- 
throw of the queen’s government was the result of a conspiracy 
between the revolutionists and John L. Stevens, the United 
States minister to Hawaii, and that the troops from the cruiser 
Boston were landed for the purpose of aiding the revolutionists. 
President Cleveland, believing that Mr. Blount’s report was true, 
concluded that he ought to restore the monarchy in Hawaii and 
put Liliuokalani back on the throne. For that purpose he sent 
a new minister, Albert S. Willis, to Hawaii. 

Mr. Willis arrived at Honolulu early in November, 1893, pre- 
sented his credentials, and was formally received by the Pro- 
visional Government. He then held a series of conferences with 
Liliuokalani and finally obtained her agreement to grant full 
pardon and amnesty to the revolutionists and to maintain the 
constitution of 1887 in case she was restored to the throne. Mr. 
Willis then, in the name of President Cleveland, asked President 


a 


THE END OF THE MONARCHY 281 


Dole and his associates to step out and turn the government over 
to Liliuokalani. To this request Mr. Dole, in his capacity as 
minister of foreign affairs, made a reply, protesting against Presi- 
dent Cleveland’s interference in the internal affairs of Hawaii, 
emphatically denying the truth of the charges contained in 
Blount’s report, and firmly declining to restore the government 
to Liliuokalani. That settled the matter, since Mr. Cleveland 





Preparations for defense of Executive Building in December, 1893 


The Provisional Government feared that the United States Minister would use 
armed force in an effort to restore the Queen. 


had no authority to use force and it was clear that the United 
States Congress would not support him in carrying out his policy. 

Establishment of the republic. In view of the failure of the 
annexation treaty and the certainty that Hawaii could not 
become a part of the United States so long as President Cleveland: 
was in office, it was thought desirable to place the government 
upon a permanent basis. A law was therefore passed providing 
for the holding of a constitutional convention, which was to con- 
sist of the President and the Executive and Advisory Councils 
of the Provisional Government, together with eighteen delegates 
elected by the voters. The voters and the delegates elected by 


282 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


them were required to take an oath to support the Provisional 
Government and oppose any attempt to restore the monarchy. . 

The convention met on May 30, 1894, and the constitution 
of the Republic of Hawaii was proclaimed on the morning of the 
Fourth of July following. The government established by this 
constitution was similar in its general outline to the government 
of the United States, but there were some features based on the . 
government of England, and the method of choosing the president 
was like that used in France. The constitution also embodied 
some new ideas in government and retained some parts of the 
Hawaiian constitution of 1887. It was very carefully worked 
out, in order to make it fit the existing condition of affairs in 
Hawaii. Mr. Dole was continued in office as president of the 
republic. The national flag remained the same as it was under 
the monarchy. The new government was promptly recognized 
by all the leading nations of the world. 

Insurrection of 1895. As long as there was any chance that 
the United States might intervene to restore Liliuokalani to 
the throne, her supporters remained quiet; but when they lost 
hope of aid from that direction, they began to lay plans for an 
armed uprising. ‘There were rumors of such an attempt during 
the spring of 1894, particularly while the constitutional conven- 
tion was in session. During the summer Liliuokalani sent agents 
to Washington to find out from President Cleveland whether 
there was any hope of his doing anything to restore the monarchy. 
His reply was that he could do nothing. After the return of 
these agents to Hawaii, preparations were completed for a revo- 
lutionary attempt to overthrow the republic. A large quantity 
of arms and ammunition was brought down from San Francisco 
and the early part of January, 1895, was fixed as the time for the 
uprising. 

The government got wind of the affair and took steps which 
prevented the royalists from carrying out their plans. There 
were a few skirmishes at Waikiki and in Palolo and Manoa 


THE END OF THE MONARCHY 283 


Valleys, resulting in the death of several men and the wounding 
of some others. Within a few days the leaders were all captured 
and a large number of the rank and file were made prisoners. 
Liliuokalani was also placed under arrest. Altogether the 
prisoners numbered more than two hundred, including twenty 
or thirty foreigners. Most of the foreigners were released on 
condition of leaving the country. The other prisoners were 
tried by a military court and nearly all, including Liliuokalani, 
were found guilty and sentenced to imprisonment or fine; but 
within a few months all were released. Among the participants 
in this insurrection were a number of men who afterwards had 
a prominent and honorable part in public affairs. 

Abdication of Liliuokalani. While she was a prisoner awaiting 
trial before the military court, Liliuokalani sent to President Dole 
a letter in which she abdicated and renounced all her claims to 
the throne of Hawaii. At the same time she signed the oath of 
allegiance to the Republic of Hawaii, and announced her intention 
of living quietly as a private citizen. This action of the ex-queen 
was a definite acknowledgment that the monarchy was sons and 
that the republic was firmly established. 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


1. We know that all over the world to-day in different countries 
we find people of many nationalities living together, generally in 
peace. In each group, however, those of one nationality usually 
depend on people from their own country for support and companion- 
ship, in times of both pleasure and trouble. If any great disturbance 
occurs in that country, these little groups composed of people of one 
nationality are even more unified than under ordinary conditions. 

a. Which racial groups had the greatest influence on life in 
Hawaii at the time of the annexation of the Hawaiian 
Islands to the United States? 

b. On what question did they divide? 

c. If you had been a native Hawaiian at this time which point 
of view would you have supported? Why? 


284 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


d. If you had been in Hawaii at this time and were an American 
what point of view would you have supported? Why? 

2. In American history you have studied about the annexation of 
Texas. Now you are studying about the annexation of Hawaii. 
Compare the two on the following points: 

a. American interests in Texas and Hawaii. 

b. Native governments in Texas and Hawaii. 

c. Reasons for annexation of each. 

d. Reasons against annexation of each. 

e. Importance to the United States government of these two 
annexations. 

3. Which of the following statements do you think best expresses 
the reasons for Hawaii’s annexation by the United States? Give 
reasons for your choice. 

a. To keep any other country from getting possession of Hawaii. 
b. To help Hawaiians. 

c. To help Americans here. 

d. To provide Hawaii with a democratic government. 

a. President Cleveland would not agree to the annexation of 

Hawaii. Why? 

Was there any similar difficulty over the annexation of Texas? 

How long was it before the question was settled ? 

5. Name some ways in which Hawaii has been benefited by annexa- 
tion; some in which Hawaii has been injured. Which do 
you think the greater, the benefits or the injuries? Why? 


Se 


XXVI 


HAWAIIT BECOMES AN AMERICAN COMMONWEALTH 


The annexation question in Hawaii and in the United States. 
Although the annexation of Hawaii to the United States was 
postponed for the time being, the idea was not given up. It was 
the purpose of the Hawaiian government to bring about annexa- 
tion as soon as it could be done. On the other hand those who 
had been in favor of the monarchy now turned their efforts 
against annexation, because so long as Hawaii was independent 
there was still some hope of restoring the monarchy. In the 
United States the “‘ Hawaiian question ”’ became a political issue 
and was hotly debated. The Democrats were generally opposed 
to annexation, while the Republicans favored it. In the elec- 
tion of 1896 the Republican candidate, William McKinley, was 
elected president, and this gave great encouragement to the 
friends of annexation. 

Treaty of annexation. Soon after the inauguration of President 
McKinley negotiations were opened at Washington and a new 
treaty of annexation was signed on June 16, 1897. Thetreaty 
was submitted to the United States Senate the same day with a 
message from the president, in which he said that the annexation 
of Hawaii was the inevitable consequence of the relations between 
that country and the United States for the last three quarters of 
a century. The opponents of the treaty fought hard to prevent 
its approval. A majority of the senators were in favor of it, but 
not two thirds of them, and the treaty required a two-thirds vote. 
Therefore no action was taken on the treaty by the United 
States Senate. In Hawaii the treaty was approved by the 

285 


286 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


Hawaiian Senate and signed by President Dole on the tenth of 
September, 1897. 

Japanese protest against annexation. The Japanese govern- 
ment presented to the United States government a strong protest 
against the annexation of Hawaii, on two grounds: (1) That 
the proposed annexation would change the existing condition 
of affairs in the Pacific Ocean and might thereby cause inter- 
national difficulties; (2) that annexation might interfere with the 
rights of Japanese citizens in Hawaii. When annexation was 
under consideration in 1893, Japan made no protest, but since 
that time circumstances had changed. Japan had defeated 
China in war and had suddenly become a world power and the 
leading nation in Asia. The number of Japanese in Hawaii had 
increased from 15,000 in 1893 to 25,000 in 1897. 

During this period (1893-1897) Japanese immigrants came 
to Hawaii so rapidly that the Hawaiian government thought it 
necessary to place some restrictions on immigration. The 
government finally became convinced that many Japanese were 
entering Hawaii in violation of the immigration laws, and in 
the early part of 1897 about a thousand immigrants were re- 
fused admission because they could not meet the requirements 
of the law. The Japanese government immediately protested 
against this action, declaring that it was in violation of treaty 
rights, and demanded indemnity from the Hawaiian govern- 
ment. This led to a long discussion, which was in progress at 
the very time Japan made her protest to the United States 
against annexation. 

The Japanese government finally withdrew its protest against 
annexation, and the Hawaiian government paid $75,000 to 
Japan in order to settle the immigration controversy so that it 
would not be passed on to the United States as an unsettled 
question at the time of annexation. The question of Japanese 
immigration to Hawaii proved to be a very strong argument in 
favor of annexation. It was said that if Hawaii were not annexed 


HAWAII BECOMES AN AMERICAN COMMONWEALTH 287 


to the United States it would be only a matter of time until the 
islands would become a Japanese colony. 

The Spanish-American War. While the question of annexa- 
tion was still pending, war broke out between the United States 
and Spain. Admiral Dewey destroyed the Spanish fleet in the 
Philippines and took possession of Manila Bay. Troops were 
ordered to sail from San Francisco to Manila. The Hawaiian 
government, instead of remaining neutral, offered to the United 
States the use of the harbors and other facilities which the islands 
afforded. The troop ships were welcomed with enthusiasm. 
The women of Honolulu organized a Red Cross Society which 
rendered important service to the “ boys in blue.’”? Under the 
circumstances the value of the Hawaiian islands for military and 
naval purposes was perfectly clear to everyone, and the cause of 
annexation was greatly strengthened. 

Annexation by joint resolution. In view of the failure of the 
United States Senate to act on the Hawaiian treaty, a different 
method was used to bring about annexation. This was by a 
joint resolution of the two houses of Congress, the same method 
that was used to bring about the annexation of Texas in 1845. 
The joint resolution required only a majority vote of each house 
of Congress. It was passed by the House of Representatives on 
June 15, 1898, by the Senate on July 6, and signed by President 
McKinley the following day. The news was received in Hono- 
lulu about a week later. 

Transfer of sovereignty. August 12, 1898, was the day set for 
the transfer of sovereignty from the Republic of Hawaii to the 
United States. The ceremony took place in front of the Execu- 
tive Building, formerly the Royal Palace, at the hour of noon. 
Mr. Sewall, United States minister to Hawaii, presented the 
joint resolution of Congress providing for annexation. President 
Dole, on behalf of Hawaii, yielded up the sovereignty of the 
islands, which was accepted by Mr. Sewall in the name of the 
United States. The troops presented arms. Twenty-one guns 


288 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


sounded from the battery on shore and from the warships in the 
harbor — the last national salute to the Hawaiian flag. The 
Hawaiian band played the national anthem, Hawaii Ponoi, and 
the Hawaiian ensign was slowly drawn down. The American 


* 
r, 


Ag “Feng 


PRbesesey ns | 


; = 
uL LE TITER 
te % 


a % ee: m 
Paha rete bas 


thy te 
*F ty, . 
Wau 





Transfer of sovereignty, August 12, 1898 


flag was raised in its place, while the band from the cruiser 
Philadelphia played The Star Spangled Banner. ‘The national 
salute of twenty-one guns was again given from ship and shore 
batteries, after which Mr. Sewall read an official proclamation 
and delivered a short address. 


HAWAII BECOMES AN AMERICAN COMMONWEALTH 289 


Hawaii had become a part of the United States. The cere- 
mony was impressive, but the occasion was one of solemnity 
rather than of public rejoicing and festivity. Not many of the 
native Hawaiians were present. To them the scene could not 
be other than a painful one. Even those who felt that annexation 
was for the best could not look on without a tug at their heart- 
strings while the beautiful flag of Hawaii gave place to that of the 
United States, and while the strains of Hawaii Ponoi were played 
for the last time as the anthem of an independent nation. 

The Organic Act. The annexation resolution provided that 
the government of Hawaii should continue as it was until Con- 
gress provided a permanent form of government for the islands. 
It also called for the appointment of a commission of five mem- 
bers to recommend to Congress “such legislation concerning 
the Hawaiian islands as they shall deem necessary or proper.” 
As members of the Hawaiian Commission President McKinley 
appointed three members of Congress, Senators S. M. Cullom 
and J. T. Morgan and Representative R. R. Hitt, and two 
citizens of Hawaii, S. B. Dole and W. F. Frear. ‘The Commission 
held its first meeting in August, 1898, and its report was pre- 
sented to Congress In December of the same year. The report 
included the draft of a bill to provide a government for the 
Territory of Hawaii. The bill was discussed, amended, and 
finally passed by Congress and approved by the president on 
April 30, 1900. This law is known as the Organic Act and is, in 
effect, the constitution of the Territory of Hawaii. 

The territorial government. Annexation to the United States 
did not involve any very radical change in the form of government 
in Hawaii. Under the Organic Act the existing laws were con- 
tinued in force unless they were inconsistent with the constitution 
and laws of the United States. The laws of the United States 
were extended over the Territory, but the aim of Congress was to 
change as little as possible the ordinary operations of the govern- 
ment already existing in Hawaii. Under the Organic Act and 


290 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


the laws of the Territory the government is divided into three 
branches, executive, judicial, and legislative. The executive 
branch consists of a Governor and a Secretary, appointed by the 
president of the United States “by and with the advice and 
consent of the Senate 
of the United States” ; 
and of an Attorney 
General, Treasurer, 
Auditor, Surveyor, 
High Sheriff, Com- 
missioner of Public 
Lands, Superintend- 
ent of Public Works, 
Superintendent of 
Public Instruction, 
and various Boards 
and Commissions, ap- 
pointed by the gov- 
ernor by and with the 
advice and consent of 
the territorial Senate. 

The judicial branch 
consists of the Su- 
preme Court, five 
circuit courts, and 
twenty-nine district 
courts. The judges of the district courts are called district 
magistrates and correspond to the justices of the peace in most 
of the states on the mainland. The judges of the Supreme 
Court and of the circuit courts are appointed by the president ; 
the district magistrates are appointed by the chief justice of the 
Supreme Court. Besides these territorial courts there is also 
a United States District Court with two judges. 

The legislative branch consists of a Legislature elected by the 





Governor Sanford B. Dole (1900-1903) 


HAWAII BECOMES AN AMERICAN COMMONWEALTH 291 


voters of the Territory and composed of two houses, the Senate, 
having fifteen members, and the House of Representatives, hav- 
ing thirty members. The voters also elect a delegate to Congress, 
who is a member of the United States House of Representatives 
and has all the rights and privileges of a representative, except 
the right to vote. 

Under the Organic Act all citizens of Hawaii became citizens of 
the United States. The privilege of voting was granted to all 
male citizens of or over twenty-one years of age who could speak, 
read, and write either 
the English or the 
Hawalian language. 
Under the nineteenth 
amendment of the 
constitution of the 
Umitedsotates ithe 
women of Hawaii also 
have the right to vote. 
There is no property 
qualification for either 
voting or holding 
office. 

County and city 
government. Under 
the monarchy and the 
republic there had 
been no local govern- 
ments in Hawaii, such 
as those of counties Governor George R. Carter (1903-1907) 
and cities. The whole 
administration of public affairs was centralized in the national 
government. The same condition existed during the first few 
years after the establishment of the territorial government. But 
a demand soon arose for the creation of county governments on 





292 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


the different islands to take over the control of local affairs. In 
response to this demand a county government act was passed 
by the legislature of 1903, but it was almost immediately declared 
unconstitutional. Two 
years later a more 
carefully prepared act 
was passed. 

By the County Act 
of 1905 the Territory 
was divided into five 
counties :4.(1) Oahu: 
(2) Hawaii; (3) Maui, 
which includes Molo- 
kai (except the Leper 
Settlement), Lanai, 
and Kahoolawe; 
(4) Kauai, which in- 
cludes. Niihau; (5) 
Kalawao, which is con- 
fined to the Leper Set- 
tlement and is under 
the control of the 
Board of Health. In 
the counties of Oahu, 
Hawaii, Maui, and Kauai governments were set up which are in 
general similar to the county governments found in states on the 
mainland. 





Governor Walter F. Frear (1907-1913) 


A further step in the development of local government was 
taken in 1907 when a law was passed to establish a municipal 
government for the city of Honolulu. A city government for 
Honolulu was first suggested many years before during the days 
of the monarchy, but no definite action resulted from that early 
suggestion. It was first intended to confine the municipal 
government to the limits of the city. A later suggestion was to 


HAWAII BECOMES AN AMERICAN COMMONWEALTH 293 


take in all of the Kona or south side of the island. But the 
Municipal Act of 1907 includes the whole island of Oahu in the 
City and County of Honolulu, for which it provides a government 
of the city type. 

The creation of these county and municipal governments 
gave to the citizens of Hawaii a much larger field of activity in 
political affairs. It also completed the transformation of Hawaii 
from a centralized monarchy into a republican commonwealth of 
the ordinary American 
type. 

Political develop- 
ment. As first gov- 
ernor of the Territory 
President McKinley 
appointed Sanford B. 
Dole; hence the diffi- 
cult period of adjust- 
ment passed by with- 
out any change in 
the highest executive 
office. There was 
much speculation as 
to how the people of 
Hawaii would act 
under the new condi- 
tions. The Organic 
Act gave the native 
Hawaiians the politi- 
cal control of all elec- 
tive offices. Down to the year 1924 the Hawaiians and part- 
Hawaiians made up a clear majority of the voting population ; 
and for many years longer they will comprise the largest single 
group of voters. Looking back over the first quarter century 
of territorial history, it can truthfully be said that the voters of 





Governor Lucius E. Pinkham (1913-1918) 


204 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


Hawaii have used the ballot as wisely as the voters in any other 
part of the United States. 

The first territorial election was held in the fall of 1900. There 
were three parties in the field: a Home Rule Party, with the 
motto, ‘‘ Hawaii for the Hawalians’’; and the Republican and 
Democratic parties. After a vigorous campaign the Home 
Rulers won a sweep- 
ing victory. Their 
candidate, Robert W. 
Wilcox, was elected 
delegate to Congress 
over the Republican 
candidate, Samuel 
Parker, and the Dem- 
ocratic candidate, 
Prince David Kawa- 
nanakoa. The Home 
Rulers also had a 
large majority in the 
first legislature. But 
after this first election 
the Home Rule Party 
rapidly dwindled 
away and after 1912 
ceased to exist. In 
1902 Wilcox was de- 
feated by the Re- 
publican candidate, 
Prince Jonah Kuhio 
Kalanianaole, and 
thereafter Prince Kuhio was returned to Congress at each elec- 
tion until his death in 1922. This prince of Hawaii became a 
national figure, and gave devoted service in the interest of his 
beloved island home. 





Governor Charles J. McCarthy (1918-1921) 


HAWAIL BECOMES AN AMERICAN COMMONWEALTH 295 


Reconciliation. Governor W. F. Frear, in his inaugural 
address in 1907, used the following words: ‘‘ Seven brief years 
[under territorial government], and yet what grand results, if we 
but pause to view them ! — years, it is true, largely of adjustment 
to new conditions but 
equally years of ad- 
vance. Natural feel- 
ings of sadness and 
even of bitterness over 
loss otf independence 
— feelings not con- 
fined to Hawaiians 
alone — have passed 
from the stage of out- 
ward manifestation 
and in large measure 
from existence; there 
is every reason for 
belief that the Ha- 
wailians will soon have 
passed from a state of 
reconciliation to one 
of the same ardent 
loyalty and patriotism 
towards their adopted 
country that characterized their attitude toward their former 
country.’’ Succeeding years have shown the truth of Governor 
Frear’s prophetic words. This happy result came about largely 
because of the fine example set by the Hawaiian aliz, and notably 
by Queen Liliuokalani herself. The later years of her life ex- 
hibited a gentleness of spirit little suspected by some who saw 
only the stern side of the queen’s character in the stormy years 
before 1900. When she died in 1917 there was sincere and uni- 
versal mourning throughout the whole Territory. The fullness 





Governor Wallace R. Farrington (1921- ) 


296 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


of reconciliation was again demonstrated following the death of 
former President and Governor Sanford B. Dole, which occurred 
in June, 1926. At that time the entire population united in 
paying honor to the memory of this man whose life for half a — 
century had been so closely interwoven with the history of 
Hawaii. 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


If you were asked to list those things which you feel are most dear 
to you, what would you put down? You would probably put down 
those things with which you are in daily contact but to which you give 
very little thought of love or loyalty from day to day. You seldom 
look up at our hills and say to yourself ‘How beautiful they are,” but 
you would miss their beauty if they were replaced by flat, barren land. 
You play and work and even quarrel with your brothers and sisters 
from day to day and do not think about how much you care for them, 
but if they become ill and are in danger of dying, you realize how dear 
they are to you. 

Think, then, how you would have felt if you had been a young 
Hawaiian at about noon on August 12, 1898. Honolulu is very quiet, 
and warm. ‘There is a very faint breeze. From your seat on a fence 
near the Armory on Hotel Street you can see the red, white, and blue 
stripes of your flag stirring against the flagstaff. Across in the palace 
grounds there is a hushed buzz. Vaguely you think, ‘This is the day 
our people talk so sadly about.’’ You are conscious that the buzz has 
ceased. A loud report of a cannon startles you, then another, and 
another. There are twenty-one of them. Then silence. The street 
is deserted except for two men coming toward you. Then music. 
Into your mind flashes the thought ‘Hawaii Ponoi.” Many times 
you’ve heard it. It makes you feel queer — proud and tall and good! 
You raise your eyes; they find your flag — why, it’s moved; it’s com- 
ing down, so slowly. How queer! The music is slow —it is sad. 
The men on the street pass; they look serious and one says: “Hail 
and farewell!” That’s what it is. Farewell! That thing that has 
been part of your daily life, part of your being, is going, so slowly, so 
sadly, so surely. There is a pause in the music. There is an air of 
waiting about you. Quick, proud music comes to you; up the flag- 
staff skims a strip of color. It is limp; a breeze stirs; it opens out — 


HAWAII BECOMES AN AMERICAN COMMONWEALTH 297 


red, white, and blue — stars and stripes — it is beautiful, but it is not 


yours ! 


ibe ad. 


b. 


C. 


Can it ever replace yours? 


To what flag have the Hawaiians transferred their loyalty 
since the days of the monarchy ? 

Do you think this was an easy thing to do? Why? 

Are there any people in Hawaii to-day who are slowly but 
surely transferring their loyalty from one flag to another? 
What are some of the difficulties which stand in their way? 

Why did the Hawaiians transfer their loyalty from the 
Hawaiian flag to that of the Americans? Why are other 
groups here in Hawaii transferring their loyalty to the 
American flag ? 


2. When the U. S. was at war with Spain the Hawaiian government 
did a clever thing which showed the American government how valu- 
able a possession our islands would be. What was that thing? 

3. Ina previous chapter we decided that a constitution was neces- 
sary in forming a government, just as specifications and plans are 
necessary in building a home. 


eae Sais’ Goa 


. Has the Territory of Hawaii a constitution ? 


What is it called? 
Who granted it? 


. How can it be changed or amended? 


Into how many branches does it divide our government ? 
In what unusual manner are the heads of two of these branches 
chosen ? 


. In your American history there is a statement, “The New 


England town meetings were schools of government and 
politics.” Can you explain what that means? 

Have we any “schools of government and politics” here in 
Hawaii? How many kinds are there? What are they? 


XXVITI 


HAWAII AND THE NATION 


The army and navy in Hawaii. Hawaii is an important link 
in the chain of national defense and because of that fact the 
army and navy occupy a conspicuous place in the everyday life of 
the islands, particularly of the island of Oahu. ‘The relations 
between the Territory and the nation have to a considerable 
extent centered about the development of plans to make Hawaii 
a powerful military and naval outpost of the United States. 

The first American troops assigned to duty in Hawaii arrived at 
Honolulu a few days after the stars and stripes were raised over 
the islands. A temporary post, called Camp McKinley, was 
established at Waikiki. For several years this was the only 
military encampment, while surveys and plans were being made 
for a permanent post. 

In 1905 contracts were let for the building of a post on the 
Kahauiki reservation near Honolulu. The first buildings were 
completed and occupied in the summer of 1907. The post was 
named Fort Shafter, in honor of William R. Shafter, one of the 
generals in the Spanish-American War. ‘This was the first of a 
series of forts established for the purpose of defending the harbor 
and city of Honolulu. Fort Shafter is now the headquarters of 
the Hawaiian Department. 

The second post was Fort Armstrong, built on the Kaakau- 
kukui reef near the entrance to the harbor. This post was first 
occupied in 1913 by a company of the Coast Artillery, but is now 
used by the Quartermaster Corps. Farther to the east, along the 
shore of Waikiki, lies Fort DeRussy. Before these two forts could 

298 


HAWAII AND THE NATION 299 


be built it was necessary to fill up a large area of low, swampy 
land. Still farther to the east is Fort Ruger, occupying Diamond 
Head, a site which looks as if nature had intended it for purposes 
of defense. This post was first occupied in 1909 by two com- 
panies of the Coast Artillery who did the pioneer work of clearing 
and laying out the grounds. To the west of Honolulu, at the 





Camp McKinley 


entrance of Pearl River, lies Fort Kamehameha, the last of the 
coast defenses of Oahu to be completed. The site was acquired 
by the national government in rgor ; but it was not occupied until 
1913, and the fort was completed much later. The fort is named 
in honor of Kamehameha the Great. 

The history of Schofield Barracks dates from the year 1908, 
when the war department gave orders for the building of a 
military post on the Leilehua plains in the central part of Oahu. 
In January, 1909, the first hastily constructed buildings were 
occupied by a cavalry regiment. At that time life at Scho- 


"VS ‘9010189 1p ‘UW01799F C10Ud YITT Aq yYdv160j20Y IT 





syovleg pjeyoyos 


= ——a 


HAWAII AND THE NATION 301 


field was not as pleasant as it has become in later years. In 1913 
Hawaii was made a separate army department. A few years 
later the national government decided to enlarge the garrison at 
Schofield and to build substantial concrete barracks to house the 
troops stationed there. The carrying out of these plans has made 
Schofield Barracks the largest military post in the United States. 

The Army Air Service was established in Hawaii in 1018. 
The main station at Luke Field on Ford Island in Pearl Harbor 
has been developed into a well-equipped and efficient flying base. 
A subsidiary station has been established on the Schofield Bar- 
racks reservation. 

The work of the navy in Hawaii has centered about Pearl 
Harbor. In order to make that harbor of much use to a modern 
fleet, two things were necessary: (1) to cut down the coral bar 
across the entrance; and (2) to construct a large dry dock. Work 
on the bar was begun not long after annexation and was carried to 
completion within a few years. But it was not until 1908 that 
Congress authorized the secretary of the navy to establish a naval 
station at Pearl Harbor. 

Work on the construction of a dry dock was parece as soon 
as plans could be drawn and a contract let. The project was one 
that tested engineering skill and patience. In February, 19132, 
it was nearing completion when the foundation gave way and the 
work of years was destroyed in a few minutes. The plans were 
then changed to provide for a much larger dock, and a different 
method of construction was adopted. The work was successfully 
completed and dedicated in tg1g. In addition to the dry dock, 
wharves, machine shops, and other necessary buildings have been 
constructed. 

The joint army and navy maneuvers of 1925, carried on in 
Hawaii, were designed to test the strength of the island defenses 
and show what further developments are necessary in order to 
make Hawaii safe against attack and effective as a military and 
naval base in time of war. 


302 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


Development of commercial harbors. The national govern- 
ment has an interest in the improvement of harbors for com- 
mercial purposes, and has spent large sums in development work 
at Honolulu, Hilo, Kahului, and Nawiliwili. This will eventually 
give each of the larger islands one first-class harbor. In addition 
there are several smaller harbors for whose development the 





Federal Building in Honolulu 


Territory is spending money and asking no assistance from the 
national government. 

Hawaii National Park. An act of signal benefit to the Ter- 
ritory and the nation was the creation of the Hawaii National 
Park. This was done by act of Congress in August, 1916, and the 
park. was formally dedicated in 1921. It has the same status as 
the Yellowstone and other national parks and is open through- 
out the year. The park is in three divisions, two on the island of 
Hawaii and one on the island of Maui. The two divisions on 
Hawaii include the volcano of Kilauea and a large area covered 
with crater pits, tropical forest, and fern jungles, and Mokuaweo- 


HAWAIL AND THE NATION 303 


weo, the summit crater of Mauna Loa. The Maui section takes 
in the immense crater of Haleakala with its interesting prehistoric 
structures. A territorial automobile road more than thirty miles 
in length from Hilo to Kilauea indicates how nation and Ter- 
ritory codperate in enterprises for the good of both. 

Other federal activities in the Territory. The Hawaii Agri- 
cultural Experiment Station was established by the United 
States government in 1gor to aid in solving the agricultural 
problems of the Territory. The station has done much useful 
work. It has given particular attention to the improvement of 
such plants as the banana, the papaia, and the alligator pear. 
Its chief work has been to teach the value of diversification, that 
is to say, the raising of a greater variety of food crops. 

The United States Public Health Service maintains a rigid 
inspection of vessels and passengers coming into the Territory, 
thus safeguarding the health of both island and mainland ports. 
It has also worked in codperation with territorial officials on 
problems of disease and sanitation. 

Honolulu is the headquarters of the Nineteenth Lighthouse 
District, which embraces all the islands of the Territory as well 
as certain other islands in the Pacific. The local station of the 
United States Weather Bureau also does efficient work. The 
radio broadcasting of weather conditions is of great importance to 
shipping, and the collection of data on climatic conditions is of 
value both to science and to the general public. 

The United States Geological Survey has codperated with the 
Territory in several important ways. It has made maps of 
Oahu, Kauai, Molokai, Lanai, and Maui, and is engaged in map- 
ping the island of Hawaii. It also has charge of studies of the 
water supplies of the Territory — determining the amount of 
water which flows in streams and pointing out places where wells 
should be drilled. Beginning with 1925, the Geological Survey 
is directing the work at the Volcano Observatory at Kilauea. 

The Archives Building in Honolulu is an example of national 


304 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


and territorial relations. After annexation there was some 
talk of removing the Hawaiian government archives to Wash- 
ington. This would have caused much inconvenience, since 
the records have to be consulted constantly for land titles. It 
was therefore arranged that the records would be allowed to 
remain in Hawaii if they were suitably housed. Accordingly the 
legislature of 1903 appropriated $75,000 for this purpose, and in 
1907 the Archives Building was completed. The first librarian, 
R. C. Lydecker, served until his death in 1924, when he was 
succeeded by the journalist-historian, A. P. Taylor. This 
department of the government has rendered a service of great 
value in making historical documents accessible to students and 
investigators. 

Hawaii in the World War. The United States formally 
entered the World War on April 6, 1917, but Hawaii’s participa- 
tion in war work began long before that date. In September, 
1914, the War Relief Committee of Hawaii was organized, and 
two years later the Hawaiian Allied War Relief Committee. 
Still later, after the United States entered the war, Red Cross 
chapters were formed on the different islands. All of these were 
finally combined in the Hawaiian Chapter of the American Red 
Cross, with four branches. 

The work of these organizations was carried on with the 
greatest devotion and efficiency. Hundreds of thousands of dol- 
lars were contributed directly for relief and Red Cross work. 
Surgical dressings, hospital supplies, and clothing to the value 
of more than half a million dollars were prepared and shipped 
from Honolulu to the war areas. Civilian relief in Hawaii; can- 
teen and camp service (reading and writing rooms, moving pic- 
tures, telephones, information bureaus, etc.) in the army posts in 
the Territory; instruction classes in Red Cross work; a Red 
Cross shop — these and many other activities gave opportunity 
for hundreds of people, especially women and children, to do their 
part in the time of crisis. 


HAWAII AND THE NATION 305 


Besides these home activities, Hawaii contributed the services 
of many volunteers for active Red Cross and relief work in war 
areas, both in Europe and in Siberia. 

Hawaii cheerfully gave her share of fighting men for direct 
military service. Even before the United States joined the 
allies, scores of men from Hawaii had volunteered for service in 
the British and French armies. After April 6, 1917, men of 
Hawaii entered the army and navy of the United States in three 
ways: (1) by volunteering for service in the regular army or in 
the navy; (2) by being called into service as reserve officers or as 
members of the naval militia or the National Guard; (3) by 
being drafted into the United States Army or Navy through the 
operation of the Selective Service Law. 

There were so many volunteer enlistments from the Territory 
that Hawaii was not required to furnish any men for the first 
national draft. But in the summer of 1918 Hawaii was called 
upon to furnish about 4,000 men for the National Army. At 
about the same time the National Guard was called into federal 
service. These men were not sent overseas, but were used to 
replace the regular army units which were withdrawn from the 
Territory. Nevertheless, Hawaii was well represented on the 
battlefields of Europe, and gave her quota both to the great army 
of men who sacrificed their lives for their country’s cause and to 
that other army of men who came out of the war sick and disabled 
for life. 

The people of Hawaii responded generously to all calls for 
money to carry on the war and for various relief funds. The 
five government loans brought in subscriptions of almost thirty 
million dollars, the quotas in each case being oversubscribed. 
Subscription to other funds brought the Territory’s war contri- 
butions up to nearly thirty-five million dollars. 

During the war period there was a serious attempt to make 
the Territory self-supporting so far as food was concerned. The 
United States Food Administration exercised a control over the 


306 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


use of various kinds of food. Hawaii joined the rest of the nation 
in having ‘‘ meatless’? and “ wheatless” days. Agricultural 


organizations and agencies aided with good advice on the growing 
of crops. School children raised gardens of vegetables. By 
these and other means it was possible to reduce the amount of 
food that had to be imported into the Territory. 





Photograph by courtesy of the M atson N avigation Company. 
Steamer Maui of Matson Navigation Company in War Service 


The Maui served as a transport from March 6, 1918, to September 8, 1919, making 
thirteen trans-Atlantic round trips and carrying 37,344 troops. The picture shows 
the steamer in New York harbor on her return from France with a load of American 
soldiers. 


The war affected life in Hawaii in many ways. In April, 1918, 
the liquor traffic was stopped on the island of Oahu by order of 
President Wilson, and in August of that year an act of Congress 
brought prohibition to the whole Territory. These were war 
measures. Permanent prohibition came later by virtue of an 
amendment to the national constitution. 

The tourist traffic was interrupted and almost ceased. Ocean 
travel was seriously interfered with. Nearly all the steamers on 


dd ie 


HAWAII AND THE NATION 307 


the lines between Hawaii and the mainland were taken over by 
the government for use as transports on the Atlantic Ocean. 
Several of these ships were sunk by German submarines. 

After the war an organization came into existence which may 
have much influence on public affairs. This is the American 
Legion, an organization of those who were in military service dur- 
ing the World War. The Legion has shown its influence by 
gaining recognition of Hawaii’s point of view at the national 
conventions of the organization. In the Territory its activities 
have centered around employment and insurance of service men, 
honor to the soldier dead, and Americanization. 

Hawaii’s “ Billof Rights.” Ever since Hawaii became a part of 
the United States, there has existed in the minds of a large number 
of people on the mainland, including members of Congress, a 
misunderstanding in regard to Hawaii’s status in the American 
Union. The islands have been spoken of as if they were a “‘ pos- 
session ”’ or a “‘ colony,’’ instead of being an integral part of the 
nation, only one step removed from statehood. 

In 1t921 Governor W. R. Farrington in his annual report 
called attention to the fact that the national government every 
year receives large sums of money from the Territory, but that 
Hawaii was left out of various general appropriations by Con- 
gress, mainly for education, good roads, and farm loans, in all of 
which the Territory felt it should rightfully have a part. 

In 1923 the legislature passed an act formally asserting the 
Territory’s right to the same treatment from Congress as that 
received by the states. ‘‘ Hawaii carries all the financial respon- 
sibilities and burdens of a state, so far as the federal government 
is concerned. ... It should therefore be accorded all the 
benefits and privileges enjoyed by states.” 

This ‘‘Bill of Rights,” as it is called, gives a full statement of 
the Territory’s claims to recognition, quoting from treaties, acts of 
Congress, and decisions of the Supreme Court. Attention is 
called to the military record of Hawaii in the World War, and to 


308 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


the great amounts of money paid as taxes into the national treas- 
ury. It ends by providing for a commission to work with the 
delegate in Congress to secure legislation that shall include 
Hawaii “in all Acts in aid of good roads, education, farm loans, 
maternity, home economics, training in agriculture, trade and 
industry, and other Acts of a like nature.” 

At the following session of Congress, the delegate from Hawaii, 
Hon. W. P. Jarrett, introduced a bill to include Hawaii in the 
various acts referred to. In order to show the national govern- 
ment that the people of the Territory were thoroughly in earnest 
in the matter, Governor Farrington visited Washington and there 
worked long and faithfully in codperation with Mr. Jarrett in 
support of the bill. The bill was finally passed by Congress and 
signed by President Coolidge on April 10, 1924, thus bringing to a 
close one chapter in the history of Hawaii’s relations with the 
national government. 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


1. We are'most likely to find the strongest defenses of a country : 
. Near large cities. 

. On inland waterways. 

In the greatest gaps of mountain ranges. 

. Along the seacoast. 

Near boundaries. 

On the more important national highways. 

Carats the above list in your notebook and cross out the letters before 
those statements which are not correct. List the remaining state- 
ments in the order of their importance. Be able to explain why you 
have arranged them in those positions. 

2. The greatest single expenditure of national funds in the United 
States ison the army and navy. After Hawaii becamea Territory, one 
of the earliest acts of the national government was the establishment 
of military defenses. The reason for this was: 

a. It is always customary to station soldiers in the various 
states of the Union. 

b. It was done to prevent the Hawaiians from overthrowing the 
government. 


= Sos 


HAWAII AND THE NATION 300 


c. Since the Hawaiian Islands are one of the entrances to the 
United States, their position in the Pacific became of 
greater importance than ever before. | 

d. There might be danger of war between the United States and 
another Pacific power. 

Choose that statement which seems most reasonable to you and give 
your arguments in defense of your choice. 

3. Where is the largest army post in the United States? Why do 
you suppose it was built in that part of the United States? 

4. We have talked of conservation in other chapters. You have 
probably seen pictures of some of the Nationai Parks which Congress 
has reserved as a part of its program of conservation: What national 
park have we in Hawaii? Why? 

5. Make a list in your notebook of the various ways in which the 
people of Hawaii come in direct contact with representatives of the 
federal government. 

6. List some of the ways in which the “Bill of Rights” will be a 
benefit to Hawaii. 


XXVIII 


INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT 


Thirty years ago Hawaii had one principal, or basic, industry — 
the production of sugar. To-day-it has two — the production of 
sugar and the production of canned pineapples. The economic 
history of Hawaii during the last third of a century is the history 
of the development of these two industries and their influence in 
various directions. 

Growth of the sugar industry. In 1895 the production of 
sugar In Hawaii was 150,000 tons. One of the leading planters 
stated that this was undoubtedly the largest amount that would 
ever be produced on the islands. But just twenty years later 
the production was 600,000 tons, and in 1925 it was more than 
775,000. During all of this period the sugar industry has had the 
benefit of the protective-tariff laws of the United States. The 
plantations have also had a fairly adequate supply of laborers. 
These are important points; but the principal reasons for the 
immense growth of the sugar industry are to be found in co- 
operation among the planters and in the use of improved, scientific 
methods. Nowhere in the world has science been more fully 
applied to industry than it has in Hawaii, and nowhere has the 
result been more striking. 

The Hawaiian Sugar Planters’ Association. Through this 
organization the men engaged in the sugar industry have been | 
able to work in coéperation. The association was formed in 
1895 as the successor of the old Planters’ Labor and Supply 
Company. In that year the Experiment Station — the most 
important feature of the association’s activities — was started. 


310 


INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT 311 


In the thirty years since 1895 the Experiment Station has cost 
the planters over $3,000,000, but the benefit received from it has 
been many times that amount. 

In order to secure profitable crops of sugar year after year from 
the same land, it is necessary to use large quantities of com- 
mercial fertilizer and an immense volume of water. Different 
kinds of land require different treatment in both these respects. 
By careful study and experimentation scientists are able to de- 
termine what kind oi fertilizer to use on any particular piece of 
land and how to apply it, how much water to use and how and 
when to use it in order to obtain the best results. The need of a 
scientific study of the fertilizer problem was the main reason for 
the establishment of the Experiment Station. But since its 
foundation the work of the station has been gradually extended 
to other problems, until now its staff of scientific experts is en- 
gaged in studying every phase of the sugar industry from the 
first plowing of the ground to the final step in the refining process. 
In recent years the work has been still further broadened to in- 
clude the problem of protecting, improving, and extending the 
forests which are so necessary in saving the natural water supply 
of the islands. In many of these activities the Experiment 
Station has codperated not only with the plantations but also with 
the territorial and national governments. 

The war on insect pests. Perhaps the most interesting feature 
of the work of the Experiment Station has been the study and 
control of insect pests and diseases which attack sugar cane 
and which, unchecked, would completely destroy the industry. 
Among the thousands of insects and bugs in the world, some are 
useful and some injurious. The entomologists, who study 
insects, have found that nearly all injurious insects have insect 
enemies which, under favorable conditions, will destroy them. 
There are many bugs and insects which do harm to sugar cane, 
some which attack the roots, some which attack the stalks, and 
others which attack the leaves. In Hawaii there are three such 


Biz A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


pests which have been particularly destructive, the leaf-hopper, 
the cane-borer, and the Anomala beetle. 

In the fight against these pests, scientists have been sent to 
many different parts of the world to find their natural enemies. 
The search extended over many years, but in each case was 
finally successful. An enemy of the cane-borer, called the 
Tachinid fly, was found in New Guinea and brought from there in 
t910. The Scolia wasp, an enemy of the Anomala beetle, was 
found in the Philippines a few years later. Several different 
insects were brought to Hawaii to fight the leaf-hopper, which 
proved to be the hardest pest to get under control. Its most 
effective enemy is a bug which sucks the eggs of the leaf-hopper. 
This bug was brought from Australia in 1920. In the reports of 
the Experiment Station from year to year we can follow the prog- 
ress of the battle between these beneficial and injurious insects 
until at last the injurious ones were held in check. But the 
battle is an unending one, and it is necessary always to be on the 
watch for new pests that may appear at any time. 

Development of new cane varieties. In the fight against 
diseases of sugar cane various methods are used. One of the 
most effective is to develop new varieties of cane which are able to 
resist disease. For a long time the variety of cane most exten- 
sively grown was the one called Lahaina cane, which is particu- 
larly rich in sugar. About 1900, for some mysterious reason, 
Lahaina cane began to fail. This was a very serious matter; but 
fortunately, as a result of the work of the Experiment Station, 
new varieties of cane were at hand to take the place of Lahaina. 
The best of the new varieties is one called H-rog, developed 
from seed planted in 1905. During the last ten years H-109 has 
rapidly taken the place of Lahaina on most of the plantations. 
The work of developing new varieties and improving old ones is 
going on constantly. Many of the plantations carry on experi- 
mental work like that of the Experiment Station, both inde- 
pendently and in coédperation with the station. 


INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT 203 


Irrigation. In the earliest years of the Hawaiian sugar industry 
the cane fields were not irrigated. The later growth of the 
industry has been due in great part to the enormous amount of 
water used in irrigating the growing cane. Irrigation has helped 
in two ways: (1) by 
increasing the yield of 
plantations already in 
existence ; (2) by mak- 
ing it possible to lay 
out new plantations 
on land which was of 
no value for sugar 
cane without irriga- 
tion. » pOMmemnotes the 
biggest and most pro- 
ductive plantations 
are of the latter type, 
a notable example be- 
ing the Ewa Planta- 
tion on the island of 
Oahu. 

The water is ob- 
tained from two 
mountain streams, by _ A stool of H-109 sugar cane 
means of ditches and 
tunnels; (2) from underground basins, by means of wells and 
pumps. Since the first big ditches were dug on the island of 
Maui, many others have been constructed. Each of the four 
principal islands has had a share in the development. One of 
the most striking features is the great amount of tunnel work 
required. The Olokele ditch on Kauai is thirteen miles long 
and eight miles of it consists of tunnels. The Waiahole water 
project on the island of Oahu, completed in 1916, involved the 





314 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


cutting of more than eleven miles of tunnels. The purpose of 
this project was to collect water from streams on the north side 
of Oahu and carry it by a tunnel through the Koolau range 
of mountains to the Oahu Sugar Plantation. 

The first artesian wells in Hawaii were drilled about 1880 in 
the vicinity of Honolulu. Since then many other wells have 
been drilled in the same region and in other parts of the islands. 





vas eee. e ss 8 Be —— 


Mechanical cane loader at work on an Hawaiian sugar plantation 


The Ewa Plantation near Honolulu has more than sixty wells, 
which furnish over 100,000,000 gallons of water daily. Some 
plantations obtain part of their water from wells and part from 
mountain streams. 

Improvements in mills and methods. Hand in hand with the 
protection and improvement of sugar cane and the development 
of water supplies there has been going on an equally important 
improvement in mills and machinery and in methods of manu- 
facture. The typical sugar mill of to-day is an enormous and 


INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT 315 


complicated mass of machinery, so powerful and perfect that it 
gets from the sugar cane practically every bit of the sugar which 
it contains. Labor-saving devices are used both in field and 
factory, and operations are watched at every step to see that 
nothing goes wrong. 

The human side. The sugar industry employs a large number 
of workers. In 1924 there were more than 45,000 laborers on the 
sugar plantations — about one sixth of the entire population of 
the Territory — the greater part of them being Filipinos and 
Japanese. Hawaii has had, and still has, labor troubles. But 
the sugar planters, like all other employers, have learned that 
contented workers do the best work, and in recent years they are 
giving more and more attention to improving the living conditions 
of the laborers — building better houses for them to live in, with 
proper attention to sanitation and water supply; maintaining 
well-equipped hospitals; and providing facilities for recreation. 
Nearly all plantations have club houses and moving picture 
theaters for their employees. The Sugar Planters’ Association 
has a special Department of Industrial Service to study all 
such questions and furnish plans and suggestions to the planta- 
tion companies, while many of the plantations have their own 
welfare workers. 

The pineapple industry. While the history of the sugar in- 
dustry in Hawaii runs back for a hundred years, the pineapple 
industry is of recent growth. Thirty-five years ago it was hardly 
thought of. During the last quarter of a century its value has 
risen from practically nothing to thirty or thirty-five million 
dollars a year. In the production of canned pineapples Hawaii 
to-day leads the world, both in quantity and quality. 

Pineapples have been grown in the islands for more than a 
hundred years. During the whaling era a considerable number of 
them were sold each year to the whalers. At that period they 
were raised chiefly in the Kona district of the island of Hawaii. 
During the fifteen years prior to annexation several men became 


316 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


interested in raising pineapples and experimented with different 
varieties which they imported. They discovered that the Smooth 
Cayenne was the best variety for all purposes; that variety is the 
one still grown almost exclusively in Hawaii. The leader in the 
industry during this early period was Captain John Kidwell, but 





ree | “oo ert a 


coe so 


Pineapple field on the island of Oahu 
he had several associates and competitors. Fresh pineapples were 
exported to the Pacific Coast; about 1891 the canning of pine- 
apples was begun and carried on in a small way. In 1899 the 
total export value of fresh and canned pineapples amounted to less 
than $15,000. In the period before 1900 the industry was con- 
fined chiefly to the Ewa district of Oahu. 

Before annexation the pineapple was in an experimental and 
introductory stage. The real history of the industry dates from 


INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT ary? 


rgo1, when the Hawaiian Pineapple Company was organized by 
James D. Dole. This company began with a capital stock of 
$20,000 and a plantation of twelve acres at Wahiawa on the 
central plateau of Oahu. <A small cannery was built and the first 
crop, which amounted to 1,893 cases, was canned in 1903. From 
that beginning the company has grown until it has to-day, in 
Honolulu, the largest fruit cannery in the world. Other com- 
panies have been organized and the extent of the plantations has 
increased with great rapidity. In 1925 more than 8,700,000 
cases of pineapples were canned in the Territory of Hawaii. 
Oahu has always been the center of the pineapple industry, but 
there are companies operating on each of the larger islands. In 
1922 the Hawaiian Pineapple Company bought nearly all of the 
island of Lanai and soon after began the work of developing 
a harbor in the island, making a settlement, and laying out a 
plantation. The extension of pineapple plantations has not 
caused a reduction of the acreage in sugar cane. The two crops 
require different conditions; pineapples are not irrigated and can 
be grown at a higher elevation than sugar cane. The growth of 
the pineapple industry, therefore, has put to use a great amount of 
land that is not suitable for sugar cane. . 
What has been said about codperation and the use of improved, 
scientific methods in the sugar industry is equally true of the 
pineapple industry. The latter has, indeed, profited by the 
experience of the former. There is an Association of Hawaiian 
Pineapple Canners which was organized, under a different name, 
in 1908. In scientific investigation there has been a cordial co- 
operation between the pineapple canners and the sugar planters. 
A contract was made by which the staff of the Sugar Planters’ 
Experiment Station undertook to study the agricultural and 
technical or scientific problems connected with the pineapple 
industry. A piece of land at Wahiawa was laid out as a pineapple 
experiment station, and the principal work of this character is 
still done at that place. Recently an arrangement was made by 


318 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


which the University of Hawaii has charge. of the pineapple 
experiment station. Results of the highest importance have 
already been obtained from this experimental work. Nearly all 





Photograph by Edgeworth. 
Scene in an Hawaiian pineapple cannery 


The Ginaca machine (not shown in this picture) cuts the pineapple into a cylinder 
by removing the outer shell and core of the fruit and trimming off the ends. The 
cylinders of fruit then pass to the operators shown on the right of the picture, who trim 
off any portions of the shell that are left by the Ginaca machine. The fruit is next 
passed through the machine in the center of the picture, where it is cut into slices. 
The slices are then graded and placed in cans according to their quality, as shown on 
the left of the picture. Notice the guards over various parts of the machine for the 
protection of the workers. 


of the special machinery and technical processes used in the pine- 
apple canneries have been invented or perfected in Hawaii. 

The pineapple canners have had to solve one problem that 
did not confront the sugar planters. When the Hawaiian pine- 
apple industry was in its infancy, canned pineapple was an 


INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT 319 


unknown product in the commercial world. There was no 
demand for it. The pineapple canners, therefore, had to create 
a demand and build up a market. This was accomplished by 
means of extensive advertising campaigns, in which the Associa- 
tion of Hawaiian Pineapple Canners has spent hundreds of 
thousands of dollars. 

Dependent industries. The development of the sugar and 
pineapple industries has called into existence and built up a 
number of other industrial and financial organizations. Most 
important of these are the banks, sugar factors, and trust com- 
panies which handle the financial problems involved. The Hono- 
lulu Iron Works has grown to mammoth size under the stimulus 
of the sugar industry. To-day it enjoys a world-wide reputation 
and has installed sugar mills both in the Philippine Islands and in 
Cuba. A fertilizer factory and a can factory have been estab- 
lished to supply the local demand. ‘Transportation facilities, 
provided by steamships, railroads, and automobiles, have grown 
from year to year, keeping pace with the development of the Ter- 
ritory’s basic industries. One very important aid to industry and 
commerce has been the improvement of means of communication 
through the development of telephone, cable, and radio service. 

Coffee, rice, bananas. It may be asked, What has become of 
the rice and coffee industries, which in earlier years gave promise 
of being permanent and important? In reply it must be said 
that neither rice nor coffee has quite fulfilled the promise of 
early days, though both have been of considerable importance. 
Sugar and pineapples have possessed to a remarkable degree the 
ability to stand up under discouragement and to adapt them- 
selves to local conditions. Rice and coffee have not exhibited 
these characteristics to the same extent. A study of their 
history in Hawaii shows that they have fluctuated greatly in 
value. 

At the end of the reign of Kamehameha III coffee was a very 
promising crop and only sugar surpassed it as an agricultural 


320 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


product in Hawaii. About 1862 rice took the place of coffee as 
the product next in importance after sugar and held that place 
for more than twenty-five years. Exports of rice reached their 
highest value in 1887 and 1888, when they amounted to more than 
half a million dollars each year. In the meantime coffee had 
gradually fallen off, until in 1885 it nearly disappeared from the 
list of exports. But after those years coffee rose and rice dropped 
off, until in 1899 coffee took second place again and held it until 
about 1905, when the rapid growth of the pineapple industry 
shouldered both rice and coffee to one side. Rice reached its 
lowest ebb in 1904; then took a sudden and spectacular spurt 
and for a few years struggled with coffee for third place in 
the list of Hawaiian exports. Since rg1o coffee has definitely 
taken its place as Hawaii’s third most valuable agricultural 
product, but in view of past history it is hardly safe to make 
predictions for the future. In 191g a million dollars’ worth of 
coffee was exported from the Territory. Since then it has 
shown a tendency to fall off. In 1924 the value of rice exported 
was less than $12,000; of coffee, a little over $550,000. These 
figures do not take into account the rice and coffee consumed 
within the Territory. 

Three principal reasons have been given for the decline of the 
rice industry: (1) the gradual disappearance of the older Chinese, 
who were the rice growers of Hawaii; (2) the increase in the 
number of Japanese, who do not like the rice grown here and pre- 
fer to import rice from Japan; (3) the development of the rice 
industry in California, which has taken away the best market for 
Hawaiian rice. 

The banana industry has, on the whole, had a more con- 
sistent development than either rice or coffee, although it has 
never reached the high marks set by those industries. Since 
about 1860 the number of bananas exported has shown a fairly 
steady increase. At one period (1889-1896) bananas for eight 
years held third place in the list of exports. The industry has 


INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT 321 


attained its greatest development in recent years, the export 
value in 1923 being nearly a quarter of a million dollars. 

Livestock industry. Hides and wool have from an early day 
afforded a substantial return to the men engaged in the cattle and 
sheep industries — industries which have furnished some of the 
most picturesque features of Hawaiian life. These products have 
at various times held third — even second — place in the list of 
exports. In 1920 the combined export value of hides and wool 
was in excess of half a million dollars. Here, as in the case of 
bananas, the greatest development has been in recent years. 
An encouraging feature is the strong effort being made to improve 
the quality of the livestock. Some Hawaiian cattle ranches and 
dairies have imported pedigreed animals which compare favorably 
with the best to be found anywhere. 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


1. From the following list choose the word or words which correctly 
complete this sentence to be entered in your notebook : 

Up to the time of annexation, the chief source of prosperity in 
Hawaii was due to: a. commerce, 0. shipping, c. agriculture, d. cane 
growing, é. rice raising, f. tourists. Is this true to-day? 

2. On the mainland of the United States, where farming lands are 
plentiful, it is possible for a farmer to do several things which help to 
prevent the soil from becoming exhausted. Make a list of all the things 
which you think he might be able to do to accomplish this purpose. 

3. Since the World War, many school children have continued to 
plant the vegetable gardens which they began at that time. Most of 
these gardens are small, because the students have only a limited 
amount of land. We all know that the size and the quality of the 
crop depend on the amount of nourishment in the soil. There is an 
old saying, ‘“You cannot eat your cake and have it too.” To what 
might that saying apply in the case of your home garden? What are 
you forced to do when all the nourishment in the soil has been used 
by the growing plants? 

Here is a list of things which raise serious problems for a man en- 
gaged in agriculture, Copy them in your notebook and check those 


220 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


things which you think play an important part in the agricultural life 
here: a. worn-out soil; 6. severe wind storms, such as hurricanes ; 
c. limited amount of land available for agriculture; d. unexpected 
cold spells; e. insect pests; f. barren soil; g. limited water supply; 
h. difficulty in obtaining workmen. 

4. Tell what has been done here in Hawaii to remedy the difficulties 
in the list you made for question 3. What has been done by the 
government ; what has been done by private groups of people? What 
have the results been? 

5. What is one natural resource without which no community can 
exist? What is the situation with regard to it here? Why is the 
situation here a more vital one than it is on the mainland? Is there 
any reason to feel alarm for the future, with regard to this condition? 
Why? 


XXIX 
RACIAL ASSOCIATIONS 


Increasing complexity of population. ‘The industrial develop- 
ment of Hawaii — in particular the growth of the sugar industry 
— resulted in bringing to this country large numbers of immi- 
grant laborers for work on the plantations. At various times 
the government tried to control this inflow of aliens. Thus, in 
the decade of the eighties, the government tried to stop the 
coming of more Chinese, and, in the decade of the nineties, to 
restrict the immigration of Japanese. In the period just before 
annexation the determined effort to stop Japanese immigration 
arose from a feeling that if it continued Hawaii would become a 
Japanese colony. Annexation to the United States put an end 
to that danger, and the immigration of Japanese went on until 
1907. It was then stopped (except for “‘ picture brides,” brides 
chosen from their pictures) by the so-called “‘ gentleman’s agree- 
ment ” between the United States and Japan. = 

To counteract the influx of Orientals, the government spent 
large sums of money to bring in people from the South Sea islands 
and from Europe. After annexation these efforts were directed 
chiefly to promoting the immigration of Portuguese, Spaniards, 
and Russians. Between 1905 and 1914 about 15,000 men, 
women, and children of those nationalities were brought here 
under the auspices of the Territorial Board of Immigration. 
But these immigrants showed a great tendency to move on to 
California as soon as they could save up enough money. ‘The 
present Portuguese population of Hawaii is the result chiefly of 
the earlier Portuguese immigration during the reign of Kalakaua. 

323 


324 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


In spite of the effort made to bring in people from the Pacific 
islands and Europe, history shows that the labor needs of Hawaii’s 
industries have been supplied principally by the immigration of 
large numbers of people from the Orient. This Oriental immi- 
gration has come in three great waves — first the Chinese, next 
the Japanese, and finally the Filipinos. The Filipino immigra- 
tion began in 1906 and is still in progress. 

In the early days many people supposed that these immigrant 
laborers from the Orient would not become permanent residents, 
but that they would stay for a few years and then return to their 
native lands. Some of them did return to their homelands, but 
many others were so well pleased with the conditions of life in 
Hawaii and the opportunities found here that they have stayed 
and made this pleasant land their home. In the days of the 
monarchy several hundred Chinese were naturalized, but since 
that time the naturalization of Chinese and Japanese has not 
been permitted. But all the children born in Hawaii are Ameri- 
can citizens. The result is that while the Japanese and Chinese 
make up almost half of the total population of Hawaii, less than 
half of them are aliens. Considerably more than fifty per cent 
of the Chinese and Japanese in the Territory are American 
citizens by reason of the fact that they were born in Hawaii. 
This proportion will increase as time goes by. Not only are they 
citizens, but they are becoming voters and will help to shape the 
political future of Hawaii. In 1924 there were 3,700 registered 
voters of Chinese or Japanese ancestry. This number will also 
increase with the passing years. 

This does not tell the whole story of Hawaii’s complex popu- 
lation. Besides the Japanese and Chinese there are 70,000 
Caucasians of half a dozen nationalities, 42,000 Hawaiians and 
part-Hawaiians, 40,000 Filipinos, and 6,000 Koreans. 

The problem of Americanization. It will thus be seen that 
the industrial development of Hawaii has given the Territory a 
tremendous problem to solve. But it has also given it a rare 


RACIAL ASSOCIATIONS 325 


opportunity to prove that East and West can meet and mingle 
in friendship and in loyalty to a common flag. The problem and 
the opportunity go together. The former is usually spoken of as 
the problem of Americanization and is commonly stated in this 
way: If Hawaii is to continue to be in truth an American 
commonwealth, her complex group of citizens of alien ancestry 
must be Americanized; since so many of their parents are from 
the Oriental countries, it means that scores of thousands of chil- 
dren, whose ancestral cultural background is Oriental, must be 
brought up to have the social and governmental ideals character- 
istic of a typical American community of the mainland portion 
of the United States. 

Can this be done? The people of Hawaii believe that it can 
be done and that it is being done. The greatest and most 
effective agency of Americanization is the public school. It is 
fortunate that the public school system of Hawaii was developed, 
even during the days of the monarchy, in accordance with 
American ideas and largely by men of American origin. A com- 
pulsory school law and the general interest of the people have 
had the effect of bringing practically all the children into the 
schools. Annexation to the United States did not make necessary 
any radical change in the school system. What has been neces- 
sary was to expand and perfect the system already in existence 
so that it would be able to care for the great increase in numbers in 
recent years and to meet the special difficulties resulting from the 
large percentage of school children of Oriental ancestry. Educa- 
tional authorities recognize that Hawaii has one of the best school 
systems in the United States. The success of Americanization 
will be largely an achievement of this excellent school system. 
The University of Hawaii is contributing greatly to the desired 
result by training students of many races for leadership along 
American lines. 

There are, however, other agencies of Americanization, such 
as the public library, the churches, the Young Men’s and Young 


326 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


Women’s Christian Associations, the American Legion, the 
National Guard, the Boy Scouts, and clubs and social organiza- 
tions of many kinds. The whole spirit of the community is 
American. ‘The leaders in all lines of endeavor are for the most 
part men of American education, and all, without any important 





aoe a 


Photograph by &. J. Baker 
A group of school children in Hawaii with a famous motion-picture actress 


exception, are in sympathy with American ideals. The tradi- 
tional friendliness of Hawaii, the spirit of aloha, love, which the 
Hawaiian people have indelibly impressed on the country, has 
been and is of great service in breaking down racial prejudices and 
making it possible for different groups to come into closer contact. 

Obstacles to Americanization. ‘There have been some obsta- 
cles to Americanization. One of these has been the mere fact of 
numbers, the fact that there are so many to be trained in Ameri- 
can ideals and so few who already possess those ideals through 


RACIAL ASSOCIATIONS 327 


inheritance. Two other obstacles have been the foreign-lan- 
guage schools and the problem of dual citizenship. 

Foreign-language schools. The foreign-language schools in 
Hawaii originated in much the same way as foreign-language 
schools in other parts of the United States, and for much the same 
reasons. The earliest schools of this kind (other than English 
schools) were Chinese, German, and Portuguese. The first 
Japanese-language school was organized in 1896 by a Christian 
Japanese who was engaged in religious work among his own 
people. All of the early Japanese schools were begun under 
Christian auspices; but later many schools were established in 
connection with Buddhist temples. In 1g19 there were 185 
foreign-language schools in the Territory, of which 163 were 
Japanese with about 20,000 pupils. 

At first no objection was raised to these schools, since they 
seemed to serve various useful purposes. As time passed, how- 
ever, particularly after the World War, many thoughtful persons 
began to feel that they had some undesirable features. In 
I9gIg—20 a commission of the national Bureau of Education made 
a survey of education in Hawaii and came to the conclusion that 
the foreign-language schools were “ obstacles standing squarely 
in the road’”’ of the work of Americanization, because of the 
character of the textbooks used and the qualifications of some of 
the teachers, and because the study of the foreign languages by 
very young children interfered with their learning the English 
language. 

In view of these facts the territorial government has at- 
tempted to control and regulate the foreign-language schools in 
such a way as to remove or lessen their objectionable features. 
It is hoped that they will cease to be obstacles to Americaniza- 
tion; and there is good reason to expect that the schools them- 
selves will disappear in due course of time. 

Dual citizenship. The problem of dual, or double, citizenship 
arises because each nation makes its own laws on the subject of 


328 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


citizenship without regard to the laws of any other nation. Our 
national constitution provides that all persons born in the 
United States are citizens of the United States. The laws of 
some nations provide that children of their citizens are also 
citizens of the country to which the parents belong, no matter 
where the parents are living at the time the children are born. 
Until very recently that was the law in Japan. ‘The result was 
that all the Japanese born in Hawaii from the time it became a 
part of the United States until December, 1924, were by that 
fact citizens of the United States and also citizens of Japan. 
In 1924 there were more than 60,000 Japanese in Hawaii having 
this double or “‘ dual” citizenship. One feature of the situation 
was that it made the young men subject to be called for military 
duty in Japan after they became eighteen years of age. Many, 
perhaps most, of the Japanese born in Hawaii did not wish to be 
Japanese citizens, but for a long time they had no choice in the 
matter. 

A great deal of trouble and some ill-feeling arose over this 
question of dual citizenship, and people both in Hawaii and in 
Japan urged the Japanese government to change the law. In 
1916 a law was passed in Japan opening a way for Japanese in 
Hawaii to expatriate themselves, that is, to rid themselves of their 
Japanese citizenship. This law did not go far enough, however, 
and the agitation continued. In 1924 a new and very liberal 
expatriation law was passed by the Japanese government. 

This new law provides that after December 1, 1924, children 
born in the United States of Japanese parents will not be Japanese 
citizens unless their parents immediately claim Japanese citizen- 
ship forthem. A simple and easy process was provided by which 
Japanese having dual citizenship may expatriate themselves, 
that is, give up their Japanese citizenship, at any time. The 
Japanese government announced that its policy was to encourage 
the expatriation of Japanese in Hawaii having dual citizenship. 
The Japanese consul general in Hawaii did all in his power to 


RACIAL ASSOCIATIONS 329 


make the provisions of the law clear, and urged Japanese- 
American citizens to take advantage of it. 

International good will in the Pacific. Far-sighted men in 
Hawaii have for a long time been striving to foster a feeling of 
friendliness among the people of different nations living in the 
Pacific area. In 1907 a committee was organized and a secretary 
was sent to visit the Pacific countries and arouse sentiment for 
some form of codperative work. In 1910 Governor Frear issued 
a call for a conference to be held in Honolulu the following year. 
This resulted in the formation of the Hands-Around-the-Pacific 
Club, which developed into the Pan-Pacific Union. The leaders 
in the movement rightly believed that the establishment of 
harmony in the Pacific would furnish to the entire world an 
example of codperation, and so promote the cause of general 
peace. 

As a means of bringing together leaders in science, education, 
and commerce, a series of conferences have been held under the 
auspices of the Union, assisted by the territorial legislature and 
by institutions and individuals. In 1920 a scientific conference 
met in Honolulu; it was followed by an educational conference 
in 1921 and a commercial conference in 1922. In 1924 Hawaii 
was again host to a food conservation conference. Delegates 
from nearly all the countries of the Pacific area have attended 
these conferences. 

Working together in learning about the plants and animals 
and men that live on the thousands of Pacific islands is another 
means of promoting friendship among the people of this part 
of the world. Beginning in 1914, the scientific institutions and 
the governments of the United States, Canada, Japan, Australia, 
and New Zealand have joined forces in exploring the Pacific, 
making new maps, and writing articles and books. To talk over 
what has been done and to plan for other work, the scientists 
hold meetings, called Pacific science congresses, at different 
places. The first meeting was held in San Francisco in 1915, 


330 ) VARHIS TORVMOT AEA WAIT 


the second at Pasadena in 1918, the third in Honolulu in 1920, 
and the fourth in Australia in 1923. In 1926 the scientists will 
again come together in Japan. The Bishop Museum has been 
a leader in organizing these scientific conferences. 

What is likely to become a very important agency in removing 
misunderstanding and establishing good will among the nations 
surrounding the Pacific is the Institute of Pacific Relations or- 
ganized in 1924. At the first meeting, held in Honolulu in July, 
1925, more than one hundred delegates were present. Among 
them were distinguished editors, university professors, scientists, 
business men, and religious leaders from Japan, Korea, China, the 
Philippines, Australia, New Zealand, the United States, Canada, 
England, and Switzerland. The purpose of the Institute is to 
discuss frankly such questions as immigration, race prejudices, 
business relations, and religious differences among the people 
living in and around the Pacific Ocean. 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


1. Here is a new word you are to look up — assimilation. People 
use it very often when they speak of food in connection with digestion. 
They also use it when they speak of many foreigners who are trying 
to adopt the customs, language, and general living conditions of the 
country in which they have chosen to make their home. 

You have all learned that to eat only one kind of food, no matter 
how nutritious it is, will not do you as much good as eating a variety of 
nutritious foods. We also know that while certain parts of a food are 
good for us, other parts are not only useless, but are really harmful. 
For example, peanuts are full of nutriment, but did you ever hear of 
any one becoming strong and healthy on peanut shells? We know 
that it is best for us to eat the most nutritious parts of many kinds of 
food. We also know it is best to eat these foods in moderate amounts. 
There are other points which we must remember with regard to eat- 
ing: (1) We must not eat too rapidly, and (2) we must chew our food 
thoroughly if we want to assimilate it. 

a. In what ways are the immigrants, who come to a country from 
many foreign lands, much like a large variety of foodstuffs ? 


RACIAL ASSOCIATIONS 331 


b. What change must take place in them and in their children 
before they are really Americans ? 

c. Is it bad for our country to bring into it foreigners whose 
ideas and customs are different from our own? Explain 
why. 

d. What lessons did you learn in discussing assimilation of food- 
stuffs that you can apply in the case of many kinds of 
foreigners becoming Americans? 

2. In our homes the kitchen is very important because it is there 
that our food is properly prepared for us. Can you see in what ways 
the schools of America are to the nation what the kitchen is to the 
home? Can you tell us how the school prepares the boys and girls 
for assimilation by the nation? 

3. You must have heard in your homes some discussion of the 
question of students’ attending foreign-language schools. In this 
chapter you have read an explanation which tries to show the reasons 
for the objections to these schools. 

a. What is the real danger from the foreign-language schools? 

b. Explain how they may be the innocent cause of much trouble. 

c. In what ways are the foreign-language schools doing a great 
deal of good in the Territory? 

4. Have you ever seen two children who want the same book 
struggling to gain possession of it? When the question was finally 
decided, you probably noticed that the book was torn or damaged 
and that neither of the children had what he really wanted. 

a. In what way can you compare the children’s struggle for the 
book with the discussion between Japan and the United 
States regarding the citizenship of Japanese born in Ha- 
wall ? 

b. Who is likely to suffer most, Japan, the United States, or the 
Japanese who has been born in the United States? Give 
reasons for your answer. 

c. How has the question of dual citizenship been settled ? 

d. What is the danger of forcing citizenship on people? 

e. Who should decide to which country the loyalty of a person 
should be given? Why? 

5. What helps to develop kindly, helpful, friendly feelings among 
the different families in a neighborhood? Make a list in your note- 
book of all the things the people of the neighborhood can do to develop 
friendly relations toward one another. 


332 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


The Pacific is like a great public park, across which all the neighbors 
who live around the park pass, from time to time, when they go to 
visit one another. 

a. What has been done in the past to bring the neighbors of the 
Pacific into closer friendship with one another? 
b. Why is the good will of neighboring countries a very necessary 
thing? 
c. What is being done here in Hawaii to continue this good work ? 
. Why should Hawaii take the lead in working for friendship 
and codperation among the peoples of the Pacific ? 
e. As a citizen of the United States, what can you do to help 
this good work ? 


Qu 


For FURTHER READING 


PatmER, A. W. — The Human Side of Hawatt. 

ALLEN, RiteEy H. — ‘‘Education and Race Problems in Hawaii,”’ in 
Review of Reviews, December, 1921. 

U. S. CommissIonER OF Epucation. — A Survey of Education in 
Hawatt. 

ApaMs, Romanzo. — The Peoples of Hawaii. 


XXX 


OLD PROBLEMS IN A NEW AGE 


Winning the fight against leprosy. Leprosy is the most 
dreadful of all diseases and one of the most difficult to combat. 
It has been a serious problem in Hawaii, although the disease 
has not been nearly so widespread as some people have supposed. 
It has been much worse in some other countries; but its mere 
presence in this beautiful island group is serious and deserves all 
the study, labor, and expense which have been put forth to con- 
quer it. The story of the fight against leprosy is as important — 
though it may not sound as thrilling — as any story of warfare 
in which swords and guns and drumbeats stir the blood. It is 
a fight in which scientists and medical men in all parts of the 
world have codperated; but it is in Hawaii that the greatest 
success has been gained. 

The settlement on Molokai for those afflicted with leprosy 
had been in existence for a third of a century when Hawaii be- 
came a part of the United States. There on a small triangle of 
land containing a few square miles about a thousand people were 
living. The problem was brought to the attention of Congress, 
and in 1905 a law was passed which made possible the establish- 
ment of a Leprosy Investigation Station in Hawaii for the pur- 
pose of studying the disease and finding a cure for it. Since 
that time the national government and the territorial govern- 
ment have worked together in the effort to stamp out leprosy 
in these islands. In the course of some twenty years many 
lepers have been cured and the population of the Molokai 
settlement has decreased to less than half what it was in 1goo. 

333 


334 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


The outstanding achievement has been the perfecting of 
chaulmoogra oil as a remedy for leprosy. This oil, product of 
a tree found in Asia, has been used for many years in various 
parts of the world in the treatment of those suffering with the 
disease. It was used in Hawaii at least as early as 1890, but 
was afterwards abandoned. In 1905 Dr. W. J. Goodhue, 
resident physician at the Molokai settlement, began its use 
again, and since then it has been used continuously. The 
trouble with plain chaulmoogra oil is that it has a very disagree- 
able taste and is also liable to upset the stomach. It was there- 
fore mixed with other things and in that way made easier to 
take through the mouth. It was found that the mixture was 
more effective when it was injected into the fleshy parts of the 
body; that method of treatment was used in many cases. By 
these methods a considerable number of patients were cured of 
leprosy between 1905 and ro1t5. 

The results of using chaulmoogra oil caused some scientists 
and medical men to think that the oil contained an active ele- 
ment which killed the germs of leprosy, and they tried by chemi- 
cal processes to extract this active element and put it into a form 
that would be more effective and less disagreeable to take. In 
1916 Dr. H. T. Hollmann, who was in charge of the Kalihi 
Hospital, the leprosy receiving station at Honolulu, began the 
use of a chemical product of chaulmoogra oil prepared in the 
laboratory of the College of Hawaii under the direction of Dr. 
A. L. Dean, president of the college and professor of chemistry. 
The curative powers of this product were superior to anything 
previously used in the treatment of leprosy. Since that time 
the chemical work has been carried on continuously in the college 
and university laboratories, and even better remedies have been 
prepared from the crude chaulmoogra oil. 

The results of the use of these remedies have been truly re- 
markable. The doctors are not yet willing to say that all cases 
of leprosy can be cured; but if the treatment is begun early 


OLD PROBLEMS IN A NEW AGE 335 


enough and continued with courage and perseverance, there is 
good reason to expect a cure. New hope has come to those 
afflicted with the disease, and it is believed that in course of time 
leprosy in Hawaii will be entirely stamped out. The latest de- 
velopment in the treatment of the disease is the use of radium, 
which has given encouraging results in some cases. 

Physical and social welfare work. The work that has just 
been described is an activity of the government. A number 
of other projects, among them several for the special benefit 
of the native population, are the result of private benefaction. 

Among the oldest of these is the Lunalilo Home for poor, aged, 
and infirm Hawatians. Here the old and feeble who have no 
other home may live as the “ guests”? of the good king who 
provided in his will for the establishment of the home. It is 
a colony of old people, who are at liberty to come and go and 
receive visitors as they please. Their wants are simple. On 
each January 31 the birth of King Lunalilo is celebrated with 
a luau. While Queen Liliuokalani was alive, it was her custom 
to visit the home on that occasion. 

Another institution founded under royal auspices is the 
Kapiolani Maternity Home, named in honor of the queen, 
Kapiolani, wife of King Kalakaua, who had most to do with its 
establishment. It dates from 1890, but grew out of an earlier 
organization whose object was the perpetuation of the Hawaiian 
race. 

Queen Liliuokalani, too, thought of the welfare of her race. 
By the terms of her will the greater part of her property was 
placed in the Liliuokalani Trust, providing a fund to be used in 
building orphanages that are to bear her name. 

The Queen’s Hospital, after more than half a century of good 
work, has just entered upon a new and broader field of service. 
A splendid new building was erected (1922-24) at a cost of more 
than half a million dollars, new departments were added, and 
the staff of doctors and nurses was enlarged. Another fine 


336 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


institution is the Japanese Hospital in Honolulu. The Kaui- 
keolani Children’s Hospital was opened in 1909. In connection 
with this hospital the national organization of the Mystic Shrine 
has for several years been carrying on an important work for 
crippled children. The Leahi Home was organized in 1900 for 
the care of those suffering with tuberculosis. These large 
hospitals are all located in Honolulu, but there are many smaller 
ones throughout the Territory which do effective work in the 
alleviation of suffering. 

The most important organization for welfare work in Hawaii is 
the Palama Settlement. This institution began in 1896 as the 
Palama Chapel and was carried on for fourteen years under the 
control of Central Union Church and the Hawaiian Board. In 
1906 the name was changed to Palama Settlement, and four 
years later the institution received a charter as an independent 
corporation for charitable purposes. Beginning on a small 
scale, the work expanded from year to year with the growing and 
changing population of Honolulu. To-day it includes medical 
and dental work (dispensaries, clinics, visits by nurses), educa- 
tional and recreational work, athletics, infant nutrition, fresh- 
air camps, and other activities to meet the needs of the people 
living in the congested parts of the city. 

Homesteads and the rehabilitation project. A homestead, as 
the word is ordinarily used, is a portion of public land which a 
person may acquire as his personal property by living upon it 
for a certain length of time and paying certain small fees. On 
the mainland of the United States the taking up of homesteads 
has been a very important method of disposing of public lands 
and of promoting agricultural development through the creation 
of a substantial farming class. In Hawaii the homestead system 
has not been so successful. 

A few homesteads were taken up every year after Hawaii 
became a Territory, but the existing system of homesteading was 
not very satisfactory. Under the Organic Act, any desired 


yUMIATIIEG BURY, eyT, 








338 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


area of available public land had to be surveyed and divided 
into homesteads whenever twenty-five citizens requested such 
action. Those who actually received the homesteads were not 
necessarily the ones who signed the original request. The 
homesteads were given out by lot and the government could not 
reject the applications of those who seemed to be unfit or un- 
reliable. An additional difficulty was the fact that a large area 
of public land had been let out on long leases and was therefore 
not available for homesteads. In 1916 three fifths of the 
agricultural land belonging to the Territory was held in this 
way on leases; but many of the leases were almost ready to 
expire. 

At the same time many thoughtful persons were seriously 
trying to find some way to preserve and increase the Hawaiian 
race. This problem was discussed in connection with the prob- 
lem of homesteading, and out of the discussion has come what 
is sometimes called the rehabilitation project. 

In ror1g the legislature adopted a resolution asking Congress 
to amend the part of the Organic Act relating to land. Under 
the proposed change the government would have some control 
over the selection of homesteaders. After a thorough considera- 
tion of the whole situation the Organic Act was amended, July 9, 
1921, by the passage of the Hawaiian Homes Commission Act. 

This act was framed primarily with the needs of the native 
race in mind. It provides that certain public lands are to be set 
aside and divided into homesteads for selected families of Ha- 
waiian ancestry. The lands are to be held on ninety-nine year 
leases, at an annual nominal rental of one dollar. These Ha- 
walian homesteads are to be limited at first to lands on Hawaii 
and Molokai. 

The project is administered by a commission consisting of 
the governor of the Territory and four other members, three of 
whom must be native Hawaiians. It was the policy of the 
commission to make thorough preparation before the settlers 


OLD PROBLEMS IN A NEW AGE 339 


were placed on the land. Accordingly, roads were built, fences 
put up, land cleared, and irrigation provided for. Then the 
first homesteaders were selected. The first settlement was on 
the island of Molokai and was named the Kalanianaole Settle- 
ment, in honor of 
Prince Jonah Kuhio 
Kalanianaole. Prince 
Kuhio was one of the 
first members of the 
commission and was 
intensely interested in 
the project. The first 
families occupied their 
homesteads in 1922, 
and by the end of 
1924 the population 
of the settlement was 
nearly three hundred. 

A demonstration 
farm has been estab- 
lished to experiment 
with fruits, vegeta- 
bles, and livestock. 
An agricultural expert 
gives advice on the 
preparation and culti- 
vation of the soil. 
Specialists from the University of Hawaii coéperate with the 
commissioners in selecting the right crops to bring the farmers 
the best returns. Money is loaned to the homesteaders to 
enable them to get started, the funds for this purpose being 
obtained from the leases of sugar lands belonging to the Territory. 

The problem of education. The present school system of 
Hawaii is the result of a century of progress. During the last 





Prince Jonah Kuhio Kalanianaole 


340 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


quarter century the problem of education has been complicated 
and made more difficult by the rapid increase in the number of 
children of Oriental ancestry. While no radical change has 
been made in the school system, it has grown and developed in 
order to be able to do the work demanded of it. The schools 
are divided into two groups, public and private. Aside from 
foreign-language schools there are between forty and fifty private 
schools. The public schools are under the direction of the ter- 
ritorial department of public instruction. There is no county or 
local school system. 

| Among the private schools two of the most interesting and 
important are the Kamehameha Schools founded in accordance 
with the will of Princess Bernice Pauahi (Mrs. Charles R. Bishop). 
It was the wish of Mrs. Bishop to provide “ first and chiefly a 
good education in the common English branches, and also 
instruction in morals and in such useful knowledge as may tend 
to make good and industrious men and women.” The school 
for boys was opened in 1887, that for girls in 1894. They have 
been carried on in the spirit of Mrs. Bishop’s will and give special 
attention to studies of a practical character. They have been 
a very important factor in the education of Hawaiian boys and 
girls. 

Punahou School has witnessed a rapid growth and expansion 
during the years since annexation. To-day it is one of the 
largest schools in Hawaii. A school of similar character is St. 
Louis College, the most important of the Catholic schools. This 
institution was founded during the early eighties and has grown 
rapidly in recent years. In 1925 plans were in progress for a 
splendid new plant to be built in Kaimuki. Other important 
private schools are the Mid-Pacific Institute and the Episcopal 
schools, St. Andrews Priory for girls and Iolani School for boys. 
All these schools are located in Honolulu. Another important 
institution is the Hilo Boarding School, whose history runs 
back to early missionary days. 


OLD PROBLEMS IN A NEW AGE 341 


The public schools of the Territory take care of more than fifty 
thousand pupils, for whom nearly sixteen hundred teachers are 
provided. The commingling of races that is characteristic of the 
schools is seen among the teachers as well as among the pupils. 

The training of teachers is provided for by the Territorial 
Normal School. A heavy handicap to education until recently 





Ewa school, island of Oahu 


was the insufficient training of teachers, many of whom had 
never gone beyond the eighth grade. This defect has been 
remedied and further opportunity for professional training is 
offered in special courses and classes at both the Normal School 
and the University of Hawaii. The growth in size and efficiency 
of the Normal School is illustrated by the fact that each year it 
is necessary to bring fewer teachers from the mainland. Within 
a short time the Territory will be self-supporting in this respect. 

The University of Hawaii is one of the youngest of Hawaii’s 
educational institutions, but it is one of the most important and 


342 A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


rounds out what would otherwise be an incomplete system. It 
began as the College of Hawaii, established by act of the legis- 
lature in 1907. The new institution was a “ land grant college,”’ 
recelving a certain amount of aid from the federal government, 





Photograph by Oliver P. Emerson. 


University of Hawaii 


The University farm is in the foreground; the athletic field is to the left of the main 
group of University buildings. 


to be expended for instruction in agriculture, mechanical and 
practical sciences, and the English language. During the early 
years the college was small, but hopes were large and plans 
broadly laid. 

In 1919 an act was passed by the legislature ‘ to establish a 
University of Hawaii,’ in which the earlier College of Hawaii 


OLD PROBLEMS IN: A NEW AGE 343 


became the college of applied science. In this new and enlarged 
form the development of the institution has been rapid, both in 
equipment and in number of students. The members of the 
student body are drawn from practically all the races represented 
in the population of the Territory. 

The chief aim of education in Hawaii must be to mold its 
sharply differentiated racial groups into an American citizenship. 
This cannot be done solely by academic courses but must include 
vocational work. Occupations directly or indirectly connected 
with agriculture offer the best future for the great mass of 
young people in the public schools. Particularly in the grades 
training in handwork, cooking and sewing, the care of a house, 
the making of gardens, and the care of animals through pig and 
poultry clubs must continue and increase. 

Although Hawaii has many difficulties that the continental 
United States does not have to meet, it also possesses compen- 
sating advantages. The climate, which makes it possible all 
the year round to be in the open air, furnishes an unequaled 
opportunity for out-of-doors activities. Good health and good 
spirits are the result of being able to play and work in the sun- 
shine. 


QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES 


1. In your earlier chapters you have read something of the spread of 
leprosy in Hawaii. Review this subject briefly. 

a. What encouraging change has taken place in the situation 
with regard to leprosy here in Hawaii? 

b. To what are these changes due? 

c. To whom does the credit for this work belong? 

2. The kindly, unselfish nature of the Hawaiian has been shown to 
us in the splendid public works of the former rulers of Hawaii. List 
these public works in your notebook, with the names of their founders. 

3. American history teaches us that the colonists had the courage to 
defy England because of their newly developed sense of independence. 
History also teaches that that independence was due to the fact that. 
nearly all of the colonists were farmers, who produced most of the 


344 


A HISTORY OF HAWAII 


necessities of life and depended on the outside world for very little. 
When there were few people and much land it was easy to be a farmer ; 
but now it is much harder to get land for farming purposes as there is 
very little fertile land still available. 


a. 


oO Ses an 


What has our government done to encourage people to take 
up land and become farmers? 
(1) On the mainland ? 
(2) Here in Hawaii? 


. How is this arrangement of landholding better, from the 


farmers’ point of view, than buying land from some private 
citizen? Discuss the benefits of the homesteading system. 


. What is the Hawaiian Homes Commission Act ? 
. Whom is it especially meant to help? Why? 


How successful has it been thus far? 


. What should the aim of education be to-day? 
. What should the aim of education be here in Hawaii? 


In what ways does the situation in Hawaii differ greatly from 
that on the mainland? 


APPENDIX 


RULERS OF HAWAII 


I. Native Monarchs 





NAME BIRTH 
Kamehameha I C 
Kamehameha IT 

(Liholiho) 
Kamehameha III . .| Aug. 11, 
(Kauikeaouli) 
Kamehameha IV . .| Feb. 9, 
(Alexander Liholiho) 
Kamehameha V.._ .| Dec. 11, 
(Lot Kamehameha) 
William C. Lunalilo .| Jan. 31, 
David Kalakaua . .| Nov. 16, 
Liliuokalani . 


Pirsig Hla 


- 1737 


1797 
1813 
1834 
1830 
1832 


1836 
1838 


ACCESSION 


May 
June 


Dec. 


Nov. 


Jan. 
Feb. 
Jan. 








20, 

6, 
T5, 
30; 
8, 


12; 
29, 


1795 
1819 


1825 


1854 


1863 


1873 
1874 
1891 





DEATH 


May 8, 


July 


Feb. 
Jan. 


Nov. 





14, 


oS, 


- 30; 


1819 
1824 


1854 
1863 
1872 
1874 


1891 
IQ17 


Liliuokalani was deposed and the Hawaiian Kingdom came to an end 


on January 17, 1893. 


2. President of Provisional Government 


Sanford B. Dole 


TeRM BEGAN 


Jans. 17, 41002 


TERM ENDED 


July 4, 1894 


3. President of Republic of Hawaii 


Sanford B. Dole 


Term BEGAN 


July 4, 1894 


345 


TerM ENDED 


June 14, 1900 


346 APPENDIX 


4. Governors of Territory of Hawan 









































NAME tabs TreRM BEGAN TERM ENDED 
Santord'B. Dole .. ....2)| McKinley | june 14; 1900 |*Nov=.23,.7904 
George R. Carter . . .| Roosevelt | Nov. 23, 1903 | Aug. 15, 1907 
Walter F. Frear), .° 29) Roosevelt) |"Aug. 15, 19007 | Nov. 20,1012 
Lucius E. Pinkham . .| Wilson Nov?20, 1913)|" June 22 sto1o 
Charles J.McCarthy .| Wilson June 22, 1918 | July 5, 1921 
Wallace R. Farrington .| Harding J Ulyse- 510210 | Ulyeeaseroos 
Wallace R. Farrington 

Necona ernie «wie COOHUIE. mes] tl yong Luss 
POPULATION OF HAWAII 
YEAR End teat Aa FOREIGNERS TOTAL 
1832 130,313 
1836 108,579 
1853 71,019 2,119 73138 
1860 67,084 2,710 69,800 
1866 58,765 4,194 62,959 
BorRN IN HAWAII OF 
Non-HAWAIAN FOREIGN-BORN 
ANCESTORS 
1872 51,531 849 4,517 56,807 
1878 47,508 047 95530 575985 
1884 44,232 2,040 34,300 80,578 
1890 40,622 7,495 41,873 89,990 
1896 309,504 12,844 56,672 109,020 
Born IN HAWAII OR 
ELSEWHERE IN UNITED 
STATES, OF NON- 
HAWAIIAN ANCESTORS 
1900 375656 25,595 90,780 154,001 
IQI0 38,547 59,010" 93,752 191,909 
1920 41,750 120,021,00me 87,241 255,912 

















*Includes 4,890 Porto Ricans and 2,361 Filipinos. 
**Includes 5,602 Porto Ricans and 21,031 Filipinos. 


APPENDIX 347 


GROWTH OF HAWAIIAN COMMERCE 








DomMESTIC PRODUCE 


YEAR TOTAL IMPORTS TOTAL Exports Reon 

1844 $ 350,347 $ 169,641 $ 109,587 
1850 1,035,058 783,052 530,522 
1860 1,223,749 807,459 480,526 
1870 1,930,227 2,144,942 1,514,425 
1880 3,673,268 4,908,445 4,889,194 
1890 6,962,201 13,142,829 13,023,304 
1899 16,069,577 22,628,742 22,324,805 
1905 ° 14,718,483 30,174,520 30,120,797 
1915 26,416,031 62,404,759 62,195,586 
1925 81,802,547 105,599,819 105,504,202 











OUTLINE OF THE GOVERNMENT OF HAWAII 
I. The Organic Act 


“The Organic Act made by Congress is the Constitution of the 
Territory of Hawaii. The people of a state make their own constitu- 
tion, but the Congress of the United States makes the laws which 
determine the form of government of all territories. The people of a 
state can amend their constitution, but the people of Hawaii cannot 
amend the Organic Act which serves as a constitution. They can 
petition Congress to amend the Act and can suggest amendments. 
Congress can change the form of government of Hawaii at any time. . . 
Congress has full control over all matters of government in Hawaii, 
Territorial and local.’”’ — K. C. Leebrick, Fundamental American Ideals 
and Institutions, pp. 55-56. 


II. The Executive 


A. Officers Appointed by the President of the United States with advice 
and consent of United States Senate. 

1. The Governor: 
(a) Term of office: Four years. 
(b) Qualifications: ‘He shall be not less than thirty-five years 
of age; shall be a citizen of the Territory of Hawaii; shall have 
resided therein for at least three years next preceding his appoint- 
ment.” 


348 


APPENDIX 


(c) Powers and duties: Similar to those of governors of states. 
He is also the personal representative of the President of the 
United States and executive officer for the federal government. 
Makes a report each year to the Secretary of the Interior. 

The Secretary of the Territory: 

(a) Term of office: Four years. 

(b) Shall be a citizen of the Territory. 

(c) Duties: “He shall record and preserve all the laws and pro- 
ceedings of the legislature and all acts and proceedings of the 
governor, and promulgate proclamations of the governor.” 

(d) Becomes acting governor in case of the death, removal, 
resignation, or disability of the governor, or his absence from the 
Territory. 


. Officers Appointed by the Governor. 


Attorney General: 

Is legal representative of the Territory in all cases in which the 
Territory is a party or is interested; is legal adviser of all heads 
of departments and other Territorial officials. Formerly had 
charge of all criminal prosecutions throughout the Territory ; 
the organization of county governments has relieved him of this 
duty, but he can still intervene whenever he sees fit to do so; 
is a member of the board of health. 

The Treasurer : 

Has general supervision over financial affairs of the Territory ; 
is charged with the enforcement of all its revenue laws, the 
collection of taxes, the safe keeping and disbursement of the 
public moneys; is ex-officio bank examiner for the Territory; 
audits financial books and accounts of the several counties; 
makes a biennial report to the legislature. 


. Auditor: 


Is the general accountant of the Territory and has complete 
supervision of all Territorial accounts; has the power, by with- 
holding his approval when necessary, to prevent the misappro- 
priation of public funds, as well as the disbursement of public 
moneys in excess of specific appropriations ; audits claims against 
the Territory and issues warrants for payment of the same; 
makes an annual report to the governor and a biennial report 
to the legislature. 

Commissioner of Public Lands: 

Has the management of all lands in the possession, use, and 


APPENDIX 349 


control of the Territory, except as otherwise provided by law; 
by and with the authority of the governor has power to lease, 
sell, or otherwise dispose of the public lands and other property, 
in such manner as he may deem best for the protection of agri- 
culture and the general welfare of the Territory, but this power is 
subject to such restrictions as are, from time to time, expressly 
provided by law; prepares and issues patents, leases, grants, and 
other conveyances of government land or real estate, and keeps a 
record of the same. 


. Superintendent of Public Works: 


Superintends and manages the internal improvements of the 
Territory; is ex-officio chairman of the board of harbor com- 
missioners; has charge of public buildings and their construction 
and repair; as chairman of board of harbor commissioners, has 
supervision of harbors, wharves, dredging, pilot service, etc. 
Superintendent of Public Instruction: 

Is chief administrative officer of the department of public in- 
struction; presides at meetings of the commissioners of public 
instruction and signs all official documents of the department ; 
makes an annual report to the governor. 

Surveyor : 

Makes official surveys, prepares maps, etc.; is adviser to the 
Land Court. 

High Sheriff : 

Duties now confined chiefly to having charge of the Territorial 
(Oahu) prison; was formerly much more powerful, but since 
organization of county governments the ordinary duties of a 
sheriff have been taken over by the county sheriffs ; is responsible 
to the attorney general. 


The above officers and all members of boards and commissions are’ 
appointed by the governor with the advice and consent of the territorial 
senate. They must be citizens of the Territory of Hawaii and must 
have resided therein for at least three years next preceding their 
appointment. The officers named above are appointed for a term of 
four years. 

C. Boards and Commissions A ppointed by the Governor. 


rr. 


Board of Health: 

Consists of seven members, including the attorney general and 
two physicians; the president is executive officer and receives 
a salary; has general charge, oversight, and care of health 


399 


APPENDIX 


(sanitation, quarantine, hospitals, vital statistics, etc.). Regula- 
tions of the board of health, when approved by the governor, 
have the force of law. — 

Board of Agriculture and Forestry: 

Consists of five members; has duty of caring for and extending 
forest areas and promoting agriculture by- study, experiment, 
and collection and publication of information relating to forestry, 
entomology, plant pathology, and general agriculture; may 
establish quarantine and other regulations to prevent introduc- 
tion of plant diseases and injurious plants and insects; when 
approved by the governor, these regulations have the force of law. 
Board of Harbor Commissioners : 

Composed of the superintendent of public works and four other 
members; has all the powers and performs “all the duties which 
may lawfully be exercised by or under the Territory of Hawaii 
relative to the control and management of the harbors, harbor 
improvements, ports, docks, wharves, and shipping throughout 
the; Terntoryey 

Public Utilities Commission : 

Consists of three members; has extensive powers and control 
over public utilities (transportation, telegraph, telephone, light, 
power, heat, water, gas companies, etc.) ; has authority to raise or 
lower rates, subject to appeal to Supreme Court of the Territory. 
Commissioners of Public Instruction : 

Six in number; together with the superintendent of public 
instruction, they constitute the department of public instruction, 
which has entire charge and control of all public schools in the 
Territory, except the University of Hawaii. 

Board of Regents of the University of Hawaii: 

Consists of seven members, including the president of the Uni- 
versity and the president of the board of agriculture and forestry ; 
has general management and control of the affairs of the Uni- 
versity. 


. Numerous other boards and commissions of lesser importance or 


of temporary character, as authorized by the legislature. 


III. The Legislature 


. The Senate: 


(a) Fifteen members apportioned as follows : 
First district (Hawaii), four senators ; 


APPENDIX 367 


Second district (Maui, Molokai, Lanai, and Kahoolawe), three 
senators ; 
Third district (Oahu), six senators ; 
Fourth district (Kauai and Niihau), two senators. 
(b) Term of office is four years. 
(c) Qualifications: Must be citizens of the United States, 
at least thirty years of age, and must have resided in the Hawaiian 
Islands not less than three years and be qualified to vote for 
senators in the district from which they are elected. 
2. The House of Representatives : 
(a) Thirty members apportioned as follows: 
First district (East Hawaii), four representatives ; 
Second district (West Hawaii), four representatives ; 
Third district (Maui, Molokai, Lanai, and Kahoolawe), six 
representatives ; 
Fourth district (Oahu east and south of Nuuanu street and 
extension thereof to Mokapu Point), six representatives ; 
Fifth district (Oahu west and north of fourth district), six repre- 
sentatives ; 
Sixth district (Kauai and Niihau), four representatives.* 
(b) Term of office is two years. 
(c) Qualifications: Must be citizens of the United States, at 
least twenty-five years of age, and must have resided in the Ha- 
waiian Islands not less than three years and be qualified to vote 
for representatives in the district from which they are elected. 
3. Sessions of the Legislature: 
(a) Regular sessions every two years in odd numbered years, 
beginning on third Wednesday in February. 
(b) Special sessions of the legislature or of the senate alone at 
call of the governor. 
(c) Procedure is similar to that of other legislative bodies. 
4. Legislative power : 
“Extends to all rightful subjects of legislation not inconsistent 
with the Constitution and laws of the United States locally 
applicable ;”” but Congress has power to disallow any act 
of the Territorial legislature. 


*By the Organic Act it is made the duty of the legislature to reapportion the 
membership in the senate and house of representatives after each census on the 
basis of the number of citizens in each district; but this has not been done up to 
this time (1926). 


352 


APPENDIX 


IV. The Judiciary 


A. Territorial Courts. 


Le 


Supreme Court: 

Composed of a chief justice and two associate justices, appointed 

by the President with advice and consent of the United States 

Senate, for terms of four years. Must be citizens of Territory 

of Hawaii and must have resided therein for at least three years 

next preceding their appointment. 

Circuit Courts: 

(a) First circuit (Oahu), four judges ; 

Second circuit (Maui, Molokai, Lanai, and Kahoolawe), one 
judge ; 

Third circuit (West Hawaii), one judge; 

Fourth circuit (East Hawaii), one judge; 

Fifth circuit (Kauai and Niihau), one judge. 

(b) Appointment, term of office, and qualifications are the same 

as those of justices of the Supreme Court. 

(c) The judges of the second, third, fourth, and fifth circuits 

and the fourth judge of the first circuit are judges of the 

Juvenile Courts. Juvenile cases are heard by them in cham- 

bers. 

(d) The fourth judge of the first circuit is judge of the division 

of domestic relations of that circuit. 

District Courts: 

The Territory is divided into twenty-seven judicial districts ; 

for each of these districts one or more district magistrates are 

appointed. District magistrates are appointed by the chief 

justice of the Supreme Court for a term of two years. They 

correspond to justices of the peace in the mainland portion of the 

United States. 


. Land Court: 


(a) This court has ‘exclusive original jurisdiction of all applica- 
tions for the registration of title to land and easements or rights 
in land held and possessed in fee simple within the Territory, 
with power to hear and determine all questions arising upon such 
applications.” The decrees of this court ‘operate directly on 
the land and vest and establish title thereto.” 

(b) The judge of the Land Court is one of the judges of the Circuit 
Court of the first circuit designated by the chief justice of the 
Supreme Court. 


APPENDIX 353 


5. Tax Appeal Courts: 
(a) There is a Tax Appeal Court in each county or city and 
county, composed of three suitable persons appointed by the 
governor for a term of one year. 
(b) These courts hear and determine appeals made from the 
property or taxable-income valuations fixed by the tax assessors. 
They commence to hold sittings during July of each year. If 
the Tax Appeal Court raises or lowers the assessments made by 
the assessor, an appeal may be taken to the Supreme Court by 
either the taxpayer or the assessor. 

B. Federal Court. 
United States District Court: 
(a) Two judges, appointed for term of six years by the Presi- 
dent, with advice and consent of United States Senate. Must 
be citizens of Territory of Hawaii and must have resided therein 
for at least three years next preceding their appointment. 
(b) This court differs from United States District Courts in the 
mainland portion of the United States in that, in addition to the 
ordinary jurisdiction of a United States District Court, it also 
has jurisdiction of all cases cognizable in a United States Circuit 
Court, and proceeds in such cases in the same manner as a United 
States Circuit Court. 


V. Citizenship and Voting 
1. Citizenship: 
All questions of citizenship and naturalization are determined 
by the constitution and laws of the United States. Section 4 of 
the Organic Act provides “‘ that all persons who were citizens of 
the Republic of Hawaii on August twelfth, eighteen hundred 
and ninety-eight, are hereby declared to be citizens of the United 
States and citizens of the Territory of Hawaii.” As to who were 
citizens of the Republic of Hawaii on that date, article 17, 
section 1, of the constitution of the Republic provided that all 
persons born or naturalized in the Hawaiian Islands and subject 
to the jurisdiction of the Republic of Hawaii were citizens thereof. 
2. Voting: 
In order to be qualified to vote, a person shall 
“First: Bea citizen of the United States. 
“Second: Have resided in the Territory not less than one year 
preceding and in the representative district in which he offers to 


354 


APPENDIX 


register not less than three months immediately preceding the 
time at which he offers to register. 

“Third: Have attained the age of twenty-one years. 

“Fourth: Prior to each regular election, during the time pre- 
scribed by law for registration, have caused his name to be entered 
on the register of voters for representatives for his district. 

“Fifth: Be able to speak, read, and write the English or 
Hawaiian language.”’ 


VI. United States Officers 


Delegate to Congress : 

Elected by the voters of the Territory ; term of office, two years ; 
shall have same qualifications as a member of the senate of the 
legislature of Hawaii. The Delegate to Congress has a seat in 
the House of Representatives, with the right of debate but not 
of voting. 

Judges of the United States District Court: 

See above, under Federal Court. 


. United States District Attorney : 


Appointed by the President; term of office, six years; must be 
a citizen of the Territory of Hawaii and must have resided therein 
for at least three years next preceding his appointment. 

United States Marshal : 

Appointed by the President ; term of office, six years; must bea 
citizen of the Territory of Hawaii and must have resided therein 
for at least three years next preceding his appointment. 


. Other Federal Officials in the Territory : 


Prohibition Administrator, Collector of Internal Revenue, Col- 
lector of Customs, Immigration Inspector, Postal Inspector, 
Postmasters, and various officials of the Departments of Agri- 
culture, Gonimerce, and Interior. 


VII. Local Government 


. Section 56 of the Organic Act provides “that the legislature may 


create counties and town and city municipalities within the 
Territory of Hawaii and provide for the government thereof, 
and all officials thereof shall be appointed or elected, as the case 
may be, in such manner as shall be provided by the Governor 
and legislature of the Territory.’ Acting under this authority, 
the legislature created local governments for the various parts 


APPENDIX 355 


of the Territory. These local governments may be changed or 
abolished by the legislature. 
2°) Counties: 

(a) County of Hawaii, comprising the island of Hawaii ; county 
seat at Hilo. 

(b) County of Maui, comprising the islands of Maui, Lanai, 
Kahoolawe, and Molokai (except the Leper Settlement) ; county 
seat at Wailuku. 

(c) County of Kauai, comprising the islands of Kauai and 
Nihau; county seat at Lihue. 

(d) County of Kalawao, comprising the Leper Settlement 
on the island of Molokai. 

3. County Government : 

(a) County of Kalawao: This county is under the jurisdiction 
and control of the Territorial Board of Health; it has one county 
officer, a sheriff, appointed and paid by the Board of Health. 

(b) Counties of Hawaii, Maui, and Kauai: 

(1) Officers: 
Board of Supervisors ; 
Sheriff (who is also Coroner) ; 
County Clerk ; 
Auditor ; 
County Attorney ; 
Treasurer. 
(2) Gaaney officers are elected by the voters for a term of 
two years. 
4. City and County of Honolulu: 

(a) Comprises the island of Oahu and all islands in the Territory 

which are not included in one of the counties. 

(b) Government (a modified type of county government) : 


Srey, SS 


(1) Officers : 
a. Mayor; 
6. Board of Supervisors ; 
c. Sheriff (who is also Coroner) ; 
d. City and County Clerk ; 
e. Auditor ; 
f. Treasurer ; 
g. City and County Attorney. 


(2) City and County Officers are elected by the voters for 
a term of two years. 


356 APPENDIX 


A Sort List oF Books DEALING WITH HAWAIIAN HIstrory 
I. General Histories 


ALEXANDER, WILLIAM D. — A Brief History of the Hawaiian People. 
1891. With continuation, 1899. For thirty-five years this has 
been the standard history of Hawaii. Written by an acknowl- 
edged authority on the subject. 

ALEXANDER, WILLIAM D.— History of Later Years of the Hawaiian 
Monarchy and the Revolution of 1893. 1896. Detailed account of 
the revolutionary period, based largely on official sources. Contains 
an account of the uprising of 1895, written by W. R. Farrington. 

BINGHAM, Hiram — A Residence of Twenty-one Years in the Sandwich 
Islands. 1847. An extensive work; the principal authority 
on early missionary history; but gives account also of political 
developments. 

BLACKMAN, WILLIAM F.— The Making of Hawaii. 1899. A valu- 
able book ; a sociological study rather than a formal history. 
CARPENTER, EDMUND J. — America in Hawaii. 1899. Sketch of 
development of American interests and influence in Hawaii. 

Based largely on United States government documents. 

DIBBLE, SHELDON — History of the Sandwich Islands. 1843. Based 
almost entirely on native Hawaiian and missionary sources. 

FORNANDER, ABRAHAM — An Account of the Polynesian Race. Vol. I, 
1878; Vol. II, 1880; Vol. III, 1885. Of great value, especially 
Volume IJ, which gives the ancient history of the Hawaiian group 
down to the year 1795. 

Hopkins, ManiteEy — Hawaii: the Past, Present, and Future of Its 
Tsland-Kingdom. 1862. Revised and extended, 1866. Impor- 
tant because of its English and Episcopal point of view. 

JaRves, JAMES J. — History of the Hawatian or Sandwich Islands. 
1843. A standard work, sympathetic with the missionaries and 
the government. Through connection with the government, 
Jarves had access to some official and other material not used by 
Dibble, whose history was published in the same year. 

LILIVOKALANI — Hawaii’s Story by Hawaii’s Queen. 1808. Royal- 
ist view of the later years and overthrow of the monarchy. 

PALMER, ALBERT W. — The Human Side of Hawaii. 1924. Study 
of the race question in Hawaii by a former pastor of Central Union 
(Congregational) Church, Honolulu. Gives a brief sketch of 
Hawaiian history. 


APPENDIX 357 


RESTARICK, HENRY B. — Hawai, 1778-1920, from the Viewpoint of a 
Bishop. 1924. Primarily a history of the Episcopal Church 
in Hawaii; but contains many valuable historical sidelights, 
particularly with reference to the earlier period. 

TAYLOR, ALBERT P. — Under Hawaiian Skies. 1922. Second edi- 
tion, revised, 1926. Sketches of Hawaiian history by an ex- 
perienced journalist, with emphasis on the romantic features. 

TWOMBLY, ALEXANDER S.— Hawai and Its People. 1899. Pleas- 
antly written book for young people. 


IT. Reference Material 


Hawaiian Almanac and Annual, compiled and published by Thomas 
G. Thrum. First issue, 1875. Beginning with the 51st issue 
(1925), the title is Te Hawaiian Annual. Contains an immense 
amount of information, statistical and otherwise, and many 
valuable historical articles. 

Memoirs, and other publications of the Bernice P. Bishop Museum. 

Report of the Governor of the Territory of Hawati to the Secretary of the 
Interior. Annual, beginning with 1900. Beginning with 10907, 
the title is Report of the Governor of Hawaii to the Secretary of the 
Interior. A very useful annual survey of conditions and affairs 
within the Territory. 

Reports, Papers, and Reprints of the Hawaiian Historical Society (organ- 
ized 1892). The Reports are published annually; 14 papers were 
printed separately; papers read before the Society are now 
regularly printed in the Annual Keport. ‘These publications 
contain much valuable material. 

Reports of various government officials, boards, and commissions. 

Files of various newspapers and periodicals published in Honolulu, 
the most important being: 

Bulletin (daily), 1882-1912. 

Friend (monthly), 1843. to date. 

Hawaiian Gazette (weekly), 1865-1888. 

Hawaiian Star (daily and weekly), 1893-1912. 

Kuokoa (Hawaiian weekly), 1861 to date. 

Pacific Commercial Advertiser (weekly), 1856-1888. Same (daily), 
now Honolulu Advertiser, 1882 to date. 

Paradise of the Pacific (monthly), 1888 to date. 

Polynesian (weekly), 1840-1841, 1844-1864. 

Star-Bulletin (daily), 1912 to date. 


« ; 
. 
y r 
% ¥ 
La : 
¥ 
r j 
4 
wht 
f 
¥ 
we 





bAae hit. cf My ; ae by 1 


om ae ent 


eee meer 





INDEX 


GUIDE TO PRONUNCIATION OF HAWAIIAN AND Pactric ISLAND WorRDS 


In all Hawaiian words every letter is sounded. 

Every syllable ends in a vowel, and many syllables contain only 
vowels. 

The consonants have the same sounds as in English, except that the 
letter w in the middle of a word nearly always has a sound approxi- 
mately like the English v. 

The vowels have the following sounds: 


a as in father ; 

é as In obey; 

i as in pique (like ee in meet) ; 
0 as in note; 

u like 00 in too. 


Each vowel has a long and a short sound, but the difference is hardly 
noticeable to an untrained ear. 

There are no true diphthongs in the Hawaiian language, but the 
following combinations of vowels have very nearly the sounds in- 
dicated : 


aia: inane: = Ee : 
zt like az in aisle or like 7 in write; 
au). : 

Stites ow 1n cow; 
oJ 
et like ay in day. 


Ordinarily the accent falls on the next to the last syllable, and in 
long words (not compounded) there is usually an accent on every 
second syllable, counting from the end. 

In the Index all Hawaiian words have been divided into syllables 
and the accents indicated. The inverted comma (‘) is used in a few 
words to mark what is called the “glottal closure,’’ which is simply 
an interruption in sound that prevents two vowels from running to- 

359 


360 


gether. 
inverted comma. 


INDEX 


In such a case the accent falls on the vowel preceding the 
If one follows the above scheme for vowels, any 


further marking of them will not be necessary. 

The markings for words of strictly Hawaiian or Pacific-Island origin 
should not be confused with the markings of the few other unusual 
proper nouns whose pronunciation has been indicated by the markings 
used in Webster’s New International Dictionary. 


Aberdeen, Earl of, 161-163 

Acteon, ship, 146 

Adams, Alexander, 90, 112, 118 

Adelaide, ship, 159 

Agriculture, 39, 155, 198-207, 223, 
225, 244, 253-255, 303, 310-321 

Ahuimanu (a-hu’i-ma’nu), College 
OLy2 Ts 

Ajax, ship, 247 

Akala (a-ka’la), a species of rasp- 
berry (Rubus macraei) that fur- 
nished a pink dye largely used 
in tapa making, 37 

Akamai (a-ka-mai’), ship, 246 

Akua (a-ku’a), god; deity; any 
supernatural being, the object of 
fear or worship, 56 

Alapainui (a-la-pai’nu’i), 63 

Albatross, ship, 112 

Albert, ship, 159-160 

Aleutian Islands, 4, 12 

Alexander, S. T., 254-255 

Alexander Liholiho (li‘ho-li‘ho), 
182, 186-187, 208 

Alii (a-li‘i), 40, 229, 230, 236, 205. 
See also Chiefs 

Aliiolani Hale 
ha’le), 248, 266 

Alofa (a-lo’fa), Samoan form of 
aloha, 46 

Aloha (a-lo’ha), love; an expres- 
sion of kind feelings; the usual 


(a-li‘i-o-la’ni 


salutation at meeting or parting, 
40, 320 

Aloha Oe (a-lo’ha o’e), song, 275 

American Board of Commissioners 
for Foreign Missions, 103, 108, 
214 

American influence, 209, 230, 253 

American interests, 119, 124-126 

American Legion, 307, 326 

American ships, first, at Hawaii, 
72-74 

American traders, 71, 94, 95, II0, 
PLe 2A 

Americanization, problem of, 324- 
326; obstacles to, 326-329 

Andrews, Lorrin, 133, 170, 172 

Animals, lack of, 25, 31; intro- 
duced by Polynesians, 28 

Annexation to United States, 
movement of 1853-54, 184-188 ; 
sugar planters favor, 207; 
feared by Kamehameha IV, 
209; and Kamehameha V, 220- 
221; advocated, 233, 270; 
sought by Provisional Govern- 
ment, 278, 280; accomplished, 
285-289; ends Japanese dan- 
ger, 323 


Archives of Hawaii, 303-304 
Armand, Abraham, 143 
Armstrong, Richard, 


185, 193; 


241, 242 


INDEX 


Armstrong, W. N., 264 

Army in Hawaii, 298-301, 305 

Aroha (a-ro’ha), Maori. form of 
aloha, 46 

Artemise (ar’ta-més’), ship, 140, 
152-154 

Artesian wells, 314 

Asia, ancestral home of Pacific 
islanders, 16 

Association of Hawaiian Pineapple 
Canners, 317 

Atkinson, A. T., 263 

Austral Islands, 3 

Australia, 3, 16, 17, 200, 234, 247, 


253 
a (bish’é-16’), Alexis, 143- 


Baldwin, Hit beeen. 

Bananas, 0;°22,/31,03207321 

Barracks mutiny, 235-236 

Bartimeus, 108 

Battles, Mokuohai, 
Valley,ye 3ry 
Kuamoo, 100 

Becket, ship, 129-130 

Beckley, George, 90, 94, 118 

Belcher, Captain Edward, 
148 

Benicia, ship, 251 

- Bernice Pauahi (pau-a’hi), Prin- 
CeSS, 229, 241, 340 

Bible, translation and printing, 
106-108 

Bill of Rights, Hawaii’s, 307-308 

Bingham, Hiram, 103 

Bishop, Charles R., 262 

Bishop, Mrs. Charles R., 229, 241, 


340 
Bishop Museum, 330 


Jao 
84 ; 


64-65 ; 
Nuuanu, 


147- 


361 


Blonde, ship, 121-123, 200, 204 

Blount, James H., 280, 281 

Boats used by Polynesians, 21-23 

Boissier (bwa’sya’), Theodore, 143 

Boki (bo’ki), 100, 119, 122, 129- 
130, 145, 200 

Bondu, Melchior, 143, 146 

Borabora (bo’ra-bo’ra), 54 

Borneo, 3, 16 

Boston, ship, 279, 280 

Bowling, 41, 48 

Boxing, 41, 48, 56 

Boyd, 78, go 

Breadfruit, 28, 30, 31 

Brintnall, Captain, 102 

Britannia, ship, 78 

British Commission, 158, 159 

Broughton, Captain, 84 

Brown, George, 177 

Brown, Miss Lydia, 203 

Brown, Captain William, 82-83 

Byng, Hon. Frederick, 121 

Byron, Lord (George Anson), 121- 
123, 200 

Byron’s Bay, 123 


Cabbage tree, 24 

Cabinet, 186, 210, 211, 220, 222, 
220, 1233,98234;ukea Omaciinr 7 T, 
2732=276 

California, trade with, 139; effect 
of settlement, 183-184, 204-205 

Camp McKinley, 298 

Canoes, 21-23, 48; peleleu, 93 

Caroline Islands, 3, 18, 19, 32, 149 

Carter, Henry A-P:, 250, 252 

Carysfort, ship, 158-159 

Castle, W. R., 254 

Catholics, 143-150, 152-155, 215, 
241 


362 


Cattle, introduced by Vancouver, 
70-77, 78, 139; industry, 321 

Celebes, island, 16 

Chamberlain, Daniel, 103 

Chanting, 40-41 

Charleston, ship, 275 

Charlton, Richard, 123, 147, 155- 
159, 162, 177, 204; land claim, 
[550 15 Ole oe lOO 

Chatham, ship, 75-76, 78 

Chatham Islands, 19 

Chaulmoogra (chél-m60’gra), oil, 
334 

Chestnut, 24, 25 

Chickens, 28 

Chiefs, 45, 88, 96, 99, 108, 112, 113, 
T1Q, 122, 127, 130, 134, 145-147, 
150, 153105 heb epeoo wed T. 
See also Alii 

Chinese, 199, 206-207, 217, 223- 
225, 240, 244, 250-257, 323- 
324 

Civil War in United States, 197, 
202 OT 2, 2ie.002 bor 

Civilization, Polynesian, 34-49 

Clementine, ship, 147 

Clerke, Captain, 59 

Cleveland, President Grover, 280- 
282 

Clothing, Polynesian, 36-39 

Coan, Mrs. Titus, 133 

Coasting, 41, 48 

Coconut, 10, 23, 26-27, 31 

Coffee, 139, 200, 201, 203-205, 
244, 319-320 

College of Hawaii, 334, 342 

Columbia, ship, 72 

Comet, ship, 245 

Commerce, 91-92, 110-117, 138- 
140, 189-197, 244-245, 347. 


INDEX 


See also Industry, Trade, Trans- 
portation 

Committee of Safety, 277-278 

Compass, not used by Polyne- 
sians, 20 

Congregation of the Sacred Hearts 
of Jesus and Mary, 143, 215 

Constitution, of 1840, 138, 165; 
ODTS5 271174 e222 2g eae 
Ofe1 864 221222) 2224007277) 


of 1/1887,.027%,) (274 So 2 OL 
the Republic, 282; of the 
Territory (Organic Act), 280, 
347 


Cook, Captain James, 53-59, 123 

Cook Islands, 3 

Cooke, Mr. and Mrs. A. S., 134, 
200 

Cooking, Polynesian method, 29- 
31 

Coronation of Kalakaua, 265-266 

Cotton, 202-203 

Council, of chiefs, 119, 122, 136- 
138; Privy, 169, 185; Execu- 
tive, 278, 281; Advisory, 278, 
281 

Counties, 292 

Cullom, Senator S. M., 289 


Daedalus, ship, 75-76 

Dancing, 40-41 

Davis, Isaac, 74, 78, 81, 90, 118 
Davis, William Heath, 111 
D.C. Murray, ship, 245 

Dean, Dr. A..L., 334 
Declaration of Rights, 137-138 
Denmark, treaty with, 177 
Diamond Head, 5, 299 

Dillon, Patrick, 180-182 
Discovery, ship, 54, 58, 75, 76, 78 


INDEX 


Dogs, 28 

Dole, Daniel, 135 

Dole, James D., 317 

Dole, Sanford B., 254, 278-283, 
286, 287, 289, 293, 296 

Dolphin, ship, 125, 129 

Dominis, John O., 251 

Dual citizenship, 327-329 

Dublin, ship, 160 

Dudoit (dii’dwa’), Jules, 147, 140, 
153; 150,71 50 

Du Petit-Thouars (dii’ p“-té- 
too’ar’), Captain (later Ad- 
miral), 147-148, 152-155 

Dutch, possible early landing on 
Hawaii, 52 


Easter Island, 16, 19, 42 
Education, 20-21, 41-42, 49, 131- 


Te Oyee eA 244°) 2037204710325, 
3390-343. See also Schools 
Eels, 25 


Eleanora, ship, 73-74 

Ellice (&l’is) Islands, 3, 18 

Ellis, William, 108 

Embuscade, ship, 154 

Emma, Queen, 209-210, 217, 237- 
238 

Emma Rooke, ship, 245 

England, see Great Britain 

English language in schools, 242, 
263 

Episcopal Church, 213-214 

Erronan, 18 

Ewa (e’wa), 5, 83; plantation, 
313, 314 

Experiment Station, Hawaii Agri- 
cultural (federal), 303; Ha- 
waiian Sugar Planters’, 310-312, 


317; pineapple, 317-318 


363 


Fair American, ship, 73-74, 81 
Fanning Island, 16 
Fanny Major, ship, 245 
Farnham, Thomas J., 156 
Farrington, W. R., 307, 308 
Feather cloak, 39, 48 
Ferns, 24 
Dijiv ges LOG 
Filibusters, 184, 186 
Filipinos, 315, 324 
Fire, Polynesian method of mak- 
ing, 29 
Fish, 25, 30, 31 
Fish, Hamilton, 252 
Flour exported to California, 204 
Food Administration, 305-306 
Food of Polynesians, 23—31 
Foreigners, 62, 66, 72, 78, 90, 99, 
"127-129, 134, 136-137, 139, 140, 
153, 167, 172, 173, 240, 241, 
256-257, 271, 283 
Foreign Language Schools, 327 
Foreign Mission School, 103 
Forester, ship, 112 
Fort, at Honolulu, 94, 181, 248; 
at Waimea, Kauai, 95; Arm- 
strong, 298; DeRussy, 2098; 
Kamehameha, 299; Ruger, 
299; Shafter, 298 
Foster, T. R:, 257 
France, “15250570 desea 75, 
180-183, 265 
Frear, W. F., 289, 295, 320 
Frere, Lieutenant, 159 
Funafuti (fu’na-fu’ti), 8-10 
Fur trade, 70, 110 
Futuna (fu-tu’na), 18 


Gambier Islands, 16 
Gassendi, ship, 180 


304 


Geological Survey, 303 © 

George IV, King of England, 1109, 
121 

Gibson, Walter Murray, 216, 268- 
271 

Gilbert Islands, 3, 9, 18 

Goodhue, Dr. W. J., 334 

Gould) PaRe) 267 

Government, organization by 
Kamehameha I, 88-89; legal 
and constitutional development, 
136-138; organization under 
Kamehameha III, 138, 165- 
174; theories about, 267-268; 
under Gibson, 268-270; fight 
for control of, 273; Provisional, 
278-281; Republic, 281-282; 
territorial, 289-291; county, 
291-292; municipal, 292-293; 
outline, OfW347-355 aro ceraiso 
Constitution 

Gray, Captain Robert, 72 

Great Britain, 79, 118-124, 157- 
TO9,0E7 7--100;.205 

Green Paha 3 

Gregg, David L., 184-186, 210-211 

Guizot (gé’zd’), 161-162 


Haalilio (ha‘a-li-li’o), Timothy, 
750-157, 150; 200103, 107 

Haiku (ha‘i-ku’), 203 

Halawa (ha-la’wa), 81 

Haleakala (ha’le-a-ka-la’), 
303 

Hale-o-Keawe (ha’le 0 ke-a’we), 
house erected at the Honaunau 
temple of refuge by Kanuha, 
a descendant of the ancient 
King Keawe, as a burial place 
for the bones of the alii, 64 


254; 


INDEX 


Hamakua (ha’ma-ku’a), 65 

Hamakua ditch, 254-255 

Hana (ha’na), 80, 81 

Hanalei (ha’na-le’i), 202, 204 

Hands-Around-the-Pacific Club, 
329 

Hannah-rourah (ha’na-ru’ra), 
term incorrectly used by early 
voyagers for Honolulu, 114 

Haole (ha’o-le), foreigner, 136, 198 

Harbors, commercial, 302 

Harbottle, 90 - 

HarriseGae 226 

Harrison, President Benjamin, 280 

Hau, 6, 24 

Hawaii (ha-wai’i), name of largest 
island of Hawaiian group; used 
also for the group as a whole 

Hawaii-loa (ha-wai‘i-lo’a), a tradi- 
tional early voyager, discoverer 
of and first settler in Hawaii, 21 

Hawaii National Park, 302-303 

Hawaii Ponoi (po’no-i’), Hawaii’s 
national anthem, words by Lu- 
nalilo, music by Henri Berger, 
265, 288, 289 

Hawaiian Board, 214-215 

Hawaiian Commission, 289 

Hawaiian Evangelical Association, 
214 

Hawaiian Homes Commission Act, 
338 

Hawaiian League, 270 

Hawaiian Pineapple 
317 

Hawaiian race, decrease of, 206, 
217,223, 225, 240r24T yesh 
261-262; effort to build up, 224, 
261-263, 336-339; political 
predominance, 293 


Company, 


INDEX 


Hawaiian Steam Navigation Com- 
pany, 246 

Hawaiian Sugar Planters’ Asso- 
ciation, 254, 310-315 

Hawaiki (ha-wa-i’ki), mythical 
homeland of the Polynesians, 18 

Heiau (hei’a’u), 46, 56, 68, 89, 96, 
100 . 

Hergest, Lieutenant, 76, 78 

Hewahewa (he’wa-he’wa), 99 

Hikiau (hi‘ki-au’), 56 

Hillebrand, Dr. William, 224 

Hilo (hilo), 65, 66, 86, 108, 115, 
123, 204, 247, 303 


Hitt, R. R., 280 
Hoapili (ho’a-pi'li), 88, 100, 131, 
133 


Hobron, UHv257 

Hogs, 29, 55, 56, 71, 83 

Hokuula (ho-ku’u’la), 
Aldebaran, 21 

Hollmiann? Dr-He D334 

Holman, Dr. Thomas, 103, 104 

Holmes, 90 

Holstein, H., 244 

Home Rule Party, 294 

Homesteads, 336-339 

Honolii (ho’no-li‘i), John, 103 

Honolulu (ho’no-lu’lu), growth of, 
92, I40~I41, 192, 195-190, 247—- 
249; city and county, 292-293 ; 
defenses of, 298-299 

Honolulu Iron Works, 254, 319 

Hooulu Lahui (ho‘o-u’lu la-hu’i), 
a phrase of Kalakaua’s, meaning 
‘increase of the people, 261 

Hopu (ho’pu), Thomas, 103, 104 

House, Polynesian, 35-36, 46 

Household Troops, 235-236 

Huckleberries, 24 


the. “star 


365 


Hui Kalaiaina (hu’i ka-la’i-a’i-na), 
“land dividing company”’; 
name of a native political so- 
ciety formed during the reign of 
Kalakaua, 274 

Hula (hu’la), 40 


Tao (i’ao), 21 

Iao Valley, battle of, 81 

Idaho, ship, 247 

Ieie (i’e-i’e), a woody climbing 
plant (Freycinetia arborea), 24 

li (i-i’), John, 167, 172, 174 

Immigration, 207-215,) 223-226, 
250-257, 20Tm2Q2ni2o0 oe 3-3 24 

Imu (i’mu), 29-31 

Independence, movement to secure 
recognition, 155-157, 159-160; 
recognized by United States, 
157.9 by | Greate Diicainmand 
France, 160-163 

Industry;"244) 3210-321 423° 
also Agriculture, Commerce 

Insect pests, 311-312 

Institute of Pacific Relations, 330 

Inter-Island Steam Navigation 
Company, 257 

To (i’o), 46 

Tolani (i’o-la’ni) Palace, 265 

Iolani School, 340 

Irrigation, 39, 198, 254-255, oe ae 
314 

Islands of Pacific Ocean, 2-14, 16 


See 


Jackal, ship, 82-83 

Java; 3 sGar 7a 

Jajczay (ytty’tsa), Captain, 235 

Japan, whaling near, 139, 190; 
Hawaiian students in, 264; 
Kalakaua in, 265; represented 


366 


at coronation, 265; protests 
against annexation, 286; and 
question of dual citizenship, 
328 

Japanese in Hawaii, 224, 256-257, 
286-287, 315, 323-324, 327-329 

Japanese Hospital, 336 

JALLetL RW mil esO3 

Jarves, Jamese] St177 

Johnston Island, ro 

Johnstone, Andrew, 134 

Jones, John Coffin, 118, 123 

J Ones HeeCe 27.5 

Jones, Captain 
Catesby, 125-126 

Juan Fernandez Island, 3 

Judd, Colonel C. H., 264 

Judd 2sDri Geb eos atcO i tO5 
170, 174, 176, 182, 185, 193, 
210} 241 

Judiciary Building, 248, 266 


Thomas ap 


Kaahumanu (ka-a’hu-ma’nu), 
“feather mantle,’ 78}: 98-100, 
10050 110) /1122;9/5 24) T20 smn, 


136, 144-145, 159 

Kaahumanu, ship, 112 

Kaawaloa (ka’a’wa-lo’a), 58, 108 

Kaeokulani (ka-e’o-ku-la’ni), 80— 
83 

Kahauiki (ka-ha’u-i’ki), 298 

Kahekili (ka’he-ki'li), 62, 63, 65, 
78, 80-82 

Kahili (ka-hi'li), a large spherical 
feather ornament used as a 
symbol of royalty on all public 
occasions, 228, 266 

Kahuna (ka-hu’na), priest; term 
used to designate a professional 
person, 68 


INDEX 


Kaiana (kai’a-na), 72, 75, 84, 86 

Kaikioewa (kai’ki-o-e’wa), 124 

Kailua (kai-lu’a), principal town 
and port of Kona, island of 
Hawali, 96, 104, 106, 108, 203, 
236 

Kaimuki (ka-i’mu-ki’), 340 

Kalakaua (ka-la’ka’u-a), David, 
candidate for throne, 229-232; 
election as king, 236-238; visit 
to United Statés) 251-2352, 253" 
Teen 201=275 

Kalanianaole (ka-la’ni-a’na-o'le), 
Prince Jonah Kuhio (ku-hi-o’), 
264, 294, 339 

Kalanianaole Settlement, 339 

Kalanikupule (ka-la’ni-ku-pu'le), 
80-84 

Kalanimoku (ka-la’ni-mo-ku’), 88, 
04;800-100; 1004100, 71048 122. 
129, 155, 178 

Kalaniopuu (ka-la’ni-o-pu‘u), 55- 
58, 62-64, 80 

Kalihi (ka-li‘hi), leper receiving 
station, 227; Hospital, 334 

Kamakau (ka’ma-ka’u), a chief 
of Kaawaloa of high character, 
learned in the ancient lore of 
Hawaii, 108 

Kamakau, S. M., historian, the 
bulk of whose writings were 
published in native Hawaiian 
newspapers from about 1860 to 
about 1870, quoted, 87-88 

Kamamalu (ka’ma-ma’lu), 
121 

Kamanawa (ka’ma-na’wa), 65, 68, 
88 

Kameeiamoku  (ka-me’e-i’a-mo’- 
ku), 65, 88, 230 


119, 


INDEX 


Kamehameha (ka-me’ha-me’ha) I, 
“the lonely one,” visits Cook’s 
ship, 55, 63; rise of (to 1791), 
62-69; and traders, 71; be- 
friends Young and Davis, 74; 
relations with Vancouver, 76- 
79; struggle with Kahekili, 
80-81; conquers Oahu, 84; 
attempts invasion of Kauai, 
84-86; suppresses revolt on 
Hawaii, 86; encourages indus- 
try, 87; organizes government, 
88-89; maintains ancient re- 
ligion, 89-90; treatment of 
foreigners, 90; and Kaumualii, 
92-93; and Russians, 93-096; 
death, 96; appoints successor, 
98; and sandalwood trade, 111- 
113; and England, 118-1109; 
makes laws, 136; statue of, 266- 
267 

Kamehameha II, 96, 98-100, 104, 


LTQeL I 3y LO ee 4A A 2ST 


Kamehameha III, 122, 147-149, 
T53-150815 o20009105-100)'103; 
172-1 747 7,1 JO; LOO. Los Doo, 
os edooN 200, 2337 #L his tein 
takes up all of chapters 12-16 

Kamehameha IV, 208-218, 221, 
233 

Kamehameha V, 219-228, 
233, 230, 267 

Kamehameha, ship, 129 

Kamehameha Schools, 340 

Kanaloa’ (ka’na-lo’a), one of the 
four greater gods of Polynesia, 
20, 21 

Kane (ka’ne), the greatest of the 
Polynesian gods, 20, 21 

Kanui (ka-nu’i), William, 103-104 


229, 


367 


Kaoha (ka-o’ha), Marquesan form 
of aloha, 46 

Kapena (ka-pe’na), John M., 251 

Kapihe (ka-pi’he), 119 

Kapiolani (ka-pi’o-la’ni), a high 
chiefess of Hawaii who became 
an early convert to Christianity, 
108, 241 

Kapiolani, Queen, 275, 335 

Kapiolani Maternity Home, 335 

Kapu (ka’pu), see Tapu 

Karika (ka-ri‘ka), 19 

Kau (ka-u’), 65, 67, 68 

Kauai (ka’u-a‘i), Kamehameha 
attempts to conquer, 84-86; 
becomes subject to Kameha- 
meha, 92-93; Russian episode, 
93-90; end of kingdom, 124 

Kauikeaouli (kau’i-ke-ao’u-li), 
I19,122. See Kamehameha III 

Kauikeolani (kau’i-ke’o-la’ni) 
Children’s Hospital, 336 

Kaula (ka-u'la), 3 

Kaumakapili  (kau’ma-ka-pi’li) 
Church, 231 

Kaumualii (kau’mu-a-li‘i), king 
of Kauai, 76, 92-95, 105, I113- 
II4, 124 

Kaumualii, George P., 103, 105, 
124 

Kawaiahao (ka-wa’i-a-ha‘o) 
Church, 160, 208, 233, 248 

Kawaihae (ka-wai-ha’e), 68, 76, 
106 

Kawananakoa (ka-wa’na-na-ko’a), 
Prince David, 294 

Kealakekua (ke-a’la-ke-ku’a) Bay, 
55) Someueer4s 70, 78, 123 

Keaweaheulu (ke-a’we-a-he-u'lu), 
65, 68, 88, 230 


368 


Keawemauhili (ke-a’we-mau’hi'li), 
65, 66, 68, 80 

Keeaumoku (ke’e-au-mo’ku), 65, 
68-69, 88, 89 

Kekauluohi (ke-kau’lu-o’hi), 241 

Kekuanaoa (ke-ku’a-na’oa), 110, 
170, 194, 208, 241 

Kekuaokalani (ke-ku’a-o-ka-la’ni), 
g8—100 

Kekuhaupio (ke-ku’hau-pi’o), 63, 
65 

Keliimaikai (ke-li‘i-ma’i-ka’i), 68, 
209 

Kendrick, Captain John, 72, 83 

Keopuolani (ke-o-pu’o-la’ni), 99- 
100, 108 

Keoua (ke-o’ua), 65-69, 80, 81 

Kidwell, Captain John, 316 

Kilauea (ki‘lau-e’a), ship, 247, 257 

Kilauea, volcano, 67, 108, 123, 302 

Kinau (kina‘u), 130, 147, 149, 208 

King, Lieutenant (later Captain), 
56, 58, 63 

Kinga Aes. 

Kip, Bishop, 213 

Kiwalao (ki-wa’la-o’), 63-65 

Koa (ko’a), a forest tree (Acacia 
koa) furnishing a choice wood 
sometimes called Hawaiian ma- 
hogany, 6 

Koahou (ko’a-ho’u), 88 

Kohala (ko-ha’la), 62, 64, 65, 81, 
96, 115, 267 

Koko (ko’ko) Head, 5 

Koloa (ko-lo’a), plantation, 201- 
202, 205 

Kona (ko’na), 64, 65, 68, 100, 204, 
315 

Kona storms, 12 

Koolau (ko‘o-lau) Range, 5 


INDEX 


Koreans, 324 

Kuakini (ku’a-ki’ni), 203, 241 

Kuamoo (ku’a-mo‘o), battle of, 
100 

Kuhina nui (ku-hi’na nu’i), 08, 
130, 136, 138, 147, 153 

Kuhio (ku-hi-o’), Prince, see Ka- 
lanianaole 

Kukailimoku = (ku’ka-i’li-mo’ku), 
63, 64, 84, 89, 98 

Kukui (ku’ku’i), a tree (Aleu- 
rites moluccana) which produces 
an oily nut, 6 

Kuleana (ku’le-a’na), term applied 
to a person’s right ina portion of 
land; also commonly applied to 
the land itself, 173 


La Bonite, ship, 146 

Labor, 206)223-225 222) 266.262, 
315 

La Comeéte, ship, 143-144 


‘Ladd and Company, 201-202 


Lady Washington, ship, 72, 83 

Lahaina (la-hai’na), 108, 109, 121, 
127, 136, 191, 192, 247 

Lahainaluna (la-hai’na-lu’na) 
school, 133, I7I, 241, 242 

Laie (la-i’e), Mormons at, 216 

L’ Aigle, ship, 119, 120 

Lanai (la’na‘i), island, 199, 216 
317 

Lanai (la’na’i), a porch, 35 

Land system, 88, 122-123, 138, 
172-174, 330-339 

Language, Hawaiian, reduced to 
writing, 106-107 

Language, Polynesian, 39-41 

Laplace (la’plis’), Captain, 152- 
154, 176, 177, 180 


) 


INDEX 


Laupahoehoe_ (la’u-pa-ho’e-ho’e), 
66 

Laysan Island, 3, 10 

Leahi (le-a’hi) Home, 336 

Lee, William L., 165, 170-172, 174, 
205, 210-212, 241 

Le Héros, ship, 143-144 

Leilehua (le’i-le-hu’a) plain, 299 

Leleiohoku (le’le-i-o-ho’ku), Wil- 
liam Pitt, 237, 264 

Lelia Byrd, ship, 91, 93 

Leprosy, 227, 234-235, 263, 269, 
BER ie hy) 

Lighthouse District, Nineteenth, 
303 

Liholiho (li‘ho-li‘ho), see Kame- 
hameha IT 

Lihue (li-hu‘e), 254 

Likelike (li‘ke-li‘ke), ship, 257 

Liliha (li-li’ha), 119 

Liliuokalani (li-li‘u-o-ka-la’ni), 
264, 274, 275-283, 205, 335 

Livestock industry, 321. See also 
Cattle 

Lono (lo’no), one of the four 
greater gods of Polynesia, 
56 

Loomis, Elisha, 103, 106 

Lord Howe Island, 18 

Lot Kamehameha, 182, 209, 2109. 
See Kamehameha V 

Loyalty Island, 10 

Luau (lu’a’u), native Hawaiian 
feast, 335 

Luke Field, 301 

Lunalilo (lu’na-li‘lo), William C., 
220-236, 237, 241, 335 

Lunalilo Home, 236, 335 

Lydecker, R. C., 304 

Lyman, David B., 133 


369 


McCook, E. M., 225-227 

Mackay, D. F., 159 

McKinley, President William, 285, 
287, 289 

Mahele (ma-he’le), 173 

Maigret (mi’gra’), L. D., 148-149, 
215 

Mai Pake (ma‘i pa-ke’), 227 

Makalii (ma’ka-li‘i), 21 

Makatea (ma’ka-te’a), 10 

Malay Peninsula, 16 

Maliko (ma-li’ko), gorge of, 255 

Mallet (ma’la’), Captain, 154-155 

Mamaki (ma-ma’ki), a tree (Pip- 
turus albidus), the bark of which 
was used for making coarse or 
heavy tapa, 37 

Mamalahoe Kanawai (ma-ma’la- 
ho’e ka’na-wa’i), 66, 136 

Mana (ma/’na), 43-44 

Manini (ma-ni’ni), 90, 199 

Manoa (ma-no’a) Valley, 200-201, 
203, 204, 248, 282 

Manono (ma-no’no), 100 

Manuia (ma-nu-i’a), 119, 121 

Maori (ma’o’ri), 18, 31, 44, 46-49 

Marcy, W. L., 184, 211-212 

Marianas Islands, 18, 32 

Marquesans, 31, 41, 42, 46-49 

Marquesas (mir-ka’sas) Islands, 
3, 8, 24, 28, 40-49, 152, 154, 155 

Marshall, J. F. B., 159, 162 

Marshall Islands, 3, 10, 13, 18, 32 

Maui (ma’u-i), a Polynesian demi- 
god, 40 

Maui (ma’u-i), island, wars with 


Hawail, 63, 65, 80-82, 84; 
cotton, 203; irrigation, 254—- 
255; railroad, 258; National 


Park, 302-303 


Ste 


Mauna Kea (ma’u-na ke’a), 104 

Meares, Captain John, 72 

Melanesia, 13, 14, 16 

Melanesians, 32 

Mele (me’le), chant or song, 40, 265 

Metcalfe, Captain Simon, 73-74 

Micronesia, 13, 14, 16 

Micronesians, 32 

Mid-Pacific Institute, 340 

Midway Island, 12 

Miller, William, 160, 177-180 

Missionaries, American _ Protes- 
tant, IoI, 103-109, 127, 120, 
{30-136, 145, 150, 199, 203, 
204, 209, 210, 214, 233, 241, 
Catholiostascnsonr Sects ymor 5. 
241; Mormon, 215-216, 268 

Moi (mo-i’), the supreme ruler of 
an island or of the group of 
islands, 62, 69, 229 

Mokolii (mo’ko-li‘i), 3 

Mokuaweoweo (mo-ku’a-we’o- 
we’o), the summit crater of 
Mauna Loa, 302-303 

Mokuohai (mo’ku-o-ha’i), battle 
of, 64-65 

Molokai (mo’lo-ka‘i), 80, 82, 84; 
leper settlement, 227, 234-235, 
333-334; Kalanianaole Settle- 
ment, 338-339 

Molokini (mo’lo-ki‘ni), 3 

Moluccas, 16 

Moo (mo’o), 131 

Moreno, C. C., 268 

Morgan, Senator J. T., 289 

Mormons, 215-216, 268 

Motto of Hawaii, 160 

Murphy, Colomban, 146, 148 

Music, Polynesian, 40-41, 48 

Mutiny at the barracks, 235-236 





INDEX 


Naihe (na’i-he), 88, 100 

National Guard, 305, 326 

Nauru (na-u’ru), 10 

Navigation, study of, 20-21 
Navy in Hawaii, 301 

Nettie Merrill, ship, 245 

Newa (ne’wa), the Southern Cross, 
20 

New Caledonia, 3 

New Guinea, see Papua 

New Hebrides, 18 

New Zealand, 3, 4, 12, 19, 25, 28, 
36, 38, 42, 46-49, 234, 253 
Niihau (ni‘i-ha’u), 55, 84, 86, 91, 
Q2 

Niue (ni-u-e’), 10 

Nobles, House of, 138, 174, 221, 
220, 271 

Noholoa (no’ho-lo’a), the North 
Star, 20 

Normal School, Territorial, 341 
Nukuor (nu’ku-or’), 18 

Nuuanu (nu‘u-a’nu), 84, 140 

















Oahu (o-a’hu), description, 5-8; 
conquered by Kamehameha, 84 ; 
railroad, 258; county, 292; 
importance of army, 298; center 
of pineapple industry, 316-317 

Oahu Charity School, 134-135, 
242 

Oahu College, 136 

Oahu Sugar Plantation, 314 

Obookiah, see Opukahaia 

Okuu (o’ku‘u), 93 

Oli (o0’li), 40 

Oloa (o-lo’a), 37 

Olokele (0’lo-ke’le), 313 

Olona (o’lo-na’), a shrub which 
yields a fiber highly prized for 


INDEX 


its durability and tenacity, used 
in making fishing nets and cord- 
age, OI 

Olopana (o’lo-pa’na), 46 

Olowalu (0’lo-wa’lu) massacre, 74 

Ontong Java, island, 18 

Opium, 269, 270, 277 

Opukahaia (0-pu’ka-ha-i’a), ro1- 
103 

Organic Acts, of 1846-1847, 168, 
170-1 Ole) eIritory 4200 201,202. 
336, 338, 347 

Our Lady of Peace, ship, 149 

Outrigger canoe, 21-23 

Oven, underground, 29-31 


Paao (pa’a’o), 49 

Pacific Ocean, 1-14 

Pacific science congresses, 329-330 

Paki (pa-ki’), 241 

Palama (pa-la’ma) Settlement, 
336 

Palaoa (pa-la’o-a), an ornament of 
whale’s tooth ivory suspended 
by a necklace of human hair: 
worn only by chiefs, 266 

Palapala (pa’la-pa‘la), name ap- 
plied by the Hawaiians to the 
system of education introduced 
by the missionaries, 131, 136 

Pali (pa'li), precipice, 84 

Palmyra Island, 3, 10 

Palolo (pa-lo’lo) Valley, 282 

Pandanus, 6, 8-9, 10, 24-25, 37 

Pan-Pacific Union, 329 

Papaia (pa-pa’i-a), 23, 303 

Papua; 3,°10,°302 

Park, Hawaii National, 302-303 

Parker, Samuel, 294 

Paula Marin, Francisco de, 90, 199 





371 


Paulet, Lord George, 157-160, 162, 
178 

Peacock, ship, 125 

Pearl Harbor, 5, 301; Pearl River, 
234; 258-250, 275 

Peck, Sherman, 202 

Peircegblenty Aly 241 

Pele (pe’le), goddess of the vol- 
canoes, 67, 108, 241 

Peleleu (pe’le-le’u), a short, deep, 
double war canoe, 93 

Pensacola, ship, 252 

Percival, Lieutenant John, 125, 129 

Perrin, Emile, 182-183 

Philadelphia, ship, 288 

Philippine Islands, 2, 3, 16, 17 

Picul, 114 

Pierce, President Franklin, 184, 
200 

Pineapple industry, 315-319 

Planters’ Labor and Supply Com- 
pany, 254, 310 

Planters’ Monthly, 254 

Planters’ Society, 223 

Poetry, 40 

Poi (poi), 28, 30, 201 

Political parties, 222, 
274, 276-277, 204 

Polynesia, 13, 14, 10, 17, 21 

Polynesian, newspaper, I41, 210 

Polynesians, migrations, 16-21; 
love of adventure, 18; rem- 
nants outside Polynesia, 18; 
voyages, 19-21; boats used 
by,’ 2i=2gheetogdeoti23-31 a 
mixed race, 31-32;  civiliza- 
tion of, 34-49; differences 
among, 46-49; suggested as 
immigrants, 217; law to pro- 
mote immigration of, 225 


267-268, 


372 


Ponape (po-na-pe’), 8, 149 

Population, decrease of native, 
200; (217, 2220 220 a 24024 
effort to build up, 224-225; 
change in character of, 240, 
256-257, 261-262; complexity, 
323-324; statistics, 346 

Portal, Leonore, 143 

Portsmouth, ship, 238 

Portuguese, 256-257, 323 

Poursuivante, ship, 180 

Prince Lee Boo, ship, 82 

Prince of Hawaii, 212-214 

Prince Regent, ship, 119 

Printing, 106-108 

Provisional Government, 278-282 

Puaaiki (pu-a‘a-i’ki), 108, 109 

Public Health Service, 303 

Puloulou (pu-lo‘u-lo‘u), balls of 
tapa on the ends of sticks as a 
symbol of high rank or tapu, 
266 

Puna (pu’na), 64, 65, 66, 131 

Punahou = (pu’na-ho’u), 
School, 135-136, 241, 340 

Punchbowl, 5 

Purslane, 24 

Puukohola (pu‘u-ko-ho-la’) heiau, 
68 


140 ; 


Queen’s Hospital, 216-217, 335 


Railroads, 258, 

Rangi (ran’gi), the heavens; 
Hawaiian form with same defi- 
nition is Lani, 43 

Rapa (ra’pa), 12, 19 

Rapa-nui, see Easter Island 

Rarotonga, 19, 28 

Raspberries, 24 


INDEX 


Reciprocity, 211-212,» 225-227, 
233-234, 250-259, 262, 275 

Red Cross, 287, 304-305 

Reform Party, 274, 277 

Rehabilitation, 217-218, 336-339 

Religion, Polynesian, 43-46 

Renne, island, 18 

Republic of Hawaii, 281-283, 287 

Resolution, ship, 54, 58 

Restless, ship, 245 

Revolution, of 1887, 270-271, 277; 
attempts at, 273-274-801, Lops, 
276-280; attempted (1895), 
282-283 

Rice, 244, 253, 319-320 

Richards, William, 129, 137, 140, 
156-163, 160, 169, 241 

Ricord, John, 165, 167-171 

Rives, John, 119, 143-144, 200 

Rooke; Drvls CeBy {oo 

Royal Hawaiian Agricultural So- 
ciety, 205, 206, 244 

Royal Hawaiian Hotel, 248 

Ruggles, Samuel, 103, 105-106 

Russell, Lord Edward, 146 

Russians, 93-96, 119 


Sailors, cause trouble, 125; riot, 
192-194 

Samoa, 3, 8, 18, 19, 23, 28, 46-49 

Samoans, 31, 40, 46-49 

Sandalwood, 91, 95, 110-117, 124— 
125;)1208138, 201 

Sandwich Island Gazette, 140 

Scheffer, Dr., 94-96 

Schofield Barracks, 299-301 

Schools, first, 106; Lahainaluna, 
133, 171, 241, 242; Hilo Board- 
ing, 133, 241, 340; Hilo Girls’, 
133; Central Female Boarding 


INDEX 


Seminary, 133; common, 134, 
241-242, 263; for young chiefs, 
134, 209, 241, 275; Oahu Char- 
ity, 134-13589241,.242;° Puna- 
hou, 135-136, 241, 340; Catho- 
lig} StS4ea215)e240.. 240.1 select, 
241-242; Honolulu Free, 242; 
University of Hawaii, 318, 325, 
339, 341-343; and Americani- 
zation, 325; foreign language, 
327; College of Hawaii, 334, 
R42 sae UM LLOUIS §C Olege mae 40: 
Kamehameha, 340; Mid-Pacific 
Institute, 340; St. Andrews 
Priory, 340; Iolani, 340; Ter- 
ritorial Normal, 341. See also 
Education 

Sea-weeds, 24, 25 

Severance, Luther, 177, 183 

Sewall, H. M., 287-288 

Short, Patrick, 143-148 

Silk, 139, 202 

Simpson, Alexander, 158-160, 162 

Simpson, Sir George, 156, 159, 160- 
162 

Smallpox, 185 

Smith, W. O., 254, 278 

Smyrniote, ship, 245 

Society Islands, see Tahiti 

Solomon Islands, 8, 18 

South Sea islanders, 217-218, 224- 

Spaniards, possible early landing 
on Hawaii, 52 

Spanish-American War, 287 

Spear throwing, 41 

Sports, Polynesian, 41 

Spreckels, Claus, 254, 255 

Staley, Bishop T. N., 213-214 

St. Andrews Priory, 340 


oh 


Starbuck, Captain Valentine, 119 

Stars, sailing by, 20-21 

Steamers, see Transportation 

Stevens, John L., 280 

Stevenson, Robert Louis, 267 

Stewart, go 

St. Louis College, 340 

Story-telling, 40 

Sugar industry, 139, 199-202, 
205207, 211, 225, 244, 253-255, 
310-315 

Sugar Planters’ Association, see 
Hawaiian Sugar Planters’ Asso- 
ciation 

Sulphur, ship, 147 

Sumatra, 16 

Sumner, Senator Charles, 227 

Surf boards, 48 

Sweet potato, 28, 30, 31 

Swimming, 41 

Swine, 28 


Taa-roa (ta’a-ro’a), 43 

Tahiti, 3,°8, 18,-10;:21, 23-28" 4qo 
48-49, 53, 54, 99, 123; the 
French at, 152-153, 155 

Tahitians, 31, 41, 48-49 

Tangiia (tan-gi-i’a), 19 

Tapa (ta’pa), 37-38, 48 

Tapu (ta’pu), 44-45, 59, 78, 89- 
90, 96, 99-100 

Taro (ta’ro), 6, 9, 28, 30, 31 

Taylor, A. P., 304 

Tenedos, ship, 238 

Ten Eyck, Anthony, 177 

Territory of Hawaii, organization, 
289-293; and the nation, 298- 
308 

Timor, 3 

Titcomb, Charles, 202, 204 


374 


Thaddeus, ship, 103-105 

Thetis, ship, 207 

Thomas, Rear Admiral Richard, 
158, 160 

Thurston, Asa, 103, 104, 106 

Toa-tou (to’a-to’u), 24 

Tobacco, 204 

Tonga, 46-49 

Tongareva, 19 

Tools, Polynesian, 23, 34, 48 

Trade, 66, 70-74, 94,95. See also 
Commerce 

Transportation, 245-247, 257-258, 
319 

Treasury Board, 167 

Treaties, first, 126; with Great 
Britain, 146, 177-178, 182; with 
France, 148, 153-154, 176-178; 
with Denmark, 177; with 
United States (1850), 177; an- 
nexation,” 185-187,09280, a3 5— 
287; reciprocity, 211-21200220— 
227, 233~234, 250-250 

Tromelin, Admiral de, 180-182 

Tuamotu (tu’a-mo’tu) Islands, 3, 
10, 19 

Tubuai (tu’bu-a’i), island, 19 

Tukuiho (tu’ku-i/ho), 19 

Tuscarora, ship, 238 

Twin canoe, 21-23 


Uenga (u-en’ga), 19 

Ulumaika (u’lu-ma’i-ka), the stone 
disk of the bowling game; also 
the name of the game itself, 41, 
48 

Underground oven, 29-31 

United States, sends commercial 
agent to Hawaii, 118; sends 
warships to Hawaii, 125; un- 


INDEX 


ratified treaty (1826), 126; rec- 
ognizes independence of Hawaii, 
157; relations with, 177,'182— 
PO7 P21 IR21 2; 225eo97 eR sae Ae 
250-2 53512507250) 205s 27 oeo2 

University of Hawaii, 318, 325, 339, 
341-343 


Vancouver, Captain George, 74- 
79, 82, 90, 118, 199 

Vancouver Island, 3 

Vavau (va-vau), island, 10 

Venus, ship, 147, 152 

Vi apple, 24 

Victorian Oueens21 34275 

Victoria, ship, 159 

Victoria Kamamalu (ka’ma-ma’- 
lu), Princess, 229 

Volcano observatory, 303 

Voyages of Polynesians, 19-21 


Wahiawa (wa’hi-a-wa’), 317 
Waiahole  (wa’i-a-ho’le) 
project, 313-314 


water 


Wainae (wa’i-a-na’e), 82, 140; 
mountains, 5 
Waikiki (wa/i-ki-ki’), | famous 


beach district on Oahu, now a 
part of Honolulu, 76, 78, 82, 84, 
93, 129, 140, 236, 248, 282, 298 

Wailuku (wa’i-lu’ku), 133, 203, 
247 

Waimanalo (wa’i-ma-na’lo), 82 

Waimea (wa’i-me’a), Hawaii, 67, 
II5 

Waimea, Kauai, 54-55, 76 

Waimea, Oahu, 76 

Waipio (wa’i-pi’o), 63, 67, 81 

War, see Civil War, Spanish-Amer- 
ican War, World War 


INDEX 375 


Wauke (wa’u-ke), the shrub| Winds of Pacific Ocean, 12-13 
(Broussonetia papyrifera) whose | Winship, Jonathan, 111 
bark made the best tapa, 38 Winship, Nathan, 111, 112 


Waverley, ship, 146 World War, Hawaii in, 304-307 
Weapons, Polynesian,,34, 48 Wrestling, 41, 48, 56 
Weather Bureau, 303 Wyllie, Robert C., 167, 169-170, 
Webster, Daniel, 157, 183 L7G eelO2 Og O5 Loy mlOl 
Win alersmem set tOveho 5.027, 120, hb) DIL 27s, 221, /24 5 

138-139, 189-107, 198, 233, 244 
Wheat, 204 WV ainis(23 2827 871) OT 


Whitney, Samuel, 103, 105-106 | Yam Bay, 92 
Wilcox, Robert W., 264, 274, 2904 | Yankee, ship, 245 


Wilder, Samuel G., 257 Young, James, 119 
Wilder Steamship Company, 257 | Young, John, 74, 76, 78, 81, 80, 
Wilkinson, John, 200, 203 go, 94, 118, I19, 209 


Williams and Company, C. A., 246} Young, John, 2d, Hawaiian name 
Willis, Albert S., 280-281 was Keoni Ana, 169 








DATE DUE 


amine) 


t- 








THE LIBRARY STORE #47-0207 


=. <2 a : 





z: 


ees 


ox 


A 
" 
eat ig ty 
Pak 





~O8 <6 4 “0 ~ 


ere 


Prieesane- oes OO, Ss ketene eeed 


ease | 
spin 


taba 
Peay reat top ere hy reas 
nad 


pyr eer ones 
aap 


ne ry 


va 8 
Raa ce 4 a Pe 


Mat 


a te aA 


os) 


ps rens 
sa tmenp insane 
re 


ames 


3 
verre 


ee 


ae 
anata. 


ee 


Sabri bbe brabrne 


yet rere 
repress ey 
ee eee 


| 


I  ¢arr te Me ies 
‘ ine at 
/ / 


Piel Mla tet 


rt 


rei y tear ws we ces 
pond Live yest eee) 
et 
eee rs 


tated est 
eat 
ane hh ey er 
baer eer irere ses 
csbs beh 


+ 


— 
rer 
1 


ae 
Pebpbe- arene —t: 
thew 


Fy 
Se 
apreie ks 


= 
ee yh roe 
+ 


Na ee heb hp get od gt 


Sears! 
Steset 


tink 


en ee 
oy 
are) 
es 


Re ee, La 
renee 


= 
See SG 


eaersrety eee 


Speer Library 


St ea ne ay ae ee 


PERS 
ae 
rerertey 

Bhp eg wo 82 mat 
poorer er ts lot ta aiea) 


ery 
earene by 


ahee ened ewe we 


si 
15 


churprenaenreenny 
“77 
: 


wae 


a 


inary- 
ceteset 

Re 
Ss * 

goss 


Silas 


weer 


i pisepira Se ry ipa irom ery nee y aryarse es 


ii, 


rpreee rary 


wae 
Py behe 
re rersrers 


See A as 


Seer ere Sere SP Eee 
NS wh wd vlsep ene oh 
nay i a 


be) 
err eee 


1 1012 00135 916 


= 
o 
72) 
w 
= 
a 
2 
° 
© 
Je 
| od 
c 
3 
~ 
av 
eo 
c 
‘= 
a 


A history of Hawa 


Pe ne eat 


} 
ui 


Hh 


ais 


Eyres erarre i 


ae aN Ak ae 


PyAO 
Pe ae er ee ee er 


rte 
Orit 
us 3 - ; 
agtty ay : ; Hi 
ety F3t= ; z 


5; 

+50 
Te? 
shay 


fel 


a5 


3 


a 


As 


is 
Tea 


I 
ee 
watery ree 





sea 


